Full text of "Grammar of the art of dancing, theoretical and practical; lessons in the arts of dancing and dance writing (choregraphy) with drawings, musical examples, choregraphic symbols, and special music scores"

See other formats

Sfe

Kf)

■^7u3^C?T%J

m^&^R

i^SrJ^

W&^^<X^B<t^^Q

tA^^'^^^itfCtS^ct^^/

GRAMMAR

OF THE

ART OF DANCING

THEORETICAL

AND

PRACTICAL

Lessons in the Arts of Dancing and
Dance Writing (Choregraphy)

With Drawings, Musical Examples, Choregraphic Symbols
and Special Music Scores

Translated from the
German of

Friedrich Albert Zorn

Teacher of Dancing at the Imperial Russian

Richelieu Gymnasium, Odessa,

and Member of the German

Academy of the Art

of Teaching

Dancing

Edited bv Alfonso Josephs Sheafe

er of Dancing, Member A. N. A. M. of D.

BOSI'»v, MASSACHUSETTS
1905

#?i

77>f Heintxemann Press Boston Mass.

To the

American National Association of Masters of Dancing

of the United States and Canada

this work is

respectfully dedicated

I <i ~> 1

Foreword

ZORN'S GRAMMAR is too well known to friends of the art which it de-
scribes to need any introduction; still an explanation of the particular differences
between this and other editions and the reasons therefor may not be out of place.
The work was originally published under the direct patronage of the German
ademy of the Art of Teaching Dancing, in Berlin, and the reader will find a very
clear and concise history of the conception and execution of it in the Author s Preface
which follows. The plan upon which the work has been written is made plain by the
text itself

The original edition was in three parts, consisting of the Grammar, which con-
tained the text, the Atlas, which contained the illustrations, scores and choregraphy, arid
the " Notenheft," which contained the full score of the musical examples, arranged for
fin and piano.
'The arrangement of this translation is unique. It differs from the German edition
in the fact that the Atlas has been incorporated in the text, by distributing the various
cuts, diagrams, scores and choregraphic symbols at their proper pL;

This plan will undoubtedly be more convenient for the reader than the original
one with a separate Atlas. The editor has also compiled an alphabetical index of more
than a thousand entries, which he believes will be of great service in rendering the
book more practical as a work of reference. A glossary of foreign words and phrases
used in dancing and music has also been compiled for this edition.

Tht F..nnr dtiirn it atknrxledgt hit gratitude fir tht ail* and ctnuitnlitui aniitance tf bis translattr,
Mr. Benjamin P. Ctalti tf But**, It tchtie untiring txirtitn and enlhusiastie ttiftralitn tht atturacy tf thi
•■ ii target} da*. The assiilante tf it tafatU a traailaftr h itldtm ahtaiaalU and is greatly af predated.

vii

Vlll GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

At the Convention of the American National Association of Masters of Dancing
held at Columbus, Ohio, June 12— IJ, IQ05, the dedication of this edition of the
Grammar was accepted and the work adopted as the standard of authority. The
resolution also strongly recommends the book as a text-book for students and teachers.

The Appendix, which relates to deportment, has been purposely omitted for the
reason that, while it is the duty of teachers of dancing to pay some attention to that
subject in the course of their instruction, it does not in itself, technically, form a part
of the art of dancing.

Again, rules of deportment are largely local in their application and of too transient
a nature to be of authority after a lapse of twenty years. Social customs are, for the
most part, creatures of fashion, and fashion is too fickle a goddess to submit to the tyranny
of settled rules.

Herr Zorn himself expresses the belief that persons who contemplate teaching
dancing will get more practical ideas regarding deportment from their experience as
teachers than it would be possible to obtain from any book.

And now having set forth the principal points of this edition and the fact that
it has been prepared to supply a great and increasing de?nand, the Editor wishes, in
conclusion, to register the hope that the movement toward abandoning the use of French
technical terms will be given up.

These terms now form the only common ground upon which the dancing profession
of the world can meet, and to discontinue them would be to indefinitely postpone the date
of a possible Universal Academy. Let us not only learn these terms which have
acquired such important technical significance^ but let us use them. Of course there is no
call for a pedantic display of them in teaching social dances, and such a use of them would
be in poor taste, but it would be a distorted allegiance to the mother tongue to so far over-
look our manifest advantages as to insist upon the substitution of our own language for
terms that have for centuries been accepted without cavil by other nations who do not
speak French. In truth, what has the English speaking dancing world done for the
art that entitles it to make so radical a change? Would it not be more logical to first

GRAMMAR OK THK ART OK DANCING IX

determine the true meaning of the expressions which we seek to discontinue? The Editor,
for one, thinks so, and that should his colleagues closely study the works of the foreign
masters, they would agree with him.

Let us rather seek to increase the common bonds of the profession than endeavour
to destroy them, for by that method, and by no other, can dancing attain that rank
among the arts beautiful to which it is so certainly entitled.

The Editor

Brttkline Massachusetts
October fpof

Author's Preface

TO the average reader, the following pages will probably reveal a vast amount of re-
search and labour, but the specialist in the subject should not, merely because the
names, definitions and principles involved are treated in a different manner from what is
usual, allow that fact to prejudice him or cause him to cast the work aside as of no value.
Let him rather give it a fair and conscientious examination, and undoubtedly much that
may at first glance appear to be fanciful will be satisfactorily demonstrated to be true.

In preparing this work, the author has carefully considered all probable objections,
has scrupulously examined all obtainable, authorities upon dancing, many of which were in
foreign languages, and has made many journeys, regardless of expense, in order to consult
with noted specialists.

In 1885 he held a personal conference with ballet-master P. Taglioni in Berlin, and
he has for many years been in correspondence with that great teacher and ballet-master,
Arthur dc St. Leon; and now after fifty years of experience he has received the favourable
judgment of Herr A. Freising, teacher of dancing at the Royal Academy in Berlin, upon
the result of his studies as set forth in this book.

The Grammar is highly commended in the report of the members of the Royal
Academy, May 24-25, 1885, and the author has been thereby induced to prepare a

^cd and enlarged edition of the work, in which he has received the valuable assistance
of Hen A. Freising, president, and of Herr Otto Stoige, ballet-master and teacher of
dancing at the University of Koenigsburg. He takes this opportunity to tender to those
gentlemen his heartfelt gratitude. Also, to Herr Bernhard Klemm of Leipsic, the author
offers his warmest thanks for valuable advice and the kind permission to quote from his

atechism."

The Author earnestly recommends this Preface to the attention of readers, for it contains a key to
the Grammar, without which a proper understanding of the subject cannot be gained.

XU GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Notwithstanding the favourable criticism of specialists, the author is well aware that
the work is still incomplete, and he will gratefully receive any reasonable suggestions and
incorporate them in a future edition, should he be favoured by a demand for one. He
believes, however, that the present work will be found quite satisfactory to those who study
it carefully.

Those estimable choregraphs, Sultzer, Roller, Carlo Blasis, Arthur de St. Leon, and
Bernhard Klemm express the hope that their system, the one most generally adopted by
lovers of the art, might be improved and enlarged, thus elevating an art which is worthy,
aesthetically, to stand in the first rank in matters of taste. To bring about such a result
has ever been the ideal of the author.

Those great masters who have preceded us have accomplished much with the means
at their disposal, and have left us far richer material than they found, but it devolves
upon us who have had the good fortune to inherit the fruits of their labours to improve
that inheritance, that our legacy to posterity may be greater still.

It would indeed be a false admiration that would deter us from advancing along the
paths which have been left open to us, and the consideration that the publication of our
experiences and discoveries might injure our personal advantages should be cast aside as
unworthy of our attention. Let us rather emulate the example of our predecessors and di-
rect our endeavours to the improvement of our art for the benefit of all who are interested.

Dancing is incontestably one of the fine arts, and not the least of them. It borrows
from each of the others that which is most beautiful and blends all into a still more lovely
unity. It presents, in vivid form, the highest ideals of the sculptor and the painter, by
means of the most graceful attitudes and movements of the human body under the inspir-
ing influence of music; and the ballet, which has been brought to so high a point of per-
fection, is an indisputable evidence of its artistic possibilities and value.

There is now lacking only a proper system of describing dances, by which they may
be perpetuated and handed down to posterity — a script analogous to that by which the
compositions of Mozart, Haydn, Beethoven, Meyerbeer, Wagner and Rubenstein have
been preserved. Where, let us ask, would music stand to-day without its script?

Perhaps that result which has always beckoned to the author like a good genius, lend-
ing him strength and courage when he has been cast down, may soon be accomplished,
and he may yet live to see examples of his ideas upon the subject published in practical
form.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING xill

The author considers his system of script appropriate for the representation of any
dance or ballet, and that any such composition, so written, would at least be sufficiently
intelligible to students of the "Grammar" for them to determine whether they had
acquired sufficient skill to execute it. The author would feel amply compensated for his
life's work, were his system to be accepted, and he is confident that the application of his
ideas would be of signal benefit to the art.

In preparing this "Grammar " the author has been many times most forcibly reminded
of the imperative need of an academy of the art of dancing to which questions of doubt-
ful authority might be submitted and final decisions as to the best methods and solutions
be made.

These findings might be promulgated through the agency of a journal or other
medium, which should circulate among interested persons, and which would in a large
measure overcome the influence and wanton speculations of those who masquerade as
teachers, but who have no actual knowledge of the art of dancing.

If the unworthy designs and demoralizing influence of such persons could be counter-
acted, the dancing profession would have advanced a great step toward that position in
the public esteem to which it is entitled.

In a copy of the German magazine "Uber Land und Meer," which found its way to the
author in Russia, he accidentally read of the formation of the German Academy of the
Art of Teaching Dancing in Berlin, and, having investigated the matter, he had the great
honour and pleasure of being elected a member.

He has much for which to thank that society, and association with its different mem-
bers has been of immense practical benefit to him. Their kindly words and friendly
interest have added greatly to his strength and confidence, and the members of the Acad-

■ have not only urged but aided him to complete this work at as early a date as pos-
sible.

At the annual meeting of the Academy, 29th and 30th May, 1887, it was resolved
that each member of the association should procure a copy of the "Grammar" and after
a careful and thorough examination submit a written report of his findings to the Academy,
from which symposium such suggestions or additions as might bethought beneficial should
be embodied in an Appendix, or if of sufficient importance to warrant it, in another edi-
tion of the " Grammar." The combined endeavours of so many competent masters could
hardly fail to greatly enhance the technical value of the work.

XIV GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The author has used the term Choregraphy and not Choreography for the reason that the
former word is given in the Dictionary of Noel and Chapsal, published in 1857, which con-
tains the most reliable information respecting dance terms. The same form of the word
was used by two of the most distinguished of our recent choregraphs, Carlo Blasis and
Arthur de St. Leon.

The term "grammar," which is ordinarily applied to a system of language, has been
selected as a fit title for this work because of the analogy of the author's system with the
system of teaching language.

The term "catechism" was originally applied to religious instruction in the form of
questions and answers, but the recent application of the term to other than religious sub-
jects has changed its significance and it is now applied to that form of instruction regard-
less of its subject.

This "Grammar" has been put forth with the object and hope of elevating and extend-
ing the scientific art of dancing, and to accomplish that purpose the author has exercised
his utmost strength and all of his faculties.

He will consider himself not only fortunate but amply rewarded for the fifty years of
labour which it has cost him, if this book meets with a favourable reception and recognition;
for such will be an indication that the goal toward which he has striven so earnestly and
so long has not only been discovered but in some small measure approached.

Friedrich Albert Zorn.
Odessa, 1887.

Contents

Friedrich Albert Zorn Frontispiece

Foreword ............ vii

Author's Preface ........... xi

INTRODUCTION 3

aNG as a Branch of Education ....... 6

The Classification of Dances 9

CHAPTER I
Method — Grammar — Carriage 15-17

CHAPTER II

Positions of the Feet 18-39

Simple Positions — Sole Positions — Open and Closed Positions — Crossed Po-
sitions — Ball and Point Positions — Choregraphy of the Principal Positions —
Raising Positions — Heel Positions — Flowing Positions — Measure of Height
— Half-High Closed Flowing Positions — High Closed Flowing Positions —
Open Flowing Positions — Air Positions (Positions tn r Air) — Inward Turned
Positions — Bended and Stretched Positions — Intermediate Positions — Half-
Intermediate Positions — Double Intermediate Positions — Crossed Positions —
Prolonged Positions — Parallel Positions.

CHAPTER III

Movements ...... 40-43

The Simple Movements — Chorcgraphic Signs for Movements.

CHAPTER IV
Preparatory Fxercises 44~54

Bending Exercises (PUrr) — Raisings (Elirvations) — Combined Bondings and
Raisings — Beating Exercises (Battrments) — Gliding (Glisser) — Carrying
(Ptrter) — Crossing Before and Behind (Dessus tt Dessous) — Direction of
Movements — Beatings for Social Dancing.

XVI

CONTENTS
CHAPTER V

The Apportionment of Time .

Measure of Speed (Tempo) — Metronome — Explanation of Musical Terms-
Sentences and Phrases (Enchainements) — Dance Music.

CHAPTER VI

The Beatings

Raising and Lowering Exercises — Small Changed Crossed Beatings (Petits
Battements Croises Changes) — Small Alternate Beatings (Petits Battements Alter-
natifs) — Large Beatings (Grands Battements).

55-6 1

62-73

CHAPTER VII
Turning Exercises .........

Foot-Circles (Ronds de yambe) — Accessory Qualities of Movement.

74-81

CHAPTER VIII

Carriage and Movement of the Upper Body and Arms

French System of Arm-Positions — Zorn's System of Arm-Positions — The Car-
riage of the Arms (Port de Bras) — The Principal Arm-Positions — The Inter-
mediate Arm-Positions — Crossed Arm-Positions — Supported Arm-Positions —
Closed Arm-Positions — Open Arm-Positions — Narrowed and Amplified Arm-
Positions — Opposition — Supported Arm-Positions (Demi-Bras) — Mimic or
Character Arm-Positions — Arm Movements — Carriage of the Arms (Port de
Bras) — The Simple Arm Movements — Hand Circles (Ronds de Bras) — Pre-
senting and Giving the Hand — Positions of the Hands — Shrugging the Shoul-
ders— Carriage and Movement of the Head (Tenue et Mouvements de la Tete) —
Movements of the Trunk and Shoulders (Mouvements de Torse et Epaulements) —
Harmony (Coincidence) — Attitude — Group — Tableau — Choregraphy.

82-105

CHAPTER IX

Compound Movements .........

Classification — Music-Syllable — Dance-Syllable — Step — Temps — Pas-
Definitions of Various Dance Terms (Termes de Danse) — Grace.

I06-109

CHAPTER X

Technical Steps and Movements ........

Steps (Pas) — Necessary Attributes — Military March (Marche Miiitaire) —
Secondary Attributes of Steps — The Meaning of the Term Pas — The Names
of the Steps — Walking Steps (Pas All'es) — Changement of the Feet (Cbange-
ment de Pieds) — Order of Steps in Instructing — Raising Steps (Pas Elev'es) —

IIO-164

CONTENTS XVH

Raising-Marching Steps (Pas Marches Elrvis) — The Steps upon the Points (Pas
sur Us Pointes) — Running Steps (Pas de Cturse) — Courante Step (Temps de
Courante) — Changements of the Legs or Feet (Changements de Jambes ou Pieds)

— Escaping Syllables (Temps Echappes) — Falling Syllables (Temps Tomb'es) —
Spreading Syllables (Temps Ecartes) — Collecting Step or Syllable (Pas ou Temps
Assemble) — Throwing Steps (Fas Jetes) — Scissor Syllable and Scissor Step
(Temps et Pas de Sissonne ou Ciseaux) — Double Scissor Step or Syllable (Pas ou
Temps dt Sissonne Double) — Hunting or Chasing Steps (Pas Chassis) — Gliding
Steps (Pas Gliss'es — Glissades) — Gliding Half-Steps (Demi-Glisses) — Whip Syl-
lables ( Temps Fouettes) — Cutting Steps (Pas Coupes) — Cutting Half-Steps (Demi-
Coupes) — Tossing Steps (Pas Ballotes) — Stuffing Steps (Pas de Bourr'ee) —
Stretched or Zephyr Steps (Pas Tendus ou Pas de Zephire) — Basque Steps (Pas
de Basque) — Ball Steps (Pas Ballonnes) — Ball Syllables (Temps Ballonnes) —
Twisting Steps (Pas Tortill'es) — Body Turns (Tours de Corps) — Turn of the
Trunk cr Rump (Tour de Torse) — Choregraphy of Turning — Occupation of
the Free Leg in Turning — Turns in the Air (Tours en I 'Air) — The Pirouette
(La Pirouette) — Thigh-Beating Syllables (Temps de Cuisse) — The Beating Steps
(Les Pas Battus) — Changement of the Legs (Changements de Jambes) — Crossed
Jump (Capriole ou Entrechat) — Half Counter-Beating (Demi-Contretemps) —
Whole Counter- Beating ( Contretemps Entier) — Broken Syllables and Steps ( Temps
et Pas Bris'es) — Pigeon- Wing Steps (Ailts de Pigeon — Pistolets).

CHAPTER XI
Periodical Enchainment of Dance Steps and Syllables . . . 165-173

CHAPTER XII
The Choregraphy of the Ficure 174-177

CHAPTER XIII

The Contra Dance and Quadrille 178-205

Theory of the Quadrille Positions — The First Person in a Quadrille — Figure
and Strophe or Couplet — Division of Time — Measure — Signal (Ritournel/e) —
Prelude — Original Steps — The French Contra-Dance (La Contredanse Fran-
caise) — Pantalon — L'Ete — La Poule — La Trenis — Les Trois Crochets ou La
Ctquille — La Pastourelle — Let Graces — La Final* — La Rose — Pas de Galop
— Moulinet dts Dames — Grandes Rondes — Rondes Oppos'ees — La Guirlande

— The Polonaise (La Polonaise).

CHAPTER XIV

The Miniet 206-216

Minuet of the Queen (Mtnuet de la Rant) — Minuet of the Court (Menuet dt
la Ctur) — Minuet Steps (Pat dt Menuet) — Execution of the Minuet of the Court.

XV111 CONTENTS

CHAPTER XV

The Gavotte 217-223

Couplet and Figure — Execution of the Gavotte of Gaetano Vestris.

CHAPTER XVI

Social Round Dances . . . . • . . . . . 224-266

Galop and Galopade — Galop a" Amazones — The Star of Four Couples (L'Etoile
a ^uatre Couples) — The Galop Waltz — Reverse Galop [Galop a I'Envers) —
The Pursuit (La Poursuitc) — The Waltz (La False) — The Two-Syllable Waltz
(La False a Deux Temps) — The Three or Six Step Waltz (La False a Trols ou
a Six Temps)— The Reverse Waltz (La False a V Envers) —The Polka (La
Polka) — The Redowa (Rejdovak) — Redowaczka (Redowatschka) — Mazurka-
Polka or Polka-Mazur — The Tyrolienne — Hop- Waltz (False Sautillee) — Bal-
ance Waltz (False Balanc'ee) — The 5-4 Waltz (False en Cinq Temps) — The
Varsovianna (La Farsouvienne) — Krakoviak (Cracovienne) — Mazurka-Waltz
(False de Mazourka) — Galop-Polka or Glide-Polka (U Esmeralda) — Schottische,
Rheinlander, Bavarian Polka — Hungarian Waltz (False Hongroise) — The Ma-
zurka (La Mazourka) — Technical Steps of the Mazurka — Mazurka Figures
— Instructions Regarding Cotillion and Mazurka Figures — Space — Large and
Small Circles- — Introduction — Selection of Figures.

CHAPTER XVII

Concluding Remarks .......... 267-277

Object of the Grammar — Choregraphic Description of the Cachucha.

Index ............. 279

Glossary ............. 297

Introduction

TO thoroughly understand an art, it is necessary to learn its source and to follow
its development to the highest possible and attainable point of perfection ; there-
by reaching the capability of judging what is still to be accomplished and the best method
of going about it.

The source of dancing lies in the nature of mankind. If in good humour, one moves
quicklv, and if the feeling is more pronounced the movements are correspondingly height-
ened and one jumps and raises himself involuntarily. This is natural dancing; it is to be
found in all zones, at all times and among all nations.

To do away with dancing entirely, as is the wish of some persons, it would be necessary
to change human nature.

It is quite comprehensible that these natural expressions of pleasure or spiritual excite-
ment vary in accordance with the temperament of the individual, and that he who has the
greatest nobility of mind will present the most noble expressions. Expressions of joy are
truer mirrors of the mind than those of the more severe emotions.

As mankind began to form societies, to divide into nations, and to follow different courses
of civilization, there grew up different dances, dependent upon and indicative of national
characteristics; and when these nations changed place, occupation, political institutions, etc.,
their dances were correspondingly affected. This same process is operative to-day, and the
statement which is made by many persons, that the character and civilization of a given man,
or indeed of an entire nation, may be known by his or its dancing, is not all incorrect.

It is not the purpose of this work to record the history of the dance from ancient to
modern times, for that has been most worthily accomplished by such writers as Albert

-winski, in his " History of the Art of Dancing," Rudolph Voss, in "The Dance and
>ry," and Franz M. Rahlme, in his "History of Dancing in Germany." There
are many others who might be mentioned, but even these are seldom read.

4 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Dancing, like every other art, has its childhood, its blossom time, its climax and its
decay; but these periods are more uncertain than those of other arts, because of the lack
of a generally accepted and efficient system of describing the accomplishments of the
masters.

Without such a script even the works of our present generation cannot be preserved
for posterity.

By means of the script of music we have retained the compositions of the early and
middle ages and are enabled to reproduce, note by note, the masterpieces of the last three
centuries; but what is left us of the works of the choregraphs of old — of the last century —
even of the last few decades? Only a few programs and incomplete descriptions which serve
rather to accentuate the extent of our loss than to aid us in reconstructing the works of
which they treat.

If a ballet-master, even to-day, desires to produce the composition of another, there is
only one way to do so. He must go where it is executed. And if he desires to reproduce
one of his own that was presented five years before, he has nearly the same difficulty as at
the original production, for the dancers are not the same. He must show them every step,
because it is impossible to supply them with written parts with which they could practice
alone.

In 1852, A. de St. Leon, first dancer and ballet-master at the Grand Opera in Paris,
published the first numbers of his "Stenochoregraphy," employing with rare discrimination
all the facilities and influence of his position, and thus opening the way to elevating the art
in a most signal manner. His Majesty the Emperor Nicholas of Russia found oppor-
tunity, notwithstanding the serious duties of his kingly calling, to read the first part of the
work, and by accepting its dedication proved conclusively that he appreciated the value of
the invention.

It is greatly to be regretted that that gifted artist and author has been too soon taken
from us, but he left us splendid material for perfecting the system set forth in his letters
and published works.

An Academy of the Art of Dancing was founded in Paris by Louis XIV, in 1661, and
was liberally endowed by that magnificent monarch. Little remains of the institution, how-
ever, save the names of its then thirteen members.

The German Academy of the Art of Teaching Dancing was founded in 1873 by several
very thoroughly educated dancing masters, and if, as we most sincerely hope, that associa-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 5

tion succeeds in its objects, it will not be the first time that small enterprises with modest
means have eventually accomplished great things. y

There is a pressing need of firmly established rules, by means of which the art may be
edified, and in formulating such precepts the members of the new Academy will, doubtless,
strive to merit the approval and esteem of all who are interested in the dance.

It is certain that the purpose is commendable, and that the new Academy is composed
of sincere and able teachers. The following names are a sure guarantee of the character of
the Academy : A. Freising, Teacher of Dancing at the Royal University in Berlin, Presi-
dent; Otto Stoige, Ballet-Master in Koenigsburg in Prussia; Knoll, Senior, Ballet-Master
in Hamburg; Bernardelli, Teacher of Dancing at the University of Leipsic, and many
others of prominence.

Without governmental recognition and the establishment of the Academy as a board of
examiners for those persons who desire to teach dancing, the association can never attain
to sufficient authority to restrain unworthy persons from teaching.

Inasmuch as the Academy has submitted this work to a most rigid examination and has
adopted it as the standard for teaching (May 25, 188 5), it is unnecessary to state that examina-
tions upon the theory of dancing will be based upon the principles laid down therein.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Dancing as a Branch of Education

The importance of dancing as a factor in education is almost universally conceded, not-
withstanding that many persons of unquestionable learning and good intention unhesi-
tatingly condemn it and seek to substitute gymnastics in its place.

It is true that gymnastics develop the physical powers, increase courage and endurance,
improve health and render one more robust, but they tend toward coarseness and impress
one with a certain recklessness and lack of delicacy, unless taught by persons who are properly
informed as to the true art of movement.

It would, however, be impossible to teach dancing by means of gymnastics, or gym-
nastics by means of dancing, although their combination is quite practicable and useful.
Schiller says, "To couple the strong with the delicate makes an agreeable combination."

Still, those who are opposed to dancing are not wholly wrong, for if we contemplate
the salon and the theatrical dances of to-day, we are compelled to admit that, with few excep-
tions, we find them objectionable to good taste. We have retained but little of that elegant
deportment and that exquisite delicacy which marked the dances of the 18th century, and
we frequently witness upon our stage indecencies of a most flagrant character, which are so
earnestly applauded by the majority of the spectators that the "artists" are led to believe
that they have done something highly commendable; while the less scrupulous managers
and directors encourage such exhibitions on account of the returns which they guarantee.

The same state of affairs exists in the dance-halls, for custom has so shortened the vision
of the majority that even the least criticism of this nature is astonishing to them, true though
it is.

One has but to examine in an unbiased manner most of our round dances, noting the
nonsensical running and racing therein, and the still more objectionable hugging which is
not only possible but actually a la mode in certain places, to realize why it is that clergy-
men, physicians, parents, and conscientious educators and governesses disapprove of so
degenerate a style.

The Lanciers Quadrille came into favor in 1856, and was generally hailed as a step
toward better taste, but the supposition has not been confirmed by experience, for that beau-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 7

tiful dance has been long since banished from our orders and we dance worse, if possible,
than before its introduction.

Dancing teachers there are and always have been who realize the dignity and responsi-
bility of their profession, and who, in so far as possible, resolutely oppose objectionable
taste; but the great majority practice for a livelihood and dare not struggle too persistently
against common customs lest such resistance react upon their schools, and pupils who might
otherwise be theirs bestow their patronage upon masters who are less severe. Unfortun-
ately, there are teachers who lend themselves readily to every caprice of custom or fashion
that they may line their pockets, regardless of its ethical or aesthetic value or result.

Proper dancing gives one that grace which should form a part of all our movements,
and which, although advantageous to all, is absolutely essential to those who are obliged to
go through the world unaided!

Upon meeting a person for the first time we are involuntarily impressed by his presence
and manners, and as there is frequently neither opportunity nor time to become more inti-
mately or fully acquainted, our treatment of him must necessarily be gauged by the impres-
sion thus obtained.

First impressions, therefore, are never of indifference, whether favourable or other-
wise.

Carefully kept and tasteful clothing, cleanliness and good manners, and above all, lack
of affectation or conceit, never fail to create good impressions, but an elegant carriage and
a pleasing appearance should neither be regarded as the only valuable traits, nor should
they be held to compensate for vice or ignorance; for indeed, unless they be in harmony
with nobility of thought and action, they can but form a mask that will, sooner or later, be
torn away and disclose the real person in his true ugliness.

Modern society demands of all who enter it, a certain attention to appearance and
behaviour, which if neglected reacts in a most serious manner upon the delinquent, often
destroying what might, with such slight concessions as it demands, be a most successful
career, and dancing and deportment are as important accomplishments for girls as for boys.

That grace which comes from dancing, however, does not depend solely upon the good
fortune of finding a competent and conscientious teacher, for unless one possesses a natural
aptitude or talent he can never accomplish more than commonplace results.

There are in most places worthy dancing teachers, but it is often hard to distinguish
them from those of lesser merit, as they usually refrain from thrusting themselves into

8 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

prominence, and instead of glorifying their achievements by means of disparaging others,
wait modestly until their services are demanded.

Still there are places where, although there are many persons to whom instruction would
be welcome, there is no teacher of dancing, and for these persons there is nothing better
than the books — many of which are of value — which have been carefully written upon
the subject.

It is of course entirely impossible to write in such a manner as to equal the effects of
proper vivid instruction, but where that is unobtainable, written instruction is better than
none.

No system of written instruction is so effective or appropriate as choregraphy, and the
time required to understand the script is far from wasted. It rests with that art alone to
elevate dancing to a fitting place among the arts beautiful, for by that, and that alone, is
it possible to so describe the dance as to withstand criticism.

If, therefore, we can promulgate a system containing proper rules for position and move-
ment, and physical and aesthetic development, such as will receive the approval of the critics,
it is certain that we shall be aided by the best masters, whose cooperation and backing will
insure our ultimate success.

We already have the works of Blasis, St. Leon and Klemm, which contain the quint-
essence of previous authority, but it appears that these are not given that study which they
deserve.

It should never suffice that a teacher of dancing earn a living, nor that a ballet-master
please the public; each should strive to elevate his art and raise its morals.

Dancing is of no small importance viewed from a hygienic standpoint. Indeed, the
exercise it provides is of peculiar physical benefit, particularly for the gentler sex.

This does not necessarily refer to the style of dancing now in vogue, but rather to the
method known as "pedal calisthenics," which contains those strengthening and developing
exercises that produce greater physical strength without destroying feminine grace.

Those physicians who forbid young persons to dance have usually a clearer understand-
ing of the abuse than of the truly useful aspect of the exercise. It is only to be expected
that if persons who are still growing and weakly avoid all exertion during the year and
then dance immoderately a whole evening, and, becoming overheated, indulge freely in cold
drinks and ices, they will become ill. If, however, they limit their dancing to a regular
attendance at a reliable and worthy dancing-school, the exercise cannot fail to be beneficial.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The Classification of Dances

Dancing is generally divided into two grand divisions, namely, social and theatrical, or
salon and show dances. The social or salon dance, having been devised solely for social
pleasure, is of such a nature that persons who do not make dancing a profession may acquire
a knowledge of it.

Nearly every country possesses its peculiar dances, of which the French Minuet and
Contra-dance may be considered the greatest, for they are replete with grace and modesty.

The " waltz position" in the so-called round dances should be conscientiously regarded.

It is to be regretted that the round dances, such as the Waltz, Galop, and Polka, are
generally preferred to others, for they do not merit the distinction, from the standpoint
either of art or of grace. This liking for that form of dancing is quite unaccountable, but
as it would be futile for the dancing profession to attempt to stem the tide of public favour,
it has been obliged to overcome its artistic scruples and teach what it must dislike.

Impartially considered, the so-called "waltz position" is wholly objectionable, as it
places the lady absolutely within the power of her partner. Such an attitude would never
be tolerated beyond the duration of the music of the dance.

After the Minuet, the Mazurka, which is the national dance of Poland, may be prop-
erly called the queen of social dances, for it affords every gentleman opportunity to display
his peculiar talents and grace in such a manner as not to overexert himself; at the same
rime permitting the ladies to exhibit the most perfect grace. Again, the figure may be as
widely varied as that of the Cotillion, thus offering never-ending charm and novelty.

Column and line dances are now out of style, although they afford much pleasure and
make an agreeable change. In that class we have Ecossaise, Triolet, Tempete, Anglaise,
and others. All of them belong to the class of "social choir dances," which is still further
divisible into the figure and the round dances. Bernhard Klemm, in his " Catechism," gives
the more minute division into dances of periodical and of full figure which is quite logical.

There are besides the "social choir dances," certain "social show dances" which may
b« danced by cither one, two or four persons. It is true that these are usually representa-
tive of the manners and customs of certain peoples, but as they arise from and form a part

IO GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

of the national life which they typify, they are not technically "show" or "theatrical"
dances.

This class contains such dances as the Gavotte, Cancan, Cachucha, Gitana, Fandango,
Tyrolienne, Styrian, Hungarian, Cossack, Cracovienne, Russian, and others too numerous
to mention. Any of these may, however, be raised to the class of " theatrical " dances if
properly arranged to accord with stage requirements and executed with sufficient skill.

The second division comprises all those dances which are executed by professional
dancers upon the stage, and which are, properly, Theatre dances. They are divided into
five degrees.

Those of the lowest degree are styled "Grotesque." Their character is unsteady or,
perhaps better, of an adventurous nature. Their movements are often imposing, but de-
mand skill rather than gracefulness.

Those of the second degree are called "Comic," and are less unsteady than those of
the first. They generally represent the customs, pastimes, or romances of the lower classes.

The third degree is known technically as " Demi-caractere." They exemplify affairs
of ordinary life by representing upon the comic stage a love-story or a plot in which the
characters are from the common people. This class is replete with grace and elegance.

The fourth degree contains what are known as the " Serious" dances. They represent
such characters as are found upon the tragic stage. The highest possible degree' of skill
and elegance is displayed in these dances. They include solos, pas de deux, pas de trois,
etc., and represent emotions or ideas. They demand the exercise of the entire art of posi-
tion and movement.

The fifth degree is of a still higher order, representing entire tragedies. These dances
are known as "Pantomimic," and are so divided into acts as to convey the entire idea with-
out the agency of words. Such dances may be properly termed " Ballets," and our century
has been especially rich in that class. The ladies have particularly excelled in this degree.

Most prominent among the artists of this class we may mention Carmargo, Marie
Taglioni (mother and daughter), Fanny Ellsler, Fanny Cerito, Carlotta Grisi, Nadeschda
Bogdanowa, and Messrs. Pecour, Beauchamp, Didelot, Noverre, Vestris (father and son),
Blasis, Perrot, Bournonville, Philip and Paul Taglioni, A. de St. Leon, Petitpas, Lepitre,
Laucherry, and Manzotti.

The amounts expended introducing a single ballet at this time are astounding, and
in them so much elaboration and ingenuity is called into play that the spectator may easily

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING II

imagine himself transported to fairyland, and he awakens to reality only at the conclusion,
as from a beautiful dream.

It is much to be deplored that up to this time there has been no adequate or satisfac-
tory script, by means of which these magnificent masterpieces might be preserved for future
generations, and it is the object of this "Grammar" to supply that demand; the complete
realization of which will yet necessarily require much time and labour.

The acquisition of such a script would enable ballet-masters to so describe the single
parts — and indeed the entire compositions — that they could be read as easily as one reads
a sheet of music. Thus it would be possible not only to communicate their achievements
to persons at a distance, but also to transmit them in intelligible form to posterity.

Grammar

UNlVERSi

Chapter I

METHOD

THE first condition of success or of accomplishment in science or in art
is a method based upon the natural principles of the subject and so ad-
justed to the capabilities of the student as to lead from the base to the
acme of perfection, without unnecessary waste of time.
Without such a method or system, and without the necessary speci-
fic names for even the most minute details and objects, progress in the
Art of Dancing will be rendered well nigh impossible, on account of the numberless diffi-
culties and apparent contradictions that must naturally arise.

Such a system should be devised as will lead the student easily and gradually from the
simpler to the more complicated portions in such a manner as to enable him not only to
comprehend but to demonstrate as he goes. A competent teacher is not often at a loss
to thoroughly communicate his ideas.

The first necessity is, therefore, what we may term a Grammar of the Art of Dancing
which shall contain a system analagous to those employed in teaching language or drawing,
and which shall so clearly define the principles of the dance, that, while it does not exceed
the comprehension of a child, it shall be none the less valuable and useful to teachers and
to professional dancers.

A grammar of this sort will quickly be appreciated by educators and by dancers, and,
indeed, by the general public, as a means of promoting correct principles, and at the same
rime of leading to an understanding of the true objects of conscientious dancing-masters
and of overcoming the present degradation of dancing in society and upon the stage. May
it not also, perhaps, induce careless and indifferent teachers to work more diligently for
their own improvement, by raising the standard of professional requirement through the
enlightenment of the public?

From the foregoing one may plainly discern the object of the author and his ideal of
the nature of a Grammar of Dancing. Time and experience alone can determine the
degree of success with which he has performed his task.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

GRAMMAR

1 . Dancing is the expression of pleasure or of other sentiments by means of prescribed
movements, which are regulated by music, either imagined or expressed.

2. Its factors are Position, Movement, Figure and Measure.

3. Before or after a movement, a Position may be either correct or incorrect.

4- Transition from one position to another is accomplished by means of Movements
which are either simple or compound.

5. The lines described upon the floor
by the dancers constitute the Figure.

6. The division of the movements into
periods of equal duration to correspond with
the music is called Measure.

7. To compare dancing to language,
the positions correspond to vowels; simple
movements to consonants; compound
movements to syllables; steps to words;
enchainments to phrases or sentences; and
the combinations of enchainments to pa-
ragraphs.

Simple figures correspond to verses, compound figures to stanzas, and the connection of
compound figures or strophes, as in a Quadrille, to an entire poem.

Fig. i.

Fig. 2.

Fig 3.

CARRIAGE

8. Before dealing with the various positions we must refer to the carriage of the body,
for good carriage is the first essential to a dancer. The head must be held straight, and
the eyes directed neither up or down, but to the face of the person opposite, the neck per-
pendicular, the chest expanded and thrust
forward, the shoulders back and down, the
abdomen drawn in, the legs turned out-
ward from the toes, the knees stretched,
and the arms hanging naturally at the sides

[Fig- 4

Hold the fingers as shown in Fig. 4

and touch the side line of the leg with the

Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Fig. 6. thumb and first and second fingers. It is

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

as incorrect to force the position, as in Fig. 2, as it-is to neglect it, as in Fig. 3. The cor-
rectness of the position may be determined by the position of the arms: if proper, the
arms hang naturally in such a way that the fingers touch the middle of the sides of the
legs. If incorrect, the hands will hang either before or behind that point.

9. Three positions of the hand
and fingers have been proposed
[Figs. 4, 5 and 6]. All are good, ac-
cording to the circle of the arms.

10. The curvature of the arm
should correspond to an arc of a
retjular circle, from the shoulder to
the tip of the little finger. The more
fully the arm is stretched the more
the fingers must be stretched. In
Fig. 7 the little finger is bended

properly; in Pig. 8 too much; and in Fig. 9 not enough.

There is a mathematical correctness of beauty, and perception thereof is as keen a sense
as musical perception. A circle not exactly round is as much an offence to the eye as a
false chord or note is to the ear. Taste can be so far debased as to accustom itself to im-
proper positions, but it is the object of art to enable one to perceive the difference and to
distinguish the correct from the incorrect.

The positions and movements of the arms are given in §§268 and 320.

Fig. 7.

Fit;. 8.

Fig. 9.

Chapter II

POSITIONS OF THE FEET

AS the modern art of dancing has been largely evolved and fostered in France, the
,. French terms and expressions are more or less used in all countries where dancing is
practiced; and while in this Grammar the English terms will be employed wherever prac-
ticable, the French equivalents are given where they differ from the English, and teachers
should in all cases acquire a knowledge of them.

Simple Positions

11. There are generally accepted five principal positions of the legs. These are sub-
ject to numberless variations, which are still further qualified, as in the sole, ball, point,
heel and flowing positions which follow.

Sole Positions

12. When the entire base of the foot touches the
floor, it is in sole position.

13. First Position. In the ist position the heels are
brought firmly together, the points turned strongly out-
ward and the knees held close together. This position
is the one most commonly used [Fig. io].

14. Second Position. In the 2d position the foot
is extended directly to the side as far as possible with-
out raising the sole from the floor or transferring the centre of gravity [Fig. 11]. If the
foot corresponds to the ideal proportion, the width of the separation in this position — that
is, the distance between the heels — will be about the length of the foot, which is said to
be the norm of width in the open positions. It may be observed that as the supporting

Fig. 10.

Fig. 11.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

foot has not yet moved, it is still in 1st position. If both feet are carried to ad position,
the distance is doubled [Fig. 12]. In walking or dancing sidewise the 2d position comes
into use, and the length of a common step to the side is, therefore, the length of one of
the feet, in accordance with the rule above mentioned.

15. Third Position. There are two phases of the 3d position. If, for example, one
places the right foot in 3d position forward (anterior) its heel touches the inner middle
of the left [Fig. 1 3]; but if the same foot be placed /

in 3d position behind (posterior), its inner middle
(instep) touches the heel of the left foot, as in Fig.
14. This position occurs in nearly all of the steps
in social dancing, and, after the 1st position, is that
most used.

16. Fourth Position. The 4th position is at-
tained by extending the foot in a straight line, either
forward or backward, the length of one of the feet,
as shown in Figs. 15 and 16. The ordinary walking step is an alternation of the 4th posi-
tion. The figures are drawn from the side for the sake of clearness; if drawn from the
front it would be difficult to distinguish them from the 1st position.

Note. — The statement made by some teachers that, as the 4th position is opposite to the 3d and
5th, the foot should be carried forward on a line with the supporting foot, is without logic, for the
principal positions undoubtedly have" their basis in natural attitudes. In natural walking the feet are
carried forward upon parallel lines of the heels, and the legs are not crossed. The crossed 4th position,
therefore, can hardly be considered as other than an intermediate position, and will be referred to later
under that head.

Ftc. 1-'.

Fir.. 1$

Fi<;. 14.

F10. 15.

Fio. 16.

Fig. 17.

17. Fifth Position. In the 5th position the legs are so strongly crossed that the heel
of each foot touches the point of the other [Fig. 17].

Open and Closed Positions

18. All positions in which the feet touch one another arc called closed positions. The
open positions arc those in which the feet arc separated.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Crossed Positions

19. The 3d and 5th positions and all their derivatives are called crossed positions.

20. In order to determine a position we may state as a basis that the supporting foot
is always in 1st position, and that the term position as applied to all other than the 1st
position applies strictly to the free foot.

These positions may be maintained with either the right or the left foot, and this rule
may also be applied to such movements and positions as will be hereafter described.

21. Unless otherwise stated, all drawings of the positions and movements represent
the dancer as facing the reader, and the terms right and left refer to the dancer, who is sup-
posed to stand opposite the reader.

Ball and Point Positions

22. When the foot is held in such a position that only the front
portions rest upon the floor, it is said to be in " ball " or " half-point "
position [Fig. 1 8].

23. When the sole is raised to such a degree that only the tips
of the toes touch the floor, it is in "point" position [Fig. 19].

24. Sole Direction. The direction of the sole in the various
positions differs in accordance with the nature of the dance and the
ability of the dancer. Many positions are constantly used, while

others occur very seldom. For the purpose of clearness and completeness, however, nearly
all are represented by cuts.

Figs. 18, 19.

Choregraphy of the Principal Positions

25. First Positions. Below Fig. 20, which has been explained in § 13, we find two
signs which represent the position. The upper one is the symbol employed in the script
of Arthur de St. Leon, who called the invention by the name of " Stenochoregraphy."
The lower sign is that designed by the author, who has amplified and perfected the system
of St. Le'on.

26. In the stenochoregraphic signs the lower limit of the body is shown by the hori-
zontal line at the top of the figure. The legs are represented by the two perpendicular
lines, and the lower horizontal line represents the floor.

The other symbol is self-explanatory, being merely a skeleton drawing of the legs and feet.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

27. Fig. 21 represents the ist sole position with the weight upon the right foot; and
as such a position throws the right leg out of the perpendicular, the figure is slightly in-
clined to the right. In the stenochoregraphic signs the supporting foot is indicated by
shading the right leg. Fig. 22 shows the same position, but with the weight upon the left
foot.

FlC. 20.

Fig. h.

Fig. 12.

Fig. 23.

LJLJ L_T

Fig. 24.

Fig. 25.

28. In Fig. 23 the right foot is held in ist ball position, with the heel touching the
supporting leg.

The ball position is indicated in the stenochoregraphic signs by a comma below the
line of the floor. The skeleton sign explains itself.

29. Fig. 24 shows both feet in ist ball position; and it must be noted that if in rais-
ing the heels they are separated, even in a very slight degree, the position changes from a
ist to an intermediate one.

30. Fig. 25 represents the ist point position of the right foot, and in this the sole of
the right foot touches the left leg.

5_ -J.

Yv. 26.

Fio. 27.

Fig. 18.

Fio. 29.

Km: -jo.

In the stenochoregraphic sign, the point position is indicated by a small circle beneath
the line of the floor.

Fig. 26 shows both feet in ist point position, and, although this position occurs very
seldom, it is well to know it and, if necessary, to be able to describe it.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

31. Second Positions. Fig. 27 shows the 2d sole position of the right foot. This posi-
tion has already been explained in § 14. The symbols are too clear to need explanation.
Fig. 28 shows the right foot in 2d ball position.
Fig. 29 represents the right foot in 2d point position.
In Fig. 30 the right foot is in raising 2d point position.

Raising Positions

32. All positions in which the heel of the supporting foot is raised from the floor are
said to be "raising" positions; and it is well to remember in this connection that the term
"raising" always refers to the supporting foot, which may, according to the ability of the
dancer and the requirements of the occasion, be carried either to the ball or the point of the foot.

33. When the supporting foot is in raising position, it is indicated in the stenochore-
graphic symbol by the sign Q.

Fig. 3 1 shows both feet in 2d point position.

If the distance between the heels in the double 2d position is greater than the length
of both feet, the position is called "amplified" [§ 109].

Fig. 31.

J-

Fig. 32.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 34.

34. Third Positions. §15 describes the 3d sole position and illustrates both the anterior
and the posterior forms.

Fig. 32 shows the right foot in anterior 3d ball position. In this position the heel
of the right foot is perpendicular to the instep of the left.

In the stenochoregraphic sign the lower end of the line representing the bended leg
touches the line of the floor, thus indicating that the point of the foot touches the floor.

35. The number 3 below the line of the floor indicates that the foot is before the sup-
porting one. This numeral always signifies that the foot is in anterior position.

A point is placed below the line of the floor to indicate a posterior position.

36. Fig. 23 represents the right foot in posterior 3d ball position. In this position
the heel is in a line above the inner middle of the supporting foot.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

yj. In the stenochoregraphic sign the comma indicating the ball is placed below the
point which indicates the posterior position.

In the lower sign, the number and point are placed below the symbol to indicate that
the foot is in posterior ball position, and to show that the line of the position leg is cut by
that of the supporting one. *

38. Fig. 34 represents the right foot in anterior 3d
point position.

.The point of the foot touches the inner middle of
the supporting foot in this position, and the small circle
is used to indicate the point position, as before men-
tioned.

39. Fig. 35 shows the posterior 3d point position
of the right.

40. Fourth Positions. Fig. 36 represents the right
foot in anterior 4th sole position; the drawing being
in profile to distinguish it from the 1st position.

41. In all illustrations of the 4th positions the position leg is shown turned toward
the reader in order to avoid the interception of the supporting leg.

42. Fig. 36 shows only a partial view of the heel of the supporting foot, in order to
obviate confusion; for if the foot were turned entirely out, it would be impossible to say
whether the supporting foot were in 1st or 2d position. It is intended to show that foot
in 1st position.

43. For similar reasons a portion of the body is added to the drawing, and, where
distinctness calls for it, the entire figure is occasionally shown.

•a

Fig. 35.

Fig. 36.

Flo. 37.

F10. 38.

Fig. 39.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 41.

44- The front view, however, is the basis for the stenochoregraphic signs. But owing
to the form of the symbol and the shading, the number and point arc unnecessary in Fig.
36, the distinction of the advanced foot being apparent, because:

45. The shaded perpendicular line always shows the supporting, and the thin line the
position leg. If the short connecting line is at the top, the position is anterior. If at the
bottom, it is posterior. The ball and point symbols arc the same as for the positions already
described.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

46. If, however, for the sake of clearness, the drawings are in profile, it is necessary
to put the qualifying marks below the line of the floor.

Fig. 37 represents the right foot in 4th ball position.

Fig. 38 shows the right foot in 4th point position.

Fig. 39 displays the posterior 4th sole position of the right.

Fig. 40 represents the posterior 4th ball position of the right.

In Fig. 41 the right foot is in posterior 4th point position.

47. Fifth Positions. Fig. 42 represents the 5th sole position as described in §17.
The symbol is distinguishable by the number 5 which is placed below it.

Where the 5th position appears it should show the exact location of the feet, and par-
ticular care is necessary in indicating this.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 43.

— *"
Fig. 44.

.j-
Fig. 45.

Fig. 46.

48. Fig. 43 represents the anterior 5th ball position of the right foot. In this the
heel of the position foot is perpendicular to the point of the supporting one, while in the
corresponding 3d position it stands perpendicular to the instep.

This difference is of great importance, especially in writing the stenochoregraphic script,
and the drawings should therefore be carefully noted.

49. Fig. 44 shows the anterior 5th point position of the right foot. The point of the
right foot stands directly above that of the left.

Fig. 45 shows the right foot in posterior 5th ball position, with its heel directly over
the point of the supporting foot.

Fig. 46 represents the right in posterior 5th point position.

Note. — This last position is in reality physically impossible, and it is only given to complete the
theory of the system.

The symbols have now been so fully described that further repetition of their significance will be
avoided wherever possible.

50. It must be remembered that one foot may be in either ball or point position,
while the other — that is, the supporting foot — is held in a " raising" position.

GKAMMAK OF THE ART OF DANCING

Heel Positions

51. These positions are very clear and simple. The front portions of the foot are
raised from the floor, and while this can be done in nearly all positions, the heel positions
are usually open.

52. While the heel positions may seem at first thought to be superfluous, they are
absolutely essential to many dances, and their omission would cause serious inconvenience
in dances of the Hungarian, Russian and Spanish class, in which they occur very frequently.

Fig. 47 shows the right foot in id heel position. This is used in the third pas of the
Spanish "Gitana," for the tortille, etc. ^

53. The stenochoregra-
phic sign is similar to that
for the ball, being an in-
verted com ma (<). The other
symbol explains itself. Fig.
48 shows the right foot for-
ward in 4th heel position.
This position is frequently
used in Russian dances.

54. Fig. 49 represents
the 2d heel position of both
feet, which forms an important factor in Cossack dancing.

These few illustrations are sufficient to clearly define all of the heel positions.

Fig. 47.

Fie. 48.

F10. 49.

Flowing Positions

55. If one foot is lifted from the floor, and the entire weight supported upon the other,
the free foot is said to be in a flowing position.

56. The French call such a position une position en balance, and the term se balancer,
as applied to position, means to support the body upon one foot.

57. If both feet are lifted from the floor at the same time, as in the leaping and spring-
ing steps, the position is called " aerial " or "air position" {position en Fair), which will be
fully explained later [§ 76].

58. As one foot is always in the air in the flowing positions, it may be very readily
seen that their variety is manifold.

59. The direction of the sole may vary greatly in the flowing positions. If held as in
the sole positions it is said to be " horizontal " ; if as in the ball position, " diagonal " or

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

"inclined"; if as in the point position, "vertical" or "perpendicular"; and if as in the
heel position, "upward" or rebroussale. j

a b " '■ c d

1 1 L_Z

Fig. 50.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 52.

Fig. 53.

In Fig. 50, a shows the horizontal sole position; b the diagonal; c the vertical;
d the rebroussale. In the open flowing positions, the direction of the sole usually follows
the line of the leg, as in Figs. 51, 52 and 53. This will be further explained in § 72.

Measure of Height

60. For the purpose of establishing a standard measure for the height in flowing posi-
tions, specific terms have been adopted. For instance, the closed flowing positions in
which the foot can be only slightly lifted from the floor are called "low" flowing positions.

In Fig. 54 the right foot is shown in the horizontal low flowing 1st position.

61. In the stenochoregraphic script the flowing positions are indicated by auxiliary
horizontal lines such as are used in music script, placed below the line of the floor. A single
line shows the " low " ; two, the
"half-high"; three, the "high";
and four, the " super-high." And
the sole direction is indicated as
follows : > horizontal ; r diago-
nal ; o vertical ; and y rebrous-
sale.

62. In the above stenocho-
regraphic symbol, the line repre-
senting the position of the flowing
leg is shortened to indicate that
the foot does not touch the floor, and the sign below the level of the floor shows that the
sole is in a horizontal direction. The other symbol is self-explanatory.

Fig. 55 represents the low anterior flowing 3d position of the right foot, with diagonal sole.
Fig. 56 represents the right foot in anterior 5th flowing position, with perpendicular sole.

Fig. 54.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 56.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING

Half-High Closed Flowing Positions

63. If the foot is lifted in the closed positions to the height of the calf, it is said to be
in "half-high" position.

Fig. 57.

Fie. 58.

Ficf?59.

Fig. 57 represents the right foot in the half-high flowing 1st position, with perpendic-
ular sole. In the symbol the bended line touches the supporting line at half-height, and
the sign otherwise explains itself.

Fig. 58 shows the half-high anterior flowing 3d position of the right foot with sole
inclined (diagonal).

Fig. 59 shows the half-high anterior flowing 5th position of the right, with perpendic-
ular sole.

High Closed Flowing Positions

64. The high closed flowing positions are those in which the point of the foot touches
the supporting leg at the height of the knee.

Kig. fat

i
Fie. 61.

Kir. 61.

Flo. 63.

Flo. 64.

F10. 65.

Figs. 60, 61 and 62 represent respectively the 1st, the anterior 3d, and the anterior 5th
high flowing positions of the right foot, with perpendicular sole.
All of these positions may be assumed with the left foot.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Fig. 63 shows the posterior low 3d flowing position of the right foot, with diagonal sole.

Fig. 64 is the half-high posterior 5th position of the right, with perpendicular sole.

Fig. 65 shows the right in high posterior 5th flowing position, with perpendicular sole.

Thus we have shown all positions in which the foot is raised backward, and from this
we can see that it is not difficult to write any position that can be imagined. Their execu-
tion is, however, a different matter ; for some are quite impossible, save in the interme-
diate positions, which are fully explained further on [§§ 97-101], or with a bended sup-
porting leg.

The use of the word "half" in connection with the height of raising is always imperative, but,
except in extraordinary cases, it is unnecessary to say "entirely " high position or "whole" height.

Open Flowing Positions

65. Any position in which the legs do not touch is called an open position, and the
class therefore includes the 2d and 4th positions and all their derivatives [§18].

"A--

itsy

'?<

A"/

«x'

»£-■

• ' « 1 IV'' 1

«• h -*( — ~\ \Jh~-f -I1*

Fig. 66.

Fig. 67.

When one foot is lifted from the floor and the weight of the body rests entirely upon
the other foot, we have what is termed a "balancing" or flowing position [§55].

The rules of the degree of height to which the foot is carried in the open balancing
positions are in accordance with Figs. 66 and 67.

When one foot is lifted slightly from an open sole position, it comes into low balanc-
ing position, as in Fig. 68.

66. But if the leg is raised to a horizontal position, as in Fig. 69, it is in high balanc-
ing position.

67. The half-high balancing position, shown in Fig. 70, is midway between the
perpendicular and horizontal lines.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

68. If the circle of height be divided into eight equal parts, as in Fig. 66 (front dia-
gram), counting from the lower centre (between the heels and indicated by a zero), tV will
represent the low; J the half-high, and 1 the high balancing positions.

69. If the leg passes the height of the horizontal position it

£l

Fig. 68.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 71.

70. These positions occur only in the grands battcmcnts, and in grotesque and acrobatic
dances.

71. The larger circle is also of use, as it gives the degree of height in mathematical
form, but the fractional system above described is most readily understood by pupils.

In Fig. 66 (front diagram)

tV = 22 J degrees, and represents the low,
1 =45 « « « « half-high,

■ft = 67J " " " " three-quarters high,

i = 90 " " " " high,

i =135 " " " " super-high,

open balancing positions. The front diagram applies to the 2d and the side diagram to

the 4th positions.

Fig. 74.

F10. 75.

Fig. 68 represents the left foot in the low balancing 2d position, with diagonal sole.
Fig. 70 shows the half-high balancing 2d position of the left foot, with diagonal sole

[§7*].

Fig. 71 represents the 2d super-high balancing position, with perpendicular sole.

3°

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

72. The direction of the sole in the open-balancing positions is called by the same
name as the direction of the leg, regardless of the geometrical position.

Fig. 72, for instance, shows the left leg in the horizontal position, and notwithstanding
the fact that the foot is also geometrically horizontal, the sole is said to be perpendicular
in a technical sense, because the toe is pressed entirely down.

If the geometrical direction were to stand as the rule in this particular, the name of the
sole direction would vary with every measure of height to which the foot might be carried.

73. Fig 73 shows the horizontal, Fig. 74 the diagonal or inclined, and Fig. 72 the
perpendicular position of the sole, according to the line of the leg.

Fig. 75 shows the right foot in the anterior low balancing 4th position, with perpen-
dicular sole. As before explained [§ 40], the cut is drawn in profile for the sake of clear-
ness.

Fig. 76.

Fig. 77.

Fig. 78.

J t t

Fig. 79.

Fig. 80.

Fig. 81

74. The stenochoregraphic symbol is drawn in front view, but is vastly different from
the signs of the 4th positions in which both feet touch the floor. The thick line repre-
sents the supporting leg and the thin one the free or position leg. If the light line be
made at the right side of the symbol, it signifies that the position is of the right foot, and
vice versa. If the position is anterior, the line is drawn at the bottom of the supporting
line ; if posterior, at the top.

75. The auxiliary " height lines " are beside the sign of the position leg, and the signs
for the sole direction are placed at the end of the line which represents the position leg.

Fig, 76 shows the anterior half-high 4th position of the right, with perpendicular sole;
Fig. 77 represents the corresponding high position;
Fig. 78, the super-high of the right;

Fig. 79, the posterior low balancing 4th position of the right, with perpendicular sole;
Fig. 80, the half-high position corresponding; and Fig. 81 the entire height of the
posterior position.

UKAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Air Positions [Positions en Fair)

76. When both feet are lifted from the floor at the same time, the dancer is in air
position.

Fig. 82 shows both feet in 2d air position, with perpendicular soles.

A h

Fig. 82.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 84.

Flo. 85.

77. While in the air, the legs and feet may execute different movements, such as pas
Arises, ailes de pigeons, entrechats, etc., and the direction of the upper body may also be
changed, as shown in Figs. 83, 84 and 85.

Inward-Turned Positions

78. There are, in many national dances, positions in which the feet arc turned inward,
and although no authority upon dancing has before written regarding them, they are of

y,r. ■&

Fig. 87.

Ki<; VS.

Fig. 89.

Fig. 90.

manifest importance in Hungarian and in Russian dances. They may be found in sole,
ball, point, heel and flowing form.

79. Fig. 86 shows the right foot in inward turned 1st sole position.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The stenochoregraphic sign explains itself. It differs from that of the ist principal
position only in the sign of the inward turned foot of the position leg.

80. Fig. 87 represents the inward turned ist ball position of the right foot.

In the script the inward turned positions are represented by the inward bended lines
of the position leg, and the ball sign appears, as usual, below the line of the floor.

Fig. 91.

Fig. 92.

Fig. 93.

Fig. 94.

Fig. 95

81. Fig. 88 represents the point and Fig. 89, the heel expression of the inward turned
ist position.

The author's script is well adapted to the writing of inward turned positions.

82. Since the balancing positions differ from the floor positions only in the fact that
the free foot does not reach the floor, it is unnecessary to represent them by drawings and
for this reason many of them will not be illustrated.

Fig. 90 shows both feet in inward turned ist sole position.

Fig. 91 represents the right foot in inward turned ist ball, and the left in inward
turned ist heel position.

These two positions occur frequently in the so-called pas tortill'es of the Russian dances.

In Fig. 92 the right foot is shown in the inward turned 2d point position, which is
often found in the Hun-
garian dances.

Figs. 93 and 94 show
respectively the inward
turned 2d point position
of both feet, and the pro-
longed or amplified form
of the same. All Cossack
dances contain this posi-
tion in amplified form.

The amplified positions will be more fully dealt with in § 108.

Figs. 95, 96 and 97 show the right foot in inward turned 3d sole, ball and heel posi-
tions.

Fig. 98 shows the right foot in the posterior inward turned 4th point position, and
Fig. 99 the anterior inward turned 5th point position.

Fig. 97.

Fig. 1

Fig. 99.

Fig. 100.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

In Fig. ioo the right foot is shown in the inward turned 5th heel position.
83. Wherever distinctness is wanting in the script it is well to add the number of the
position, as. in the above sign.

Bended and Stretched Positions

84- Many — indeed most — of the sole and open positions may be assumed with
either bended or stretched knees; while the closed ball and point positions necessitate
bending; and the open heel positions cannot be executed save with stretched knees.

85. Specific names have been assigned to the various degrees of bending and may be
illustrated by the following drawings which show the stretched, half-stretched, rounded,
half-bended and entirely bended positions of the leg respectively [Figs. 101, 102, 103,
104 and 105].

86. In the entirely bended positions, the thigh and calf nearly touch one another.
Fig. 106 shows the legs in the entirely bended 1st position.

Fig. 101.

»
Fig. 102.

Fig. 103.

Fig. 104.

Yu:. 105.

The drawing represents the heels as raised, because such a position is well nigh impos-
sible in sole position.

87. In the half-bended positions the thigh and calf are at right angles.

88. The half-stretched positions contain an angle of 135 degrees, and may be called
quarter-bended.

89. The rounded position is that in which the leg forms a portion of a circle.

90. Figs. 107 and 108 show respectively the half and quarter bended 1st positions of
both legs upon the soles.

Kig. 109 is the amplified 2d heel position of the left, with the supporting leg three-
quarters bended (Cossack step).

Fig. 1 to shows the left in the amplified inward turned ad point position with the sup-
porting leg three-quarters bended, while Fig. 1 1 1 shows the more exaggerated form of the
same position, which may be found in a very effective Hungarian dance, and in which the
top of the left foot nearly touches the floor.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Fig. 112 illustrates a position in which the weight rests upon the left knee and the
right leg is in the half-bended 4th position upon the sole.

The position shown in Fig. 113 occurs frequently in a popular Cossack dance and
shows the prolonged anterior 4th heel position of the right leg, with the supporting leg in
a bended raising position.

Fig. 114 shows both legs in a half-
bended air-position.

The last mentioned positions are much
more clearly shown by drawings than by
any choregraphic signs.

91 . In Fig. 115 the left leg is in an en-
tirely stretched supporting position, while
the right is held in the low balancing 2d,
and Fig. 116 represents the left leg in bended raising position on the ball and the right in
the high balancing 2d position.

All minor or auxiliary symbols should be placed as near as possible to the leg whose
position they qualify.

Fig. 106.

Fig. 107.

Fig. 108.

<\.

£^

JL.

Fig. 109.

Fig. 1 10.

Fig. hi.

Fig. 112.

Fig. 113.

92. In Fig. 117 the left leg is in the half-stretched raising position, and the right is
half-stretched in half-high flowing 2d position. The left foot is in diagonal sole position.

Fig. 118 shows the fully stretched half-high 4th balancing position with perpendicular
sole and supported by the half-stretched left leg in raising position.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 115.

Z2.

/2_ _£i

Fig. 116.

Fig. 117.

Fig. 118.

In Fig. 119 the right leg is in a half-stretched raising position supporting the left, which
is held in the entirely stretched posterior low 4th balancing position.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

In Fig. 1 20 the left leg supports the weight in a fully stretched sole position, while the
right is held in the anterior high half-bended 4th position, with the sole nearly horizontal.

93. In all open balancing positions the height is determined by the direction of the
thigh when the knee is bended, as explained in § 65 and § 71 ; the degrees of bending are
described in §§85 to 89.

Fie. 119.

Fie. 120.

.C2.

Fie. 121.

Fig. 122.

Fig. 123.

Fig. 121 represents the left leg stretched and supporting, and the right half-bended in
the posterior half-high 4th balancing position.

Figs. 122 and 123 represent the ordinary running steps. In Fig. 122 the step is com-
menced bv the extension of the right leg into the amplified anterior low 4th balancing
position, with diagonal sole, while the left is half-stretched and supporting.

Fig. 123 shows the completion of the running step in which the right leg is carried
back to the posterior high 4th balancing position.

Intermediate Positions

94. The foot is sometimes carried into a position between the 2d and 4th positions,
thus standing in a diagonal relation to the line of position. Such a position as lies thus —
between two principal positions — is called an intermediate position.

95. Intermediate positions may be classified as simple, double, whole or half-inter-
mediate.

96. Simple or whole intermediate positions
which lie between two principal positions are
shown in Figs. 124 and 125, in which the left
foot is to be regarded as free, and is, therefore,
omitted and indicated by the position numbers,
which are placed at various points upon which
the heel rests in the positions given.

St. Lion used musical signs to indicate the
open intermediate positions, the "sharp" 1*1 representing the amplified, and the "flat" (►)
representing the narrowed positions, and these symbols were placed upon that side of the

F10. 124.

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OK DANCING

leg to which the changement would carry the foot. The exact positions can be best rep-
resented by numbers.

97. To avoid confusion, the intermediate positions are more properly represented by
writing the numbers, as 2-4, 3-5, etc., rather than in the form of common fractions, as £,
i, 1, etc.

98. The simple intermediate positions of the left foot are:

1st, between the 1 and 2, known as the 1-2.

2d,

3d,

4th,

5th,

6th,

7th,

8 th,

9th,

10th,

nth,

1 2th,

i3th>

1 and 3 forward, known as the 1-3.
1 and 3 backward, known as the 1-3.
1 and 4 forward, known as the 1-4.

1 and 4 backward, known as the 1-4.

2 and 4 forward, known as the 2-4.

2 and 4 backward, known as the 2-4.

3 and 4 forward, known as the 3-4.

3 and 4 backward, known as the 3-4.
3 and 5 forward, known as the 3-5.

3 and 5 backward, known as the 3-5.

4 and 5 forward, known as the 4-5.
4 and 5 backward, known as the 4-5.

These positions may also be assumed with the right foot.

Half Intermediate Positions

99. The half intermediate positions are those
in which the foot does not stand midway between
two principal positions, but is half-way between
such a point and a principal position. These posi-
tions are represented in Fjg. 126.

100. The ruling position is designated by
doubling the number of the principal position to
which the foot stands in closest proximity.

Note. — These half-intermediate positions occur but
seldom ; however, they are represented here for the pur-
pose of completing the script, so as to enable one to
write all possible positions.

S^"W

<f/f'y

! / *

-^ .1 \

*>2

SS£

«v

«v*

SH'/

y\ "t*

w\) ;

\ m\>

iy-z

4i--£

Fig. 126.

GKAMMAK OF THE AKT OK DANCING

Double Intermediate Positions

101. The double intermediate positions lie at points which
are in direct relation to three principal positions. They are
shown in Fig. 127.

Crossed Positions

\ : •' T \ f

)1v

Fie. 127.

102. The 3d and 5th positions and all their derivatives are called simple crossed positions.

103. If the foot be carried around the supporting leg it comes into double-crossed
position.

Fig. 128 represents the right foot forward in 3d point position.

Fig. 129 shows the right leg in the anterior double-crossed 3d point position.

In Fig. 130 the left foot is in anterior 5th point position.

In Fig. 131 the left leg stands in anterior double-crossed 5th point position.

104- Double-crossings must always be designated; although such a course is unneces-
sary in the case of the single-crossed positions, which are self-evident.

J05. In the choregraphic signs the double-crossed positions are indicated by a cross (x)
placed over the line of the supporting leg.

Fie. 11S.

Fig. 134.

Special attention should be paid to drawing the feet in the symbols, as absolute dis-
tinctness is imperative.

106. Fig. 132 represents the right foot in the amplified double-crossed anterior 4-5
point position.

107. Figs. 133 and 134 represent the same position in half-high and high attitudes
respectively.

These positions can be most easily represented by the skeleton symbols.
The three last shown positions come into use in the pas de basques.

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

Prolonged Positions

108. If the heel of the free foot be placed within a circle of which the radius is the
length of one of the feet, it is in an intermediate position.

109. But if the heel of the free foot passes beyond such a limit, which is only possible
in the open positions, it comes into a prolonged or amplified position.

.z^.

^s^

£±

Fig. 135.

Fig. 136.

Fig. 137.

Figs. 135 and 136 show the prolonged ad heel and point positions of both feet.
Fig. j 37 shows the left foot in the prolonged 2d heel position and supported upon the
wholly bended right leg.

Parallel Positions

110. Parallel positions are those in which the feet are at an equal distance from one
another throughout their whole length.

? t
Fig. 138.

Fig. 139.

Fig. 140.

A- -A

Fig. 141.

111. Parallel positions may be either sole, ball, point or flowing; indeed, one foot may
be sole and the other balancing, and still be in parallel position.

Note. — These positions are frequent in Russian, Polish and other national dances.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Fig. 138 shows the right leg stretched and held in low balancing 2d position, and the
left in a stretched raising position, while the feet are parallel and the points directly forward.

In the sign, the parallel position is indicated by small symbols to represent the soles,
which are placed below the line of the floor.

112. Fig. 139 shows both feet in parallel 1st position.

In Fig. 140 the feet are in the parallel 1-2 position. The dotted line is drawn to indi-
cate the intermediate position, and shows the width to be less than that of a principal
position.

In Fig. 141 the feet are both in parallel 2d position on the points.

From the foregoing it can be seen how manifold the positions are — there are thou-
sands of them — and although it is hardly possible to illustrate them all, the dancer or
choregraph should, if he has attentively studied such examples as have been given, be able
to classify any that may occur.

The proper name and sign for each, however, demand thoughtful consideration, and in
order to clearly express every quality in such a manner that the dancer may understand
and interpret them, special attention must be given to their form.

Chapter III

MOVEMENTS

TRANSITION from one position into another is accomplished by means of one or
more movements. These may be either simple or compound. If compound, it is
necessary to analyze the movements and reduce them to the simple movements of which
they consist. The ability to write the compound movements is therefore dependent upon
the ability to write the simple; and he who has learned to do that can surely handle any
combination.

114- If we study the anatomy of the leg, we find the following capabilities of move-
ment:

(a) The toes may be either spread or contracted.

(b) The ankles may be either drawn up or stretched down ; thus raising or lowering

the instep.

(d) The thighs may be either raised or lowered; and a turning movement, in which

the other portions of the leg participate, may be accomplished at the joint of the
hip.

(e) Both legs may, by cooperating, effect a transfer of the weight from one foot to the

other.

115. By means of these possibilities of movement human beings are able to execute
the following simple movements, all of which are exercised in dancing: bending, stretch-
ing, raising, lowering, lifting, putting down, turning and transferring.

116. The clutching or contraction of the toes which occurs in the point positions, and
their spreading, as in most heel positions, are so natural that it is unnecessary to deal with/
them as independent movements; and there are therefore no special choregraphic sym-
bols to represent them.

117. The following French terms will be explained, as they are inseparably connected
with the art of dancing. There may perhaps be a time when such words as are now employed
in the language of art will be eliminated and our tongue be entirely free from foreign
words and expressions; but at present any attempt to obviate their use in a technical manner
would only serve to confuse the student, and we can be of far greater service to our lan-
guage by explaining these technical terms and by using them properly, than by seeking to

avoid them.
40

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING 41

The Simple Movements

J J8. Bending (Plier). This movement may be made with either or with both legs, and
is absolutely essential to elasticity of motion. The various degrees of bending have been
exemplified under the heading " Bended and Stretched Positions" [§§ 84 to 104] ; and while
it is true that bending is for the most part so natural as to render its description unneces-

, there are cases in which the intention of the composer may be somewhat indefinite.
The system has therefore been extended to the bending signs for the sake of absolute dis-
tinctness.

119. Stretching (J(edresser — Allonger — Tendre). Stretching is that movement which is
opposite to bending, and without it no new bending is possible. The term represser means
to straighten a bended member. Allonger means to stretch it to the limit. These terms
are used to designate the different forms of stretching which the term tendre (to stretch) is
sometimes insufficient to clearly express.

120. Narrow and Distant Legs (Jarrete et Jlrque). Very few persons possess entirely
straight legs, and few therefore find it easy to hold them straight.

Those whose knee-joints nearly or quite touch, and whose calves stand close together,
while the heels are separated, are said to have narrow legs. In such cases the knees are large
and thick, and it is usually impossible or at least difficult to stand with the heels together.

Those persons whose heels touch, but who have a space between the knees, are said to
have distant legs. Such persons are usually of a lively temperament, and are especially fitted
for the execution of entrechats and steps of a similar nature in which the knees are often
a hindrance to properly formed persons. Such persons as have distant legs should exercise
particular care to bring the legs as near parallel as possible.

121. Raising (TElever). Raising is that movement which results from pressing down the
front portion of the foot, by which the body is slightly raised from the floor. The move-
ment may be made with either or with both feet, and the raising may be extended until one
stands upon the extreme point of the foot, as in the case of many female ballet dancers.
To do this, however, the toes must be very strongly contracted. No light and easy danc-
ing can be imagined without raising.

To raise the body from a sole position carries the foot into ball or point position; and
to apply the same movement to a flowing foot, creates a diagonal or perpendicular position
of the sole.

122. By raising upon both feet from sole position, the heels are separated and the pod-
is either amplified or changed.

123. Lowering (Jtbaiuer). Lowering is merely the resumption of sole position which
results from raising. In this movement, the heel merely sinks to its normal position. As
applied to a flowing foot, the movement creates a rebroussale sole direction.

124. Lifting (Lever). Lifting is a movement which starts at the hip, by means of which

42 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

the entire leg is carried from a position upon the floor. The movement may be executed
in either bended or stretched position. §§ 60 to 64 show the various degrees of lifting in
the closed, and §§66 to 71 those of the open positions. They are clearly set forth in the
diagrams accompanying these sections.

J25. Putting Down (Baisser). To put down signifies the replacing of a foot which has
been lifted. Do not confound this movement with lowering (abaisser).

126. Turning (Tourner). Turning is that movement by means of which the leg is turned
either inward or outward. This movement cannot be made unless the entire leg partici-
pates in the motion.

This differs from the movement by which the single members are turned, and from
that by which the whole body is carried around upon one foot or in the air.

If the leg is carried from an outward position, without turning the body, it is a simple
foot-turning. Such movements are common in the Russian and many other national dances.

Turning may be executed in sole, ball, point, heel or flowing position.

127. The French term se tourner is understood to mean changing the direction of the
body. Such a movement may be made without really turning the leg.

Most of the rapid Pirouettes are executed by swinging the arms and body and one of
the legs, whereby the supporting leg, which is really not turned, is carried around upon the
ball. In the slow Pirouettes turning is the principal factor.

128. Transferring {Degager). The term degager is applied to that movement by which
the weight is transferred from one foot to the other. Such a movement may be made in
all positions, but is more frequently found in the open ones. Its importance as a movement
is demonstrated by the fact that no step can be made without a transfer. Movements which
do not contain this transfer are merely parts of steps, and are called temps.

In § 27 the position of the weight is clearly illustrated by drawings.

1 29. By transferring the weight, a new position is always taken ; as the free foot, which
denominates the position, is made to support the weight, while the supporting foot has
been relieved of its burden and becomes free. This is true even though the feet are not
moved.

Degager will be more fully dealt with in §253 and §§ 289 to 291, in which the trans-
ferring exercises will be found.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 43

Choregraphic Signs for Movements

] 30. The choregraphic symbols for the movements which have just been described are
as follows:

MOVEMENT. UCHT. LEFT. BOTH.

Bending.— P/ier. _£ ") £\

Stretching. — Tendre. J 71

Raising. — Elever. } \ )\
Lo weri ng. — Abaisser.

Lifting. — Lever. J J J

-0 o- . -co-
Putting down. — Baisser. ^- — X. — -^—

— o o— -00—

Turning. — Tourner. If V If

-o o- —co-
Transferring. — Degager. f\ /-y

All symbols of the movements represent the dancer as facing the reader.

J 31. The movement signs differ from the position signs in the fact that the body is
not represented above them, and in that they are usually made in smaller proportion than
the position signs. The symbols of the sole directions may be placed cither below or at
the side of the movement signs. The application of the signs for movements is demon-
strated in the following preparatory exercises.

Chapter IV

PREPARATORY EXERCISES

AG R EAT variety of preparatory exercises may be composed of the simple movements.
It is important to adapt these exercises to the ability of the pupil. If for young
grown persons, who desire only social dancing, they must be limited to those which are
necessary, as more than these would render the instruction tiresome.

In teaching children, or at private houses, more attention may be devoted to the work
and more difficult exercises are both possible and desirable.

133. In the case of courses which extend over a longer period, still others may be used
with good results, for here the training is rather for aesthetic development than for educa-
tion in the various dances. Even here, however, care should be taken to introduce only
such exercises as may be given without lessening the interest of the pupil, or dulling the
pleasure of learning, for without these factors it is impossible for the most conscientious
and competent teacher to achieve worthy results.

134. In ballet schools, and in courses for persons who desire to make dancing a pro-
fession, the system of preparatory exercises should be applied in its entirety.

Of these exercises the most necessary are : plies, Elevations, battements, changements de
jambes and d'egagements (bending, raising, beating, alternating, and transferring).

Bending Exercises (P/ier}

135. These exercises, which are composed solely of the two movements, bending and
stretching, are first in importance; for without them it would be impossible to acquire any
degree of flexibility or ease of movement, and without these qualities dancing is ridiculous.
These bendings must be made in all positions, and as low as possible ; and the exercise is
as necessary to the most proficient dancer as to the novice.

136. The trunk must be held perpendicular, the knees turned outward and the heels
remain upon the floor, thus supporting the weight upon the whole sole. The arms should
hang naturally at the sides with the forefingers touching the side lines of the legs. The
ladies may raise their skirts, if desired; in which case the arms should be rounded.

If the knees are bent forward, the body is not only ungraceful, but also unsafe; if the
44

GRAMMAR OF THE AKT OF DANCING

heels are raised, the ankles receive no training; and if the body is allowed to bend forward,
the entire attitude is absurd.

137. In order to render the exercises agreeable to pupils, only the first eight measures
should be counted. The remainder should be accompanied by suitable, simple music.
Pupils will practice more zealously and more willingly if the aim of the movements is
explained in every case where it is possible.

The measures of the metronome show the various degrees of speed, from the simplest
slow movements to the most rapid and the most difficult. Teachers should commence
with that degree most in accordance with the temperament of the pupil, and work upward
to the more difficult by easy degrees.

Variety is of great assistance to a teacher.

In the Music Book the measure of the metronome is given, so that the teacher may indi-
cate the exact tempo to his musician ; and the pieces have been arranged for the piano
with simple accompaniment. The melody is written upon a separate line for the violin,
and can be used without accompaniment.

138. Exercise i. Staccato Bendings (Plies staccato) [Fig. 142].

M M 80 i 40

Fie. 143.

(Beginning with 80 beats a minute and changing to 40, in accordance with MaeltzePs metronome.)

Note. — As a musical example appears here, it seems necessary to refer to music, measure, accent,
tronome and kindred subjects ; but such information on these subjects as is required will be found
Chapter V.

The dotted lines between the choregraphical signs indicate the continuation of the
jvement. For this the French term is continuer.

After this exercise has been taken in all simple sole positions, it should be made glid-
j, with music.

139. F.xcrcise 2. Legato Bendings (Plies legato) [Fig. 143].

M y. 80 • 120 1 i

Jo.

the sake of variety in these exercises, which might otherwise become tiresome to
the pupil, varv the speed from MM. 69 to 144, and change the rhythm by either bead

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

ing slowly and stretching quickly or vice versa, pausing a longer or a shorter period be-
tween the positions, as shown in the following examples.
140. Exercise 3. Quick Bendings [Fig. 144].

MM. 80: J

Fig. 144.

It is readily seen that the " slurs " belonging to the notes have a gliding influence
upon the exercise.

141- Exercise 4. Slow Bendings and Quick Stretchings [Fig. 145].

MM. 60: J

j'ltyrif

T''-.'

hdihiQ

ofiT 00

Mb o I o

Fig. 145.

The sign Jr means " repeat " [repetition), as in music. If such a sign extends through
two measures it means the repetition of both (-^) ; and if it occurs in part measure, repeat
the preceding part measure.

I42. Exercise 5. Slow Bendings and Quick Stretchings [Fig. 146].

M. M.60 : J _.

f»3 0, Q]

*™ «■ ^-m

P*r-i n,r~

J>*. r*

,1 ,,_ ft

r»*. ft

ft? |,

lO-OA

a A

\ J W

**r

Fig. 146.

In this example the position signs are omitted after the first measure because they are
understood; and the reader must not imagine that the author has forgotten them if such

signs are left out in other instances.

Exercise 6. Slow Stretching and Quick Bending [Fig. 147].

MM 60 r J
\

rffl K

i-rf1A

1^1-

01 To

II Q

4J' ' ^
Jr

li I

Fig. 147.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING
Exercise 7. Quick Bending and Slow Stretching [Fig. 148].

MM 60: J

0 1 !* ' 1*

^ **^" ~ +

:»■

fci *-■' ^,

(» fff

T ol

Oil

oli

■*

*•

LiJI

Fig. 14&

Exercise 8. Slow Bending and Quick Stretching of One Leg, with Balancing Position
of the other [Fig. 149 J.

MM 60: J

r~ f

D f

i»~*^ f-

I *-»,, |» -I

f"N A

■ « ... ■ -

A A \

) i

\ I

•*

Kli: 149.

Exercise 9. Quick Bending and Slow Stretching of the Supporting Leg [Fig. 150].

MM 60: J

r-+.

# r'l ^»

fr^ f^ ^~C

*■ 'T*

if)rrf?

l f

// ^ s

7 i

JSr

■*-

Fie. 150.

Exercise 10. Bending and Stretching of the Supporting Leg in Equal Duration
[Fig. 151].

MM 60:

t*rf?h

f ' ~ 1

«**♦

■ . .

-M-J:.^ a ._

)

V <•

}

— J —

Fin. 151.

Repeat music, transfer weight and execute with other leg.

By varying the position of the free leg, this exercise may be changed in many ways.

143. After the above exercises have been practiced in all simple sole positions, they
should be executed in the various ball, point, heel and flowing positions.

144. After these, the bending and stretching exercises may be applied to the free leg;
but as they are quite difficult, it is better to defer them until after the pupils have learned
the small and large bailments, when they will be referred to as battements sur le cou-de-
fied\% 164].

145. Inasmuch as dancing is rather an art than a science, all of these exercises must

48 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

be repeated often and with precision. Knowledge is the first requirement, but the ability
to execute what is learned demands a great deal of careful practice.

J46. But as these strictly necessary repetitions are tiresome, especially to children,
the great desideratum of teaching is to render the instruction agreeable.

147. It is a well known principle of teaching that if one would not tire his pupils, he
must retain their good-will. Experience has demonstrated that grace, ease and freedom of
movement can only be acquired by constant practice of elementary work ; it is therefore
necessary from time to time to introduce changes which will not interfere with the course
of the instruction.

148. Teachers must always adapt the work to the ability, knowledge and requirements
of the pupil; as it is impossible to set up a standard of accomplishment for a given time,
on account of the difference in pupils. Any teacher whose method is practical can, how-
ever, always conform to circumstances.

149. Intelligible explanations are of the first importance to pupils, and any teacher
whose knowledge is well founded will be enabled to impart his instruction in a satisfac-
tory manner.

Teachers should give the reason for each exercise, and be able to correctly answer all
questions regarding the work. Answers which may be given upon the instant and are not
accurate or well grounded, are soon discovered, and react in no favourable manner upon the
instructor.

150. No one thing is so sure to secure a teacher the esteem of his pupils as a demon-
stration of his ability and of his knowledge ; for although many succeed for a short time,
and with certain persons, by means of boasting, the only real success comes from wide and
appropriate knowledge and a constant endeavour to succeed. Besides all this, the teacher's
conduct must be dignified and refined ; his speech free from levity or immoral suggestion,
and his dress tasteful and neat.

151. By friendly ways, a teacher may, if he possesses great patience, effectually gain
the confidence and esteem of his pupils, thereby overcoming their lazy, careless and even
vicious instincts, if such exist. Private reproof, administered in a kindly manner, can only
result pleasantly, but unkind or ungentlemanly manners usually destroy that confidence
which, once disturbed, is lost forever.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Raisings [Elevations)

152. These exercises are composed of only two movements — raising and lowering.
They strengthen and train the muscles of the lower leg and foot, thus increasing endur-
ance ; without this factor, the dancer would tire very soon, and become slow and unsteady
and finally lose the measure.

The exercises should be practiced in all positions, increasing in height from the sole
to the extreme point positions. Slow movements are more beneficial and likewise more
difficult than rapid movements. They should be done by counting at first, and then by
music; and particular care should be paid to the carriage of the trunk. Pupils should
never be allowed to make ridiculous grimaces, or to move the shoulders, or to stretch
the fingers in an awkward manner, as all of these things tend to ruin the work.

J 53. It is more difficult to lower one's body slowly than to raise it slowly, but the
heels must be allowed to sink noiselessly at all times.

Exercise II. Pushed Raisings [Fig. 152].

MM 60: J

Fig. 152.

Exercise 12. Bound Raisings [Fig. 153].
M.M.120 4 60: J r\

Fn:. 153.

Exercise 13. Quick Lowering and Slow Raising [Fig. 154].

U. M 80 : J ^-> fM

Flo. 154.

Exercise 14. Slow Raising and Quick Lowering in J time [Fig. 155].
MM. 70. J

i '■ V .' ' *

1 f-f .==

^■ByT

I K A 1

A_,

A 1

*•

««•

«••

F10. 1 5 j.

5°

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 15. Intermittent Raising and Lowering [Fig. 156].
MM. 60 a 120 = J

Fig. 156.

Exercise 16. Slow Raising and Quick Lowering, in J time [Fig. 157].

MM 100: J

Fig. 157.

154- For the sake of variety, innumerable passages may be chosen from existing
musical compositions which will fit these exercises ; those given having been selected on
account of their peculiar fitness for rendering the method clear.

The author has searched diligently for suitable phrases for each exercise, but as he has
found but few, he has been compelled to compose many himself. He is, naturally, less
satisfied than he would be with the works of acknowledged masters. In all cases he has
given the name of the composer, if known.

When it is possible to apply the entire system, the raising exercises should be executed
upon one foot only in all stretched, bended and intermediate positions.

Combined Bendings and Raisings

155. Exercise 17. Bending and Raising in one Measure [Fig. 158].

MM. 70 r J

43=

„^

<J_IX

JUL

jJL

Fig. 158.
Exercise 18. Bending and Raising in £ Time [Fig. 159].

MM. 60-120: J

Fig. 159.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART O*' DANCING

Exercise 19. Quick Bending and Raising [Fig. 160].

M M 100-200.- J

J} trr ■■,,-—

f — 7r rr?

!fr.,

> — u j>*~ - .. ,

-0 «

A ,

t ~ ^ ^. ^ £

it.

A .

, 1

Fig. 160.

All exercises should be executed in all possible positions.

156. If in the raising exercises in 3d or 5th position, we so vary the movement that,
in lowering, one heel and then the other falls in front, we have what are termed the alternate
crossed raising exercises — des elevations croisees alternatives.

157. These exercises have been called changements dejambes, or rubbing of the heels.
However, as a changement dejambes is literally a changement of the legs, such as occurs in
every step, and it is unnecessary in so doing to rub the heels, it is perhaps better to refer
to these exercises in such a manner as to signify their peculiar quality by sticking to the
term "alternate crossed raisings."

J 58. Inasmuch as the front direction of the trunk is not changed in these exercises,
they can only be executed in ball and point position, in which it is possible to turn the
feet. They will therefore be found in the department relating to the turning of the feet
[§246].

Remarks Upon the Raising and Lowering Exercises

1 59. When the foot is carried from a closed to an open position the leg is raised, and
when carried from an open to a closed one the leg is lowered.

Beating Exercises (Battemetits)

160. If one foot is pushed strongly against the other, the movement is called a beat-
ing (un battement) from the French word battre, to beat.

161. These beatings areeithcr small, medium, large, simple, crossed, changed or alternate.

162. Small Beatings (Petits Batlementi) are those in which the feet are not separated
beyond the point at which the tip touches the floor when the leg is fully stretched. Their
width, therefore, can never exceed the length of the foot.

52 GRAMMAR *OF THE ART OF DANCING

163. Large Beatings (Grands Battemenh) are those in which the leg passes that limit. It
is customary for ballet-dancers to practice the large beatings to the horizontal height; that
is, to carry the free leg to a horizontal position in the air. For the social dances, it is suf-
ficient to carry the leg to half that height, or an angle of 45 degrees.

164- The Medium Beatings (Battemenh sur le cou-de-pied) are executed solely by the
lower leg, in which the upper leg is held still, and the movement takes place from the knee
joint, with the foot pointed strongly outward.

165. The Small Beatings are especially adapted to training the ankle; the large affect
the hip joint; and the medium develop the activity of the knee.

166. Simple Beatings (Battemenh Simples). If the free foot returns to its original posi-
tion, the beating is called Simple.

167. Crossed Beatings (Battemenh Croises). If it is carried to the crossed (3d or 5th)
position, it is a Crossed Beating (croise).

168. Changed Beatings (Battemenh Changes). If the beating be with the same foot for-
ward and backward, it is called changed (change).

169. Alternate Beatings (Battemenh Alternatifs). And if it is made first by one foot and
then the other it is termed alternate (alternatif).

170. Beatings may be executed in all directions, from an open to a closed position, but
are usually commenced from a preparatory closed one.

171. They may be either glided or carried, and therefore may be either audible or
inaudible.

Gliding (Glisser)

172. The word glisser, which is the French term for gliding, also expresses in that lan-
guage those other forms of movement which, in English, are known by the more specific
names of sliding, slipping and tracing.

In our language, the difference is as follows:

Gliding is a simple leg movement by means of which the foot is moved from one posi-
tion to another lightly touching the floor in transit.

Sliding is a voluntary movement in which the body is propelled along a surface by
means of its own weight, or the momentum derived from a previous movement.

Slipping is an involuntary or unintentional movement by means of which either one
or both feet move upon a surface.

Tracing (French, tracer) is the indication of movement, or the lines of movement, upon
the floor without transfer of weight.

173. Glisser should not be confounded with the terms glissez, un gliss'e, and un glisse-
ment.

Glisser, being the infinitive, means to glide.

Gliss'e is the technical term which signifies a gliding step or ba.ttement; un gliss'e desig-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 53

nates a glided step (un pas glisse), and glissement is the term by which a gliding movement
is known. More particulars may be found in §480.

174. Gliding may be executed upon either the sole, ball, point or heel, and is written
as follows: sole /^., ball ^~>t point ^1, and heel f — ^

Carrying (Porter)

175. All beatings that are not glided are said to be Carried, and this includes that class
in which the free foot does not touch the floor in transit.

Carrying {Porter) is of so self-evident a nature that it is seldom necessary to express it
in dance-writing. There are cases, however, in which clearness is gained by employing
a symbol, and the following signs may be used: upward -^, horizontal — , and down-
ward \.

Crossing Before and Behind (Dessus et Dessous)

176. If in a crossed beating the foot passes before the supporting leg, it is called dessus
1 over 1, and if it passes behind the support, it is called dessous (under). Strictly speaking,
these movements should be referred to as crossing before or behind, but it is preferable in
the technical sense to omit the word and to adhere to the French usage ; thus obviating
the confusion that arises from the employment of similar terms to express different attri-
butes.

Direction of Movements

177. Movements may be either forward, backward or to the side, in either straight or
curved lines.

178. Straight movements may be either directly forward, backward, to either side, over
or under crossed; and oblique movements, to cither side forward or backward, over or
under crossed.

179. Curved movements may describe either whole or part circles, or elliptical, waving
or spiral lines.

It is plain, therefore, that the beatings may be combined in almost endless variety, ami
the more deeply the student studies the art, the more arduously must he practice, in order
to properly execute the steps and movements. For the chorcgraph, or dance-writer, the
baitemenis are doubly important.

54 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Beatings for Social Dancing

180. Only the following battements are imperatively necessary for social dancing:
I. The small crossed beatings from the 3d into the 2d position (les petits battements
croises de la jieme a la 2ieme position).

1. The same forward or backward from 3d into 4th position.

3. The same forward and then backward, alternately.

4-6. The corresponding large battements in all above directions, to the half height.

7. The medium changed battements in different degrees of speed (varying tempo).

Chapter V

THE APPORTIONMENT OF TIME

SOME remarks relating to the coincidence of music and dancing may have appeared
necessary in connection with the bending exercises, but they have been deferred until
now in order to more clearly demonstrate their importance to the student by creating an
imperative demand for them in his mind.

It will be unanimously conceded that without this coincidence, dancing becomes dis-
agreeable both to the dancer and to the observer ; and although this fact is based upon a
sense of measure which is instinct to most persons, there are comparatively few who clearly
understand the reason of it.

Now, while an imperfect sense of time may be sufficient to satisfy most social dancers,
the professional dancer, the dancing teacher, and the choregraph, must be so completely
informed on the subject that he is conscious of what he is doing at all times. We are hardly
surprised, however, at the present time, to find not only social dancers, but professionals
who demonstrate by every step and movement their imperfect conception of time, rhythm
and accent.

J82. Exercises and steps for dancing are usually practiced by counting, before they
arc combined with music, and in so doing, the measures of music are not expressed, the
count relating merely to the beats, or part measures, which constitute the step-syllables;
for there are in dancing steps of more than one beat, which may be compared to words
of more than one syllable; and the dancer counts the number of time or step-syllables in
the same manner as the poet does the sound-syllables in completing his scansion. These
dance-syllables are called tempi.

Measure of Speed (Tempo)

183. Every movement consumes a certain period of duration which varies in accord-
ance with its length and form. This applies most conspicuously to the jumped steps. A
long jump consumes more time than a short one, as the falling back takes longer, in accord-
ance with the natural law of falling bodies. Glide dances mav be executed in quicker tempo

56 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

than those in which the feet are lifted from the floor, and it is, for that reason, nonsensical
to urge musicians to play in more rapid tempo than the quality of the step requires.
The proper tempo may be decided by the metronome.

Metronome

184- In the days before the invention of the metronome by Maeltzel, certain Italian
words, such as Adagio, Allegro, Presto, etc., were used throughout the world for the expres-
sion of the various degrees of speed in rendering musical compositions, but since that time
this ingenious little pyramidal machine, which divides the duration of a minute into equal
parts, has been universally adopted. The pendulum, which marks these divisions by aud-
ible strokes, is so arranged that a scale shows the various divisions from 40 to 208; or, in
other words, it is arranged so that it may swing at a rate varying from 40 to 208 strokes
to a minute.

One of these machines should be in the possession of every teacher of dancing, for by
it alone may the exact tempo be determined. It is not necessary that the dancing teacher
should be a performer upon any instrument, but some knowledge of music is absolutely
imperative; without it he can never hope to succeed, either as a teacher or as an artist.

For the information of the student who is perhaps only slightly acquainted with the
subject of music, the following explanations have been inserted, and careful consideration
thereof is earnestly recommended, not only to dancers but also to dance musicians and to
composers.

Explanation of Musical Terms*

185. Measure. 1. In music the term measure is applied to the division of sounds into
periods of equal duration, and these are indicated upon the "stafF" by means of perpen-
dicular lines, which express the form or rhythm of the composition.

2. The term is also applied, in a qualifying sense, to the regular succession of such
periods of duration.

Of the various kinds of music measures, the most common in dancing are what are
known as 2-4, 3-4, 4-4, 3-8 and 6-8.

The term measure, as applied to dancing, signifies the division of the dancing steps
and movements into periods of duration to correspond with the music and to the mainte-
nance of such periods throughout the dance composition.

* The writer has drawn largely upon the "C atechism of the Art of Dancing," by Bernhard Klemm,
for these explanations. That excellent work contains a masterly exposition of the terms used in music.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 57

186. To dance without measure is therefore to move out of harmony with the music,
in either more or less rapid tempo, or to vary the speed regardless of the rhythm of the
sound. Such lack of measure in dancing is due either to ignorance as to measure, or to
inattention or carelessness.

187. Accent is that quality of speech by which the sense of words is conveyed or affected
by means of a stronger or a lighter pronunciation of certain syllables. In music it is the
demonstration of the theme by means of strengthening the tone which forms a certain por-
tion of the measure, and without which the melody would not be properly expressed. In
dancing, the term is applied to that part of the descending step which coincides with the
heavy part measure in music, and if the dancer accents the wrong portion of the measure
he is said to dance in false measure (en fausse mesure), even though he maintain the proper
tempo. Accent usually applies to the first part of the measure, but there are certain excep-
tions to this rule.

188. Down-Stroke and Up-Stroke (Thesis ct Arsis). If, in beating the measure, a musi-
cian lowers his baton on the first part-measure, it is called " beating down " (Thesis, frappi, a);
and if he raises his baton upon the last part-measure, it is called " beating up " (Arsis,
leve, v).

189. Preparation for a step is made by raising the leg during the beating up.

190. Syncope in music is the continuance of an unaccented into an accented note, and
in dancing it is the execution of an unaccented step closely joined to an accented one.

191. Rhythm is the symmetrical regulation of time and the periodical repetition of the
same arrangement. In poetry, rhythm is applied to the arrangement of syllables; in music
to the division of tones ; and in dancing the term refers to the coincidence of movement
and music.

192. Cadence, which is derived from the Latin word cadere, to fall, is the term applied
to the final down-beat in a passage of music. Cadence is the quality which expresses the
intent of the dancer by means of rests and pauses, in the same manner as cadences of speech
and song aid the expression of the speaker and the singer by means of raising or lowering
the voice, or of lengthening or shortening the enunciation of a syllable, or the emission of
a tone. If, therefore, a dancer finishes a certain chain of steps either before or after the
corresponding musical cadence, he is said to be in false cadence.

Sentences and Phrases (Etn/uuneiiit'tits)

193. If two dance movements are connected, the combination is called Kite phrase (a
phrase), and the combination of several such phrases constitutes what is known technically
as an enchainment, or a step-sentence.

194. If the step-sentence or enchainement is repeated in each measure, the accent falls
upon the first syllable, thereby clearly demonstrating the measure; but in cases in which

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

the enchainment extends through two measures, as in the Waltz, the Galop, the Polka,
etc., the dancers often begin upon the accented first part of the second measure, thereby
dancing in false measure, although in accordance with the time. This is best explained by
the term "dancing across the music." Special attention to measure must be paid in those
dances whose enchainment requires four music measures for their execution, such as the
Mazurka, the Polka, the Schottische, etc., and in those in which the combination of steps
extends through eight measures; as, for instance, the Cracovienne, the Hongroise and the
Varsouvienne, where it is easier still to fall into incorrect measure.

Arsis Thesis

First Cut

P.
U

3
O

195. In the Varsouvienne the tempo remains the same, although the rhythm is changed,
and one is therefore doubly liable to miss the measure.

196. Faulty Composition of Dance Music. Dancers frequently step into false measure
because of faulty composition or poor rendering of the music.

197. Each strain of a piece of dance music contains, ordinarily, eight measures, which
may be compared to a square [Fig. 161]. This square, which contains the melody (Clau-
sula) may be divided into its eight measures, each two of which constitute a "cut" or
"Caesura," and two such "cuts" form a principal part; two principal parts making up the
entire melody. By thus analyzing a composition, it will be seen that the first and third
"Caesuras" are of like rhythm. They are therefore said to be "parallel"; but while the

con

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

ond and fourth are also similar, there is the distinction that, while the second indicates a
ntinuance of the melody, the fourth contains its conclusion.

J 98. Fig. 161 demonstrates the necessity for composing dance music in strains of eight
measures; but if such a number is insufficient for the composer he may sometimes use ten
measures, without seriously disturbing the dance, but melodies of twelve measures should
be avoided in such figure-dances as the Mazurka and the Quadrilles. It is to be regretted
that this fault is very common in Mazurka music, for such compositions can only be used
in the execution of "free" figures, such as the "Serpent," the "Pyramid," etc.

J99. Ballet music is either written originally for the dance or else the ballet-master com-
the dance to correspond with a certain composition to which it is always executed.
n such cases the number of measures is immaterial; it is left to the judgment or taste of
e composer or choregraph.

200. In Social Figure Dances, however, the number of measures is unchangeable, and
the dances may be executed to different musical compositions, such music must be so

nged as to coincide with the enchainment.

20J. An introduction of several measures often precedes the melody of a dance com-
position, and although it is left entirely to the judgment of the composer to prefix such an
introduction as may be necessary, it should be as short as possible and should end with a
decided cadence, in order that the dancers may recognize the commencement of the dance
melody. The prelude should never be repeated during the execution of a dance, and even
the " to place " which occurs in Quadrille music as an introduction to each strophe or couplet
is, in reality, entirely superfluous.

202. No prelude whatever should precede the "trio " or any other part of a dance com-
position, for a prelude would render the execution of the regular figure impossible; as indi-
cated in Fig. 162.

I il £\£ J

fcjTJpt p T

Fig. 162.

203. Many of the most celebrated composers make this mistake, and in the "Wine,
Woman and Song" Waltz, No. 2, this error is especially annoying, for the prelude contains
only three measures [Fig. 163]:

i1' 1 1 if 'i if 'i if"iM'n in

Kir.. 163.

These three measures invariably throw the dancers into false cadence, as a waltz rotation
requires two measures of music.

The same annoyance, with similar results, arises from the addition of a few measures
at the end of a strain, as in Fig. 164, which has been taken from a popular polka:

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Jlf-

Fig. 164.

If, therefore, a composer finds it necessary to insert certain chords in order to change to
another key, such chords should extend through at least four measures; although they
would be more acceptable to the dancers if embodied in a melody of eight or sixteen.

204. I n the matter of part measures, special care should be taken ; for if they are improp-
erly constructed, they mislead the dancers, who mistake them for the commencement of
the melody. In 2-4 time, for instance, only an eighth note should be used; and not more
than two eighth notes in 6-8.

ft;;f f f rf-ff 1> \f p^r|f PT P |f ,^_r |

Fig. 165.

fe£

,f thr Pr

Fig. 166.

In Fig. 165 we find this mistake, while Fig. 166 is correct.

A similar example in 2-4 time may be found in a popular Quadrille from La Fille de
Madame Angot [Fig. 167].

Fig. 167.

This error could have been obviated if it had been written as shown in Fig. 168.

rtl/irHfQ

r_,r £'/ 1 gr flr 1

Fig. 168.

Thousands of such instances might be cited, but these will suffice to cover the point.

205. A dance musician who has a correct understanding of cadence and accent will clearly
interpret the music by placing a strong accent upon the first syllable of the measure, but
composers should write their music so that misinterpretation will be impossible, instead of
leaving it to the player to properly express their meaning.

206. All dancers can hardly be expected to possess a knowledge of music, but dance

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 6l

music must, nevertheless, be written for all, and should therefore be composed so that it
may be readily understood. Unless a composer understands enchainments, movements and
figures, and their rhythm, he should consult a scientifically educated master of dancing before
publishing dance music; for even the most perfect musical masterpiece is unfit for dancing
if it does not assist the dancer; and the number of incorrectly composed dance compositions
is surprising.

207. Another, and still more annoying evil must be mentioned, and this is the tendency
upon the part of certain musicians to vary the tempo in order to render the music "soul-
ful." In the programs of garden and house concerts, there are usually some numbers of
dance music, and of these the musicians frequently render certain measures more slowly
and others more rapidly than is proper for dancing.* To render music in this manner is
destructive of the sense of measure, for if a composition be played several times with a cer-
tain variation of tempo, the hearer becomes so accustomed to the variation that it becomes
fixed in the mind as the correct form of the piece, and this ruins the conception of the dance
rhythm.

208. No one is better qualified to make observations regarding the sense of measure
than the dancing master, for the contemplation of properly measured dancing develops and
refines this sense.

There are, at this time, many more persons who lack a conception of measure than in
the days when it was fashionable to dance correctly. Indeed, while there was scarcely one
in a hundred dancers who lacked that sense fifty years ago, there are more than ten to-day.

Chapter VI

THE BEATINGS

Raising and Lowering Exercises

IN the raising and lowering exercises which follow the holding of the body must be cor-
rect; the knees stretched, and the entire sole should remain upon the floor as long as
possible, thus exercising the ankles. Special attention should also be paid to the positions.
It is especially necessary to execute all exercises with such precision as to ennoble the
work and to give the dancer that elegance of carriage and manner which tends toward
beautiful dancing.

210. Bad Habits. It is better to make ten proper movements than a hundred careless
ones, as the muscles so quickly become accustomed to either good or bad habits. If the
first exercises are carefully executed, a person will dance easily and well, but if they have
been neglected with the intention of making corrections later, it will be found that it is much
more difficult to make these corrections than it would have been to learn properly from
the beginning, because the muscles will have become accustomed to careless movements.

As it is self-evident that one can glide from one sole position to another, no particular
instructions in relation thereto will be given.

21 1. Most of the musical examples for the following exercises are extremely simple and
old, and may be replaced by any others, so long as the rhythm is correct. Of course, all
musical compositions grow old, but although the various compositions may be succeeded
by later ones, the necessity for the coincidence of the music and the dance remains the same.

212. Exercise 20. Small Simple Beatings (Petits battements simples). [Fig. 169].
The signs above the notes upon the rhythm line indicate the manner in which the exer-
cise should be counted before executing it with music.

The sign ( w ) shows the unaccented, and the sign ( — ) shows the accented counts.
Counting is of special importance to those pupils who do not understand music, or whose
sense of measure is imperfect.

213. Exercise 20 a [Fig. 169] is called Small Simple Beatings of the Right Foot from
the 1st into the 2d Position {Petits battements simples du pied droit de la premiere position
a la seconde).

214- Correct Order of Words. The expressions are given both in the English and the
62

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 63

French languages for the benefit of teachers and pupils, and for the purpose of demonstrat-
ing the advantage of the correct order of the words, which, if properly systematized, forms
a great help to the memory.

These battements are called small because they do not pass the limit of the length of
one of the feet; and simple, because the foot returns to its original position.

Repeat the music and go through the exercise with the left foot before proceeding to
-cise 20 b, and apply the same method to each of the succeeding exercises.

k 1-yf

LJL

LvL

- 1? -A

^JL

t\.A

\-A

\,JL

\^JL

JLA

JLJ.

I_i

-1

J_i

-T.l

F-&

JLJ.

JLJL

j 1? .A

-\-\

»- &

_LJL

ILJL

Fio. 169.

215. Kxercisc 20 b [Fig. 169] is known as Small Simple Beatings of the Right Foot
from the Anterior 3d into the id Position (Pelits battements simples du pied droit de la
troisi'eme position dessus, a la seconde).

2J6. Although the 3d is a crossed position (tme position croisee) the exercise is not called
a crossed beating, for the purpose of avoiding confusion, and the word "simple" is suf-
ficient to show that the foot returns to 3d position.

The names for Kxcrcises 20 b to 20/ [Fig. 169] arc easily determined by comparing
them with those already described.

It might now appear to be the natural course to extend the execution of these exercises

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

to the intermediate positions, but as the intermediate positions seldom permit a movement
of the length of a foot, no complete movement of the ankle could be contained in them
and they are therefore not only unnecessary but useless.

Small Changed Crossed Beatings [Petits battements croises changes')

217. By carrying the foot into a crossed position alternately before and behind the sup-
porting leg, one executes what are known as Alternate Crossed Beatings (Battements croi-
ses change's).

218. Exercise 21*. Small Alternate Crossed Beatings {Petit s battements croises alter-
natifs) [Fig. 170].

MM. 72

..*

£*"?

rWrrrf

iWrrr

-#-,.

a U_/f

— J — — J — i —

l.AA.A

-*-

■¥

•4-

-4—0--

1 j i M

-**

-if

J - J-*

JLA1

b \„A

"3 8

JLyf.j.yf

-*r

■*■

-*•

-+-

-*-

•3 3
JUJ

, \mA

•5 5

±AA.A

-*-

-*•

•4»

-v

6 6

X/7J

■8 3

±AJ.A

-*-

■fa

•8 3

JUJ

Fig. 170.

These movements are very frequently used, especially "a" and "b " and are of so great
benefit to the ankles that they cannot receive too much attention and practice. In prac-
ticing them, however, enough variations should be introduced to retain the interest of the
pupils, who should also be encouraged to evolve combinations for themselves. By such a
course the instruction becomes more interesting.

Small Alternate Beatings (Petits battements alternatifs')

219. If the changes are so executed that one beats first with one foot and then the other,
these movements are called Alternate Beatings (des battements alternatifs), and if they return
to the original position they are called "simple." If they are in the crossed positions they
are called "crossed."

220. If the position be first before and then behind, or vice versa, the movement is
called Alternate Changed Crossed Beatings (Battements alternatifs croises changes).

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

If they begin with the foot which is in the rear, they constitute a movement forward;
and it they begin with the advanced foot the movement is reversed.

Exercise 22. Small Alternate Simple Beatings (Petits battements simples alternatifs)
[Fig. 171].

MM. 72: J

Fig. 171.

-»,._„_„

MM. 72-. J

J ,-A

X/LlfA

o->'^2 -o'tCv

•^2 -o«£x

h iLKlX/lJA

j -a

UJU, -

»-i Six

Fig. 171.

These exercises differ from Exercise 22 both in position and in rhythm. The rhythm
in Exercise 22 shows the movement continued to the end of the clausula; while in Exer-
cise 23 there is a pause (rest) in the fourth measure, for the purpose of changing the direc-
tion of the movement. In repeating, begin the movement with the other foot.

222. The transfer sign (degager, _Z2L or C\ ), which is to be found below the line
of the floor, indicates the proper time for transferring from one foot to the other.

The sole symbol shows which foot should execute the movement.

The terms clausula, cssura, and " principal part " were explained In § 197.

The following variations of the foregoing exercises will render still other changes easy.

Exercise 24. Three alternate beatings, rest, and repetition with other foot; four meas-
ures walking forward, and four "measures walking backward. (Trots petits battements alter-
natifs dessus, intervalle et repetition commencee de I 'autre pied: 4 mesures. Repetition de ces
battements mais dessous: ./mesures) [Fig. 173].

Yu.. i;j.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 25. Three Alternate Beatings in a Cut (caesura). First phrase forward, second
backward. The second principal part {clausula) is executed in the same way as the first
[Fig- '74]-

MM. 72: J

o^ 5 5 5 fi- '5 6'

Fig. 174.

Exercise 26. Enchainment of Eight Measures (Variation avec des Intervalles). Two
alternate beatings forward, rest, and repeat. Four measures. Same backward 4 measures.
Repeat entire eight measures [Fig. 175].

Rhytme-J) J — J — J

-* — f-

j> , m

i , j> , m

-* — *-

MM. 100: J)

^=e

E£E=E

£p

JLA

XtO

X./UH

XAJ

5 s

te f-

Fig. 175.

Exercise 27. Two Beatings in Complete and three in Broken Measure; first clausula
forward, second backward [Fig. 176].

Rhytme. k J^ J) j^ i J J) J J) J^J> , J> , J^Jl, J> , J^J> , J> , J J) J ]> , jfj) ■

M.M.100 = J.

J-M

MJL//XMJT ~ MJ ~A

KUU-lKl

Fig. 176.

Large Beatings [Grands battements)

223. These movements commence with a beat, the leg being carried as high as required,
and they may be varied in the same manner and to as great a degree as the small beatings;
but if executed by the same music it must be played more slowly. Different music has

GRAMMAR OF THK ART OF DANCING

the advantage of being an agreeable change for the student, and its use is therefore recom-
mended.

224- The weight of the entire body, resting as it does, balanced over one foot, renders

the outward turned position of the feet more difficult to maintain than if the point of the

foot reached the floor. The grands battements are therefore more difficult in execution

than the petitsy and their difficulty increases with the decrease in the tempo. They are usually

commenced at M. M. 72, that tempo being gradually diminished to 40.

Note. — Although it is customary to practice the large beatings with the aid of a bar or support,
they should also be executed in free manner, as greater benefit is to be derived from that form of exer-
cise, after the bar work has been accomplished.

225. Kxercise 28. Large Simple Beatings {Grands battements simples) [Fig. 177].

MM 72 40 r J

t _r?

n -~i

JLTL

dJL

n .n

JLZL

c_X_f

-M

It "■ — — L

LJ.

n „, i

k_Jl -4

1 - 1

^C jl ■" *

F10. 177.

JLJ

Exercise 28 a is called large, simple beatings of the right foot, from the 1st sole into
high 2d position, with perpendicular sole-direction. This verbal description clearly shows
the advantage of the signs over the words, as it takes many words to explain what may
be conveyed by the use of very few signs.

226. The sign s~^s' represents the beating of the point of the foot upon the floor

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

which precedes the movement of the leg into a horizontal or " high " position ; and the
opposite sign, \^> signifies that the leg is lowered and the foot beats back again to its
original position.

227. Exercise a 8 b is known as large simple beatings of the right foot from the an-
terior 3d into the high' 2d position. The word "simple" signifies that the beating returns
to the original position.

In Exercise 28 c the right foot stands in posterior 3d position.

These exercises should also be executed with the other foot.

Exercise 29. Large Beatings to Half Height {Grands battemenls a demi-hauteur) [Fig.
178].

MM 72-40 = J

Fig. 178.

This Exercise is composed of those movements contained in Exercise 28 which are
carried to the half height.

The choregraphic symbols of the degrees of height were explained in §§ 61 and 75
and illustrated therein by cuts and diagrams. Some of these signs are used in this Exercise.

Exercise 30. Large Simple Beatings upon the Ball {Grands battements a demi-jbauteur)
[Fig. 179].

M M. 60-80

jy • jy m ■

L i , if

r-ftf j>r|»

[ ^-f §

I I

•I "7

-*■

-*-

— '\ — A

—*t7 fl

1 1

Fig. 179.

Exercise 3 1. Large Simple Beatings upon the Point (Grands battements simples sur le
pointe) [Fig. 180].

M M 75-100: J

Fig. 18a.

Exercise 32. Alternate Large Crossed Beatings (Grands battements crois'es chang'es)
[Fig. 181].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

MM 50-100: J

Fig. 18 1.

228. The signs of movement have been purposely omitted, as they have been rendered
unnecessary by the full descriptive titles of the exercises.

229. Kxercise 22- Alternate Large Beatings (Grands bat lements alternatifs) [Fig. 182].

M M 60-100= J

*U71

til

X;\rirr/

vT./KV.

Uun

vl? '■J--^

Llv pi 77

1AAZ

fn\ 1H77

JUn

4^*54

1U E M~

T.r~T.-7

7 rv

h T/iv V y J

If I T

, *j[. r~j,H

4JZJL

dJjpILlUZL

JkEJ.

- V\l \-P

V\\h'J~

4-W1

W-

Fig. 182.

At the commencement and in the middle of this Kxercise appears a sign that lias not
been used before. It is called the "key" and it indicates the movement of the free foot
in the air. This sign will be fully explained in §353.

7<D GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

230. Exercise 33 & contains what are known as alternate large beatings (Grands batte-
ments alternatifs). The right foot is lifted from the 1st sole position into the ad high balanc-
ing position, and is then put down in its original place. The weight is then transferred, as
indicated by the sign C\ (degager), and the same movement is executed with the left foot.

231. An entire measure consisting of four *^ notes is used for the execution of these
beatings, and as a beating commences upon the last note in a measure, the second move-
ment coincides with the thesis or first quarter of the measure. The third movement falls
upon the second quarter, and the fourth or last upon the third quarter, while the repetition
commences upon the last quarter. The movement has been so arranged that the last move-
ment coincides with the third part measure, for the purpose of distinctly expressing the
cadence.

232. It will be noted that in the second measure the transfer sign, and in the third and
fourth measures the lifting and putting down signs have been omitted, and that they have
been again written in the fifth measure. This is because a new line has been used. The
abbreviations used in the sixth and seventh measures have already been explained [§ 141]
as indicating a repetition of the preceding measure; and as they are regular signs from
music-script they need no further comment. The symbol is used for the mutual conven-
ience of reader and writer.

233. Exercise 33 b is known as the alternate large beatings forward and backward
(Grands battements alternatifs en avant et en arriere).

In this exercise the right foot is lifted from the 1st sole position into the high anterior
4th balancing position, and put down in its original place; when the weight is transferred,
and the left foot lifted to posterior 4th position and brought back again to 1st position.

234- Exercise 33 c. Large alternate crossed beatings (Grands battements alternatifs
crois'es).

The key at the beginning of this line points forward. The left foot, which stands in
posterior 3d position, is lifted into the high 2d, and put down in anterior 3d position; the
weight transferred, and the same movement made with the other foot. This movement is
executed four times and the body is thereby carried forward from the place. Another key
pointing backward follows the third part of the fourth measure, and indicates that from that
point the movement is reversed, commencing with the right foot and returning to place.
These are the most frequently used of the alternate large beatings.

Exercise 33d differs from 33 c merely in position, starting from the 5th instead of the 3d.

235. Exercise 33 e contains the alternate large beatings with direction sidewise and for-
ward (Grands battements alternatifs avec changement de direction de cote et en avant).

The left foot is lifted from the posterior 3d into the high id and put down in anterior
3d position, then again lifted to high anterior 4th and put down in anterior 3d position.
The symbol of repetition extending through two measures means to repeat both preceding
measures. The fifth, sixth and seventh measures are the same as the first, second and third,
but the eighth ends upon the third quarter.

All of these exercises should be practiced in different directions and various heights,
according to different rhythmic arrangement.

GKAMMAK OF THE A«T OF DANCING 71

236. It requires much more space to explain the various choregraphic signs and ab-
breviations than to express their meaning by applying them to the musical score, but it is
no more difficult to acquire skill in reading them than in learning to read the script of
language or of music.

237. The exercises which now follow, although belonging, on account of their construc-
tion, to the bending and stretching exercises, have been deferred until this time, because
their difficulty has rendered them impracticable up to this point [§ 144].

238. The Intermediate Beatings (Les battements moyens, ou les battements sur le cou-
de-pied).

In lifting the right foot into the low 3d balancing position, as in Fig. 183, it will be
noticed that the right leg is bended, thereby throwing the knee strongly
outward. The uninterrupted extension of the right leg, through this posi-
tion into the 2d low balancing position, followed by so bending the knee
as to carry the foot again into the 3d low balancing position, is technically
known as the battements sur le cou-de-pied. These beatings tend to train
and develop the knee-joint.

239. This exercise is styled Intermediate Beatings {battements moyens), .H
because, while the free foot may beat upon the supporting leg, and the \
movement of the leg may be greater than the length of a foot, which is the ^L

limit of the small beatings, it is impossible to so execute the movements kig. 183.

as to fill the specifications of the large beatings.

240. The French term, Le cou-de-pied, which finds its equivalent in the Italian as TV
collo delpiede, may be literally translated into English as the neck of the foot, or ankle. While
this term may be appropriately applied to that portion of a horse's leg known as the fet-
lock, there is really no part of the human leg which resembles a neck.

24J . For the purpose of obtaining a complete bending of the forefoot, the pupil should
be made to execute each beating with an audible tap upon the floor; and to perfect his
sense of measure, the first part of each measure should be accented by a stronger and more
audible beating. This audible beating is known technically by the term terre-a-terre. This
practice, while it renders the exercises more difficult to learn, will give greater ease and
pleasure in execution as the pupil progresses.

Kxercisc 34. I ntermediate Simple Beatings (Battements moyens simples). To the greatest
possible degree of speed [Fig. 184].

242. Fxercise 34 a. Intermediate simple beatings of the right foot from 1st ball to
half-high ad flowing position, with inclined sole, in which the foot is put down in its original
position, palpably touching the supporting leg.

These movements would be simply bending and stretching exercises if the free foot
did not touch the supporting leg; that attribute alone constitutes them battements.

1 he choregraphic signs for these movements are the usual bending and stretching
signs. If the movement is executed in a flowing position, the fact is made evident by the
appropriate sign under the floor line.

Kxercisc 34 b differs from the preceding only in the perpendicular sole direction.

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

M M. 100-S

00: J

f f~-

, 4 \A

f4 M

C 1

•*-

.*-

1 4^^^— — —

„ <f \A

(1M

t 1

-4-

-*•

•*•

c i \A

H\A

J i

-*-

a f M

<>k\A

-*-

.*-

-*■

-*-

e 1 \A

< I

-*■

-*-

•4-

-*-

( f \A

'4M

< ?

■»-

•¥

*•

-*"

-*-

•8

i4-

Fig. 184.

Exercise 34 c is composed of the intermediate simple beatings of the right foot, from
the anterior 3d ball position into the half-high 2d.

Exercise 34 d differs from 34 c in sole direction.

Exercise 34 e contains intermediate simple beatings of the right foot, from the posterior
3d ball position into the half-high 2d, and back to its original position.

Exercise 34/ is the same as 34 e, but with perpendicular sole.

These exercises may be executed in 5th position by extremely skilful pupils who are
able to hold the legs turned completely outward.

243. Exercise 35. Alternate Intermediate Beatings {Battements moyens changes). To the
greatest degree of speed [Fig. 185].

M M. 100-

200: J

TftP*

[f-pff-

\fffff ^

tfmfm

1 - * I.

. 4 M

U/14/1

-4-

•*.

-*■

-*-

■*•

4/14

b 4 M

^A4A

-+■

-»-

•+■

.*-

-*-

■3 3
444

c 4 M

63 3

UAU

-*•

-*■

-*•

-*-

•*•

63 3

4A4

a i \A

HA4A

'fl 5

-*•

-*-

■*•

-*-

M±

Fig. 185.

Exercise 35 a. The right foot is extended from the anterior 3d ball position (dessus)
into the half-high 2d, and then put down in the posterior 3d ball position, palpably touch-
ing the supporting leg. Repeat in opposite direction.

244- The changement from the anterior to the posterior 3d position renders this move-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

ment different from the simple beatings. These positions
are illustrated by Figs. j86 and 187. This is the most im-
portant of the exercises known as battements sur le cou-de-
pied.

Explanations of Exercises 3 5 b, 3 5 c , 3 5 d, are not neces-
ssary.

245. Exercise 36. Alternate Intermediate Beatings in
Varied Rhythm (Battements moyens changes avec changement
de rhythme). To the most rapid tempo [Fig. 188].

Fig. 186.

•9

Fig. 187.

Jig . ■

m f=^t

4) A

141A<4\A

<>41A<>41A<>41A

J 11 'I * '3

- 0 „. .

<. 1 c 1

^ /

< I H

Fig. 188.

This exercise may be practiced in different rhythms. Such practice aids in the appre-
ciation of rhythmic arrangement and educates the musical sense.

Chapter VII

TURNING EXERCISES

THE terms tourner and se tourner have been fully explained in §§ 116 and 127, while
the choregraphic symbols are given in §130, and §§156 and 158 contain Raising
Exercises in which the feet are turned.

247. The simplest sign for turning the foot is the letter v [§ 130], which is further
qualified by the use of the auxiliary sole symbols, in the same manner as with the position
signs.

248. Exercise 37. Turning the Legs (Tourner les jambes) [Fig. 189].

M M 108= J

Fig. 189.

In this exercise (a) shows the first sole position; (b) means to turn both feet upon the
heels; (c) the feet in parallel first position; (d) turning both feet upon the balls; (e) inward
turned 1-2 intermediate position of both feet; (/) the same as b; (g) parallel i-a position;
(h) the same as d, and (i) the first position. The first and last mentioned (a) and (/), are
without auxiliary symbols, as it is understood that the feet are turned outward in the 1st
position unless otherwise noted; indeed the symbols themselves show the feet in that posi-
tion. If the turn be executed in a balancing position, the sign (v) is placed above the line
of the floor. If the accent sign (a) be placed horizontally, near the sole sign, as in the
seventh measure of this exercise, it indicates that the movement is to be executed sidewise.

250. Whether the leg is turned inward or outward is always indicated by the succeed-
ing position sign.

251. Twisting (Tortiller). The term Tortiller signifies twisting, or the simultaneous
turning of one foot upon the toe and the other on the ball. This is not a simple move-

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

ment, as it consists of two turning movements, and it will therefore be explained more fully
under the head of compound movements and steps in § 532. The choregraphic sign for
Tortiller, is a double v or w.

252. Transferring (Degager.) This has been explained in § 128 and its symbol is
explained and illustrated in j 130.

The transfer of weight in the open positions may be combined with elevations upon
the balls or points. Such exercises are usually practiced in 2d position, but the movement
should be more thoroughly practiced in the intermediate 2-4 position, as more benefit is
to be derived therefrom than is afforded by the 2d.

253. These exercises affect the spine, as well as the legs, as no transfer can be made
without a certain degree of movement thereof. One may avoid losing the balance by mov-
ing the upper body.

Certain movements of the head and arms, combined with the transferring exercises,
contribute much to the acquirement of grace [§ 289].

The choregraphic sign of transfer, which is found in Exercise 38, which follows, is in
most cases omitted, as the transfer is usually so evident that it is superfluous to indicate
it. In such cases, however, as there may be more or less ambiguity as to the exact moment
of transfer, the symbol should always be used.

Exercise 38. Raising and Transferring {fclever et Degager) [Fig. 190].

M M 200-60= J

*/i 1

1. kj

_i_

LzJL

hJ_L

!^2_

J_^

JLa

/L±

1 D

Fio. 190.

~L-

^J-

Exercise 38 a. Stretch right leg to second point position, raise left foot as high as
possible, thus throwing both feet into intermediate 1-2 point position [Kig.
191] then lower the right foot to sole position, by which movement the
left comes into 2d position. ' The transfer in raising and lowering is so
natural that it needs no comment.

Exercise 38 b. Standing in anterior 4th point position of the right, raise
the left foot and transfer weight to right, thereby leaving the left in pos-
terior 4th position. At the instant when both feet are entirely raised, they
are in intermediate 4- 1 point position, and therefore separated by the length
of a half step.

I xercise 38 c consists in raising and transferring the weight from the
anterior 2-4 position of the right to the posterior 2-4 position of the left.

_A_
JA.

Fin. 191.

76 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Foot- Circles [Ronds de jambe)

The-foot circles differ from the small beatings only in the fact that their transition is
curved, while that of the petits battements is in straight lines. They are therefore very closely
related.

254. A foot-circle is, as its name indicates, a circle described by the foot. In the French
language the term rond de jambe, which means, literally, circle of the leg, is applied; but as
the circle is actually described by the point of the foot with the assistance of the leg, the
term "foot-circles" is considered proper.

255. The various foot-circles {ronds de jambe) may be classified as follows:

(a) Into whole, double and triple or more, and half, quarter and eighth circles.

(b) Into large and small circles.

(d) Into inward or outward circles.

(e) Into bended or stretched circles.
(/) Into beaten or carried circles.

256. (a) Whole, half and double circles are known by their geometrical form.

(b) Small circles are those whose diameter does not exceed the length of the foot; all
others are called large circles.

257. A circle forward does not pass farther back than the line of the 2d position, nor
does a circle backward reach in front of that line. Circles to the side are exactly bisected
by the same line [Fig. 192].

* o

>"-V b r*

— cr!^C>^5=a2^ i ;^Sse£IX-SsC22^ 4 if-~

Fig. 192.

258. The circles to the side usually start from 2d position, and if the foot is carried
backward, the circle is called " outward," if carried forward, the circle is called " inward "
[b and c]. If a circle to the side starts from 1st position, an "outward" circle is described
by carrying the foot forward, and an "inward" by the opposite movement. Any circle
which starts forward from an anterior closed position is " outward," and all those which begin
with a movement to the side are "inward."

Circles starting backward from a posterior closed position are "inward," while those
which start sidewise are "outward."

A circle which starts from the anterior 4th and passes through the 1st and 2d positions
is "inward," but if it passes the 2d and then the 1st position, it is an "outward" circle.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 77

Circles beginning from the posterior 4th position and passing through the 2d and 1st
are "inward," and those in countermotion are "outward."

Circles starting backward from open intermediate positions are " outward," and those
starting forward are "inward." All circles which go in the direction indicated in the pre-
ceding figure [b] are "inward," and those in [r] are always "outward."

259. Circles are either "bended" or "stretched," in accordance with the state of the
leg.

260. Circles which are described upon the floor by the point of the foot are called
"glided" circles. If the foot does not touch the floor they are called "carried" or "bal-
anced." These latter may be executed at any height.

261. The signs for the various foot circles are as follows:

a. b. c d. e. f. g. h. i. k. 1. m.

J k °^fr <A \ ,A k /I W V <? fr

n. o. p. q.

"7V* "7T

Fig. 193.

(a) "Small," of the right and left.

(b) " Medium," of the right and left.

(d) "Backward" (dessous), shown by point over supporting leg.

(e) "Outward glided," of the right.
(/) " Outward glided," of the left.
(g) " Inward glided," of the right.
(h) "Inward glided," of the left.

(/) "Half-high outward," of the right.
\k) " Half-high outward," of the left.
(/) "Half-high inward," of the right.
(m) " Half-high inward," of the left.
(») "High outward," of the right.
(0) "High outward," of the left.
(/>) "High inward," of the right.
(7) "High inward," of the left.

The position from which the circle starts is indicated by the form of the sign.
262. Double or repeated circles are designated by the letter "t" (meaning tours) which
is placed below the line of the .floor, accompanied by the number of times the circle is exe-

7»

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

cuted, and half and quarter circles are shown by the form of the circle in the drawing or
the fraction which is placed below the line of the floor [Fig. 194].

r s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z.

"Tft 2t It V4 V2 3/4 V4 V? 3/4 It

Fig. 194.

Exercise 39. Stretched Glided Foot-Circles to the Side (Rands de jambe gliss'es lat'erale-
ment) [Fig. 195].

MM 50-100 .- J

A Jl J

A A

h_AA.

A d.

c A A J

A A

<* A 4

4- A

zAA A

A A

f A 4 L

A L

LA A

A A

h U A

A L

Fig. 195.

Repeat the music and execute the movements with the left foot.

Exercise 40. Stretched Carried Foot-Circles to the Side (Ronds de jambe port es lat'erale-
ment) [Fig. 196].

MM. 50: J

P'IG. 196.

This exercise differs from Exercise 39 only in the fact that the foot does not touch the

loor.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING

Exercise 41. Stretched Glided Foot-Circles Forward {Ronds de jambe gliss'es dessus, en
dedans et en dehors) [Fig. 197].

M H 120
£ 1 ^^~t

, . r_

* ft

. 0 £-*

. 0 S~m

1 0 1 ^p— 1

lLiIjL

a I

_j-

•*•

■+■

-*-

» I

*•

—

■*■

•*»

•*-

"TT

A «

■*•

-*-

■*•

•+-

.+•

.+■

* 1

•*■

«,

•V

-%-

-V

Fig. 197.

Different music for Exercise 41 b, without choregraphic symbols, may be found in the
Musical Score, arranged for piano accompaniment. The exercises above given should be
practiced with that music, as well as with the melody provided above [Fig. 197].

Exercise 42. Small Stretched Glided Foot-Circles Backward (Petits ronds de jambe
gliss'es dessous, en dehors et en dedans) [Fig. 198].

M M 120 1 i

~~ fl T

-+■

> T

■*■

—

■*■

h I

J-

■*■

-*-

■+■

-*-

•J

« I

-+-

■*■

■+■

-+-

■*-

-*-

-«-

-*•

•*-

■*■

« JL

4 -

■*■

—

-*-

-+-

■4-

Fl<:. 198.

The corresponding carried circles may be executed with the same music.

Exercise 43. Three Carried Foot-Circles to the Side and u Transfer (Trots ronds de
jambe port is et un degagement) [Fig. 199].

While every movement is written by signs upon line a of this exercise, only the most
necessary symbols have been expressed upon line b.

263. In such cases, as the movement is clearly understood, only the most necessary
signs should be used.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Aoi4

h A°4^

AAA

A* z

A* L

\^ w

kv°i>

i2_

N*° v

}?L

^2_

Fig. 199.

Exercise 44. Foot-Circle Forward, to the Side, and Backward, and a Transfer {Ronds
de jambe dessus, de cote, dessous et un degagement) [Fig. 200].

M.M.100 : J

jHtfH .r

l^£j*_rf

|t£f ff

p-f -p ,- «

iff, •?

ffrrr

n^r^r

irrr rr

— p—

a i„rf

/ 0 \

It a

t> J? 4

I n \

I n

Fig. 200.

Exercise 45. The same as Exercise 44, but commencing with circle backward and end-
ing with circle forward [Fig. 201].

M.M.100 : J

Fig. 201.

Exercise 46. Large Glided Foot-Circles, combined with Raising and Bending [Fig. 202].

I ' n )Tf

iex

^^^

AM \

2_L

i^_±

2__L

o4 I

? t/f

b /f x? u

2__L

^Ll

_2__L

il_L

-> \A

4cA \ 1

oi±

l_L

^ l c

? t/f

Fig. 202

Exercise 46 «. Raise upon supporting left leg, and bend and stretch same during the
lowering. At the same time describe a large outward circle with the right foot, forward.

Exercise 46 b. Execute a large inward circle backward with the right foot, during the
combined lowering, bending and stretching of the raised and supporting left leg.

Exercise 46 c. Execute movements similar to Exercises 46 a and 46 b, with large circles
to the side.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 8l

Accessory Qualities of Movement

264- The movements heretofore described may be expressed in other forms which have
not yet been mentioned, such as stamping or pounding, rubbing, striking, etc.

265. Stamping (Taper). To " stamp " one puts his foot down forcibly ; this is known
in the French language as taper.

Pounding \Trapper). To " pound" with one's foot is to wilfully and forcibly put down
the foot in such a manner as to produce sound.

" Stamping " is done with the leg stretched, while the knee must be bended in order to
procure the force necessary to "pounding."

Either movement may be executed upon the sole, ball, point or heel, which may be
indicated by the regular symbols of sole direction below the line of the floor.

These more than ordinarily strong accents are noted in the choregraphic symbolism
by the same sign as is used in the script of music (a). The difference
between the two movements, stamping, — taper (a), and pounding, — i . A

frapper (A), is indicated by representing the former by thin and the ■* ■■ — j' -^ ^
latter by thick lines. The application of these symbols is fully ex- fig. 203.

plained by Fig. 203.

266. Rubbing iTrotter). By this term, as applied to the art of dancing, we designate the

movement of the feet one against the other, and the choregraphic sign therefor is

or r~ . The proper sign is usually placed below the line of the floor, to designate what
portion of the rubbing foot comes into actual contact with the other.

267. Striking (Battre), taken in its technical sense, means to touch the supporting leg
sharply with the free foot, which is in transit from an open position. One may "strike"
either with the entire leg, the calf, the sole, the edge of the sole, the heel, etc. If, in strik-
ing, the free leg touches the support only once, it is called a simple striking; two strokes
constitute a double, and three a triple striking, etc.

The signs of these various
»trikingsareasfollows[Fig.204]: b c d e f

(a) Simple forward striking — m m — - -
(Battu simple dessus). —

(b) Simple backward striking I ■>>•■ "M-
{Battu simple dessous).

(e) Double striking, backward and forward (Battu double dessous-dessus).

(d) Double striking, forward and backward ( Battu double dessus-dessous).

(e) Triple striking, forward, backward and forward (Battu triple dessus-dessous-dessus).
(/) Triple striking, backward, forward and backward (Battu triple dessous-dessus-dessous).
if the signs do not of themselves indicate the striking foot, the corresponding sole

position should be written.

Chapter VIII

CARRIAGE AND MOVEMENT OF THE UPPER BODY

AND ARMS

OF the many different systems which have been applied to this department of dancing,
that of the so-called French school has become most widely known and adopted, and
the exercises practiced according to this system are extremely beautiful and graceful. Still,
the representation by the dance script, which describes the order and manner of succession
of the positions and movements, makes necessary certain alterations and additions to the
French system.

These changes are rather complemental than corrective to that system, and are quite
in line with the published wishes of such distinguished writers upon dancing, as Sulzer,
Blasis, St. Leon, and B. Klemm, as expressed by themselves. The latter distinctly states
that " their systems might be employed, corrected and amplified by artistic masters, to assist
in the advancement and development of an art which is able to fight for first place with all
works of good taste in regard to aesthetic power" (Klemm's "Catechism of the Art of
Dancing," p. a8).

The many fine exercises introduced by the French system may be very distinctly classi-
fied by means of a mathematically divided circle of positions.

Our predecessors have accomplished great results, and it is our duty to advance along
the road which leads to the perfection of our art by means of the assistance they have left
us; but it is only a false admiration for that which has gone before which would prevent
corrections or improvements ; indeed, had all former writers clung to that line of action,
we would still be dancing in the same manner as did Adam and Eve.

French System of Arm Positions

According to the French system, the horizontal position of the arms at the sides is

called the ad position. Now, if one arm is raised to the horizontal position at the side, and

one to the horizontal position in front of the body (the 3d arm position), which arm is

actually in proper 3d position? Both. But how is that possible with the arms so differ-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

ently disposed ? Has not one remained in the horizontal side position, while the other has
passed into another? The same is true of the French 4th position. One arm is in horizontal
side and one in horizontal front position. Which is in 4th position ? The 5th position,
according to that system, is with the arms raised and forming an oval above the head.

Zorn's System of Arm Positions

X R j 1

•:.

Fig. 205.

If we hold to the principle that the perpendicular
hanging position of the arms is the 1st position, and the
perpendicular raised position is the 5th, there exists, theo-
retically, a circle, the centre of which is just below the
gorge, which is described by raising the arms sidewise,
and which is shown in Fig. 205.

In the middle of the circumference, or, as we may say,
half-way between the 1st and the 5th positions, we find
what we may term the 3d position, and these points are
horizontal to the shoulder line. The 4th position falls,
consequently, midway between the 5th and 3d, and the
id at a point equidistant from the 3d and 1st. The posi-
tion of the arms, therefore, is known by the height to
which they are raised.

For the purpose of representing whether the position
be sidewise, forward, or backward let us suppose the
dancer to be surrounded by a horizontal circle [Fig. 206],
and we shall then be able to indicate, with mathematical
precision, the exact position to which the arm is carried.

The system embodied in this Grammar is based upon
this mathematical foundation, and the difference between
our system and that of the French school is that we con-
sider the horizontal position of the arms the 3d instead of
the 2d position, and that the heights midway between the
1st and 3d, and 3d and 5th positions are taken as the re-
spective 2d and 4th positions.

In the French system the harmonious coincidence of the arm and foot positions is
maintained, the 3d arm position corresponding to the 3d foot position, etc.; while in our
system it is necessary to name the position of each. By our method we are enabled to
describe all positions exactly. The art of dancing is universal and its script must be ca-
pable of expressing all national dances.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The Carriage of the Arms [Port de bras)

268. Let us then suppose five positions of the arms, corresponding to the five foot-
positions, and from them we may derive all the variations and all the intermediate positions.

The Principal Arm Positions

269. The pendant position of the arms is their natural attitude and is universally under-
stood to be the ist arm position.

Fig. 207.

Fig. 208.

Fig. 209.

270. The line from the points of the middle fingers, when both arms are extended to
their full length horizontally at the sides, is exactly equal to the distance from the crown
of the head, perpendicularly, to the sole of the foot.

These two lines cross one another a little below the gorge, and taking this point as the
centre of a circle, we may easily find the various arm positions by dividing the circle into
eighths ; for the arm positions are based upon this division in our system.

The lowest point in this circle is the location of the 1 st position ; the points at the ends
of the horizontal diameter, that of the 3d ; and the highest point, that of the 5th ; while
the lower intermediate points show the 2d ; and the upper intermediate points the 4th posi-
tion.

It will be noticed that the ends of the fingers touch the circumference of the circle in

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

the 3d position only. This is because of the width of the chest, which affects and increases
the distance in that position alone.

Fig. 209 shows all positions as viewed from the front, and stretched sidewise ; and Fig.
207 represents them as viewed from the side, and extended either forward or backward.

271. The wholly stretched arm positions occur only in comic dances, for the repre-
sentation of stiffness, but they are mentioned here for the purpose of more clearly demon-
strating the system.

272. Five degrees of bending the arm are recog-
nized. They are known technically as follows : (a)
wholly stretched, tendu; (b) half-stretched, demi-tendu;
(c) rounded, arrondi ; (d) half-bended, demi-courbe ; and
(e) wholly bended, courb'e-entierement [Fig. 208].

The half stretched positions are most appropriate in
serious dances and for tall persons.

The rounded carriage harmonizes with all positions
and is most suitable for persons of medium height and
full figure. This is the most usual position, and unless
qualification is used, the term " arm position " is always

understood to mean the rounded form. The half-bended positions occur in the small arm-
circles (pedis ronds de bras) in the supporting positions, and in various national dances.
Wholly bended positions are seldom used.

Fig. 210.

Fig. 2ii.

The Intermediate Arm Positions

273. The intermediate arm positions, which lie between the five principal positions, may
be found in Fig. 209, which shows not only the principal positions, but also the simple,
double and half-intermediate positions.

Crossed Arm Positions

274- If the arm passes beyond the perpendicular line of position which divides the cir-
cle into equal parts, it is said to be in "crossed position" [Figs. 210 and 21 1 J.

Supported Arm Positions

Besides these, there are also what may be termed the interlaced, supported and mimic
or imitative arm positions, which will be treated in the following sections.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

275. First Arm Position. Assume the ist position, as described in § 8, and allow the
arms to hang naturally at the sides, with fingers rounded and the palms turned toward the
legs [Fig. 212]. Gentlemen hold their arms in ist position in Quadrilles and various other
dances, and although it was formerly the custom for

ladies to hold their arms in 2d position, and carry the
dress, the fashion has been so far abandoned that that
position now appears affected, and ladies as well as
gentlemen usually adopt the ist position.

276. Second Arm Position. The arms, though hang-
ing, are so rounded as to form an oval, with the elbows
turned outward, and the wrist neither noticeably bended
nor stretched [Fig. 213] ; but so rounded as to harmon-
ize with the curvature of the arm, which, as previously
stated, should form a portion of a regular circle. In

this position, the little finger may be more fully stretched than the others, so long as it
does not pass the arc of the circle of the arms. In theatrical dancing, the first finger is
sometimes more fully stretched than the middle one.

277. Third Arm Position. The arms are raised (rounded) to the height of the shoul-
ders, and form an open circle ; and the forearms are held at an angle of 45 degrees from
the straight line of the upper arms [Fig. 214].

Fig. 212.

Fig. 213.

Fig. 214.

Fig. 215.

Fig. 216.

Fig. 217.

278. This position of the arm occurs frequently in ordinary life as well as dancing.
Even the common greeting of "shaking hands" is most gracefully done in this position.

279. To present the hand in a straight line, with fully stretched arm, appears stifFand
ridiculous, and if the hand be carried higher than the horizontal position of the forearm, it
must be lowered again to reach that of the other person. This also looks crude and affected.
In the figures of the Quadrille, the Mazurka and the Cotillion, such a position occurs very
frequently with either or both arms, and the theory of the "position" for the social round
dances is based upon it.

280. The left arm of the lady is half-stretched and rests upon the half-stretched right
arm of the gentleman. The proper height of raising the arms in this position depends up-
on the height of the dancers [Figs. 215, 216].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

281. Fourth Arm Position. The arms are rounded and carried so far toward the per-
pendicular as to form a circle above the head, in which the breach, or distance between
the hands, is equal to the width of the shoulders [Fig. 217]. This position is seldom used
in social dancing, but it occurs often in theatrical dances.

Note. — The circle is taken as the model for the round-
ing of the arms, for well proportioned persons, but for per-
sons who are more than ordinarily slender and who have
long arms, the oval is more suitable.

282. Fifth Arm Position. The arms are raised,
rounded, into a perpendicular attitude, and the middle
fingers nearly touch. Although this position is never
used in social dancing, it occurs frequently in the-
atrical and national dances, particular)- in Spanish
dances [Fig. 218].

Fig. 218.

Fig. 219.

Closed Arm Positions

283. All positions of the arms in which the hands touch are called "closed" posi-
tions. They occur at all heights ; the degree of height determining the number of the
position.

Open Arm Positions

284. AM arm positions in which the hands do not touch are called open positions. The
normal width (distance between the hands) in such positions is the width oT the shoulders.

Narrowed and Amplified Arm Positions

285. If the distance between the hands in the open arm positions is less than the width
of the shoulders, they are said to be "narrowed"; and if the distance be greater, they are
in "amplified" position.

Fig. 219 represents an amplified arm position which is very commonly used.

286. To determine the degree to which a position is narrowed or amplified, let us sur-
round the body by a horizontal circle at the height of the shoulders, which will represent
the various positions as seen from above.

Fig. 220 shows such a plan. A dotted line passes from the point a through the centre
of the breast and spine to the point b, and marks the point from which the width of the

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

position is determined. The horizontal line c-c shows the line of complete amplification;
the points d-d represent the anterior half-amplified positions, and the points e-e show
the posterior half-amplified positions.

The choregraphic signs representing these various positions will be found in §336.

Opposition

287. Opposition is the term which, in the art of dancing, is used to signify an exactly
contrasted or opposed position or movement. If, for instance, one arm be in 2d and the
other in 4th position, they are in opposition.

288. Opposed positions 4s /•'" "*-., . may be either coincident or
harmonious,as shown in Fig. **•„ jff \/ 221, which is agreeable to

Fig. 221.

Fig. 222.

Fig. 223.

the eye ; or they may be inharmonious, as shown in Fig. 222, which is not. The inharmony
of the position shown in Fig. 222 lies in the fact that one arm is stretched and the other
is rounded.

289. In walking, the right arm and the left leg are carried forward sim-
ultaneously, and vice versa. This may be said to be opposition of move-
ment, and such opposition assists the movement by maintaining the proper
balance of the body. The rules for the movements of the arms are all
based upon this natural law.

290. To insure to the pupil a proper comprehension and appreciation
of this law of opposition, the transfer exercises combining the correspond-
ing arm and head movements should be practiced as soon as the simple
arm positions have been learned [§ 253].

In practicing this exercise one should start from a position like that in
Fig. 223, which shows the right foot in 2d point position, the left arm in
4th, and the right arm in 2d position, with the head turned yi to the right. From this at-
titude the various members are gradually and simultaneously carried into the opposite

Fig. 224.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING

positions, while the left heel is raised and the weight is transferred to the right foot. This
movement carries the body into the attitude shown in Fig. 224, which represents the left
foot in 2d point position, the right arm in the 4th and the left arm in the 2d position,
while the head is turned \i to the left. This exercise may also be practiced from the an-
terior to the posterior 4th position.

291. These exercises, if practiced diligently and accurately under the direction of a
competent teacher, are of great value (especially for girls). They should be practiced away
from the dancing school before a mirror, or if no large mirror is accessible, a lamp may be
placed upon the floor of a dark room and the movements followed in the shadow upon the
wall.

I rcise 47. Transfer with Arm Movements (Degagements et mouvements des bras)
[Fig. 225].

M M 60-120 : J
-4-A ■*■ — -- \ r

pf f — ft

, ,*■ ' -», ^ 0-

1 1 ^ ^^^^

j\. A

, \

1 - 1\

Fie. 225.

Supported Arm Positions {Demi-bras)

292. In many dances, particularly those of the Slavic nations, positions may be found
in which the arm is bended and the hand rests upon the hip. This is called a supporting
position. The technical French term for this position is demi-bras.

293. The position shown in Fig. 226, in which the palm rests upon the hip, with the
thumb backward and fingers forward, is usually reserved for gymnastic exercises.

294. The positions in which the closed hand is supported upon the hip are generally
used by male dancers and occur most frequently in peasant dances.

295. Those in which the joints of the fingers rest upon the hip arc usually adopted l>y
female dancers, as they are more graceful than those in which the hand is closed [Figs.
227 and 228].

296. Positions in which the head or the elbow are supported upon the back of the
hand occur only in mimic dances. They are used frequently in character dances [Figs.
229 and 230].

9°

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

297. The resting of the hand upon the arm or shoulder of another person, as in Figs.
231 and 232, is very effective, and these attitudes are found in all round dances.

298. The palm of the hand is sometimes placed upon the back of the head in certain
Hungarian dances [Fig. 233], and some persons execute the movement of placing the back

Fig. 226.

Fig. 227.

Fig. 228.

Fig. 229.

Fig. 230.

of the hand against the forehead, as in the military salute, in an extremely graceful and
elegant manner [Fig. 234].

299. Folded or interlaced arm positions frequently occur in Cossack and Russian dances.
They are shown in Figs. 235 and 236.

Fig. 231.

Fig. 232.

Fig. 233.

Fie. 234.

Interlaced fingers, with either inward or outward turned arms, are frequent in character
dancing and are very graceful if well executed [Fig. 237].

Interlaced groups, such as are represented by Figs. 238 and 239, are found in unlimited
number and variety.

Mimic or Character Arm Positions

300. No dances are so rich in mimic positions as those of the Russians, unless, perhaps,
we might descend to the indecent dances of the Moors and the Spaniards. The very title

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCINi.

of this class of positions so well demonstrates their nature that further explanation would
be superfluous.

30). The Polish and the Hungarian dances and those of the Gypsies, the Tartars and
the Bayaderes are replete with mimic arm positions; and while the native dancers in this
class do not execute their steps with artistic finish and elegance, they certainly do instil
into them sufficient of the national characteristics to make them typical of their race, and
a thoroughly educated teacher of dancing can so arrange them that they will become pre-
sentable as artistic dances. />

Fig. 135.

]■ 'ic. 256

Fig 237

Fro, 238.

Arm Movements

302. The arm movements have been so beauti-
fully and so clearly described in the " Catechism of
the Art of Dancing" by Bernhard Klemm, that the
author has, with the kind permission of Herr Klemm,
transcribed many of them here.

303. The movements of the arms are entirely
independent of, and often opposite to, those of the
legs ; although the object of each is to harmonize with
the other, so as to present a beautiful whole. This
independence may be best explained by stating that
the arms represent the plastic, and the legs the rhyth-
mic elements of the dance.

Fie. 239.

Carriage of the Arms (Port dc bras)

304- The expression Port de bras means the ability to carry or hold the arms grace-
fully, either in curved or in parallel positions, and to change easily and gracefully from

02 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

one position to another, by means of either straight or curved movements ; consequently
it also means the development of formal beauty in the lines described.
The port de bras are divided into two classes, the high and the low.

305. The Low Port de Bras include all movements of the arms horizontal to or below
the shoulders; and the high, all movements above the shoulders. The low port de bras are
used only in social dancing, and the high only appear in the art and national dances.

306. The entire arm contains but five movable parts: the upper arm, the elbow, the
lower arm, the wrist and the hand; and the fundamental movements of the arm are rais-
ing and lowering. Each of these movements is executed in accordance with the same rule.
In raising the movement starts with the upper arm and extends in easy transition to the
elbow, forearm, and wrist, ending with the hand. In lowering, the sequence is inverted.

307. In the low Port de bras the movements are executed as follows: First, assume a
closed position of the feet, observing the rules which apply to the correct holding of the
body, and raise both upper arms, turning the elbows and forearms slightly to the front,
and curving the wrists to correspond, while the forefingers nearly touch. The arms are
now raised to the height of the breast, where the hands, which are so held that the palms
are visible, are separated and carried in their respective directions until an oval is formed
before the body. From this the hands, wrists, forearms, elbows and upper arms respectively
are allowed to sink to the original position. The low port de bras should be executed with
the feet in 5th position and accompanied by bending and stretching.

308. The High Port de Bras are commenced in the same manner as the low, but the
raising continues beyond the shoulder height until the head, which should be thrown back,
is framed in the circle of the arms, while the points of the forefingers nearly touch. The
arms should be swayed to right and left and in a circular manner, before they sink gradu-
ally to the original position.

The Simple Arm Movements

309. The simple arm movements are : bending, stretching, raising, lowering, carrying
and turning. The ability to bend and stretch lies in the elbow, the wrist and the fingers,
and it may be exercised either in one or more of these joints simultaneously. The script
should clearly show this.

310. The ability to raise or lower the arm, or to carry it horizontally from one posi-
tion to another, resides in the shoulder-joint.

Hand-Circles {Ronds de bras} '

311. In the execution of a regular movement, the hand describes a portion of a circle.
If the elbow forms the centre, and the lower arm the radius of such a figure, it is called a

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 93

small circle; but if the shoulder is the centre, and the entire arm the radius, it is a large
circle. In the same manner that a circle described by the foot is called a rond de jambe, one
drawn by the hand is termed a rond de bras.

31 2. While it is the rule in the ronds de bras to draw the circles as large as the radius
will permit, in the small arm-circles (petits ronds de bras), the first quarter starts from the
height of the breast and passes from the perpendicular or 1st arm position into the nar-
rowed 2-3 position; the second quarter from that point to the height of the shoulder; the
third quarter to the amplified 2-3 position; and the fourth quarter to the place from which
the movement began.

31 3. The easy bending of the wrist in raising and the corresponding stretching in lower-
ing the arms add much to the grace of the arm movements. Even the fingers must par-
ticipate in all the movements, being bended to correspond with the degree of bending the
arm, and stretched to correspond with the stretching.

Presenting and Giving the Hand

31-j. In presenting the hand as in the ordinary salutation, the execution of a quarter
circle enhances the grace of the movement; but to raise the arm beyond the 2-3 position,
or to too strongly bend the wrist, renders it affected and absurd.

315. In dancing the gentleman always " presents " his hand palm upward ( *g^; ), and
the lady " gives " hers palm downward ( ;3^ ), thus signifying that the gentleman must
guide, while the lady follows.

316. If a circle is composed entirely either of ladies or of gentlemen, the right hand
is presented (palm upward) and the left is given (palm downward). If the circle is mixed
(that is, if it contains both ladies and gentlemen), the gentlemen present both hands (palm
upward) and the ladies give theirs. The thumb of the presented hand rests lightly over
the fingers of the given one.

317. In the large arm -circles {grands ronds de bras) the arm is carried, in the first quarter,
from the perpendicular into the narrowed 3d position ; in the second quarter to the 5th,
in the third quarter to the amplified 3d position, and again into the original (1st) position
in the fourth quarter.

3J8. The sixth simple arm movement is known as "turning" or "rolling," but the
former term appears to be the more appropriate for the language of dancing.

Positions of the Hands

Positions in which the palm of the hand is held toward the body are called inward
turned [Fig. 240], and those in which the palm is turned from the body are called outward

94 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

turned hand-positions [Fig. 241]. The hands may also be held in forward or backward,
upward or downward turned positions.

Figs. 242, 243, 244 and 245 show the hands in various positions which are sufficiently
described by their names.

Fig. 246 shows the right elbow (a) turned V~?/ K~~r ^/\ 1

outward and the right palm turned inward; «*]( Wil \k]

while the left elbow (b) is turned backward ^ fr tiff

and the left hand turned palm forward. Fig. 240. Fig. 241.

Fig. 247 represents the right elbow (a)
and palm turned outward, and the left elbow (&) and palm turned inward.

319. In giving the hand, one should look at the person to whom it is given, thus caus-
ing the head to participate in the general movement of the body. This concerted move-
ment is called tournure.

Fig. 242. Fig. 243. Fig. 244. Fig. 245.

Forward turned palms. Backward turned palms. Forward turned fists. Backward turned fists.

Shrugging the Shoulders

320. The shoulders may be raised and lowered entirely independent of all other move-
ments. This frequently occurs in Slavic and Russian dances.

Carriage and Movement of the Head (Tenue et Mowvements de la Tete)

321. The head may be turned to the right or to the left, and inclined forward, back-
ward or sidewise; and it may be moved in a circular manner in the inclined positions.

In turning, the head cannot be moved further than the limit of a quarter circle, as shown
in Fig. 248. So complete a turning, however, appears forced, and the j4 turn, as shown
in Fig. 249, is much more agreeable to the beholder. A slight inclination of the head to
one side makes a very pleasing effect.

Many persons who do not possess exceptional beauty, carry the head in so beautiful
a manner as to render themselves extremely attractive or " bewitching." Grace is often
even more fascinating than cold beauty.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Movements of the Trunk and Shoulders [Mowcements de torse et epaulements)

"ill. The trunk may be turned either to the right or to the left, or bended forward,
backward or to the side; and it may be moved in a circular direction in the bended posi-
tions.

The limit of twisting in the turning of the trunk (tour de torse) is a quarter turn, but
so complete a movement always appears forced and the most graceful attitudes are those
in which only a one-eighth turn appears.

The movements of the trunk are most clearly noticeable in the shoulders, and are for
that reason termed epaulements.

Fie. 246.

Fie. 247.

I-'IG. 24S.

Flo. 249.

323. The art of turning is the most graceful and beautiful accomplishment connected
with the dance, and is called avoir unejolie tournure. This phrase, however, cannot be prop-
erly translated to express beauty of carriage, nor regularity of outline, as the word tournure
implies a movement (turning), and it cannot therefore be expressed by mere attitude or
exterior form. The turnings of the body {tours de corps) are fully described in §§ 540 to 548.

324. In addition to the above movements, the weight of the body may be transferred
from one foot to the other by means of turning or bending; but in this movement the
muscles of the legs participate so naturally and unavoidably that the sign of transfer is seldom
necessary in order to show the movement of the body.

325. The bending of the body forward, backward and to the side is particularly com-
mon in the Spanish dances and in the ballet.

1 larmony l Coincidence)

326. In the language of music, the coincidence of certain tones is called a chord. A
combination of harmonious tones creates a pleasing impression upon even those persons

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

who understand little or nothing regarding music, while inharmonious or discordant tones
are unpleasant to every one; for the hearing organs of man are so delicately constructed
that even the slightest discord is disagreeable to them.

The same is true of the sense and the organs of sight ; and a house, a window or a human
being whose outline is not symmetrical creates an impression upon the beholder quite as
disagreeable to the sense of sight as is an inharmonious sound to the sense of hearing. A
swollen cheek or a cross-eye will ruin the most beautiful face, and a lack of symmetry or
harmony is equally destructive to beauty of movement.

Fig. 250.

The artist or connoisseur is always able to see such defects, and even those who have
little or no technical understanding of the artistic are guided (by intuition?) to a proper
sense of what is graceful and what is not. The harmonious disposition of the entire body
may be said to constitute a " chord " for the eye.

Attitude*

327. " Any significant position of the body, either in action or at rest, and upon
either or both feet, which gracefully displays the lines of the figure by means of a harmo-
nious holding of the arms and hands, is called an Attitude ; and such a position expresses
the liveliness of artistic repose, which precedes the development of graceful movement."

* The following definitions have been taken from " The Catechism of the Art of Dancing " by
Bernhard Klemm, as the descriptions he gives cannot be more beautifully or more comprehensively
expressed.

GKAMMAK OF THE ART OF DANCING 97

Group

328. " The artistic assemblage of several persons, arranged according to their size, atti-
tude and direction so as to form a harmonious and properly connected whole, is called a
Group."

Tableau

329. "The combination of several artistically arranged groups, for the representation
of a larger unit, is called a Tableau — which is an animate picture instinct with vital en-
ergy." [Fig. 250.]

Choregraphic Signs

for the Positions and Movements of the Head, the Arms, the Shoulders and the Trunk.

(Signes choregraphiques des positions et mouvements de la tele, des

bras, des epaules et du tronc.)

\ \ 1

Right. Half right. Front Ifalf left. Left.
Fig. 251.

330. The head is represented by an oval a. b. c. d.
ring, whose form and shading indicate the
direction of the face, as in Fig. 251 :

331. The long perpendicular _
line in this sign represents the /rr\
body; the horizontal line the \ /

shoulders; and the short oblique

lines at the sides, the arms.

332. The degree of bending m the arms is indicated by the shape of the sign:

— — Stretched (tendu).

-^». Half-stretched (demi-tendu).

"v Rounded (arrottdi).

\s- tjalf-bended (demi-courbe).

V Entirely bended (courbe entiiremeni).

333. Unless specifically mentioned, the arm positions arc always understood to be in
rounded form.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

334- The signs of the five principal arm-positions are as follows

First.

Second.

Co) 0

Third.

Fourth.

Fifth.

These symbols show the choregraphy of Figs. 212, 213, 214, 217, and 218.

Intermediate Arm Positions

**-— «— -^w

}-*£

335. Fig. 252, as has been already stated [§ 273],
shows the height of the various intermediate positions >,/

which are denominated by the double numbers.

Therefore, if an arm appears in an intermediate posi-
tion, it may be clearly indicated, either by the position of
the arm-line or by the numbers themselves, or both, as
shown in Fig. 253, which represents :

(j^ the right arm in the 2-1 and the left arm in the 4-
5 position ;

(H) the right arm in 2-3 and the left arm in 3-4 posi-
tion ; and

(z) the right arm in 2-3 and the left arm in 3-4 position.

The last sign is an abbreviation of the regular script. Fi(;. 252.

336. The Narrowed and Amplified Arm Positions have

been explained in §§285 and 286, and the drawing referred to in § 286 is again intro-
duced at this point for the purpose of explaining the manner of designating their various
degrees [Fig. 254]. The letter a shows the point at' which the hands touch before the
body ; b indicates the corresponding point behind the body ; c the points of the greatest
possible amplification ; d the half-amplification forward ; and e the corresponding points
backward. These letters are written above the position signs [Fig. 255], which show re-
spectively the 1st anterior closed; the 2d half-amplified; and the 3d wholly amplified
positions.

The second example is an abbreviated sign.

337. The expressions " wholly narrowed " and " closed," while synonymous in mean-
ing, contain a distinction and a difference, notwithstanding the fact that the fingers of both
hands, or indeed both arms, may touch; as the term closed position can only be applied

GRAMMAR OF THK ART OK DANCING

3-\

Fie. 253.

when both hands arc brought together; while a
wholly narrowed position may be assumed, with
only one arm, the other remaining in an open
position.

338. If an arm passes from the half-circle of
its side, as in Figs. 21c, 235 and 238, it enters
what is called a crossed position, which position
has already been explained in § 274. These posi-
tions may be indicated in the script either by the form of the sign or by a cross (x) placed
above the arm-line [Fig. 256].

n shows the right arm crossed in front. (Observe the small a and the x.) In cases which
demand greater clearness, the side-lines of the body which complete the drawing may be
added.

In 0 the left arm is represented as in posterior crossed position.

p indicates that both arms are in anterior 3d crossed position.

Opposed Arm Positions

339. In Fig. 257, q the right arm is in 2d and the left
in 4th position.

In r the right arm is half-backward in the 4th, and the
left half-forward in the 2d position.

j represents the right arm in half-forward 2-3 position,
and the left in half-backward 3-4.

»fas£~S

Supporting Arm Positions {Demi-/>ras)

340. The sign of the supported hand ends with a fork, but in the usual drawing only
the forepart appears. This fork touches the figure at the point of support 1/1.

1.
2

Fig. 255.

: 0

Via. 456.

The sign of the supported knuckle* is round and with palm turned outward if), and
that of the supported fist is a ring (u) [Fig. 258].

IOO

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

In Fig. 249 the right arm is supported upon the knuckles, and the left is in 4th position.
34L In cases where the choregraphic symbols are insufficient for showing the lay-

Fig. 257.

Fig. 258.

ing on of the hand, or the crossed or the mimic hand positions, the figure must be more
fully represented by means of a drawing.

Arm Movements

342. The right arm (bras droit) is represented by this sign — -— -, and the left {bras
gauche) by this one : — * — .

A dotted horizontal line indicates the continuance of a movement, and the position
sign which succeeds it shows the result of the movement by representing the position in
which it ends.

343. If the movement is otherwise than in a horizontal line, the line of continuance
is drawn so as to show the exact figure of movement, and an arrow point is placed at the
end to show its direction. If the movement is curved, it is represented by a curved
line ; and if it is undulating, a wavy line will show the course of the movement [Fig. 259].

.-* --v..

Fig. 259.

344. The signs for "raising" and "lowering" are similar to those ^ -^
for moving the arms, but may be distinguished by their unbroken lines: -^ a

345. Tourner (Turning) is usually represented by the letter v, followed by the sign of
the position in which the movement terminates. As the position signs may at times be
indefinite, signs showing the hand positions are added wherever they may render the
symbol more distinct.

346. In these symbols the straight line represents the side of the
leg, and the curved lines on either side of the straight line show the
arms. In the first sign the hands are represented with the palms turned
toward the body ; and in the second, which represents the hand in a
convex position, the palms are turned outward.

l\ H

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

:oi

Carriage of the Head

347. The degree of turning the head is indicated in the sign by the shape of the line,
and by the shading which represents the hair ; and the inclination of the head is shown by
the line which represents the neck.

348. To indicate the turning of the shoulders, the musical sign # is placed on that
side of the symbol toward which the movement is made [Fig. 260].

Fig. *6o.

b. c.

Fig. 261.

•T

349. If the dancer does not stand fully facing the observer, the fractions showing the
degree of turning are used instead of the double cross, as in Fig. 261, which shows:

a. Quarter-turn to the right.

b. Quarter-turn to the left.

c. Half-turn to the left.

d. Half-turn to the right.

350. If the body be inclined, the fact is shown by a corresponding inclination of the
body-line in the sign, in the proper direction, as in Fig. 262, which shows:

e. f. g- h-

ft (f) ^ p*

Fig. 261.

e. Inclination of the body to the right with pendant arms.

f. Same to left.

jf. Quarter-turn and inclination to right, arms raised.

h. Half turn and inclination to right. This sign shows the dancer with his back
toward the spectator, as a half turn would place the dancer in that relative position. In
such drawings the right of the dancer is at the right of the figure, etc., and the entire sym-
bol is opposite to that used for the representation of the front view. The darkening of
sign of the head, to indicate the hair, is the best way to show this position by chore-
graphic sign.

I02-

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OK DANCING

Shrugging (Raising) the Shoulders

351. The shrugging or raising of the shoulders has been referred to in § 320. This
movement is indicated in the script by means of the regular lifting sign, -

which is placed above the shoulder to which it applies. The lowering is '•/'"tV-I

shown by placing above the proper shoulder the regular sign of putting
down. Each is shown in this drawing.

351 a. Tfa/nasser-Movements. Strong bending movements, accompanied by deep lower-
ing of the arms (as in picking up objects from the floor), are of
frequent occurrence in Spanish dances, and are known as ramasser-
movements. These movements may be represented by chore-
graphic signs, but in very complicated signs the script will be
more intelligible if accompanied by drawings of certain positions
of the figure [Fig. 263 a and b\ 5 p-IG- 263.

Arm-Circles

352. In order to properly designate or describe an arm-circle, one must ascertain from
which position, and in what direction, it is executed. In the script the starting point is

...... 9 ..

"®±

\ <A

Fig. 264.

/"'""\Q/ \

shown by a comma ; the continuation by a dotted line ; and the direction and finishing
point by an arrow head [Fig. 264].

This sign shows (.a) small inward circle of the right, and (b) small outward circle of the
left, from the 1st position.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING IO3

c. represents a large inward circle of the right, and d. a large outward circle of the
left, from the 1st position.

e. shows a small downward circle of the right; and/, a small upward circle of the left,
from the 3d position. A large downward circle of the right is shown by g. ; and a large
upward circle of the left from the 3d position by //.

i. represents a large outward circle of the right ; and k. a large outward circle of the
left from the 4th position.

/. shows large inward circles of both arms, from the 2d position, ending in the hip
support.

The Chorcgraphic Key (La Clef)

353. I n the script of music a clef is a symbol which is placed upon a given line of the
staff, to indicate the pitch of the note which is placed thereon. In the script of dancing
a similar symbol is used to indicate the line of direction to be followed by the dancer. The
effect of the key continues until it is superseded by another.

The form of such keys may be either straight, diagonal, circular, spiral, wavy or zig-
zag, and indicates the figure which is to be described upon the floor. The first step always
follows the direction of the key.

The twenty-five keys which are shown in Figs. 265a and 265 £ are used according to
their various descriptions :

1. »■ 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. It. »2 13. W- 1*

1 ? l~™~ S\ \/^ ^t <^ > ^

KlG. 265 a.

1 . Movement to be executed upon the place.

2. " " " " forward.

3. " " " " backward.

4 and 5. Movement to right and to left, respectively.

6 and 7. diagonally forward to right and to left, respectively.

8 and 9. " diagonally backward to right and to left, respectively.

10. Movement alternating from right to left.

11. " " " left to right.

1 2. Zig-zag forward to right and left.

13. " backward to " "

14. " forward to left and right.

15. " backward to " "

104 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

16. 17. 18. t9. 20 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

Fig. 265*.

16. Movement curved to the right, forward.

17. Movement curved to the right, backward.

18. Movement curved to the left, forward.

19. Movement curved to the left, backward.

20. Circular movement to the right, forward.

21. Circular movement to the right, backward.

22. Circular movement to the left, forward.

23. Circular movement to the left, backward.

24. Waltz turns to the right, with direction line running to the right.

25. Waltz turns to the left, with direction line running to the left.

It must be remembered that the key refers to the direction of the entire movement in
the room in which the person is dancing, and that it represents the figure described by the
dancer upon the floor ; and also that the dancer is supposed to be facing the reader.

Chapter IX

COMPOUND MOVEMENTS

TH E combination of two or more simple movements produces a compound movement,
which may or may not possess secondary attributes. The analysis of compound
movements is, particularly to the inexperienced, very difficult. This is perhaps one of the
principal reasons why written descriptions of dances are so imperfect.

It is often quite necessary to exactly describe the movement of the supporting leg as
well as that of the free leg, in connection with compound movements, and wherever distinct-
ness will be aided thereby, it is well to represent the figure or a certain part thereof in
the script.

Classification

355. Compound movements may be classified according to form, direction, and divi-
sion of time (phrasing). For the purpose of instruction, it is well to explain the most com-
monly used compound movements before the classification is made.

356. A step differs from a compound movement in that it must contain a transfer of
weight (degager), while this is not always true of the compound movements.

Music Syllable, Dance Syllable, Step {Temps, Pas)

357. The same difference that exists between a syllable and a word, exists between temps
and pas. A step is a combination of movements which contains a transfer of the weight,
and this last is an indispensable attribute of a step. A temps is a step-syllable; therefore,
it is only a portion of a step.

358. A word is an entity, existing by itself, and having its own meaning; a step is also
an independent entity. Steps may be made alternately.

359. A syllable must be pronounced with a single tone; a temps must be executed upon

a single beat of music.

105

106 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

A syllable may contain many letters, but only one vowel sound ; a temps may, in like
manner, contain many movements without a transfer of weight, but must not exceed one
beat of music.

As there are words of more than one syllable, so also are there steps of more than one
temps.

Definitions of Various Dance Terms (Termes de Danse)

360. Each of the sciences and arts and crafts has its own technical expressions, and these
are often unfamiliar to those outside the profession or trade; indeed, they are sometimes
not understood at all by the outsider. Many such expressions occur in the arts of dancing
and choregraphy, and while they appear unreasonable or unnecessary to the inexperi-
enced, they are not only reasonable and appropriate, but they are indispensable to the
initiated.

The best definitions of the termes de danse may be found in the dictionary of Noel and
Chapsal. They were probably furnished by A. de St. Leon, or others deeply learned and
experienced in the art. These definitions follow and have been inserted because they are
imperatively necessary to the proper understanding not only of the subjects which already
have been treated, but also of those that are to follow in this work.

361. Temps. The literal translation of the word temps is "time," and many writers
upon dancing and gymnastics use that word in preference to the French temps, or the-Italian
tempo.

362. The Italian word tempo, which has been adopted into the English language, is
generally understood to refer to the degree of speed in the execution of a musical compo-
sition [§ 184].

363. The word " dance-syllable," which is often used in this work, is not current in the
language and has been adopted by the author to fit the requirements of his system. Sim-
ilar terms have recently been invented for use in teaching gymnastics; if the innovation is
justifiable in gymnastics, why not in dancing?

364- Tin Temps Leve (A Lifting Syllable) is a compound movement of one side, which
consists of lifting one leg while the other leg is differently occupied. 1

It usually occurs in the part measure, as preparation for the succeed- -

ing step. It may be represented in the script by an ascending sign, ^s\ _^|^

crossed by a raising one (a).

365. Tin Temps Baisse (A Putting-Down Syllable) is the putting down of the lifted foot
to coincide with the music-syllable. It is shown by [b).

366. Levi et "Eleve (Lifting and Raising). There is a distinct difference in the meaning
of these two words. Levi, which means to lift, applies only to the free leg; while eleve,
which means to raise, refers always to the supporting leg.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 107

Sauter — Jumping

367. Un Temps Saute, a jump, is the result of a quick pressure of the front portion of
the supporting foot, by means of which the body is lifted from the floor. If the weight
falls upon one foot only, while the other leg is lifted, it is called un temps /eve-saute, — a
jumped lifted syllable, or a lifting syllable.

This is one of the most important of all the compound movements. A a b

hop on the right is shown in a, and one on the left in b. The lifting sign } \
does not touch the floor. This clearly shows that a jump has been made.

368. Sautiller. Although the word "hop" is seldom used, it is quite as correct as the
words "spring" or " throw." Indeed, many of the new books upon gymnastics use the
word frequently. The hop may be distinguished from the spring or leap, not only - ^
by the indispensable bending of the knee, but also by the fact that the weight is not y {
transferred from one foot to the other. A high jump cannot be executed without "" ^
bending the knees, and may be written as shown in the drawing. It must never show the
sign of transfer.

369. Pas Saute. If, as soon as the body is lifted from the floor, the weight is "^-k
transferred to the other foot, it is a jumping step and is represented as follows : — J ^ /?

370. BonJir. Although it has been stated that hopping and springing (bondir) have
the same meaning, there is a technical difference. A child may be said to jump for joy,
upon either foot or upon both feet, but in so doing he remains on or near the place ; while
a man does not jump, but springs across a ditch ; for instance : A sparrow jumps over a
straw, and a lion springs at his prey.

Inasmuch as a spring contains a transfer of weight, it is not a step-syllable or temps,
but a step of one temps, un pas.

37 J. Jeter. The word sauter in the French language means "to jump," and the word
bondir means " to spring." This latter word has been used by Delille and Blasis, but the
word jeter, to throw, is more commonly used in the termcs de danse, because in springing
the weight is thrown from one foot to the other.

372. Bond (Spring). Jet (Throw). The term " spring " relates to the foot from which
the force is derived, and the term " throw " refers to the one which receives the weight.
If one springs from the right foot and lights upon the left, the left foot has been thrown,
and the right, which is now free, may either during or after the movement be carried into
any position.

373. In springing it is necessary to press the front portion of the foot strongly down,
and to forcibly bend and stretch the knee.

These signs show the spring from the right and from the left foot, re- / \
spectivcly. The sign of transfer is placed near the lifting sign to show that si <^
the movements follow in natural succession.

lo8 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

374. Tomber (Falling). Every jumping, springing or throwing movement is accom-
panied, inevitably, by a falling back, which may be executed either upon the sole, ball,
point, or heel. If this movement is so strongly accented as to become audible it is called
a fall, une chute; and if a step is executed, it is called a falling step, un pas tomb'e.

The choregraphic sign depends upon and corresponds to the movement which pre-
cedes it.

c. Jump (Hop) and fall on right foot.

d. Jump (Hop) and fall on left foot. 1 ' 1 ' ., ' J v

e. Jump and fall on both feet. \\ q JL /i v\

f. Spring from right and fall on left foot. A A A A A

g. Spring from left and fall on right foot. FlG- z66-

375. Pliemenh (Bendings) are simple movements.

Un temps plie (a bending syllable) is the bending of one leg, while the other is differ-
ently occupied, upon one music syllable, in which no transfer of weight is made.

During the bending of the right leg, the left foot glides backward upon ,
the ball into the 4th position. It will be noted by the sign that the support- (o-^ I

ing foot rests upon the line of the floor, and that the other is above it. 3 •

Tensions (Stretchings) are also simple movements. They have already been explained
in §119.

• 376. "Elevations (Raisings) are simple movements and are described in § 121. Un temps
elev'e, a raising syllable, is a raising of the supporting foot while the free foot tt ^
is differently occupied. While the body is being raised upon the right foot, || '} I
the left is carried to the half-high balancing 4th position. * =l

377. Abaissements (Lowerings) are simple movements and are described in § 123.

378. T4n Temps Jlbaisse (A Lowering Syllable) is a compound movement,

in which the body is lowered from a raised supporting foot while the free foot 4 l -.

is otherwise occupied, and in which there is no transfer of weight. -■ — *— ^ ij —

379. line Tevee (a Lifting) is a simple movement [§ 1 24].

380. Un Temps "Levi (A Lifting Syllable) is a compound movement which is executed
upon one music-syllable [§ 364].

381. Tine Baisse (A Putting Down) is a simple movement and is explained in § 125.

382. Un Temps Baisse (A Putting-Down Syllable) is the putting down of a lifted leg
while the supporting leg is' otherwise occupied, and without transfer of weight.

383. Lr°\ Temps Baisse. L?\ Temps Jlbaisse.

To avoid ambiguity regarding similar signs, the movement sign should be clearly exe-
cuted, with lines showing the floor. The sole direction symbol may be omitted, if desired,
in the above signs.

384- J{uer (To Kick) is to project the leg forcibly into an open position ; and kicking
movements should, therefore, be termed ruements. This term has been seldom used, except
in referring to horses.

Un Jtyement (A Kick) differs from a beating, un battement, because the accent in a rue-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING I09

ment applies to the movement of lifting the foot to an open position; while a battement is
the opposite movement, that of knocking the free foot against the supporting leg.

385. The term Marquer les Pas ou Temps (Marking) is applied to the practice of de-
scribing the dance-steps and measures upon the floor without raising from it, maintaining
precision of accent and time and correct lines of movement, but omitting all embellish-
ments (especially the battements) or at least only faintly indicating them. (Klemm.) This is
generally practiced for the purpose of memorizing the figure, and it is in reality the partial
execution of steps, or dances, of which the dancer feels certain.

386. Terre a terre. This expression is used to designate the gliding style of dancing.
It usually consists of small connected movements, in which the feet lightly touch the floor

Mask: legato). (K/emm.)

387. Equilibre (Equilibrium) is the quality of balancing the entire body, which is effected
by a proper and graceful attitude of the upper body, and maintained by it independently
of the legs, although cooperating with them to present a harmonious appearance. (Klemm.)

388. Aplomb is the absolute safety in rising and falling back which results from the
perpendicular attitude of the upper body and the artistic placing of the feet. By means
of aplomb the dancer acquires a precision and an elegance which insure the successful exe-
cution of every foot-movement, however artistic and difficult, and thereby creates a pleasing
and a satisfactory impression upon the observer. Aplomb may be compared with the
sureness of touch of the pianist. (Klemm).

Grace

389. Grace is the ideal of purity and beauty of movement and that ease and
elegance in holding and moving the body which attracts and charms all beholders. "Grace
is a beauty not given by nature, but produced by the subject itself; and as the beauty of
the human form does honor to the Creator, so do cheerfulness and grace do honor to their
possessor. One is a natural, the other a personal gift." (Schiller.) (Klemm.)

Gentle and natural, unconscious of its charm, and free from the effort to please, na-
tural grace is most effective. Overstepping this tends to affectation, distasteful elaboration
and grimace. Schiller says, "Grace must be always natural and involuntary (or at least
must appear so), and a person mu3t never display a consciousness of it." (Klemm.)

There are persons who possess so great a degree of natural grace, that a teacher may
learn more from them than he can impart to them, but such cases are very rare. A com-
petent teacher is generally able to assist his pupils by overcoming the impediments which
naturally arise from weight and form.

The development of grace should be the principal aim of instruction in dancing.

Chapter X

TECHNICAL STEPS AND MOVEMENTS

Steps — Pas

THE term "stepping" is generally understood to mean the movement of ordinary
walking, and a common step forward extends from the posterior to the anterior 4th
position. A step has, therefore, a beginning and an ending position, and a movement by
which transition is made from one position to the other. The transfer of weight is so
closely allied to the movement of the legs with which it coincides that it is impossible to
separate the two ; for that reason, wherever two or more steps are taken, it is unnecessary
to consider the transfer.

391. As every step contains a change of position and a transfer {engagement), both legs
are more or less active therein. The legs may be engaged in either simple or compound
movements. These are often so natural that they do not require description. At other
times, however, not only the simple movements and the moment of their execution, but
even the various positions through which the dancer passes in making the step, must be
indicated so precisely as to enable the distinction from other and different steps to be
easily seen.

392. Every step contains at least three necessary attributes, viz. : size, direction and
duration. Frequently other qualities of a secondary nature may be found.

Size. As to size, a step may be either whole, half, or quarter, etc. ; small, medium, or
large ; natural, diminished or prolonged.

393. Direction. As to direction, a step may be either on the place; forward or backward;
in straight or diagonal lines; sidewise or crossed. Side-steps may be made either to the
right or to the left, and either over or under crossed. The diagonal steps may be made
either to the right or to the left, forward or backward, and either over or under crossed.

394. Duration. Steps are of one or more temps, and may be executed according to
either slow, protracted, temperate, rapid or very rapid tempo.

REMARKS AS TO THE NECESSARY ATTRIBUTES

395. The regular marching step is a whole step, as it is made from the posterior to
the anterior 4th position ; but the first movement, which is from repose in a closed posi-
tion, and the last, which is to repose in another closed position, are half-steps.

1 TO

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING HI

Military March {Marche Militaire)
(explanation of the choregraphic signs)

396. The key indicates the movement forward, and the sign shows that it starts from
the ist position [Fig. 267].

In the part-measure, the left foot is lifted and carried forward, and the transfer begins
upon the first part of the complete measure,

and finishes upon the second part by the O TT r i

putting down of the left foot in anterior jf_ J r/?\ \\ J c\\ I J n\^ \ ■* \

4th position, which leaves the right in pos- Fu. ,6

terior 4th. Continuing, the right foot is

carried forward and put down upon the first beat in the second measure.

The signs are unnecessary for any but the part-measure, the first measure and the end,
as all measures which intervene are like the first and may be indicated by the regular sym-
bol of repetition (4r).

397. Side Steps are executed in a similar manner. A whole step to the side passes from
the 2d position, through the ist and 3d to the 5th. If the foot is only carried to the ist
position, it is a half-step; if to the 3d, a three-quarters step; and if it passes beyond the
5th position, it is a large or prolonged step.

Note. — Never forget the distinction between a temps and a pas. If, for example, a movement is
made from the 2d or 4th to the 1st position, and no transfer is made, it is a step-syllable; but if the
transfer is added, it is a half-step.

398. Small, Medium and Large Steps. In the explanation of the positions under § 14,
it was stated that the proper width of an open position is the length of the person's foot.
If, therefore, a whole step consists of a movement from an open to an open position, the
entire distance will be found to be equal to the length of both feet. This rule for width,
however, is taken from the dancer, whose feet are, suppositiously, turned entirely outward.
If the feet are turned less strongly outward, or parallel (i. e. straight forward), the steps
are lengthened; for the reason that the centre of gravity is carried from the heel to the
toe of the supporting foot, while the free foot is carried forward. The distance in such
open positions is, therefore, from the toe of the supporting to a ^ c

the heel of the advancing foot. An average step directly for- rv| yP<\ <^XXZ>

ward in parallel foot-position is nearly 36 inches long; and with (X) * ^

the feet turned half outward, about 30 inches. An average Fm. j68.

dancing step should, therefore, be equal to the length of both

the dancer's feet; if it exceeds that limit, it is a large, and if it docs not reach it, it is a
small step.

Fig. 268 shows (a) the parallel, {b) the half-outward, and (c) the entirely outward posi-
tions of the feet, respectively.

112 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

399. Diminished and Prolonged Steps. The composer of a dance prescribes either
medium or small or large steps to fit the requirements of his music; but dancers are fre-
quently compelled, by force of circumstances, to execute the steps either in greater or in
smaller width. If, for instance, a small lady dances with a tall gentleman, she must prolong
her steps, while he diminishes his. *

400. Simple and Compound Steps. A simple movement cannot be divided into differ-
ent movements, nor can a simple step be divided into different steps; but a simple step
may consist of various movements and several temps, and may possess different secondary
qualities. A compound step consists of a combination "of simple steps.

401. Direction. Steps on the place require no movement from the spot, but contain
an alteration of position and a transfer of weight.

If such steps are worthy of the attention of soldiers who practice them in "marking
time," they must certainly be of more consequence to the dancer, who is obliged to carry
his application of the word step to more minute detail.

402. If the objective point is reached without deviation, it is a straight step, as, for
example, the marching step, which is directly forward; but if such a point is reached by a
curved, a wavy or a zig-zag line, the step is diagonal.

403. Temps or step-syllable has been explained and repeated in various sections, and
if we refer in the following pages to a step as of one temps, we mean that the entire step, in-
cluding the necessary transfer, does not require more than one syllable of music. Such
steps may be compared with monosyllabic words.

404. Measure of Speed (Tempo). That degree of speed which is neither slow nor rapid
may be called temperate, and it is a degree which is natural to the organism of the body.
Quick steps require a certain amount of impetus, and are more laborious than temperate
steps; slow steps require a voluntary holding back which coincides with the duration of the
music. Therefore, slow and prolonged steps are more tiresome than temperate steps, because
one is obliged to restrain his natural impulsiveness in order to properly execute them.

405. Since the invention of the metronome, the degree of speed is seldom given in words,
as the numbers of the metronome scale are far more definite. The metronome measures
given herein, particularly those for the social dances, are for the temperate speed. This
degree is often difficult to determine, but the following principles may be of service :

406. The ordinary walk of a man coincides with the beating of his pulse. Young per-
sons walk more rapidly than older people; lymphatic persons more rapidly than phleg-
matic persons ; gay people more rapidly than solemn people.

407. This law has a natural influence upon dancing, and in the social dance, as gayety
predominates, the temperate rate of speed in dancing is greater than in ordinary walking-
The degree of speed in theatrical dancing varies according to the characteristics expressed.

408. From these explanations it is fair to assume that a person about thirty years of
age steps at about the average or temperate rate of speed.

Large steps necessarily require more time than small steps, and those of the Polka
require more time than those of the glide Galop, because of the leap, which demands a
certain time according to natural law.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 113

Secondary Attributes of Steps

409. Unless the name of a step signifies that it is "glided," or executed in some other
specific manner, it is always understood to be " carried" (that is, lifted off the floor during
transit to the new position).

Unless a step is more than ordinarily bended or stretched, the common walking step
which contains an agreeable and natural degree of bending and stretching of the leg, is taken
as the normal type.

410. A secondary quality may be omitted from a step without changing it to anything
less than a step; for a secondary quality is a characteristic attribute which relates exclu-
sively to the component parts of the step; that is, to the movements and positions of which
it is constructed.

The Meaning of the Term Pas

4J J. The term pas has a more varied and a wider significance in the language of danc-
ing than it has in ordinary usage, and while the word "step " is its equivalent in the English
language, the French term pas is more comprehensive, for it may be used to express an
entire dance of one or more persons; for example the pas seul, pas de deux, pas de trots or
even chorus dances such as pas de fleurs, pas de soldats or pas de manteaux.

The Names of the Steps

412. Kvery step has a technical name, usually of French origin, which may be under-
stood by a knowledge of the meaning of the word ; but time and custom, and in some cases
an improper usage of the word outside of France, has evolved a different technical mean-
ing. An incorrect application of the original word has in some instances even been so per-
sistently made that the wrong expression has grown into technical value by its constant
use. This feature renders it very difficult at times to get at the real meaning of some terms
and indeed has seriously injured the value of most of the works upon dancing that have
been published up to this time.

4J 3. We have, therefore, no better criterion to go by than the usage of the best authors
upon dancing, for determining the significance of the terms, although a dictionary of the
termes de danse, such as might be produced by the German or the French Academy, would
be of great value, provided the definitions were clear and intelligible.

4J4- In the French language, the term pas is often omitted and the indefinite article

114 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

un substituted for it, and the expressions faites un glisse, deux tor lilies, unjete et un assemble,
etc., are used to express steps or step-syllables. The English language, however, requires
the use of the word "step," for it would be improper and unsatisfactory to say " a gliding,"
and one must say "a gliding step" to fully convey the meaning. If, however, the French
term is used in its technical sense, it is correct to speak of a glisse, a tortill'e, a coupe, etc.

Note. — The reader will avoid many noticeable errors by following the suggestions of this last
paragraph in the description of dances and the use of dance-script.

415. Wherever the participles, such as glisse, pli'e, tourn'e, etc., are combined with the
article un, they become nouns, and are significant of the respective steps, with the incidental
transfer thereof.

41 6. In order, therefore, to determine upon the proper name of a step, one must as-
certain, besides the necessary attributes : first, the qualities of the movement of the free
leg and those which follow them ; and, second, the movement of the supporting leg during
the activity of the free one.

Walking Steps — Pas Alles

417. While this step is usually spoken of as pas march'e, there is in reality a vast dif-
ference between walking and marching ; for walking is an entirely free movement, while
marching is the result of the continued application of rule to the step for the purpose of a
precision of execution which is unnecessary in ordinary walking. Again, a person in walking
allows the arms to swing naturally and free ; while in marching the arms must be carried in
a certain prescribed manner; and while, in walking, the free foot is put down in such a
manner as to gradually receive the weight of the body, in marching the foot must fall
first upon the point and then pass to the ball for the balance.

41 8. In order to walk not only gracefully but with ease and safety, the body should
be held erect, and the free foot should be carried horizontally and only naturally stretched.
If the feet are at right angles, as shown in § 398 b, they are turned sufficiently outward.
If they turn more strongly outward, the gait becomes less beautiful and appears affected.
In walking, a pupil should not be required to touch the floor with the extreme tips of the
foot first, for such a gait could not be maintained ; besides it would appear pedantic and
render the person ridiculous. The knee should be bended only enough to permit freedom
of movement.

419. The ordinary forward walking step should be executed directly forward ; that is,
the foot should be carried from the posterior to the anterior position without crossing —
as in the case of artificial tripping steps, or other deviations — and the steps should not
be too large. To kick with the heels betrays carelessness in walking.

420. The degree of speed in walking should be considered, and, as has already been
stated, is in accordance with the beatings of the pulse. Growing young persons would
therefore take about 80 steps per minute, to coincide with the 80 pulsations which is their

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

average. In the Quadrilles a dancer usually takes about 90 to 100 steps per minute ; more
rapid tempo is unreasonable.

If a man in walking takes less than 80 steps per minute either fatigue or sluggishness
is indicated; if more rapidly than 120 steps, excitement or hurry; and as both are un-
natural speeds, either can be maintained but a short time. If one is conversing with an
agreeable companion the gait is naturally lessened.

421 . The Movement of the Arms in Walking. The arms move naturally, and in opposi-
tion to the legs, in walking : that is, the movement of the left arm coincides with that of
the right leg, and that of the right arm with the movement of the left leg. This may be
termed natural opposition [§ 289]. The arms are allowed a degree of freedom of move-
ment which is consistent with and regulated by a proper carriage of the upper body.

The fingers should be rounded. Fully stretched fingers appear stiff", clenched fists
indicate rage ; hands supported upon the hips appear awkward and give the idea that one
is at a loss as to what to do with them ; and the placing of the fists at the sides (arms
akimbo) gives an appearance of impudence.

422. For the purpose of developing refinement of gait, allow the pupils to walk, either
singly or in couples, with music, and to describe such circles, squares, serpentine lines and
other figures as space and circumstances permit.

For new pupils, play a simple march or polka and for those further advanced, a Polo-
naise; as the accentuation of 2-4 or 4-4 measure is more readily understood than that

of 3-4-

In this practice the height of the pupils should always be considered, and it is unwise
to require the execution of them in lines which are composed of both children and adults,
for in such cases the children must enlarge their steps while the adults are forced to dimin-
ish theirs, thereby destroying the benefit of the exercise for both classes of pupils.

423. The difference between marching and walking has been explained in § 417, and
as the term marching is understood to relate to the regular military gait, the carriage is
more deliberate and the steps more precise.

The "Field Step" {pas ordinaire) is usually executed at the rate of 112 to 1 16 steps
in a minute; the "quick step" (pas accileri), 144, and the "parade step" (pas de parade)
— now obsolete — about 70 steps a minute.

■.rcise 48. Marching Step (Pas marcb'e) [Fig. 269].

mm 80 - 120 : J

Flo. 169.

424- Slow marching is an exercise of great utility to pupils, and is especially to be
recommended. M. M. 72 is a very suitable tempo, and 60 is adapted to the more expe-
rienced pupils, as the exercise increases in difficulty as the tempo diminishes.

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

In marching, the leg should be raised to half-height [§ 67], which is indicated in the
script by the addition of two auxiliary lines above the carrying sign.

425. It is generally agreed that, in marching, one should begin with the left foot, and
the teacher should pronounce the command "forward" slowly; but the word "march"
must be given sharply and with a decided accent, in order that the left foot may be raised
immediately to coincide with the unaccented part measure, and put down upon the ac-
cented first note of the measure succeeding. 5

Changement of the Feet {Changetnent de Pieds)

426. It is of great importance, in marching, that every person steps an equal distance
with the same foot at the same time. If one misses the step, it may be regained in the
following manner [Fig. 270] :

Supposing the left foot to have been put down upon an un-
accented beat — instead of carrying the right forward to the \f *v
4th position, execute only a half step and put it down in either o— si •
1st or posterior 3d position, and continue with a half step with 1G' 2?0'
the left foot.

427. This changement of step can only be executed in proper rhythm to correspond
with the movement. As an exercise, these changements should be alternated and frequent
and in well defined measure, as in

Exercise 49. Changement of the Feet {Changement de Pieds) [Fig. 271].

3' -O

MM. 72 a

100 = J

3F^Mf

r r r ur

Fig. 271.

(In this exercise, the 3d position is used because it is more distinct and less liable to
be misunderstood than the 1st.)

428. Those persons who have a proper sense of measure readily understand the com-
mencement of the measure.

The abbreviated sign of the changement de pieds is as follows : XT^

GRAMMAR OF THB ART OK DANCING 117

Order of Steps in Instructing

429. Every teacher understands that he should lead gradually from what is easy to that
which is difficult, but, notwithstanding this fact, teachers and books of instruction seldom
agree as to the exact order in which the various steps should be taught. They usually affirm
that theirs is the only correct sequence, and require all others to follow their direction.

This is of course unreasonable and impossible, and for that reason the present direc-
tors of the "German Academy of the Art of Teaching Dancing," have adopted the suc-
cession of steps which was used by the celebrated ballet-masters, Taglioni and Lauchery,
and their best pupils.

This arrangement of steps for teaching has been proven to be efficient for schools of
ballet and for other institutes of higher instruction, but of course, the order given in this
work cannot be so completely applied in the case of persons who require instruction only
in the social dances, and who desire to learn to dance in the shortest possible time, as it
can in schools where the course is planned to cover several years.

The teacher must, therefore, make his own selections from the preparatory exercises
and dancing steps, according to the abilities of his pupils, and the result to be attained in
the given rime.

Raising Steps (Pas Eleves)

430. The movement of raising has been explained in § 121. By the term, " raising "
steps, there is an implied rising upon each step, which imparts a degree of elasticity to
the movement and lends an added grace to the dance. Each step, therefore, to which a
rising movement is applied is a "raising" step. If still other qualities are added to
the raising steps they are denominated accordingly.

431. A raising-walking step is different from the step of walking upon the points; be-
cause in walking-raising, the raising and lowering occurs upon each step; while in the walk
upon the points, the raising position is maintained to the end, when the lowering is made
after the final step.

432. The difference between raising-walking and jumping-walking is still more im-
portant. Raising is an easy movement produced by forcibly bending down the instep ;
while jumping is a species of kicking movement, which requires that the knee be bended,
and stretched so forcibly as to project the body into the air.

433. Straight raising steps go into the ad or 4th position, and crossed ones into the 3d
or 5th or intermediate positions. With few exceptions, the raisings occur upon the light
beats and the lowerings upon the accented beats of the music.

Ii8

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

1L^T!„-MK^-h

The raising steps should be practiced gliding, after they have been executed in carry-
ing form. The gliding will be indicated by
the usual sign. The difference in the names
should be noted in all cases.

The script signs for the raising steps are
shown in Fig. 272.

The music for the following exercise should be repeated, so that the movement may
be executed in the opposite direction from that indicated by the keys.

Exercise 50. Raising Steps (Pas eleves) [Fig. 273].

Fig. 272.

MM. 54 =

?v-^

rti

Lkk

L-^

L2_

* TT-t^

L-w

<L_I:

/L-jK

u2_

? !H-

<-0 TT

A* 1

A~ i-v

Fig. 273.

Raising-Marching Steps [Pas Marches Eleves)

434- The difference between these and the raising steps is indicated by the word
"marching," which signifies that the stretching is more complete, the carriage firmer, and
the appearance more seriously attentive. A signal difference is noticeable at the moment
of transfer. In raising-walking, the free foot is put down to receive the weight of the body,
which is already following it, while in raising-marching
the free foot is placed upon the floor before the weight ^> I -^ **■ -^

is carried to it from the supporting leg. Simple and II I \ I Li II V"N II f I L«i_

lively melodies are suitable for raising-walking, but FlG 2_4

raising-marching demands slow and majestic music.

The raising is slight in raising-walking and great in raising-marching. The script of the
raising-marching steps (pas marches eleves) is shown in Fig. 274.

Exercise 51. Raising-Marching Steps (Pas marches eleves) [Fig. 275].

GRAMMAK OF THE ART OF DANCING

II9

MM 60: «

[tJJI^-1|tJ„II

j rir i\rr\nr\ft't\W't

/r»

r»cif ir-f4^t|^^

r>/f-l

Fig. 275.

The Steps Upon the Points (Les Pas sur Its Pointes)

435. It has been already stated that in Walking upon the points the raising position is
maintained without lowerings, throughout the movement; the steps are therefore smaller
than those upon the sole or the ball.

436. These steps are also called pas emboites, " boxed-in steps," if they are so small that
they do not pass the measure of the simple open positions (the length of one of the feet).

rcise 52. Small Steps upon the Points or Boxed-in Steps (Petits pas sur les pointes
ou pas emboites) [Fig. 276].

M.M 72 = J

l±±

JL^

ilil^i

nti' " *

•-*i-^\ArUa \A }

1 m ; ]H-tN

M M ]j *-tN

AkA kA °%\

M ,W i m ;

uu[

mi' im

MM|

4Afl

aiM I

Fio. »76.

The manner of writing these st»ps is easily understood from the above exercise and the
abbreviated form is given in Fig. 277. The number below the line of the floor always

120

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

indicates the foot to be in anterior, and the dot represents the tt tt tt

foot as in posterior position. } \ t \

. ... 3 jj u • jj 3 3 3

Exercise 53. Walking upon the Points in Varying Rhythm ••
[Fig. 278].

00 00

Fig. 277.

Tt^-^i

fe£&

) *tY 1

falfe

SHHl

IT; \\\

o-,

J L

Si I.*

I wi

j L

1 LLL

1 \

\\\ \\\

UM MM

Fig. 278.

The special aim of this exercise is to direct the pupils' attention to the rhythm, that
they may learn to accommodate their movements to the requirements of the music. Too
little attention is paid to this all important point.

Running Steps [Pas de Course)

437. The difference between walking and marching has been dealt with in § 417. The
difference between walking and running lies in the fact that, in running, one foot is always
in the air, and that the following foot is raised while the weight is descending to the advanc-
ing one.

Thus we see that the difference between walking and running is not to be determined
by speed, notwithstanding the fact that running is usually executed more rapidly. Indeed,
a person may walk in more rapid tempo, and advance more quickly, than one who runs
slowly; but even in the most rapid walking both feet must touch the floor at the same
time once in every step. This is not done even in the slowest running movement.

Running may be executed on the soles, balls, points or heels; forward, backward or
sidewise.

438. To carry the upper body forward and run upon the soles makes the steps longei-
than in walking, and requires a strong bending of the knees. As a dancing exercise, this
movement appears stiff and awkward; it is only used in national and in comic dances to
represent the customs and manners of the lower classes.

439. Running steps upon the balls are more graceful, and in these the legs are fully
stretched and the upper body is held erect. These steps are often and differently used in

GRAMMAR OP THE ART OK DANCING 121

dancing. They are usually small, and may be executed either forward, backward, sidewise
or crossed.

440. Running upon the points occurs frequently in the serious art dances. The steps
are generally very short (small) and rapid.

441. Running upon the heels is very unusual, occurring only in a few national dances,
as the Afate/ot, etc. The steps are very small.

442. As a gymnastic exercise, running is of great importance and very exactly regulated.
For continued running, about 150 steps may be made in a minute, and for rapid running
about 210.

443. The running positions have been described and illustrated in § 93, and the chore-
graphic symbol is a serpentine line [Fig. 279]. If the symbol does

not possess auxiliary marks below the line, or if it is written with a rt 0 1

short line, it signifies running upon the soles. The other modes are ^ _ ^ — . *V
shown by the regular symbols of the ball, point and heel positions. Fig. 279.

444. The size of the steps in running is shown by the corre-
sponding size of the symbols; this difference is due largely to the different positions of the
soles in the various modes of running.

445. It is often necessary to write the sign of the movement executed, to demonstrate
the exact manner of transition from one position to another. If the position signs are accu-
rately drawn, the movement is usually expressed so clearly that auxiliary symbols are not
necessary.

446. If, however, the script is abbreviated, it may be desirable, for the sake of dis-
tinctness, to add secondary signs to the signs of movement.

447. As the weight of the body rests upon the foot which has executed the movement
in the running steps, special attention should be given to the succeeding position sign. The
sign of transfer is unnecessary in writing the running steps, as the transfer is inseparable
from the movement and is contemplated by its symbol.

Courante Step ( Temps tie Courante)

448. Temps de Courante is a slow dancing step which was taken from the Courante,
an ancient and long since forgotten dance. The step is of some slight classical value,
but is seldom used. As the step has no resemblance to running, its title is a mis-
nomer.

449. There is, in the Mazurka, a so-called pas courant which somewhat resembles the
running step. It will be completely described in connection with the Mazurka (§ 882).

122

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Changements of the Legs or Feet (Changements de J amies ou Pieds)

450. There is, in every step, a changement of the position of the feet, which is conse-
quent upon the transfer of the weight. When, however, crossed positions are changed, the
movement is almost wholly done by means of changing the positions of the legs ; the name
changements de jatnbes has therefore been applied to this class of movements.

451. Section 157 refers to the changement de jambes as a raising exercise. We shall now
consider it as a jumping exercise. The usual script

for these movements is shown in Fig. 280.

As a preparation, stand in either 3d or 5th position
and jump upon both feet, changing the relative positions
of the feet and falling back in such a manner that the foot
which was in front will be behind after the jump.

Exercise 54. Changements of the Legs or Feet {Changements de jambes ou pieds) [Fig. 281].

M.M. 58-80

UITftlU 4

Fig. 280.

Fig. 281.

Exercise 54 a is known as Raising Changements of the Legs in 3d Position (Change-
ments de jambes eleves en troisieme position).

Exercise 54^ contains the Jumped Changements of the Legs in 5th Position (Change-
ments de jambes saut'es en cinquieme position).

Exercise 54 c consists of the Jumped Changements of the Legs in 5th Position (Change-
ments de jambes sautes en cinquieme position).

This last exercise contains a high jump, while that which precedes it is executed by
means of slight lifting only.

High jumps may also be expressed by the jumping sign ; but in such cases, the transfer
symbol is omitted.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

123

Exercise 54 </ shows the Jumped Changements of the Legs in Turning (Cbangements
de j amies sautes en tournani).

Note. — The sign similar to the key, which occurs at the beginning of this exercise, shows that
the turning continues throughout the entire melody. The fractional portion of the turning sign which
accompanies each measure, indicates that a quarter-turn is made during each measure.

Exercise 54 e contains Jumped Changements of the Legs with Spreading [Cbangements
dej amies sautes et ecarti* ).

Exercise 54/ is composed of Jumped Changements of the Legs with Subsequent
Raising (Changements de jambes sautes et releves).

These changements should also be practiced in combination with the bendings and
stretchings, as they are of great benefit in the development of the muscular powers of the
legs.

Escaping Syllables {Temps Echappes)

452. The word echapper means to escape, or to slip ; but as this movement does not
contain a transfer of weight, it must be called temps and not pas 'echapp'e.

This is a compound dance movement consisting of the simultaneous lifting of both feet
from a closed position and their consequent falling back and slipping to an open one.

453. This movement is usually executed upon the place, from a

preparatory 5th position, by bending and jumping from both feet, [ ( > 7"\

which are separated and fall back in open position (generally the ad) -gr —

upon the balls.

Falling Syllables (Temps Tombes)

454. When this movement (echappe) is accented by falling back upon
the soles, as in preparation for a turn in the air, it is called temps tomb'e

-4]-

i±f±

Spreading Syllables (Temps Ecartes)

^SS. The word 'ecart'e means to spread or open; this movement is also called spagat,
which is derived from the Italian word spa/ancare, which signifies to open wide or to greatly
extend.

Execution — from preparatory 5th position. Commence with high jump upon both
feet, during which the feet are widely spread and fall back again in a closed position.

124

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

If, during the falling back, there is a changement
of the legs, the same is noted by its corresponding
symbol below the line of the floor [Fig. 282].

IM^F^

Fig. 282.

Collecting Step or Syllable (Pas ou Temps Assemble)

456. The word assembler means to put together or to collect, and this movement
may be either a dance syllable or a dance step of one syllable, consequent upon the non-
transfer or transfer of weight. Assemble is generally executed at the end of a step sentence
which it finishes, and it seldom occurs except in connection with other steps. Its most
frequent usage is in connection with the throwing step (pas jete).

457. Of the various applications of assemble the most usual is chosen for example.

EXECUTION OF THE STEP UPON THE PLACE

oun

o^ vx>

Preparation: Anterior 5th position of right. During the bending of the knees in
the preceding part measure, slide the left foot to the 2d balancing position, stretch
forcibly, jump, and bring the feet together into
5th position with the left foot in front (dessus),
falling back upon the points. Where several as- Jl fS
sembles are made consecutively, they should be Fig. 283.

executed with alternating feet [Fig. 283]. The free

foot passes from the 2d balancing position to the 5th position behind the other in the
assemble dessous. (Klemm.)

Exercise 55. Collecting Steps Before and Behind (Assembles dessus et dessous) [Fig. 284].

MM. 60

a 4. c * 4. ■

1 .pjpr

— P #

fc=*rn

^LcT^Lo

' * P

3S «=o

» - • ■"•

-+-

•+■

-»-

-*-

5 0-

J H Q4
5

•6 »-

ft£ °=*

-4-

-*-

-%-

-*-

~ 1

Fig. 28

Exercise 55^ shows the assembles dessus. Exercise 55^ shows the assembles dessous.

458. The first measure contains the complete, and the second the abbreviated script
for the exercises ; and in the abbreviation the open sole symbol represents the active, and
the shaded symbol, the other foot.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

I25

Throwing Steps [Pas Jetes}

^K-TK*

Fig. 285.

459. This class of steps is very closely related to running and differs from it only in
the fact that in running one foot always touches the floor; while in the throwing steps
both feet are momentarily in the air at the same time [§ 372].

460. Pas jeti is a step of one syllable and contains four simple movements, viz.:
bending, stretching, putting down and transferring.

To throw the body into the air, one must bend the knee of the supporting leg and then
stretch it forcibly. As the weight of the body is received, in the falling back, upon the
other foot, the transfer must of necessity either accompany or follow the leap.

46J. Jete relevation. This step is frequently followed by a raising upon the foot which
has received the weight; such subsequent raising is called
raising again or relevation [Fig. 285].

462. Pas jete is a very common step, and while it
may be variously combined with other positions and
movements, in many different ways, such other positions

and movements are not comprehended within the meaning of the word jete ; they must,
therefore, be indicated by qualifying words.

The script in Fig. 286 shows the complete method of writing a simple throwing step,
and the abbreviation thereof.

463. This abbreviation has been adopted because of the
time and accuracy which is necessary when the step is written
in detail.

The throwing steps might be represented by the same
symbol as the running steps, but as the falling back is more strongly accented than in
running, the sign of transfer would have to be made much heavier and thicker, in order
to convey the distinction.

464 a. The symbol of this step must never rest upon the floor line, for a. jete is always
executed into the air, and the size of the symbol varies in accordance with the rule regard-
ing the running symbol in § 444. The terms dessus and dessous are used in connection with
the throwing steps; their application is fully explained in § 176.

Kxercise 56. Simple Throwing Steps into an Open Position (Jetes simples a une position
Oliver te) [Fig. 287.]

4^\„V

Fig. a86.

il -'•'.'

. > . , .

a? \~t

-*-

■f

*'*

<*f

}

Fio. a«7-

126

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 57. Simple Throwing Steps into a Closed Position ( Jetes simples a une position
close). In these we find an inclined sole position [Fig. 288].

MM. 80 .J
2_

P » J) JU J)

ij f p

Pf j)[j^

^p^jt^

fe -^

t ^

continual

-P-

E M

£ -j

i_Z±

dJL

-»-' // -*--

4-^

1 -1

IS IT

it-^4

Fig.

464 b. Exercise 58. Throwing Steps into an Open with Subsequent Raising in a Closed
Position {JetS et relevation) [Fig. 289].

M.M.80_.J

M .'0

Fig. 289.

464 c Exercise 59. Advancing with Small Throwing Steps [Fig. 290].

,.0000

• • -

m m 0 f—

f~^ ■

f f> p 0

#• -

I P' „

;'j k

>^ 4 0-

<U^

* o-> -0

•+-

if &

•i ■■
?>-o <f 0-

•6 5 '

■*■

3 , 3

-*-

Fig. 290.

465. Exercise 60. Throwing Steps with Collecting (Jete et assemble) [Fig. 291].

M V

60 t J

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING
1r _-.*" **"

127

l^L

?~f

* TT-rtH^c

l^L

dLJLr

l^rz

■±j£

±^L

Fig. 291.

The sign of transfer has been omitted from these exercises, because the degagement is
comprehended in the throwing sign. There is no degagement following the assemble.

Fig. 292 shows the choregraphy of the throwing step with turning (jete en tournant).
Fig. 293 shows the choregraphy of the throwing step with collecting {jete et assemble)

— O

wv^rn

ll/^-o fl (f^ o- f>

Fig. 292.

Fig. 293.

Scissor Syllable and Scissor Step (Temps et Pas de Sissonne ou de Ciseaux)

466. The word Sissonne is given as the name of a Provencal national dance of former
times, and R. Voss, in his " Dictionary of Dances," mentions that dance among others as
having been executed in 1 565 at a festival at the French court given in honour of the then
queen, but no description of the manner in which it was danced, nor of its movements
and figures, has been found.

467. The scissor movement contains two simple movements. If, during the first syl-
lable, the weight rests upon both feet, but in the second is supported upon only one, it
is a step (pas de Sissonne) [Fig.

294 £]. But if the weight remains a b

upon the same support during both uJVQ^K \\ } V C "V/^ \V

music syllables, it is merely a move- -* * ' * — — ' 6 ; —

ment of two syllables (temps de Sis- Fig. 294.

sonne) [Fig. 294/1].

468. There is, in the bending and stretching of the knees in these movements, a motion
which appears quite similar to the movement of the blades of a pair of scissors, and the
names temps on pas de ciseaux (scissor syllable or step) are therefore quite as properly ap-
plicable to these as the word sissonne. Nearly every other movement, as for instance,

ii8

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

temps leve,fouettey pas marchi and chasse, may be recognized by its name, and this is as it
should be; so, notwithstanding the fact that the term sissonne has been used for many
years, it is the duty of the dancing master not alone to justify the technical terms of his
art, but to invent such other more appropriate terms as may be of assistance in teaching.
No title which incorrectly describes the motives or attributes of the step should be re-
tained merely because of its ancient usage, when a more appropriate name can be assigned
to it.

469. Execution of the Scissor Step upon the Place. From preparatory 2d balancing
position of left.

First Syllable : During a light jump upon the right, in the part measure, the left foot
is put down in the posterior 5th ball position, thus rendering both legs bended in the
thesis of the music.

Second syllable : Jump and fall back upon one foot only, while the other foot is quickly
raised into the ad balancing position, preparatory to the next step.

If the stepping foot is put down in the thesis, into a crossed position in front of the
other it forms a forward or over-crossed scissor step (un pas de ciseaux dessus). But if it
is put down behind the other, it is a backward or under-crossed scissor step (un pas de
ciseaux dessous).

By executing these steps, first forward, and then backward, we have the alternating
scissor steps (des pas de ciseaux alternatifs).

All these steps may be executed with turning.

Exercise 61. Scissor Step (Pas de Sissonne ou de ciseaux) [Fig. 295].

M.M.72
7~jr ft *i — 1

-100: i

f m

t- ^^^ 1

a? N/\

o-tm

• 0

-V

^^^2 1

kM IV

5 ■

KO<A

•*-

■%■

•~r

-V

-v \

J N;V

Q<A \

V()fN

- 1

VOTM I

£4 i\

5 ■

• 5
KO<4

- \

5 '

vpr Ki

•5

PlMV

\o -r N

■*r

Pa w

0 rN;

■ 5

^Q <A

- \

Fig. 295.

Exercise 6 1 a. Simple, Under-Crossed Scissor Steps upon the Left Foot (Pas de ciseaux
simples dessous du pied gauche).

Note. — When the steps are all made with the same foot, they are called simple.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

129

Exercise 6 1 b. Over-Crossed Scissor Step with Right Foot (Pas de ciseaux simples dessus
du pied droit).

rcise 61 c. Walking Backward by Means of Alternate Under-Crossed Scissor
Steps (Pas de ciseaux alter nat if s dessous en reculant).

Exercise 61 d. Walking Forward by Means of Alternate Over-Crossed Scissor Steps
(Pas de ciseaux alternatifs dessus en avancant).

rcise 61 e. Simple Under-Crossed Scissor Steps with Left Foot, with Backward
Turning upon the Right.

Exercise 61 f. Turning Forward by Means of Alternate Over and Under-Crossed Scis-
sor Steps.

470. Scissor Steps with Subsequent Raisings (Pas de Sissonne ou Ciseaux t\eleves). The
meaning of the word relever (to raise again) has been explained in §461, and, as applied
to the pas de ciseaux, it forms what is known as un pas de ciseaux relev'e. It is usually exe-
cuted in 2-4 measure, but may be made in either 3-8 or
3-4. In the latter measure it is often used in the Ma-
zurka, for a finishing tour.

Fig. 296 shows the choregraphy of the pas de ciseaux Fig. 296.

rele

.rcise 62. Scissor Steps with Subsequent Raisings (Pasde ciseaux releves) [Fig. 297].

Kk>r^n\

OW^Nn.

Q-^K^V

■*■

.+-

-V-

■+

•V

^L_

Fie. 297.

Double Scissor Step or Syllable (Pas ou Temps de Sissonne Double)

471. If the weight remains upon the same foot throughout these movements, it is called
double scissor syllable, but when there is a transfer added during the execution, it becomes
a regular step (un pas de ciseaux double).

This step is described by Bernhard Klemm, in his "Catechism of the Art of Dancing,"
as follows:

Upon the place.

Preparation: 5th position, right forward. During the part measure, the knees are bended,
in preparation for the leap which follows upon the first beat in the full measure, and which
is made upon both feet, falling back into 5th point position. Upon the second beat, there
occurs a second leap, with falling back upon the left foot only, while the right is carried
to the 2d position and remains there stretched and balancing, until the third beat, when it

13°

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

IT OUTFIT

Fig 298.

falls back again into the 5th position, either before (dessus) or behind (dessous) the left
[Fig. 298].

472. This step occurs in the English national dance
called the Sailor's Hornpipe.

473. Pas de Rigaudon. This step is also known as the pas
de Rigaudon because of its use in a lively and once popular
dance of that name.

The "Dictionary" of Noel and Chapsal is authority for the statement that this da. ;e
was the invention of Rigaudon, whose name it bears, and that the dance was carried to
England from Provence, in the southern part of France, where it was first danced by only
two persons, but afterwards became used as a social dance. The position for the Rigaudon
was like that of the Anglaise, and Ecossaise, which later became extremely popular. The
gentlemen formed in a straight line opposite and facing their ladies, and the first couple
danced a figure which was afterward repeated by the others. As there are various different
descriptions of the steps, it is probable that they were executed in different figures.

474. If we may believe the explanations of many competent writers, the pas de Rigaudon
consisted of zjeti which was immediately followed by ■afouetti, similar to the second half of
the enchainement of the so-called Rhinelander Polka.

Exercise 63. Double Scissor Step (Pas de Sissonne double) [Fig. 299].

W^w^n\ui

? IT oln^TToJu^Tf o

rr^Q.

Fig. 299.

Chasing or Hunting Steps (Pas Chassis)

475. The word chasser means to chase, and is most appropriately applied to these steps,
for in them, one foot "chases" the other from its position. If, as is often the case, all of
these steps are executed with the same foot and in the same direction they are called simple
chasing steps (pas chassis simples) [Fig. 300], but if they are executed alternately with one
foot and then with the other, they are called alternate chasing steps (des chassis alternatifs).
The simple chasing steps are usually

executed sidewise and the alternate y\ A

steps forward, in the various figures ^Za' '^ 0^3 • *"*~lr- r —

of the Quadrilles. The alternate chas- fig. 300.

j&ralso occur in many of the Waltzes.

476. Simple Chasing Steps to the Side (Chassis Simples de Cote). To execute these steps
to the side, one places the left foot in 2d position, and, upon the first part measure, glides

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OK DANCING

«31

or steps with the left foot into posterior 3d, thereby chasing the right foot from its place,
whence it glides to the right into 2d position, where it immediately receives the weight,
thus leaving the left free and prepared for the repetition of the movement. The step is
executed to the left in countermotion.

To execute the chasse forward, begin with either foot, from a preparatory posterior 4th
position, and close into posterior 3d, at the same time transferring the weight and gliding
the advancing foot forward to anterior 4th, where it immediately receives again the weight
of he body. A slight raising and lowering, combined with a corresponding bending of the
knees, gives these steps a beautiful elastic appearance.

To begin from a closed position, one must make a preparatory half-step into an open
one.

The chasse is most frequently begun from the anterior 3d position, by slightly raising
the rear foot and gliding forward upon the advanced one, while the weight falls back upon
the foot behind.

In the following exercise will be found the choregraphic script for the step. While the
script is written in full in the part measure and in the first full measure, the abbreviation
only is used in the measures which succeed.

Exercise 64. Simple Chasing Steps (Chassis simples) [Fig. 301].

Via. 301.

The symbol which is placed below the line of the floor, at the end of the fourth measure,
indicates that a quarter-turn to the left is made upon both balls ; and the key which is placed
above the sign of the chasse shows that the last half of the exercise is to be executed in the
opposite direction.

477. Alternate Chasing Steps (Pas Chassis Jllternatifs). The simple chasing steps require
only one music syllable, but in order to immediately execute another step with the other
foot, certain movements are necessary to effect the transfer of weight. This combination
of syllables is known as pas chasse. They may be executed any number of times, either
forward, backward, sidewise or turning in 2-4 or 6-8 measure.

They occur in the Quadrilles in the traverse, the "chains" and various other figures.

478. The complete chasing step (pas chasse) consists, therefore, of one whole and two
half-steps, which arc executed upon two music syllables, and may be made in all directions.

Chasing Step Forward (Pas Chasse en avanl). Preparation: Anterior 3d position of right.
cution: Raise upon the left foot and glide forward upon the right, into 4th posi-
tion, slightly bending and stretching the knee, and transfer; bring the left foot for-
ward into posterior 4th position during the transition to the accented first music syllable.
During the second syllable, the left foot is glided forcibly into the posterior 3d position,

132

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

"chasing" the right from its place into the anterior 4th position, where the weight is trans-
ferred to it; thus making it possible to begin the next pas chass'e with the left foot.

479. Exercise 64 a. Alternate Chasing Steps in a Circle to the Right (Pas chassis al-
ternatifs autour de la salle) [Fig. 302].

fc^r r p 1 r p J ^ 1 J J> J P

JLJLJL

*3^

o-3- — o

| S I a

* A

f J » =p

— f — H

» — # — «—

1 J'

IL-k]T

3 3

Fig. 302.

The key indicates a circular movement and the arrow point shows its direction.

The choregraphy of the part measure and of the first measure are written completely,
but the succeeding measures contain only the abbreviated sign of the chasing steps, and the
symbols of movement for the part measure.

The abbreviated sign of the chassis alternatifs differs from that of the chassis simples
very slightly; the chassis simples being shown with one perpendicular line, and the altern-
atifs by two perpendicular lines from the middle of the long stretching line to the line of
the floor [Fig. 303].

J2x

Fig. 303.

Gliding Steps (Pas Glisses — Glissades)

480. The gliding steps are among the most important, as they are very frequently used
in both social and theatrical dances. There are few steps which have been known by so
many different names, or which have been so differently explained and interpreted.

481. For this reason, one must consider especially the proper order of words; for example,
pas ilevi-glissi (raising gliding step) and pas glissi-ilevi (raised gliding step) mean quite
different movements. In the raising gliding step the body is raised upon the supporting
foot, while the free foot glides upon the floor, but, in the raised gliding step the free foot
glides with the point on the floor, without reference to the occupation of the supporting

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

'33

LJLH

8 ^o

one. Pas ilev'e glissant (gliding raising step) is still different, as that term is applied to the
simultaneous raising and gliding of the supporting foot.

482. The terms glissade and fas gliss'e are often interpreted to mean the combination
of a raising step to the side and a subsequent gliding movement of the other foot, but
this is incorrect, for such a movement is not a simple gliding step {pas gliss'e simple), but a
demi-glissi or pas ilev'e et un glissement.

483. Gliding Half-Steps (Demi-Glisses). The definition of a half-step may be found in
§395- lf> then, the foot is glided from the anterior 3d to the anterior 4th position, and
the weight transferred, thus throwing the rear foot into
posterior 4th position, there has been executed a gliding
half-step.

This is also the case if the foot is glided from 4th to
3d, or from 1st to 2d position, with immediate transfer.
Fig. 304 shows both the complete and abbreviated choregraphy for the demi-glisse.

484. Whole Gliding Steps (Pas Glisses Entiers). A gliding step is whole if it extends the
full width of a step; as, for example, from the posterior to the anterior 4th, or from the
2d, past the 1st into the 3d, 5th or similar crossed position. The expression pas gliss'e is
always understood to mean a whole gliding step; and the word "whole" is therefore only
necessary in cases where the meaning is to be defined more clearly. The word "half,"
however, should never be omitted when a demi-glisse is intended, as one might be led to
believe, from the similarity of the symbols, that a whole step was meant.

crcise 65. Gliding Half-Steps (Demi-glissis) [Fig. 305].

Fig. 304.

U M 72

.j ^

"v *^ —

iM _f

T7~\

1 . 1 - > —

IL.4 -

-*•

•*■

-*■

-♦.

■*■

4»

Oil- 1 TO

IL4 _

+•

-*.

■+■

■V

*■

rol *' o~,

A.XA.A^
». » 1—0

A^A ~

-*■

-*-

-♦-

•♦

■*•

■*■

'R \.A ,s ^ % „-^A~Jl K

""™I* _rttt- — ■*&&-

Fig. 305.

485. Alternate Crossed Gliding Steps (Glisses Croisis Changis ou Glissades Croisies). Glid-
ing steps which pass into crossed positions are called glisses croisis. If executed alter-
nately before and behind the supporting foot, they are known as glisses croises changes dessus
et dessous ou dessous et dessus.

Fie. 106 shows the abbreviated script of these move- ^ — ^3"^7^ — "■r3""?
° ° r ^^ i o— 6—0 • o— B

ments. A complete description will be found in Kxercise 66. F10. 306.

134 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 66. Crossed Gliding Steps to Right and Left (Glisses changes) [Fig. 307].

M.M.72- J
3

Fig. 307.

486. A very appropriate and sensible comparison of language and dancing may be
found in Klemm's "Catechism of the Art of Dancing" in connection with his explanation
of the glissades in which he likens an enchainement to a line of poetry, as in Fig. 308.

4 n LLf ?Lf ills ?lj 1 If Li I r — jr~

1 2

4 Glissades.
4 Iambuses.

Fig. 308.

1 Echappe', 1 Echappe et assemble.

2 Changements de jambes. Spondee.

Dactyl.

By such examples, one might properly indicate, by means of the signs of prosody, a
certain rhythmic formation for the use of a composer in writing a melody.

Whip Syllable [Temps Fouette)

487. Inasmuch as the weight is never transferred upon the whip syllable, it cannot be
regarded as a step (pas). The syllable is composed of the following simple movements, all
of which are executed during a hop upon the supporting foot: The free foot is first carried
to an open position, from which, by a quick bending of the knee, it passes rapidly into a
closed or crossed position. These movements are all executed in the air, and so quickly
as to suggest the snapping of a whip, from which resemblance it derives its name.

Exercise 67. Whip Syllable (Temps fouett'e) [Fig. 309].

MM. 70-100 = J
fl a m P 1

i»

-j~* f 0

f |*

• ,

---» »

J4K4WW

A& i1 & V

r/| aJI

«!■

JL.

b! M^N*^

3 3

-T*

5 is

1 i

Ho 9o

-*•

-*-

■!>

3
1

Fig. 309.

GRAMMAR OF THK ART OF DANCING

'35

Exercise 67 a is called "Simple Whip Syllables upon the Place" of the right foot into
the low crossed anterior 3d position, with inclined direction of the sole and immediate rais-
ing of the same foot into half-high balancing 2d position. (Temps fouetths simples du pied
droit, sur la place, a la jieme position dessus en balance avec la direction inclin'ee de la semelle
et levee immediate du pied droit a la 2de position jusqu a la demi-hauteur.)

Thus, we see again, how many words are necessary to explain a simple dance move-
ment that can be completely described beneath a single note, by means of choregraphy ; for
the entire movement is completely expressed under the second quarter note in the exercise.

487 a. Both the first and the second measures contain the complete script, but the third
has simply the abbreviated sign of the whip, below which is the number of the position
and the symbol of the sole direction. The succeeding measures show merely the sign of
repetition.

I xercise 67 b contains the whip
movement into posterior 3d position,
with perpendicular sole direction.

Exercise 67 c is composed of whip
movements crossed alternately above and below.

Fig. 310 shows the different signs of the various whip syllables.

Exercise 68. Phrases of Two and Enchainment Four Measures.

6- 3, 3 *] ST

Fig. 310.

Fio. 311.

Fig. 311.

Exercise 68 a. (a) Phrase of Two Measures to the Right Composed of One Raising
Step with Gliding, Two Simple Chasing Steps, and One Whip Syllable (Phrase a deux mes-
ures, contenant: un pas leve et gliss'e et un temps fouett'e a droit e) [Fig. 311].

(b) The Same Phrase Executed to the Left [Fig. 312].

Fig. 313.

The short perpendicular line has been omitted in the sign of the raising step with
gliding because there is no striking in this step such as occurs in pas chass'e.

This exercise may remind the student of some others which are mentioned much earlier
in the book.

136

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

488. The phrase (§ 193) of two measures begins in the part measure, and ends, there-
fore, with the third eighth-note of the second measure — that is, upon the completion of
the first casura (§ 197) — and the final eighth-note of that measure belongs to the second
caesura, or phrase of the melody. The preparatory raising steps belong, in like manner,
to the second dance phrase.

489. The second phrase contains the same combination of steps as the first, but is exe-
cuted in countermotion, in order to bring the dancer into the original position.

490. By such a repetition, with a suitable cadence (§ 192), the melody of the music
and the period of the dance are completed (§ 194).

Exercise 69. Sentence of Eight Measures {Enchainement a huit mesures) [Fig. 314].

Fig. 314.

The steps are indicated by abbreviated signs, and the music which has been selected is
the second part {clausula) of the Galop, to which composition the preceding exercises belong.
In this exercise the number of steps in each direction is doubled.

Cutting Step (Pas Coupe)

491. A cutting step extends from an open through a closed and into an open position.
A cutting step with the right foot from the posterior 4th position, passing through the 3d
position, is executed as follows :

The right foot is carried from the posterior 4th to the posterior 3d position, touching
the heel of the left foot, where it receives the weight, and the left foot, now free, is raised
into the anterior 4th balancing

_LlL

Fig. 315.

I =5 o—

-r<>

Fig. 316.

/KLA

Fig. 317.

position [Fig. 315].

These movements, if they are
all executed upon one music syl-
lable, constitute what is known
as pas coupe dessous (cutting step
behind). /

492. If the step commences from the anterior 4th and passes through the anterior 3d
to the posterior 4th position, it is a pas coupe dessus (cutting step before) [Fig. 316].

493. If the step commences in the 2d position and passes through the 1st (or another
closed position) carrying the other foot into 2d position, it is called a pas coupe lateral
(cutting step sidewise) [Fig. 317].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

137

In these diagrams the symbol upon the lower line is the abbreviated sign of the corre-
sponding step.

A point above signifies dessous (behind); a short, horizontal line below means dessus
(before). This direction is also indicated by the arrow point.

494. If, as occurs in the step of the Mazurka, there is a strongly perceptible knock-
ing, the step is called a coupe

pouss'e (pushed cutting step — 1 b , c

495. If the foot is. put -** M <?? ** ' 1
down in an audible manner, I j=±± -i .

-o 7^ <-^>

it is called a coupe frapp'e. ¥l* 3,8- FlG 3,9. FlG 320

The coupes frapp'e et coupes
pouss'e often occur in Russian dances, with the points of the feet turned upward and the
heels gliding upon the floor as shown in Fig. 48.

The choregraphic symbols of the steps are as follows:

Beaten cutting step forward {coupe dessus frapp'e) [Fig. 318].

Pushed cutting step, to the side, with parallel feet {coupe lateral pouss'e parallilement)

[F'g-3'9]-

Pushed, beaten, under-crossed cutting step, followed by gliding on the heel {coupe des-
sous pouss'e et frapp'e suive d'un glissement sur le talon) [Fig. 320].

Cutting Half-Step (Demi-Coupe)

496. If only the first half of the step and the transfer is executed, the movement is
called un demi-coup'e. In such cases the remainder of the step does not, in itself, constitute
a step, as it lacks the d'egagement . That portion of the step must therefore be known as
temps glisse, temps leve, temps baisse, etc., as the case may be.

In the abbreviated script, the point is omitted from the arrow which represents the
demi-coup'e. I t -+■

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN COUPfc AND CHASsi

497. Pat Coupi, to the right, from 2d balancing position of left, and passing through
the 3d to the 2d balancing position of the a. b.

right, is represented by Fig. 321 a. TT~T\ ~7l K ff ~/1 V,

Pat Chatti. to the right, from 2d ball po- \\ I „/[ \\ | n /[ ^ \\

sition of left, and passing through the 3d to * ''

the 2d ball position of the right, with im-
mediate transfer to right, leaving left foot in 2d position, is represented by Fig. 321 b.

'38

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

The pas coupe forward finishes in anterior 4th balancing position of the right.

The pas chass'e forward finishes in posterior 4th ball position of the left.

The positions in the pas coupes are usually " balancing," while those of the pas chassis
(almost without exception) touch the floor.

In the execution of the coupes the feet are "carried," while the chassis are generally made
by a light gliding upon the floor.

Pas coupi contains only one transfer and finishes upon the supporting foot, but pas
chassis require two transfers to bring the dancer into readiness for a repetition of the step.

Tossing Steps (Pas Ballotes)

M^hF- ^ hi^M i

2JL

-LL

Fig. 322.

498. The French word balloter means
to toss in various directions, and may be
applied to tossing a ball, a package, or the
movement of a ship in a storm.

499. A tossing step consists of two
consecutive and opposite pas coupis.

Fig. 322 a shows the tossing step crossed behind and before (balloti dessous et dessus).
Fig. 322 £ represents the tossing step crossed before and behind (balloti dessus et dessous).
(The signs on the lower line are abbreviations.)

500. While pas balloti never contains less, it may contain more than two syllables.
Note the following examples [Fig. 323]:

O— 3- — o I -O 3 O— O— 3 ' — o 3 $• 3 ST

AZ1

.AZ1

Fig. 323.

c. Pas balloti of three syllables, d. Pas balloti of four syllables.
Exercise 70. English Sailor Step (Pas de matelot anglais) [Fig. 324].

4 f y < V IE/ ^

^ Hi > / ^

Fig. 324.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 139

This enchainement is composed of a triple tossing step (pas ballot'e) and a whip syllable
(temps fouetti) in anterior 3d balancing position. The whole is repeated alternately six
times and finished with three alternate stamping steps in 3d position.

The same enchainement is repeated upon the succeeding eight measures, commencing
with the other foot.

Stuffing Steps (Pas de Bourree)

501. La Bourree is the name of a now obsolete dance which was once very popular in
the province of Auvergne, France; this movement takes its name from that dance.

The word bourr'e is an adjective, meaning "stuffing," and is most appropriately applied
to the movements which go to make up this step. Indeed, it is not at all unlikely that the
dance itself derived its title from this quality of the movement.

502. As the name of this step should indicate its peculiar quality of movement (in the
same manner as do the titles of the chassis and glissis) the name pas bourr'e would, in the
opinion of the author, be more correct than that of pas de Bourree.

The practice of naming steps for dances is extremely impracticable. It almost invari-
ably leads to ambiguity, because many dances, though similarly named, are differently exe-
cuted; while others differently named are executed in much the same manner. Is there
one of our dancing masters who can state definitely the exact manner in which La Bourree
was danced, or who would claim indeed that it was danced everywhere in the same manner?
This element of doubt is eliminated by the use of an adjective which explains the quality
of the movement, for this kind of a description is notsubject tosubsequentchangeof meaning.

This reason, therefore, is offered for the author's preference for the term pas bourr'e as
a name for this step.

503. While there is a marked similarity between the stuffing and the chasing steps, there
is in reality a considerable difference, which is indicated in some degree by their names.
That which is "stuffed" is usually stationary, while that which is "chased " is forced from
its place, and these characteristics apply to the pas bourris and pas chassis. In the pas bourr'e
forward, the free foot is brought against the supporting one, which is momentarily held in
position before it glides forward; and in the pas chassi forward, the rear foot drives or chases
the supporting foot from its place before receiving the weight, as is indicated by the name
cbassi.

504. "Pas Bourri may be executed in either 2-4 or 6-8 time.

At the period when it was fashionable to dance Quadrilles, Contra- Dances, Kcossaises,
Anglaises, etc., with slow and precise steps, such steps were known as pas de Bourre'es, and
these really were stuffed steps, that quality being necessary to fill out the slow tempo.
Since that time, however, fashion has changed, and in place of the slow stuffing steps, we
have quick chasing ones to correspond with the more rapid tempo now in vogue.

505. Ancient Stuffing Steps (Pas de Bourrte Ancient). The word " ancient" is used, in
this case, to distinguish between this step and the sidewisc stuffing step which ..mirs in

140

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

several of the more recent dances. To these latter steps we shall apply the name " modern "
stuffing steps (pas de Bourree moderne).

Exercise 71. Ancient Stuffing Steps Forward and Backward (Pas de Bourree anciens en
avant et en arriere) [Fig. 325].

. *

0m-

9 ■

~f~T ' r~ T

» — B

nuation

Fig. 325.

_£V

-LL.

Exercise 71 a. Forward (En avant).

Preparation : Posterior low balancing 4th position of right.

Execution : First syllable : — Bend the supporting knee slightly and glide right foot
forward to 4th position, where it receives the weight of the body upon the thesis of the
music, thus completing a whole step.

Second Syllable : — Glide left foot into pos-
terior 3d position and transfer (half-step), and I "ht\
advance right to 4th position and transfer (half- o_^. 3-
step.) The succeeding movement commences FlG- 32<5-
with the left foot [Fig. 326].

Exercise 71 b. The Same Movement Backward. Executed in the countermotion.

506. In Quadrilles and dances of similar nature, the first fas bourr'e forward usually
starts from the anterior 3d position, which makes it only a half-step; the first one back-
ward usually starts from a posterior 3d. At the end of a step, phrase, or sentence, the
dancer usually stands in 3d position.

507. The choregraphic symbols in Exercise 71 contain no features that have not al-
ready been explained, with the exception of the abbreviation, which is new nr nr>

to the reader. The number above the symbol indicates a posterior and the ±^-U- %^_-

number below it an anterior position.

508. Modern Stuffing Steps (Pas de Bourree Moderne). The pas bourr'e lateral has been
applied, in some of the modern dances, in such a way that all three step movements are
executed upon a single music syllable, or triole, or so that the first and second step move-
ments coincide with the part measure, the third falling upon the first syllable of the full
measure, as shown in the following exercise :

509. Exercise 72. Over and Under Crossed Stuffing Steps to the Side (Pas de Bourree
lat'eraux dessus et dessous) [Fig. 327].

RAMMAR I AR DANCING

I4I

dessous

- ^J

During the first half of this exercise, the steps are crossed in front or above, which car-
ries the dancer forward as indicated by the key. During the second half, they are crossed
behind or below, by which the dancer goes backward.

510. Exercise 73. Stuffing Steps to the Side in Triole Rhythm (Pas de Bourree en
rhytbme de trioles dessus et dessous) [Fig. 328].

Uaata

Fig. 328.

In executing the stuffing steps to the side, for example, to the right — the dancer raises
the left leg into the half-high 2d position, as preparation, and from this carries the left foot
either before or behind the right into 3d or 5th position, upon the first music syllable
belonging to the step. Upon the second music syllable, the right foot is carried to 2d
position and receives the weight ; and upon the third

music syllable, the left foot is again carried to its \\\ V^c oNv I yn^L

former crossed position and the weight transferred, 0-5 o- a

while the right is immediately lifted to half-high 2d *10' 329'

position, so as to be in readiness for the succeeding step [Fig. 329].

511. In Spanish and Italian dances, the stuffing steps are usually made in the 5th posi-
tion ; in French dances, they fall in the 3d ; and in different Hungarian, Polish and Rus-
sian dances, in 1st position, with the feet nearly parallel.

512. The abbreviated signs arc easily understood. The symbol fir
ancient" step is rounded and nearly perpendicular, while •v^- •

of the " ;

that of the "modern" is angular and horizontal. The same signs

are added to indicate the forward and backward crossing (dessus et dessous) as are applied

to the other symbols.

1 42

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 74. Step Sentence of Four Measures, Containing a Triple Jete Bourre Fol-
lowed by Jete et Assemble to the Right (1 jete et 1 bourre r'ep'et'e 3 fois,puis 1 jete et 1
assemble). This movement is repeated in countermotion to compose an enchainement
of 8 measures [Fig. 330].

Fig. 330.

Stretched or Zephyr Steps [Pas Tendus ou Pas de Zephire)

513. In the Greek mythology, which personifies all ideas, emotions and objects, the
west wind was called Zephyr, and the name implies especially the qualities of the warm,
gentle, spring winds which nourish the flowers.

The god Zephyr was represented as a beautiful youth who was said to be the favorite
of the goddess of the flowers, who was in turn called Flora. These two deities are among
the most usual characters in the various mythological ballets.

It is, therefore, natural to suppose that the dancing step to which this name has been
applied contains movements of a peculiarly dainty and attractive quality.

514- The expression pas tendu, which means a stretched step, might properly be ap-
plied to any step in which the legs are stretched, but it is usually applied, in its technical
sense, to the following movement of two syllables, which may be executed in all directions,
either upon the spot or turning:

515. Pas Tendu. First syllable : The movement commences with the right foot, from
the preparatory anterior 4th balancing position, with the execution of a cutting step into
1st position, by means of which the left goes backward .

into the 4th position.

The second syllable begins with a jump upon the
right foot while the left is stretched forward into the 4th
position, touching the floor lightly in transit through the
1st [Fig._£3^,

In the choregraphic script, division "a" shows the complete, and division "b" the
abbreviated form of writing.

516. The word tendu has been applied to this step because of the fact that the active
leg is stretched during transition, notwithstanding the fact that the supporting leg neces-

)

±^

Fig. 331

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

sarily has to be bended, in order to execute the jump. Indeed, the active leg must be
slightly bended during transition, or the movement appears extremely stiff, and only the
tip of the foot should touch the floor in passing through the ist position.

517. The whole movement, if executed in this manner, is more agreeable to the eye,
and corresponds more closely to the meaning of the name pas de zephire. The term is
entirely justified if the active leg beats gently backward and forward in 3d position during
transit, which movement furnishes the requisite shading to complete the sentiment of the
Pas de zephire, then, is a beating step [§ 583].

name.

JL/Z^

Fig. 332.

518. Although this step may be executed in the 2d position, it is more beautiful in
the 2-4 intermediate, and by the addition of the corresponding
movements of the upper body and arms, which are very easily
determined, one may improvise many very agreeable exercises

[F'g- 33*3-

519. Pas de Zephire may also be composed of a coupe dessus and a temps ballone [§528]

and it is often used in this form in that exquisite composition, the Gavotte de Vestris.

520. Kxercise 75. Gliding Zephyr Step in 4th Position upon the Place (Pas de zephire
sur la place) [Fig. 23Z\

M M 80

n^-

^5 ^-- o- V

111

! .1

J 11/^

1A.

LaI

J <=>

(fa

111

■LlI

,<±^

<*v\

/ Zfphire

^ Zfyhire

LAa

lZL

I VL N

LAA

Fig. 333.

If the transition which occurs upon the 2d syllable is to be glided, the gliding symbol
must be written upon the line of the floor; if executed in half-
height, the movement sign cuts the line of the leg ; and if
transition occurs at full height, the sign is placed above the
sign of the supporting leg [ Fig. 334].

Kxercise 7 $6. Zephyr Step in 2-4 Position upon the
Spot, with Quarter-Turns (indicated by the turning sign below the line of the floor)
[§ 546].

Flo. 334

144

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercises 75 c and 75 d are completely drawn for the purpose of acquainting the reader
with the signs, and in order to demonstrate the proper corresponding movements of the
head and the arms.

Exercise 75 e shows the movement in a circular form, as indicated by the key. In
various places the word z'ephire has been substituted for the script.

Exercise 75/ is composed of zephyr steps sidewise, going first to the right and then to
the left, as indicated by the key.

Basque Steps (Pas de Basques)

521. The Basques are a people who live around the Bay of Biscay, among whom
there have always been many good dancers, and this movement forms the most important
portion of their national dances. The same combination is also to be found in the Spanish
dances, such as the Aragonesa, the Gitana and the Cachucha, in which it is executed either
in 3-4 or 3-8 time. It also exists in various French dances, where it is danced in 2-4 or
6-8 time.

522. Exercise 76. Spanish Basque Step (Pas de basque espagnol) [Fig. 335]. — a
forward, b backward.

M.M. 120-144= J)

IL^l^-J.

^^IL^ TT

contl.

£ I

8-4 0—4-5 — O "5

nI„JLJ1

_2_

f^ coiiti.

— o V6 o- 1

4-5 -O 9

nu;itiou

Fig- 335-

In this step all three syllables are distinctly accented. The music is that of the famous
Cachucha.

EXECUTION OF THE BASQUE STEPS

523. Exercise 76 a. In 3-4 Measure, Forward.

Preparation : Anterior 5th position of right.

First syllable: Easy jet'e in anterior 2-4 position. Second syllable: Glide
or carry left to double crossed anterior 4-5 position and transfer [Fig. 336].
Third syllable: Glide right foot into posterior 5th and transfer [Fig. 337.]

Fig. 336.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

4-5

Fig. 337.

•5

Exercise 76 £. Backward. Preparation: Posterior TT , TT V

5th position of left. 11/ > 1 1 r\ /_ A rt ^ 1 1

First syllable: Light jet'e into posterior 4th position.
Second syllable: Carry right lightly into 4-5 position
and transfer. Third syllable: Glide left into anterior 5th position and transfer, thus leav
ing right foot free and prepared to commence the succeeding step.

Exercise 77. Basque Step Sidewise (Pas de basque lateral) [Fig. 338].

MM 72-80= J

0-»-» ::Cr5 PS O- »•

*»*;»»*»"* ; » ■■»;

Fig. 338.

This step is executed first to right and then to left, as indicated by the key.

524. The first and second syllables are so executed, in 2-4 and 6-8 time, that they coin-
cide with only one music syllable; and the preparation, which begins in the part measure,
is so closely joined to the accented movement as to form a syncopation. The steps are the
same as in the forward movement, but go to the side, and the transition from one to an-
other Basque step to the side is accomplished by the addition of half an outward foot-
circle [§ 261].

Exercise 78. Basque Step with Turning (Pas de basque en tournant) — a forward, b
backward [Fig. 339].

F»c- 339-

525. Exercise 78 a. Basque Steps Forward in Turning, to the Right (6-8 Time) (Pas
de basque en avant en tournant a droit e).

The legs must be crossed in the first half of the step, sufficiently to produce a half-
turn; the second half contains a half-turn to the right upon the toes of both feet, which
restores the right foot to the anterior 5th position.

Exercise 78 b. Basque Steps Backward in Turning, to the Left (Pas de basque en arriere
en tournant a gauche).

This movement is exactly similar to the preceding, but in countermotion.

52b. Abbreviated Script. In the first two measures in each of the foregoing exercises,

146 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

the script has been fully drawn. In the remaining measures it has been indicated by abbre-
viations.

In Fig. 340 the sign a signifies an entire Basque step with the right foot, and the sign
b one with the left foot. The direction is indicated by the key. The tip of the free foot

— o o — — o o — — o o—

Fig. 340.

should always be directed strongly down. The symbol of the lateral Basque step is drawn
horizontally; in cases where there could be doubt, the sole direction is added below the
line.

The turnings are indicated by the regular turning signs [§ 548].

Ball Step (Pas Ballonne)

527. This step derives its name from the circular movement of the free foot, which has
the appearance of stepping over a ball. It is usually executed to the side, but it may also
be made forward or backward. Although it may be practiced alternately, it is usually applied
in "simple" form, that is, without change of direction.

Ball Syllable [Temps Ballonne)

528. If the circular movement of the free foot is unaccompanied by transfer, as in the
second syllable of the zephyr step, it is called temps ballonne.

EXECUTION OF THE BALL STEP

529. Preparation : 3d or 5th position of right. The first syllable commences in the
part measure, with a jump on the left foot, during which the right is carried in a circular
direction to the id position, where it immediately receives the weight.

In the second syllable, the left 4 q _

foot glides into posterior 5th position /*\ // c^ /-> (R) (Ph

[Fig. 341]. In order to maintain the 5 5- s^o _o5

same direction, it is necessary to add IG' 341'

a transfer to the second syllable, but such is not necessary in the case of alternate ball steps.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 79. Ball Steps (Pas ballonnis) [Fig. 342].

c p /c^c^/rfrA^n,

r»n^

a^tt-ta^ti

natioi

Fig. 342

a. Simple Ball Steps Forward (Pas ballonnis simples en avani).

b. Simple Ball Steps Backward (Pas ballonnis simples en arriere).

c. Simple Ball Steps to the Right (Pas ballonnis simples a droite).

d. Alternate Ball Steps to the Side (Pas ballonnis alternatifs de coti).
The abbreviation needs no explanation.

Twisting .Steps (Pas Tortilles)

530. The simple turning movements are explained in §§ 246 to 250 and the com-
pound movement tortilli, and its choregraphic symbol (w), are dealt with in § 251.

The word tortilli occurs very frequently in the descriptions of dances, particularly in
describing dances of Slavic and Hungarian origin. A twisting step (pas tortilli) contains
at least two turns and a transfer, all of which must of course be written beneath the notes
with which the steps coincide. For the purpose of abbreviation, the letter 'W has been
chosen as a symbol, being composed of two v's, which letter is the symbol of a turn [§251].

531. These steps may be executed upon the sole, ball, point or heel, or in balancing
tion, with either or both feet, and in all directions.

While they may be made independently of all other steps, they are often executed in
connection with other steps, and thus either form enchainments or complete them.

a b c

A,,A„l l„A„A //,.X.,y/

—0—0 5 — o -* •

Flo. 343

532. In Fig. 343, a shows a twisting step on the sole of the right foot, from the 2d
to the anterior 5th position [un pas tortilli du pied droit sur lasemelle), consisting of an inward

I48 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

and an outward turn of the right foot, made upon the sole and followed by a transfer of
weight.

Note. — As it is practically impossible to make a real turn upon the sole, it is necessary to raise
either the heel or the ball of the foot in executing this step.

b shows the same movement in the opposite direction (from the anterior 5th to the 2d
position with subsequent transfer).
c shows the abbreviated script.

533. Low twisting step of the right foot going upon the ball and heel from 1st to 2d
position (tortill'e sur la demi-pointe et le talon du pied).

Demi-pointe means the ball of the foot, and the sign of transfer is TT c\ a
placed above the symbol of tortill'e to indicate that the d'egage occurs Jl ity^/L
during the turning. The signs below the turning sign show that the
first turning movement is made upon the ball, and the second upon the heel.

534. Twisting Steps upon the Heels and the Balls (Tortille sur les Talons a tt
et les Demi-Pointes). This step is combined with a.frappe in the 2d position, /[ #/»
and a pas de basque in the Spanish dances. ' ' 5

535. Twisting Step upon Both Feet in Opposite Directions (Tortille Bipede Contraire)
[Fig. 344]. In this step there is a simultaneous turning of both feet, but the right foot
makes first a turn upon the heel, and then one upon the ball; while the left foot makes
a turn on the ball, followed by one on the heel. This movement contains the step of the
Tour tortille, which will be explained in § 538.

— OO-c 7-00— /\

Fig. 344. Fig. 345.

536. Twisting Step upon Both Feet in the Same Direction (Tortille Bipede Simultane)
[Fig. 345]. This step is composed of a simultaneous turning of both feet in the same di-
rection, either upon the balls or the heels. It is very seldom used, while the tortille bipede
contraire occurs very frequently in the Russian dances.

537. Leaping Twisting Step upon the Point and Heel, with Audible Lowering of
the Ball of the Foot (Tortille Sautille sur la Pointe et le Talon et Termine par un Tape)
[Fig. 345]. This movement starts from the 2d balancing position of the right, by throw-
ing the heel outward, after which the leg is put down forcibly and audibly upon the ball
of the foot. The transfer of weight occurs before the putting down, and the whole move-
ment is simultaneous with the leap, which is made upon the left foot.

538. Movement from the Place by Means of Twisting (Tour Tortille). The twisting step
upon both feet in opposite directions, which has been referred to in § 535, carries the danc-
er from the place, toward the left, and may be executed either in a straight or a curved
line. It may, of course, be executed in the opposite direction. If, however, the move-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 149

ment is upon a curved line, it is called a circle of turning steps to the right or left («» tour
tortilli a droit e, or un tour tortilli a gauche). This is also a part of nearly all the Russian
dances.

Body Turns [Tours de Corps)

539. The various turns and their differences have been explained in §§ 126 and 127,
and some reference to the turning of the rump has been made in §§ 322 to 325.

The term " rump turn " {tour de torse) applies only to the turning of that portion of
the body and the movement is executed mainly in the hips, without the assistance of the
feet. The term tour de corps (body turn) refers to the movement of the entire body.

These movements are usually executed upon the points, or balls, of both or either of
the feet, and they occasionally take place in the air. Only in very rare instances are they
made upon the heels.

540. Whole or Part Turns. The dancer who stands directly facing the spectators and
turns in one direction until he has resumed his original position describes a "whole turn."
If he stops the turning with his back to them he executes a "half-turn." If he turns to
the right only so far as to stand with the left shoulder toward the spectators, he has made
a "quarter-turn," and one half-way between this and the original position is an "eighth-
turn."

541. Body Turns upon Both Feet. To make an eighth-turn to the right upon the
points from the first (sole) position, carries the dancer into the intermediate 3-4 position
of the* right [Fig. 346].

Note. — If the weight is upon the left foot during this turn, it finishes in anterior 3-4 position
of the right ; if it is on the right foot it ends in posterior 3-4 position of the left.

A quarter-turn to the right upon the points, starting from the 1st (sole) position,
brings the dancer into 4th position. If the weight during this movement rests upon the

aVs b'A c%

LJJJ^ JLJL1JL ^dJAJ.

^o«-« *-«>-c 8* »-o»-t> »*-«o-» *-<> •*-< -"-of*--

Fig. 346. Kio. 347. K,G- 348-

left foot, the result is an anterior 4th position of the right; if upon the right foot, it pro-
duces a posterior 4th position of the left [Fig. 347].

A quarter-turn to the right, from the 2d position, carries the right foot into anterior
4th [Fig. 348]; while a similar movement to the left, backward, has the opposite effect.

i5o

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

An eighth-turn upon the points in 3d position [Fig. 349] reverses the position. (Do
not confound this movement with that of the crossed alternate raisings — elevations
croisees alternatives — mentioned in §§ 157 and 158.)

A quarter-turn to the left, from the anterior 4th position, brings the right into posterior
4th [Fig. 350^], and a half-turn to the left upon the points carries the right foot from
the anterior to the posterior 4-5 position [Fig. 350/].

Note. — Bear in mind the distinction between the 4th and the 4-5 position, as explained in the
note to § 16.

A half-turn to the right forward, from posterior 4-5 position, brings the right foot in-
to anterior 4-5 position [Fig. 351].

The 5th position is changed in the same manner as the 3d.

dV8

Fig. 349.

fV2

U JJL JJL

^5 4-5 V-*4*5 4-5 'V^

Fig. 350.

Fig. 351.

Body Turns Upon One Foot

542. In order to artistically execute a complete turn upon one foot, the body must be
securely balanced and held firm. This is greatly facilitated by a preparatory bending of
the supporting knee. From this bended position the dancer should stretch the supporting
leg and raise the body in the first half-turn, and lower it in the second half-turn.

543. A turn to the right is one in which the dancer faces from the front position toward
his right; and a turn to the left goes from the front toward his left. By turning to the right
upon the right foot, the body moves forward ; and by turning to the left upon the right
foot it moves backward.

Turn of the Trunk or Rump [Tour de Torse')

544- A turn of the trunk or rump, as has been explained in §322, is called tour de torse;
and a turn of the entire body is called tour de corps.

545. In marching, and in the figure dances, and even in the round dances of the Waltz
class, there are various turns which, however, cannot be called pirouettes. If, therefore, a
dancer executes, as some persons do, real pirouettes in dancing Quadrille solos and Mazurka
figures, they exhibit more skill than is essential to the ordinary social dance.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 151

Choregraphy of Turning

546. Quarter-Turns upon One Foot {Quart de Tours de Corps sur tun Pied) [Fig. 352].

a. Quarter-Turn to the Right upon the Right Foot (Un

quart de tour a droit e sur le pied droit). abed

b. Quarter-Turn to the Left upon the Right Foot (Un quart V% /* \
de tour a gauche sur le pied droit). £ ^

c. Quarter-Turn to the Left upon the Left Foot ( Un quart
de tour a gaucbe sur le pied gauche).

d. Quarter-Turn to the Right upon the Left Foot (Un quart de tour a droite sur le
pied gaucbe).

547. While this system of describing the quarter-turns is very simple, the symbols must
be perfectly memorized before proceeding further, in order to clearly distinguish them from
the symbols of the half-turns.

548. Half-Turns upon One Foot (Demi-Tours de Corps sur I'un Pied) [Fig. 353].

e. Half-Turn to the Right upon the Right Foot (Demi-
tour a droite sur le pied droit). e f g h

/. Half-Turn to the Left upon the Right Foot (Demi- \/.2 s--± s~\

tour a gauche sur le pied droit). ^ ~ ^ ,_^

g. Half-Turn to the Left upon the Left Foot (Demi-tour Fio. 353.

a gaucbe sur le pied gauche).

b. Half-Turn to the Right upon the Left Foot (Demi-tour a droite sur le pied gauche).

549. Whole Turns upon One Foot (Tours de Corps Entiers sur I'un Pied) [Fig. 354].
/'. Whole Turn to the Right upon the Right Foot

(Tour a droite sur le pied droit). \ k 1 m

k. Whole Turn to the Left upon the Right Foot flour ^^ ^ ^—^ f\

( Tour a gaucbe sur le pied droit). v-7 O vJ L/

/. Whole Turn to the Left upon the Left Foot ; -Iu_ J54

( 'Tour a gauche sur le pied gaucbe).

m. Whole Turn to the Right upon the Left Foot (Tour a droite sur le pied gaucbe).

550. One and a Half Turns upon One Foot (Tour de Corps et Demi sur I'un Pied) [Fig. 355].
n. One and a Half Turns to the Right upon the

Right Foot (Tour et demi a droite sur le pied droit). n o p q

0. One and a Half Turns to the Left upon the Right \Y2 ^^ /^x f~\ ^r^\

Foot (Tour et demi a gaucbe sur le pied droit). ~^i ^J i^ i~

p. One and a Half Turns to the Left upon the Left ••"J. 355.

Foot ( Tour et demi a gauche sur le pied gaucbe).

q. One and a Half Turns to the Right upon the Left Foot (Tour et demi a droite sur

le pied gaucbe).

152 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Occupation of the Free Leg in Turning

551. In all of the above mentioned turns, the movement of the supporting leg has been
shown without reference to the occupation of the free one, which may be carried into any
possible position, and which may execute any possible movement either before, after or
during the continuance of the turn, as will be demonstrated in the application of the turns
to the various exercises and enchainements which are to follow.

Turns in the Air (Tours en l' Air)

552. Turns are sometimes executed during the continuance of a jumping or throwing
movement, or a vigorous turn in the air, which will be explained in § 574.

The Pirouette (La Pirouette)

553. The French word pirouette is derived from the Low Latin word gyruetta, which,
in turn, comes from gyrus, a turn.

In the "Dictionary" of Noel and Chapsal, such a turn is described as follows: " Un
tour entier du corps, qu on fait en se tenant sur le point e d'un seu/pied" (a complete turn of the
body, which is executed while the body is held upon the point of one foot).

The Italian word piroetta also means a complete turn upon the spot.

In the " Stenochoregraphy " of Arthur de St. Leon, he says: " Pirouette se dit en danse
de Taction d'un tour entier * * * " (the performance of a complete turn in dancing is called
a pirouette).

From these quotations it is clearly demonstrated that the word pirouette means, tech-
nically, a turn.

554. The French word is composed of two words, viz.: pied, foot, and rouette, a small
wheel, and thus most happily describes this wheel-like rotation of the body upon the point
of one foot containing one or more complete turns. Certain other authors besides those
previously mentioned maintain that a pirouette must contain not less than three complete
turns, but the Academy of the German Art of Teaching Dancing have agreed to call a single,
artistic, complete turn a " simple pirouette."

555. Pirouettes relate exclusively to theatrical dancing; if, therefore, one or more com-
plete turns are artistically executed in theatrical dancing, they may be called pirouettes,

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

153

whereas, quarter, half, or even entire or simple turns cannot be considered pirouettes if
they occur in social dances.

556. Pirouettes may be executed in two directions: outward (en dehors) or inward (en
dedans).

The backward turns are usually called outward; and the forward turns, inward.

Simple Pirouettes

557. The Principal Forms of the Pirouette are :

Sur le cou-de-pied (on the ankle) [Fig. 356].

A la seconde (in 2d position) [Fig. 357].

En attitude (in attitude, in various forms) [Fig. 358].

Fie. 356.

Fio. 357.

FIG. 358.

Composite Pirouettes (Pirouettes Composees)

558. Various combinations of movements, which are known as pirouettes composees,
may be formed by means of varying the carriage of the upper body and arms (des attitudes
et arabesques), by changing the occupation of the free leg in transit, and by ending the
pirouette in different form. Nearly every great dancer has his own peculiar method of
executing pirouettes, and the following treatise upon them has been kindly and unself-
ishly prepared for this work by Herr Otto Stoige, ballet master and dancing teacher at the
University in Koenigsberg in Prussia.

EXECUTION OF THE PIROUETTES

559. Outward Pirouette (Pirouette en Dehors). The pirouette en dehors commences from
the 3d position and is executed upon three tempi or music syllables. If executed upon

*54

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

the left foot, the right is placed in anterior 3d position as preparation. Upon the first
syllable, the body is raised upon the ball of the left foot, simultaneously with the. exten-
sion of the right foot into half-high 2d position, and the
raising of the arms at the sides to a position almost shoul-
der-high.

Upon the second syllable, the body is lowered upon
both feet into the bended 2d position, during which the
left foot is turned outward upon the point, thus thrusting
the right side slightly forward, and the right arm is rounded and carried forward in nearly
horizontal position [Fig. 360].

Upon the third syllable, the right foot is quickly lifted from the floor and the body
raised to a point position upon the left, in which the turn is executed by the aid of the arms

[%• 359]-

Fig. 359.

Fig. 360.

Fig. 361.

Fig. 362.

560. If the pirouette is executed upon the ankle (sur le cou-de-pied) the arms are held
equidistant from the body [Fig. 361].

In the pirouette in second position (a la seconde), the arms are held in horizontal
position sidewise as in Fig. 362 and may be carried to a higher position at the end [Fig.

561. In this example [Fig. 363] the turn is made to the right, and the right side is
thereby carried backward.

Fig. 363.

Fig. 364.

If the pirouette is made upon the right foot, the movements are executed in counter-
motion.

562. Inward Pirouette (Pirouette en Dedans). This also starts from 3d position and is
executed upon two music syllables.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 1 55

In order to render the first syllable more intelligible to the reader, it has been divided
into four movements which have been marked a, b, c, and </[Fig. 364].

As this pirouette is executed upon the left foot, it starts from the anterior 3d position
of the right.

a shows the lifting of the right foot forward into the stretched 4th position, with sim-
ultaneous raising of both arms into the rounded horizontal position.

b indicates the opening of the arms, with simultaneous movement of the right foot
backward into the high 2d position.

c shows the carriage of the right foot backward into the 4th
position, accompanied by a quarter-turn to the right, with raising
upon the left; during which the right arm is raised and the left
lowered as in Fig. 365, but with the right foot in high posterior 4th
position.

d shows the putting down of the right foot in posterior 4th po-
sition and immediate transfer. As soon as the tip of the right foot
reaches the floor, the positions of the arms are changed before the
body, by which cbangement (which is simultaneous with the trans-
fer of weight) the right arm is lowered and carried to a half-stretched
posterior position, slightly below the shoulder height, and the left Fig. 365.

arm is raised to a corresponding position in front [Fig. 367].

All these movements must be executed in unbroken continuity, after which occurs the
first opportunity for rest.

In order to execute the pirouette, the weight must be once more transferred to the
left foot, the heel of which is momentarily lowered to the floor and immediately re-raised
into ball or point position, while the left arm is lowered and the right side advanced; in
order, by the assistance of the right arm and leg, to execute the turns to the left.

Note. — If this pirouette is executed stir It cou-dt-pied, the arms arc not raised, and the right foot
it carried through the 2d balancing position before it touches the ankle.

The carriage of the arms in the pirouettes en attitude, tire-bouchon (cork-screw*), etc.,
should be such as are appropriate to the movement.

563. In the pirouette sur le cou-de-pied which begins with the right foot, the turn is
chiefly accomplished by means of the left arm, and vice versa.

564. In the pirouette a la seconde, beginning with the right foot, the turning is princi-
pally aided by the right arm, and vice versa.

In commencing the pirouette en dehors, that side of the body from which it is executed
is slightly advanced [Fig. 360].

565. Outward pirouettes usually end sur le cou-de-pied, and the inward, either en attitude,
en arabesque, or with a pas de basque.

566. The most common of the pirouettes composees (composite pirouettes), which may
alto be called " deviating " or " mixed," are the following :

• So called from the «crew-likc movement of the free foot during the turning.

i56

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

En dehors:

Pirouette a la seconde et sur le cou-de-pied.

Pirouette a la seconde et grand rond de jambe.

Pirouette a la seconde et en attitude et pas de Bourree.

Pirouette a petits battements sur le cou-de pied.
En dedans :

Pirouette sur le cou-de-pied en tire-bouchon and a pirouette renversee (usually
of two turns).

Note. — This pirouette generally precedes coupe, jet'e and a sharply accented step into posterior
4th position, and, as it ends in an open position, its principal use is in the middle of a dance to bring
the dancer back to the commencement of a step or an enchainement.

Figs. 366, 367, 368 and 369 represent positions which are frequently found in the
pirouettes compos'ees.

Fig. 366.

Fig. 367.

Fig. 368.

Fig. 369.

567. Pure Pirouette. A pure pirouette which consists of four or five turns without low-
ering the heel is most artistic.

Note. — Stullmueller, formerly royal solo dancer of Prussia, brought the pirouette sur le cou-de-pied
to seven rotations.

568. A mixed pirouette, in which the turns may be made alternately upon the heel and
ball, may be carried to fifteen or even more complete turns, with various changes of posi-
tions and movements.

569. The dancer should be precise in measuring the duration of his pirouettes, that
they may end with the music ; as it has an extremely disturbing effect upon what follows
if the pirouette is not finished upon the last music syllable allotted to it. For a pirouette to
be finished too late is more annoying than when it is finished too soon, for in the latter
event the time may be filled in by one or two tours en Fair.

570. The pirouette sur le cou-de-pied effects a changement of the feet ; that is, if the turn
is upon the left foot, it starts with the right foot in front, and ends with the right foot be-
hind the supporting left ; and it is proof of great skill and precision if the dancer ends in

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 1 57

a position exactly opposite to that from which he has started. A spring or jump, accom-
panied by a quick raising of the arms, is usually only made for the purpose of aiding a
poorly executed pirouette.*

571. The free leg may, during the turns of the pirouette, execute different embellish-
ments, such as battementSy ronds de jambe, fouettes, etc., but these are left to the taste and
discretion of the dancer.

572. The pirouette is most frequently used to lend a brilliant finish to enchainements
of dancing steps, but it may also be used as a preparation for a succeeding step.

573. The execution of beautiful pirouettes is an indication of the highest ability in
dancing, but their frequent use is ridiculous and always appears pedantic.

574- Pirouettes in the Air (Pirouettes en I'Jlir). Sect. 552 refers the reader to this number
for the turns in the air. While zjete en tournant is of course a turn in the air, the expres-
sion pirouette en I'air is usually understood to mean those turns which are executed while
the body is lifted in the air as the result of a strong jump upon both feet.

575. This movement is sometimes called volta or rivo/ta, Italian words which mean,
respectively, a turn, and a repeated or an opposite turn.

This kind of turn requires greater muscular exertion than is necessary in social dancing.
They occur in various national dances, and frequently persons who are not trained danc-
ers have acquired so much perfection in them as to be able to execute them in an oblique
position of the upper body. They are oftenest employed by circus riders.

They are usually executed after a preparatory temps tombe, and may be represented in
the script as follows :

a, kchappe; b, strong jump upon both feet; c, single b c d e

(simple) turn in the air; </, double turn in the air; e, finish- -» t\ P~S f~\ tt

ing position [Fig. 370]. S 2 > < |t at I,

576. Choregraphy of the Pirouettes. The pirouettes fig. 370.
are written in the same manner as the complete turns, but

in addition to the turning symbol, the letter t, meaning tours, with the corresponding
number, is placed below.

Fig. 371 shows: a, simple inward pirouette upon the right abed

foot; b, double inward pirouette upon the left foot; c, triple f~\ S~\ /~\ /~N

outward pirouette upon the right foot; d, quadruple outward It 2* 3* 4t

pirouette upon the left foot. *~* *" ° *

The symbol of the pirouette is written above the line, to
distinguish it from the symbol of the complete turn.

• Hcrr Stoige't explanation of the pirouettes ends here. It will be evident to those who have devoted
much time to the study of these movements, that the description that he has given is the result of
thorough knowledge of his subject, combined with many years of practice and the most exact ob-
servation of every movement.

158

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Thigh Beating Syllables [Temps de Cuisse)

}

511. The word cuisse, which means the thigh, as used in connection with this move-
ment, implies that that portion of the leg is particularly active therein.

In this movement the leg is entirely stretched and the thigh (cuisse) is so moved as to
describe two lines upon the floor with the tip of the foot. On account of this unusual activity
of the thigh, the movement is called temps or pas de cuisse, differing in accordance with the
non-transfer or transfer of the weight.

578. Execution to the right [Fig. 372]. Preparation: 2d balancing position of left.
In the part measure, the supporting leg is bended, and the left leg,

entirely stretched, beats audibly with the tip in 2d position, after
which movements the dancer hops to the right upon the supporting
right foot, and the left is put down again in the 2d and drawn audibly
into 5th position, either dessus or dessous.

579. If several such movements are executed consecutively with the same foot, no trans-
fer is made, and they are therefore merely temps or syllables. But if executed alternately,
a transfer must be added to each, thus constituting them steps which are known as pas de
traits de cuisse. They may be executed forward, backward or to the side.

580. These steps are very similar to beating steps, although no actual battement is made.
Exercise 80. Thigh Beating Syllables and Steps (Temps de cuisse et pas de traits de

cuisse) [Fig. 373].

Fig. 372.

-Hfrn £_f

y m m

f f ■

a~K(vl

\'i \L

\n \L

H^O

5 0-

if »i

It v.

H V^

J4)kI

11. ( vl

L v^

IT. v.

aI Uvi

■0

3
TL v.

IT v,

•5

Fig. 373.

a. Simple Over-Crossed Thigh Syllables to the Right (Temps de cuisse simples dessus
a droite).

b. Alternate Over and Under-Crossed Thigh Syllables to the Left (Temps de cuisse
changes dessus et dessous a gauche).

c. Alternate Thigh Step Forward (Pas de traits de cuisse alternatifs en avancant).

d. Alternate Thigh Steps Backward (Pas de traits de cuisse alternatifs en reculant).

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 1 59

The Beating Steps (Les Pas Battus)

581. The definition, explanation and execution of the term battre and its choregraphic
script have been given in §§ 160 and 267. This movement may be made with either or
with both feet.

582. Beatings are not steps, in themselves ; they should rather be considered as em-
bellishments which are added to other movements, in much the same manner as grace
notes or trills are added to a note of music; for beatings must be so much a part of the
steps which they ornament, that they will consume no more time than if they had been
omitted and the step or movement rendered in simple form.

583. Practice, skill, muscle, elasticity and endurance are all necessary to the proper

execution of the beating steps, and they belong to the theatrical dance exclusively.

Note. — The Zephyr step, with over and under beatings in the 3d position, referred to in § 517,
may be regarded as a beating step.

584- Changement of the Legs {Changemenh dejambes). The most common pas battus
are what is known as the changement s dejambes.

In Fig. 374* the beatings are numbered, to demonstrate the method of
counting them.

585. At this point let us consider the difference between the terms

battu and battement. The former (battu) relates to the actual contact which

is produced by the movement ; while the latter (battement) is the technical

name for the entire movement of which the beating is the result. In the

o Fio. 374.

battements the simple beatings (battus) are counted.

586. There are, therefore, two beatings, in a single changement of the legs, in which the
change is effected in balancing position, and upon one music syllable; of which the first
is the separation from a closed to an open position ; and the second is the resumption of
the closed from the open position.

587. In the cuts, the beatings are shown commencing from the heels, and extending
to the finishing positions, which are indicated by means of perpendicular dotted lines.

588. A simple changement de jambes is not technically regarded as a pas battu, unless
another beating is added to it.

In the beating steps, the falling back may be upon either or upon both feet; if upon
only one the other may be carried to any of the balancing positions.

589. Crossed Jump (Capriole ou "Entrechat). This name is applied to the repeated
crossing of the feet during the continuance of a single strong jump, and the name is de-
rived from the Italian word intrecciare, which means to weave or braid. For instance, colle
mani intrecciale means with braided hands.

* This and many other examples and explanations have been taken, by permission, from Klcmm's
" Catechism."

i6o

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The repeated beating together of the feet or legs with crossing called capriola, and the
crossed or braided beatings, are known as capriola intrecciata.

590. Both legs must cooperate in the execution of the entrechat, which may be made
from a preparatory bending in any position, followed by a strong jump.

The trioles, or triple crossings, should be executed during the jump ; as that move-
ment is of greater duration than the falling back.

The falling back occurs either in open or in closed position, according to the number
of the beatings and the original position.

591. Fig. 374 shows a simple changement de jambes from the anterior to the posterior
3d position.

Fig. 375 represents an entrechat clos a trois (a closed crossed jump of three beatings)
which goes from a closed to an open position.

Fig. 376 shows an entrechat ouvert a trois (a crossed jump of three beatings) going
from an open to a closed position.

Fig. 377 shows an entrechat a trois (Royal) beginning from a closed and ending in a
closed position.

Note. — The term "Royal" is understood by some authorities to mean the triple beating in 3d
position without changement, but that movement is really the capriole a trois.

Fig. 375.

Fig. 376.

Fig. 377.

Fig. 378.

Fig. 378 shows the entrechat a quatre, a crossed jump of four beatings.
The entrechats a cinq, six, sept, huit, etc. (of five, six, seven, eight beatings, etc.) are
easily understood by means of the above examples.

592. Turning in the cross jumps {entrechats) will be aided by placing the foot toward
which the body is to turn in a preparatory posterior 5th position.

593. Abbreviated Script. The symbol of the entrechat is composed of an appropriate
sign, to be written in place of the complete choregraphy. Below it the number of the posi-
tion in which it ends is added. Fig. 379 represents: a b C d e

a. Changement de jambes, ending in anterior 3d position <^K <£> <-S> <£> <£>
of right. 1» zh sr 5 £1

b. Entrechat ouvert a trois, ending in 2-1 position. • 379-

c. Entrechat clos a trois, ending in posterior 5th position of the right.

d. Entrechat quatre, ending in anterior 5th position of right.

e. Entrechat cinq, ending in double 2-1 position.
The number of beatings is placed inside the sign.

GRAMMAR OF THK ART OF DANCING

161

Fig. 3S0.

594. Half Counter Beating (Demi-Contretemps). The word contretemps means something
which is unexpected and apparently out of measure, and is used as a term for those move-
ments in dancing which appear unexpectedly, and which seem to be contrary to the measure.

Fig. 380 shows the movements very clearly. They are executed
as follows: Starting from a preparatory balancing 2d position, the free
leg is carried into a closed position, then to an open one, and touches
the supporting leg either behind and before, or before and behind, in
3d or 5th position in passing, but does not receive the weight. It is
executed entirely upon one music syllable during a light jump upon
the supporting foot. Thus the beating which begins while the body
is in the air appears to occur too late and is contrary to the measure.
It is probable that the name contretemps was applied on account of this
feature. The movement corresponds to the double beat in music which is called spondee.

595. Whole Counter Beating (Contretemps Entier). This is a step of two syllables, and
it may be executed forward, backward, sidewise, or in turning, for example, to the right.

Preparation: Right foot in posterior 5th position.

In the part measure, execute a hop upon the left foot, and lift the right to the side.

Upon the first syllable the right foot is put
down and glided to 2d position, where the
weight is transferred to it; and the second syl-
lable contains the demi-contretemps, which was
described in § 594 [Fig. 381].

If the succeeding step is to be made in the same direction, a transfer is added to the
second syllable.

The whole step appears almost to consist of an enchdinement of pas gliss'e and pas bourr'e,
if the point of the active foot lightly touches the floor during the beating with immediate
d'egage.

Pas jete, pas tomb'e, or any similar step, may be executed as a first syllable, if desire'd.

Fxercise 81. Whole Counter- Beating Steps {Pas contretemps entiers) [Fig. 382].

M.M. 60-80- J

HA^/L-ft^

<\?

Fig. 381.

H-^L^M-s

yk-HJkfl^NL-rK ^

»M

J±l

£*

Fio. 383.

The first two measures contain the complete, and the third the abbreviated script, and
the musical symbol appears in the fourth measure.

596. Broken Syllables and Steps (Temps et Pas Brio's). It was explained in § 4<> 1 that pas

\dl

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

coupe meant a cut or divided step. Un pas bris'e is also a step of one syllable

of a jump, during which the free foot is carried from one

open position to another, executing, in transit, a beating

before and behind (dessus et dessous), or vice versa; after

which it receives the weight of the body. While the

coupe is made in a straight line and divided in the middle,

the brise is in zig-zag form. Figs. 383 and 384 show the

movements of the feet very clearly.

597. The distinction between contretemps and brise is
clearly demonstrated in Figs. 385 and 386.

Brise' dessus
Fig. 383.

It consists
&

■A-*XJT^

vs •«
Fig. 385.

<A3

-K

Fig. 3S6.

In the contretemps the beating is usually added to the final movement as an embellish-
ment, and in the brise the step begins by beating.

598. If, after the beating, there is no transfer of weight, it is called un temps brise —
a broken syllable. Two or more such syllables, following one another upon the same foot,
will finish in an open position ; but if they are executed alternately, there is an unavoidable
transfer after each movement, constituting what are known as des pas bris'es alternatifs —
the alternating broken steps.

599. Although the beating in the bris'e is similar to that in the entrechat, there is this
difference : In the entrechat both feet are equally

active, while in the brise only one actually beats, /I *^\\ /[ ~^x\ nju\

while the other assists the movement. This move-

... . . . . . Fig. 387.

ment finds its musical prototype in the arpeggio.

Fig. 387 shows the script of the brise dessus, dessous in the full and the abbreviated

forms.

F.xercise 82. Broken Syllables [Temps bris'es) [Fig. 388].

a. Six over and under-crossed broken syllables to the right, one collecting syllable
and one transfer, followed by the same movements to the left (Six temps bris'es dessous et
dessus a droite, 1 assemble et 1 d'egag'e, en suite les memes mouvements a gauche).

In the part measure and the first full measure, the complete choregraphy is given, and
the abbreviated sign is used for assemble. The key at the end of the first half of the
melody indicates that the remainder of the enchainment goes toward the left.

b contains the same bris'e syllables as a, but they are executed dessous et dessus.

c. Alternate broken steps forward (pas bris'es alternatifs en avant), followed in the
second half by the same movements backward.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

163

d. Alternate broken steps backward {pas bris'es alternatifs en arriere), followed by the
same movements forward.

M. M.72-80- J

-"j*- -t* 'T** ^7

th » t r g

A ^A

<fS

A -^ -

-i-

sLl

4 TM T

/? f ~

_^_2

f-l?>i

t-^4

■\

I ^f-

L^i.|

L-ri.*r

tiuiiuoa

Fio. 388.

Pigeon Wing Steps (Ailes Je Pigeons — Pistolets)

l£l

^tv

VWVM.

Flo. 389.

600. The name "pigeon wing," which is applied to this step, doubtless arose from the
similarity of the movement to the beating of the wings of pigeons, but the derivation of its
other name (pislolels) seems to be unknown.

601. This step consists of the combination of brisi dessous and jeti, and may be exe-
cuted alternately, forward or backward, upon the

place, or in turning.

602. A single pigeon wing step may be compared
to striking a harp from low to high (arpeggio), and the
alternate steps may be compared to a continued trill
(trillo).

603. Execution (to the left). Preparation: Raise the left foot into posterior 2-4 bal-
ancing position, and bend the right leg in readiness for a
strong jump, during which the left leg beats against the calf
of the right, after which the legs are crossed in the air as in
the brisi. In falling back, the weight is caught upon the left
leg, and the right is immediately carried into the posterior 2-4
balancing position, in readiness for a repetition of the step
upon the other foot [Fig. 389].

These movements are clearly demonstrated in Fig. 390.

Fio. 39a

164 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 83. Pigeon Wing Steps (Ailes de Pigeons — Pistolets) [Fig. 391].

tiuation

Fig. 391.

The first two measures contain the complete choregraphy, and the third the musical
sign of repetition.

Chapter XI

PERIODICAL ENCHAINMENT OF DANCE STEPS

AND SYLLABLES

ik M ONG other things, § 7 likens dancing steps to words, combinations of steps to phrases
j[\. and sentences, and combinations of enchainements to paragraphs. Simple figures are
likened to verse lines, compound figures to stanzas, and the combination of several com-
pound figures or strophes (as in the Quadrilles) to an entire poem.

In the art of dancing, French terms are generally used, and step combinations are called
phrases ; phrase combinations are known as enchainements; and combinations of enc haine-
ments are called "strophes" or "couplets" (§§193 and 194). If the same /><6nw« or enchaine-
ments arc repeated, in like sequence, upon a certain number of measures of music, the whole
is called a " periodical enchainement," and several such periodical enchainements, composed of
the steps and syllables which have been described, will be given in this chapter, to promote
skill in execution and to demonstrate their application in various social and theatrical dances.
They are among the most helpful of all the exercises.

605. We will commence with a combination of pas chassis and pas ilevis, such as occurs
in several of the Quadrilles.

606. These exercises are ordered so as to be best fitted for practical instruction, in pref-
erence to the common method of combining the balances, traverses, solos, etc., while recog-
nizing that the old method contains certain advantages.

607. This book, however, is intended merely as a guide for the teacher, and it is left
to his judgment to select proper combina-
tions and to substitute other music In the
latter case, however, care must be exercised
that the rhythm exactly coincides with the
step movements.

Kxercise 84 a. One Chasing and Two
Raising Steps Forward {Une pas chassi et deux pas ilevis en avant) [Fig. 392].

The abbreviated script is used because the pas chassis have been described and explained
in §§475 to 479, and the pas clevis in §§ 430 to 433. The key always represents the direc-
tion upon the floor; that is, the figure.

165

Fio. 391.

i66

GRAMMAR OF THE AKT OF DANCING

I lJL

Fig. 393.

Fig. 394.

One Chasing and Two Raising Steps Backward (Une pas chass'e et deux pas elev'es en
arriere) [Fig. 393].

Exercise 84 b. One Chasing and Two
Raising Steps to the Right with Quarter-
Turn to the Left (Une pas chass'e et deux
pas elev'es a droit e et se tourner) [Fig. 394].

One Chasing and Two Raising Steps
to the Left with Quarter-Turn to the Right
(Une pas chass'e et deux pas elev'es a gauche et se tourner) [Fig. 395]

The turns upon both feet have been explained in § 541.

Exercise 84 c. Crossing: Three Chas-
ing Steps and a Half-Turn to the Right
(^Traverse: Trois chassis et demi-tour a
droite) [Fig. 396].

The key indicates the degree of turning.

Recrossing with Three Chasing Steps
and a Half-Turn to the Right (Retravers'e: Trois chassis et demi-tour a droite) [Fig., 397].

Exercise 84^. Balance and Transfer (Balanci-d'egagi) [Fig. 398].

Balance with four balancing steps.

The meaning of the words en balance
is explained in § 56 in their relation to
positions. In their application to move-
ments, they imply a certain buoyancy of
carriage upon the place. In this exercise,
various different syllables may be intro-
duced, as, for instance, a small pas de basque, pas tendu ou zephire, etc.

608. In this movement, the balance consists of four transfers into 2d position, while the
free foot glides backward into 3d position
during the raising of the supporting foot,
and then passes immediately into 2d posi-
tion. The full choregraphy is given in the
first two measures, but the subsequent
measures contain only the sign of transfer. FlG- 396-

Turning by the hand (tour de main) with three pas chassis and a quarter-turn to the
right. Four measures [Fig. 399].

609. The expression balanc'e is very frequently interpreted to mean one chass'e and two
pas elev'es to the right, with repetition to

the left ; but this is not technically correct,
as such movements do not contain the
buoyant movement upon the place, which
is usually inferred from the term balanc'e.
As a compromise, however, in favor of Fig. 397.

Fig. 395.

w£&

it n

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

167

those who have learned the figure in that manner, we will term that combination balance-
chass'e.

Fig. 39S.

Fig. 399.

Kxercise 85. Chasing Steps Forward and Back, to Right and Left Across; to Right
and Left to Centre, Balance Chasse, and Circular Chasing Steps Forward and Back {Chass'e
en avant et en arriere, a droite et a gauche, traverse, chasse a droite et a gauche, au milieu,
balanc'e-chass'e, chass'e tourn'e en avant et de retour) [Fig. 400] .

Note. — This exercise is similar to the preceding, but there is a difference in the music, the present
one being in 2-4 measure. Again, the movement goes either to right or left to centre, instead of back-
ward, and balance chasse is substituted for balance d'egag'e. Instead of the transfer there is a chasse-
tourne forward and backward.

<fr vr

Kxercise 86. Balance with One Thrown Stuffing Step, One Zephyr Step and One
Thrown Stuffing Step {Balance par un jeti-bourri et un pas de zephire et un jet'e-bourr'e)
[Fig. 401].

■i-JUi

*=~tf

/ ^^N

2>-jy

^ -tk

-I

F10. 401.

i68»

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Exercise 87. Balance with One Zephyr Step and One Thrown Stuffing Step {Balance
par un pas de z'ephire et unjet'e-bourre) [Fig. 402].

The two last-mentioned exercises are examples of the different effects of phrasing and
interpreting music. The same piece of music is used in both, but in Exercise 86 the first
measure is rendered staccato, and in the second, legato, and so on to the end. The staccato
movement is best fitted for the jet e bourr'e, and the legato for the pas de zephire. One may
therefore decide, from the music, the nature of the step to be danced; indeed, the rule can
be applied to the musician who can see, from the steps, how the music should be
rendered.

610. In theatrical dancing, unless the composer writes his music to coincide with the
movements of the dance, the dancer must consider each note with minuteness, and exe-
cute each movement in exact coincidence with the music.

It is this feature of coincidence which creates involuntary enthusiasm on the part of
spectators, and the fact that so little attention is bestowed upon it by most ballet masters
is beyond comprehension; for, although this quality of coincidence is really the mark of
their success, there are but few of even the most eminent artists of either sex, now appear-
ing in the ballet, who follow the exact rhythm of the music.

Exercise 88. Chasing, Throwing, Collecting and Gliding Steps (Chassis, jet'es, assembles
et glissades) [Fig. 403].

Fig. 403.

61 1 . The old custom of executing the Quadrille steps with jet'e and assemble is retained
by some conscientious teachers, for the reason that they are far more artistic and beautiful
than the walking or raising steps now in vogue.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

169

This custom cannot, however, be extended to social entertainments, because it is no
longer fashionable to dance correctly, and a dancer who executes his steps in exact rhythm
is regarded as ridiculous. Let us hope that fashion will, before long, change for the better
in this respect, even though we realize that such a change is not probable unless a taste
for correct and artistic dancing is manifested by one of the leading courts.

Exercise 89. This Exercise contains exactly the same movements as the preceding
one, but it is in 2-4 measure [Fig. 404].

Fig. 404.

Exercise 90. Combinations of Chasing, Raising, Gliding and Zephyr Steps (Phrases .
Chassis, clevis, glissades et ziphires) [Fig. 405].

F10. 405.

Forward, one chasing, one throwing and one collecting step (En avant : cbasse, jeti
et assemble).

Backward, eight small crossed, raising steps (boxed in) (En arriere : S pas ilevis
embolics.

To right, two gliding and one zephyr step ; to left, two gliding and one zephyr step
(A droite : 2 glissades et / pas de zipbire et a gauche ; les mimes pas).

170

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Crossing, two chasing and two zephyr steps ; recrossing, two chasing and two zephyr
steps {Traverse et retravers'e par 2 chassis et 2 pas de ziphires).

Exercise 91. This contains the same movements as the preceding, in 2-4 time
[Fig. 406].

f -7K

*\ -^kC

f "TK

,\n*sTT

Fig. 406.

Exercise 92. Combination of Chasing Step, Changement of the Legs, Cutting and Col-
lecting Steps (Phrases: Chassis, changement s de jambes, coupes-assembles).

Forward, one chasing step and two changements of the legs. Backward, the same
steps; upon the place, one cutting and one collecting step, alternating to right and left, and
executed four times (En avant ; 1 chass'e et 2 changements de jambes ; en arriere, les memes
pas sur la place, 1 coupe, et 1 assembl'e, 4 fois alternativement) [Fig. 407].

? TT-Vs

£ ^J

£ £.

Fig. 407.

Exercise 93. The same steps as in the preceding, executed in 2-4 time [Fig. 408].

A <> ^

Fig. 408.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

171

Exercise 94. Exercises in Body Turns and Pirouettes (Exercices des tours de corps et pirou-
ettes) [Fig. 409].

Fig. 409.

a. Traverse. In the first half of the transition, execute one chasing step and one com-
plete turn to the right, and for the second half, one chasing step and a half-turn to the
right. This occupies four measures of music, and the " retransition " {retraverse), which
contains the same movements, fills the remaining four measures.

b. This differs from a in direction only, the chasing steps beginning with the left foot
and the turns and progress of the entire movement going to the left.

t. Midway of the traverse and retraverse two turns are made and at the end there are
one and one-half; in the repetition the movement goes to the left.

This exercise is similar to the preceding one, as it contains first three and then two
and a half turns.

Note. — If the reader has carefully studied the explanations and choregraphy of the turns and
pirouettes, in §§ 546 to 549, further explanation of them is unnecessary.

rcise 95. Combination of Four Simple Zephyr Steps, One Chasing Step in Turn-
ing, and Two Alternate Cutting and Collecting Steps (Enchainement par j pas de zep/iire
simples, chasse tourn'e et 2 coupes-assembles) [Fig. 410].

*F/1'/^ \

K11;. 41a

Forward, four simple zephyr steps {pas tendus). Backward, one chasing step and two
jumped changements of the legs in turning, followed by one cutting step with collecting
first to the right and then to the left.

Exercise 96. Forward, Four Beaten Zephyr Steps. Backward, One Chasing ami Two

172

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Crossed Jumps of Four Beatings [entrechat s-quatre); Followed by a Cutting Step to Right
and Left upon the Place, and One Over-Crossed Collecting Step (brise) [Fig. 411].

Fig. 411.

The last two exercises are quite similar, the only difference being that in Exercise
95 the steps are simple, and in Exercise 96 they are beaten.

Exercise 97. Combination to the Right: a Throwing and a Stuffing Step Twice Exe-
cuted, Followed by a Turning Chasing Step, and the Whole Repeated to the Left
(Phrase : 2 jetes-bourres et un chass'e-tourrie a droite et repetition de la phrase a gauche)
[Fig. 412].

-^iFol

Fig. 412.

Exercise 98. Combination to the Right : One Throwing and One Stuffing Step Twice
Executed, Followed by a Turning Basque Step and a Zephyr Step, and the Same Steps
to the Left (Enchainement a droite; 2 jetes-bourres, 1 pirouette basque et 1 pas de zephire; a
gauche; les memes pas) [Fig. 413].

Itf .T. n

— ■ m — f — w

*****

1 r f — 1

r f , n =a

^p 1— — j — * —

0- „^ ^ ^

f_S\

—&0 j

nr J f

^3o^.

/ ^

Fig. 413.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

173

612. Exercise 99. Combination: One Gliding Step, Two Whip Syllables, and One
Throwing and Collecting Step (Phrase: f glisse, 2 fouettes, T jete-assemble) [Fig. 414].

7°-

FTL^FyN

Fig. 414.

This combination is usually known as "Flig-Flag," the name being derived from the
whipping movements, which follow one another in quick time. The same name is some-
times applied to another combination.

The movement consists of an accented gliding step, an over and under-crossed whip
syllable in rapid succession, one throwing and one collecting step.

a. Beginning with the right, two measures forward; with the left, two measures back-
ward; repeat the whole exercise, b. The same combination, with turning upon the whip
syllables, c. Crossing and re-crossing with the same combination in turning.

Kxercise 100. Combination: Basque and Stuffing Steps, and Basque Steps in Turning
(Enchainement : Pas de basque, bourr'ee et pirouette basque) [Fig. 415].

N O P 1 ^O P

Fic. 415.

Forward, two Basque steps ; backward, three stuffing and one collecting step ; forward,
two Basque steps; backward, two Basque steps in turning (En avant, 2 pas de basques; en
arriere ; J pas de bourre'es et I assemble ; en avant ; 2 pas de basques ; en arriere ; 2 pas de
basques en tournant).

613. This combination is found in the Gavotte of Gaetano Vestris, and the study of this
encbainement calls that beautirul classic to mind. It is universally recognized as a model
by all competent teachers of dancing, and merits all the honor it has received, for the
choice and sequence of its various movements are all truly artistic.

This entire dance may be divided into its various encbainement s ■, which can be used as
exercises, and he who masters them will have received a thorough course in dancing.

Chapter XII

THE CHOREGRAPHY OF THE FIGURE

THE word "figure," in dancing (§ 5), signifies the direction in which the dancers move
upon the floor, and may be drawn as a plan. The possibility of representing the figures
has been of great assistance to dance authors in writing descriptions of dances. As instruc-
tions for drawing such plans come within the province of this Grammar, the Author has
examined many of the systems of writing that have appeared, and in order to obtain a
method of representation that may be universally reliable and intelligible, has deduced and
devised from them the symbolism described in the following pages, which appears to him
to be an adequate solution of the problem.

In the following table are given symbols of the dancers and the figure which each de-
scribes, the gentleman being represented under the letter A, the lady under the letter B,
the figure of the gentleman under C, the figure of the lady under D, and the symbol of the
end of the figure under E.

Author Place Date ABC D E

Noverre Paris 1761 ^±- .tP\ <

Madel Erfurt 1805 &&£ AtBC v

Dancing Teachers' Society . Vienna 1844 /. / ._ .0

B. Klemm Leipzig 1855 Q "*& ,

Bazaar (p. 333) .... Berlin 1861 X 6 »

Bazaar (p. 347) .... Berlin 1864 /^\ ^ 0

L. Manzotti Milan 1885 © O , .»

A. Freising Berlin 1885 jfj? Jf §D , ♦

F. A. Zorn Odessa 1887 9 q > $

615. By referring to this table, it will be seen that the choregraphs quoted practically
agree as to the symbol of the figure of the gentleman and lady, by using a continuous
line to represent the former and a broken or dotted one for the latter ; but each applies

174

GRAMMAR OK THK ART OF DANCING I75

his own peculiar sign to indicate the persons of the dancers. Even these symbols have
been changed in Berlin, as is indicated by comparing the signs published in the "Journal
of Fashions" ("Bazaar"), page 233, for 1 861, and page 347, for 1864.

It will also be seen from the table that Balz, the inspector of the ballet in Berlin, used
the same signs in 1864 as did Noverre in Paris in 176 1, but in the opposite application.

616. It is plain that the use of different symbols by individual choregraphs leads to
unavoidable ambiguity, and that the only manner in which a script may become univer-
sally intelligible and definite is to adopt universal and arbitrary symbols which will not be
subject to change, but which will remain the same during all time.

After carefully considering each one of the systems referred to, the Author has selected
for the purpose a sign of the person which corresponds to the anatomical structure of the
body. Working upon the principle that this kind of a symbol would be intelligible to all
nations and would need no translation in any language (as would be the case if letters
were used), he has, therefore, evolved a sign that he believes will be perfectly clear.

617. As respects the person of the dancer in connection with the drawing of the fig-
ure, one must imagine that he sees it from a point directly above; that he has a bird's-
eye view, using the term in the same manner as we apply it to an imaginary view of a
building or a park.

From such a position, an observer would only see the top of the head, which is cov-
ered with hair, the tip of the nose, the shoulders, and the horizontal movements of the
arms. The activity of the feet would be only partly visible.

618. In drawing the symbol of the person, therefore, there has been taken the out-
line of the top of the head, the bone lines of the arms, and the soles of the feet. In these
outlines, the direction of the face may be known by the tip of the nose, the positions of
the arms by the degree of bending in the arm lines and the positions of the feet by the
sole signs.

Fig. 416 shows the complete drawing of the sign, and the respective /\t^ /V

abbreviations for the symbols of the gentleman and the lady. The arm jV ^P y)
line of the gentleman has been drawn with the palm upward and that of )/

the lady with the palm downward, for the reason that the gentleman
"presents" his hands and the lady "gives" hers in these positions. CO CPD

619. To further distinguish the sexes, the symbol of the gentleman Flo 4,6
has been filled in, while that of the lady is in outline. Also the figure

described by the gentleman is represented by a continuous line and that described by the
lady by a dotted one.

The symbol of the person is written at the starting point of the symbol of the figure,
and the arrow head at its end, while the position signs are drawn at any point in the fig-
ure where distinctness demands them.

620. In order to be more readily understood, it is often well to simplify the script by
representing only the part of the first dancer, as the figures of the other dancers are usually
also indicated thereby.

62 J. Perhaps the best method of obtaining a correct picture of a figure is to actually

176 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

draw the course of the dancers upon the floor. This practical demonstration will convince
the reader of the feasibility of the plan.

622. The representation of the various dancers by means of different colors would be
very much easier to follow, but it would be difficult to show more than six different per-
sons, and the cost of drawing and printing in more than one color is great, so small nu-
merals by the side of the person signs, and along the direction lines, may be used to represent
a number of dancers.

623. For the purpose of drawing figures for use upon the stage, a frame representing
the floor plan of the stage must be shown which provides similar arrangements and condi-
tions at all times. Fig. 417 shows such a frame.

The line a-a runs from the front to the back of the Fl?"d
stage, dividing it into halves, and is known as the per-
pendicular middle line. The term "right" signifies the
right side of the dancer when facing the spectators. bk — £ •— — W

The line b-b divides the stage into forward and
backward halves, and is known as the horizontal middle

line. / Avant-- scene

The point c, at which the middle lines cross one an- FlG _

other, is known as " centre."

Five side scenes or "wings" are represented on each side; these are numbered from
the front backward, and the ends of the third pair rest upon the horizontal middle line. A
passage is left free behind these wings.

624. The term descendre, which means walking or dancing downward, signifies that the
person approaches the front of the stage, and the term monter means the opposite. - These
expressions are literally correct, as applied to the stage, for the floor is slightly elevated at
the rear, so as to render all parts of the stage perfectly visible to the spectators. No explana-
tion is necessary as to dancing forward, backward or to the side, except that these directions
radiate from the person of the dancer, without reference to his position

upon the stage or his relation to the spectators.

625. A dancer may, therefore, move either upward or downward, by
walking forward ; or he may walk or dance in perpendicular, horizontal
or irregular lines, forward, backward, diagonally or sidewise.

626. If the frame consists of a simple quadrilateral figure, it repre-
sents only that portion of the stage which is visible from the auditorium. Fig. 418.
Fig. 418 shows such a frame. The dotted zig-zag shows the opening

figure of the first couplet of the Cachucha, a Spanish solo dance, which is fully explained
later in this work [§921 et seq.\

627. Fig. 419 shows a group from the ballet Amor, by L. Manzotti, and plainly indi-
cates that the entire group faces the spectators.

The representation of the figures of stage dances is very different from that of social
dances, for the reason that spectators sit or stand around the hall in social dances, whereas
they are all in the same relative position to the stage in theatrical work. Therefore, the

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

'77

invariable stage rule to turn the back to the spectators as seldom as possible cannot be
applied in any degree to social dancing.

628. The French Quadrille has been selected as the I XI —

first example of the application of the choregraphy of the / c£ \ )>

figures, in social dancing, because that dance is universally / — r^^c

known, and is, therefore, more easily demonstrated. In / aLuAfcv.

order to convey a proper idea of the figures and their cho- j .V ] j\\ [jfC

regraphy, it is necessary to give a description of the whole / ~~ f^v*J I V\ jT\

dance in detail. /- ^^W*^^

Note. — It may appear entirely superfluous to many readers Fie. 419.

to devote so many pages to the description of the ordinary Contre

Dans/, whereas other writers have found a single page quite sufficient to answer the purpose ; but this
description has not been written for those who merely desire to learn the various figures and their se-
quence. It has been completely and minutely given so that those who study the explanation carefully
will be enabled to clearly and satisfactorily answer, both for themselves and others, any question that
may arise regarding this beautiful dance.

Chapter XIII

THE CONTRA DANCE AND QUADRILLE

THE term contre danse, translated literally, means "opposite dance"; and the term
quadrille, applied to dancing, means, technically, the assembling of four or more
ladies and a like number of gentlemen, in the form of a square (quarr£).

The Contra Dance and the Quadrille differ only in the positions of the dancers, for
the same figures may be executed in either, in which case they retain the same names ; al-
though it is not customary to introduce so great a variety of figures in the Contra Dance,
because only two couples form a set.

With respect to the names of the various simple and compound figures, this Grammar
can recognize as authentic only the literal meaning of the term which is applied to each,
for the reason that traditions and anecdotal references differ widely and not infrequently
contradict one another [§ 413].

THE THEORY OF THE POSITIONS IN THE QUADRILLE

630. There have been used two systems of numbering the couples in Quadrilles.
They are as follows :

SYSTEM A SYSTEM B

I I

2 4 3 4

3 2

These systems have been advocated by twelve different masters in their respective
works, and in the following table these authorities are divided under the respective sys-
tems they advocate :

SYSTEM A SYSTEM B

i Tschutter (Jahn), Dresden . . 1835 * Maedel, Erfurt 1805

2 Dancing Teachers' Soc, Vienna 1844 2 Dancing Teachers' Acad., Paris i860

3 Buchey, Greitz . ... . 1852 3 Balz, Ballet Inspector, Berlin . 1861

4 Fricker, Dessau 1865 4 Scipio, Hamm 1865

5 Cellarius, Paris 1862 5 Gohle, Dresden 1874

6 Martin, Philadelphia .... 1864 6 B. Klemm, Leipzig .... 1875

178

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

'79

~^T

Afc

Fig. 420.

The fact that the advocates of the two systems balance so evenly is not due entirely
to European authority, for it will be noticed that an American appears among the support-
ers of System A.

The Author had adhered consistently to System A for more than forty years, having
learned it in childhood, but while preparing this work, he thoroughly contemplated each
system, submitting each to every test, and, after mature deliberation, decided to adopt
System B for the following reasons :

631. There are but two couples in a Contre Danse; the couples numbered 3 and 4 are,
therefore, merely added to complete the Quadrille arrangement. In the execution of the
Quadrille, the opposite couple always follow the first couple or the first lady, and that
couple are, therefore, actually the second couple; while the couple at the right of the head
couple follow in third place, and must therefore be considered the true third couple.

Again, suppose a teacher asks a new pupil which are the second couple — he will invari-
ably signify that opposite the head couple, as that will appear to him to be the natural
order.

System B has also been adopted by many of the more recent author-
ities, among them being Freising, Wallner and Guttman ; the German
Academy of the Art of Teaching Dancing also accepts that theory as
correct.

632. Let us suppose the floor plan of the hall to represent a map — at
the top is North; at the bottom, South; at the right, East, and at the left,
West. Let us say that the entrance is in the South side of the hall, and
placing the four couples in the form of a square, the first couple stand in the North, the
second in the South, the third in the West, and the fourth in the East [Fig. 420].

633. If the square be composed of eight couples, a letter is added to the number of
the couple, and couple 1 a are opposite, and dance with couple 2 b (w'j-
a-vis) [Fig. 421].

If three couples stand in each line, the letter c is added, and if there
are four couples in each line, the letter d.

If two or more couples stand in each line, the couples marked a
are the first in their respective lines.

634. It is an almost universal practice to consider that the first
couple in a Quadrille stand facing the orchestra, but there are frequent
exceptions to this rule. Sometimes the couple facing the entrance to

the hall are called the head couple. Very often the orchestra is placed in an adjoining
room at the side, in order to save the space in the hall which would otherwise be occu-
pied by the musicians, and in such cases the position opposite is not considered as appro-
priate for the head couple. The same is true where the entrance is at the side of the hall.
It is always necessary to provide a place for a piano which is not near a window or a
heater, because heat and dampness injure that instrument; thus we have a certain limita-
tion in placing an orchestra. If, however, there is only a violinist, as is often the case in
teaching, a position may be given him which will be most convenient to the dancers, and

Nord

o"V ou.

•

•,.° V

Sud

Fi<;. 421.

180 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

if the dancing master himself plays the violin he may stand wherever his purpose is best
served.

635. In case neither the orchestra nor the entrance can serve as a guide it is well to
observe this general rule:

The first place or place of honour cannot be near the entrance, hence that place which
is opposite the entrance should be considered the first. A throne is never placed at the
entrance of a throne room.

636. The First Person in a Quadrille. It is usually conceded that the first place belongs
to the lady, but some descriptions assign the initiative to the gentleman.

It is the Author's opinion that wherever the charms of the Muses are evoked for the
beautifying of life, precedence should be given to the gentler sex, although man should
always lead in points of strength and courage, being naturally adapted therefor. The first
place is universally assigned to the bride at a wedding festival, and it is no more than proper
to extend this same rule to all social functions.

637. In the Quadrille, the first lady begins the dance, and if at a private residence, the
mistress of the house is always regarded as the first lady. If, however, she does not dance,
for whatever reason, she delegates her position to an adult daughter, a younger sister, a
cousin, or anyone else whom she may select.

If the function is given in honour of a prominent guest of either sex, the first rank is
always given to that person and the guest of honour stands in the first place. At a birth-
day or engagement dance or other honorary affair, the person honoured is always assumed to
be in the first place, wherever he or she may stand.

In case there is no lady present who has a peculiar right to the first place, that point is
arbitrarily determined by the conductor in accordance with the conditions of the hall.

638. For the proper understanding of the diagrams which follow, it is necessary to
specifically name each of the different parts, single and combined. We shall therefore first
consider the explanations.

Figure and Strophe, or Couplet

639. The word "figure," as has been already explained, signifies the lines upon which
the dancers proceed. The term probably arose from the fact that it may be drawn upon
the floor. A traverse, for instance, is a simple figure.

A figure-strophe is composed of the enchdinement of such simple figures, and as has been
stated in § 7, it may be likened to a stanza of poetry, composed of a number of lines or
verses corresponding to the number of enchainements of eight measures which constitute it.

Note. — The word "couplet" has been adopted for this Grammar, after long and careful con-
sideration, because it avoids the ambiguity which arises from the use of the word " figure."

French terms are accepted as technical names for movements, steps, figures, etc., in all

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING l8l

countries where'dancing is properly and scientifically taught; a step combination is there-
fore called une phrase, and a strophe, un couplet.

640. The Quadrille of the present day usually contains six couplets, which are called
by the following names: Pantalon, tt'e, Poule, Trenis, Pastourelle and Finale.

The fourth couplet (Trenis) was inserted many years after the others, and even now it
is not executed in all countries. It should perhaps be left out entirely, as it too closely
resembles the Pastourelle which follows it.

Many dance managers add to the last couplet so many different logical and illogical
combinations that one is often at a loss to decide which is most remarkable, the diligence
of the orchestra, the good nature of the abused dancers, or the presumption of the so-called
"manager" in undertaking to present something of which he is ignorant.

641. The number of figures and couplets varies from time to time. The Author saw
at a very elaborate ball in Berlin in 1833 a French Quadrille of eleven couplets. In 1836
it was usual to dance seven couplets, in Norway, Sweden and Denmark.

It was customary, during the early part of the nineteenth century, for persons of
fashion to study new couplets for the Quadrille each year, and every one of these was
known by its specific name, and its peculiar combination of steps. Persons who had
danced for years spent weeks in practice before taking part in the Quadrille.

642. The simple figures usually bear the names of the geometrical forms which they
describe upon the floor, as, for instance, cbaine, balance, tour de main, traverse. The
couplets or strophes bear names that are seldom suggestive of any object or movement,
the names being often derived from the title of a famous musical composition or of a
song, or from the name of its inventor, or some celebrity.

The name of each couplet often appears at the beginning of the corresponding music,
but these names are of no value, and are usually disregarded, because their derivation is
uncertain.

643. The custom of speaking of simple figures as tours, and of entire strophes as
■ figures," has been common for more than a century, but this application of the words
is technically incorrect.

The literal significance of the word tour is a circular movement, and the expression un
tour de roue means a single rotation of a wheel. Un tour de valse means a single rotation
of the Waltz, or sometimes, to waltz once around the hall.

Balance and traverse may be called figures, but not tours, because, while they do con-
tain movements which would describe certain lines upon the floor, they contain no turn-
ing, and the word tour implies that quality.

Certain rules relative to the execution of the various figures must be given, besides
the exact description of each of the drawings which follow.

644- Division of Time — Measure. It is necessary, before applying music to the vari-
ous movements, to "count" the different steps and figures, and in Quadrilles such
counting is usually divided into periods running to eight.

In this division, however, the count relates to the number of music syllables or tempi,
and not to the number of measures. A measure of Quadrille music contains two music

182 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

syllables and two steps, but it is the number of music syllables that count in the figures
and not the number of measures ; in the same manner that a line of poetry is composed
of a certain number of word syllables, irrespective of the number of words.

645. Signal (Rjtournelle). To enable the participants to take their places in the set,
either eight or sixteen measures of music are played before the actual execution of a Contra
Dance or Quadrille. These introductory measures constitute the signal or ritournelle.
The music of the Quadrille starts immediately after the various couples are placed and
the " sets " completed.

646. Prelude. At the beginning, the dancers wait during eight measures of the music,
which are played to indicate the tempo, after which the actual dancing commences. A
similar period of eight measures is played at the beginning of each couplet or strophe.
The most suitable tempo for the Quadrille, when the steps are properly executed in 2-4
or 6-8 time, is about M.M. 100; but for the walking steps now in use this may be in-
creased to M.M. 116. In this connection it may be mentioned that the tempo in some
countries runs as high as M.M. 144, which is nonsensical, as so great a speed precludes
even a uniform and graceful walk.

Original Steps

647. The steps formerly used in the various figures of Quadrilles and Contra Dances
were as follows :

FIGURE STEP COMBINATION

En avant (forward). Pas chass'e et deux pas ilevis.

En arriere (backward). Pas chass'e et deux pas eleves.

A droite (to right). Pas chass'e et deux pas eleves.

A gauche (to left). Pas chass'e et deux pas eleves.

'Traverse (crossing). Trois pas chassis et deux pas eleves en tournant.

Balance chass'e (balance). Unpas chass'e et deux pas eleves a droit ou a

gauche.

Tour de main (turning by the hand). Trois pas chassis et deux pas ilevis.

(See Exercises 84 and 85, and §§ 608 and 609.)

648. One jeti and one assembli may be substituted for the pas ilevis, if the dancer
desires to still further improve the execution of the steps (Exercise 88, § 611).

It is a matter of profound regret that it is no longer fashionable to properly execute
the steps, — that by so doing one renders himself ridiculous; but it is necessary, in teach-
ing, to strictly observe the proper combinations. This applies especially to the teaching
of children, and all competent and conscientious instructors follow the practice, for the
aesthetic development of the pupils and of their movements which it affords [§ 611].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING J 83

649. Four pas de basques, executed alternately to the right and left, are substituted for
the balance in North Germany ; and, if well executed, they present a very pretty effect.
In other places the balanc'e-d'egage (explained in § 608) is executed.

650. It is now an almost universal custom to walk through a Quadrille, but it is none
the less desirable or advantageous to learn the proper steps, and the correct method of ex-
ecution, for the training that is gained by their practice gives grace of movement and
educates the sense of measure ; while he who neglects to acquire these steps seldom, if
ever, even walks according to measure in a Quadrille, or indeed walks properly, to say
nothing of dancing.

651. It was for many years customary to exercise the utmost precision in the execu-
tion of the steps in a Quadrille, and not infrequently they were accompanied by artistic
embellishments, so that the dance was far more beautiful than it now appears. Since that
time, however, custom has changed, and fashion is a tyrant from whose decree it would be
useless for the dancing master to appeal, so he has been obliged to follow it.

Even now, a person may endeavour to walk in measure without seriously offending the
rules of social usage, although no attention is paid to the measure in many countries, and
the figures are absolutely neglected, while certain persons exclaim, " Ce nest plus le bon ton
de danser en mesure" (It is no longer good form to dance in measure).

How is it possible to so far distort taste and reason as to find beauty and attractiveness
in that which is positively unlovely, simply because it is fashionable? It would be as sen-
sible to introduce inharmonious and discordant tones in musical compositions, for if taste
can so far err in dancing, is it not possible that this may be the fate of music in the future?
No conscientious teacher can find it possible to teach in such a manner, for such dancing
is offensive to common sense, to artistic taste, and to beauty.

652. He who disregards the natural sense of measure, impairs it; and he who labours
against the influence of the beautiful in art, in nature or in life, descends the ladder of
human progress.

It is only fair to assume that a person who wilfully opposes the wishes of a conscien-
tious manager at a ball, or who disregards the rules of social custom, would, if opportunity
and occasion arose, violate the laws of the state. It should be firmly impressed upon the
minds of the young that their dancing is sure to indicate their character, their education
and their breeding.

653. In dancing, the lady always stands at the right of her partner. This is in con-
formity with the general rule which assigns that position to whomsoever one wishes to
particularly honour, cither in dancing, in walking, at table or in a carriage.

654. The Contra-Dance may be executed by as many couples as space will permit, and
is always danced in two opposite lines.

655. In a Quadrille, however, at least four couples must participate to form the
square, although six, eight, ten, twelve or even more couples may be used. Indeed, sets
of twenty or thirty couples have been formed, but such a number is impracticable, and
should be avoided, as it causes too great a distance between the vis-a-vis (opposite couples).

The music for a traverse (crossing) is composed of four measures, and provides for

184 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

only eight walking steps ; as the proper length of such a step is not more than that of one
of the feet, a square of eight persons is best adapted to the music.

656. In case a person or a couple is lacking to fill a set, one or two persons may pass
to the vacant place and dance, thus filling both positions. In such case, however, the
gentleman should always inquire if the double exertion will be agreeable to his partner,
before undertaking it.

It sometimes happens that a hall is so crowded that double squares are formed, con-
sisting of, say, twenty-four couples. In such cases twelve couples dance through the first
figure, and then rest, while the same is executed by the other twelve. This plan doubles
the duration of the Quadrille, but it is usually tiresome to the dancers, and should there-
fore be avoided, whenever possible.

In cases where there are twice as many ladies as gentlemen, each gentleman may en-
gage two partners, dancing first with one and then with the other, but unless this is done
in all the sets it is improper to introduce the feature.

Standing and Sitting during the Quadrille

657. While it is not only natural but desirable to sit during a Cotillion or a Mazurka,
the practice should never be tolerated in a Quadrille.

The execution of an ordinary French Quadrille, it is true, affords sufficient time for sit-
ting while two couples are executing the figures, and while it is, beyond question, more
agreeable to be comfortably seated and to pass the time in conversation with an interest-
ing lady, still the practice tends to cause the couple to neglect the dance and therefore to
disturb the other dancers. The carrying of chairs is also inconvenient and unpleasant.

658. Before engaging a partner for the Quadrille, a gentleman should arrange for a
vis-a-vis, that is, another gentleman who will dance opposite ; if no vis-a-vis can be found,
and he has engaged a lady, he is under the disagreeable necessity of excusing himself. He
should at the time of finding a vis-a-vis arrange for a particular place in the hall, that they
may not be compelled to hurriedly find a position when the signal is given.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 1 85

The French Contra Dance {La Contredanse Franfaise)

THE FIRST COUPLET OR STROPHE PANTALON

659. It is said that the name of this couplet is taken from its original music, which
was the air of a French song commencing with the word " Pantalon," although the Italians
believe the strophe to be named for one of the characters of the old Italian comedies and
pantomimes, in which certain mythical personages, such as Pantalon, Polischinello, Colum-
bine, etc., always appeared.

660. In our language, a word like Pantalon would be entirely out of the question as a
title for a strophe, and it sounds very strange to us, but it would not appear unusual to
the French. We have incorporated into our language many French words — such as names
of various articles for the use of ladies, especially toilet articles — which if translated literally
would sound stranger still, but nobody thinks of avoiding them.

661. The First Figure in Pantalon is called Right and Left {Cbaine Anglaise Entiere).
Those figures in which the hands are alternately given in meeting are called cbaines.

Of these there are several different examples, such as cbaine anglaise, cbaine des dames, cbaine
en trots, en quatre, en six, en huit, which are named in accordance with the number of dancers,
as well as the grande cbaine, chaine en ligne, cbaine aux bras, tour de cbaine, and others. If
the lines described by the dancers in these figures were drawn upon the floor they would
look like chains, and were the dancers to halt at the precise moment in which all the hands
are joined, an actual chain would be the result.

This particular cbaine is called "anglaise," from the fact that it is said to be of English
origin.

In the Fnglish language, although the name Pantalon is applied to the couplet, this
figure is known as " right and left," while the cbaine des dames is known as " ladies' chain,"
and the demi-cbaine anglaise as " half right and left."

Cbaine anglaise entiere is so named because it leads to the opposite positions and back
to place, thus describing a complete figure.

In this figure, although it is not at present customary in all countries, the hands should
be given, as is indicated by the word cbaine in its title. The practice is of advantage, for
the reason that if one presents his right hand to his vis-a-vis in passing, and then joins
left hands with his partner for the turn, it will be impossible to mistake the turning, which
frequently occurs in such cases if the hands arc not joined. In teaching, the instruction
should at least begin with the joining of the hands, for the sake of demonstration.

The number of measures necessary for each figure will be found at the beginning of
the following descriptions :

I., II. Right and Left (Chaine Anglaise Entiere). Fight measures. The first couple
exchange places in the set, by giving right hands to the vis-a-vis and then turning partners

i86

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

4 Mesures iTukte)
Fig. 422.

to position by the left hands. This consumes four music measures, and is called demi-
chaine anglaise [Fig. 422]. The same movements executed upon the succeeding four
measures restore the dancers to their original posi-
tions in the set, and form the chaine anglaise entiere
[Fig. 423]. In giving the hands, the arms should be
moved gracefully in curved lines and in rounded
form and one should look at the person to whom the
hand is given [§§312-319].

662. III. Balance Partners (Balance). Four meas-
ures. The term se balancer means to rock or swing,
or to weigh, in which latter significance the English
word "balance" is also used. The word is some-
times written in the imperative mood, balance?.. While this is quite correct in "prompt-
ing," where the word is given as a command, it cannot be used as the name of a figure,
for this use of the word renders it a noun instead of a verb and the noun is spelled balance.
This rule is also applicable to the terms traverse, croise and other similar terms.

At the time of the composition of this figure, the dancers did actually rock from one
foot to the other, in the same manner as in the balance sur place and the demi-balance, and
later this movement was superseded by more elaborate steps, as fashion demanded, and it
became customary to execute the pas tendus or zephyr steps. But now that the artistic
steps have gone out of fashion, it is the almost universal custom to execute this figure by
means of one chasing and two raising steps, first to the right and then to the left, although
the movement is not, properly speaking, a real balance [Fig. 424].

663. A Quadrille, if properly executed, may be said to represent a conversation, yet,
in this dance, it is not at all uncommon to find even
the most polite persons committing an entirely un-
necessary, but none the less serious, breach of eti-
quette. It is a positive rule of politeness that one
should face the person whom he addresses; this is so
natural that one never thinks of disregarding it ; still,
in the balance where the chassis are used, many, and
we really believe most, dancers step directly forward
instead of going to the right, and thus deliberately
turn their backs to their partners, in supreme unconsciousness of the fault.

The face should always be turned toward the person with whom one is to dance, so
that conversation will be possible, if desired.

664. IV. Turning by the Hand (Tour de Main). In this figure the dancers join right,
or both, hands with their partners and walk in a small circle around to place [Fig. 425].

It is at present the general practice to give both hands in this figure, but it is more
correct to give the right only; first because the name of the figure only calls for the giv-
ing of one hand, and if both hands were intended, the plural form would be used and the
name would be tour des mains; and second, because the figure extends through four

IV.

4 Mes

Fig. 424.

*£?§*

4 Mes.

Fig. 425.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

I87

measures of music, which provide for eight walking steps, each about the length of one
of the feet.

If one hand is given, eight such steps will bring the dancers back to the exact place
from which they started ; but if both hands are given, eight such steps will carry them
once and a half around the set. The same condition exists in the case of c has si steps.

665. V., VI. Complete Ladies' Chain (Cbaine des Dames Enticre). Eight measures.
The ladies advance, and give right hands, in the centre, pass by and give left hands to
the opposite gentlemen, who also give left hands, and turn the ladies so as to face the
centre, while the gentlemen regain those positions in the set which they have left at the
commencement of the figure to meet the visiting ladies, for which purpose they advance
diagonally to the right [Fig. 426].

This evolution requires four measures, and its repetition, upon the four measures suc-
ceeding, brings the ladies once more to their original places, and completes the figure
[Fig. 427].

666. VII. Half Promenade (Demi-Promenade). This figure was at one time called
queue de chat (cat's tail). In it, the couple join both hands, with the right crossed above
the left, and proceed to the place opposite in the set [Fig. 428].

VI.

vn.

vra.

4 Mrs

Fic. 417.

4 Me*.
Fio. 429.

667. The word demi means " half," and signifies that the figure leads only to the oppo-
site position, from which the couple regain their places by means of a demi-chaine anglaise
[Fig. 429] which consumes the remaining four measures of the music and ends the strophe
or couplet of a Con/re Danse. If, however, the dance be a Quadrille, the entire couplet js
repeated, and the first and second couples wait while the "second party" (third and fourth
couples) execute the same figures.

THE SECOND COUPLET OR STROPHE l/ETE

668. The name L'Ete, meaning "The Summer," which has been applied to this strophe,
is also said to be derived from the opening words of a song, upon whose melody the figures
were arranged. This couplet has been technically described for nearly two centuries by the
following formula: En avant deux el en arriere, cbass'e a droit e et a gaucbe, traverse, c has si

i88

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

a droite et a gauche, balance et tour de main; but there have existed differences of opinion
as to the succession of the various figures, and notwithstanding the fact that the above suc-
cession has been the one most generally accepted, it is not exactly proper, for the combi-
nation would require twenty-eight measures of music; thereby contradicting the rules, as
well as the sense of measure. This disparity is corrected by Gardel and Blasis, by omitting
either the first chass'e a droite et a gauche or the balanc'e (see p. 362, " Manuel de la Danse,"
by Blasis, revised by Gardel, published by Roret, Paris, 1830).

The probable cause of this misunderstanding is the improper placing of a comma and
the word et. If, instead of writing retravers'e, balance et tour de main, we write retravers'e
et balanc'e, tour de main, it is clearly indicated that the retravers'e and the balanc'e are con-
nected, in which case only four measures of music are used, and the persons who remain
upon their places during the retravers'e of their partners execute a balanc'e, which is followed
by a tour de main upon the succeeding four measures.

The most competent authorities show this couplet in this manner, and it is given in
this order in the "Catechism of the Art of Dancing," by B. Klemm.

111

IV.

1 y 1

1 1

2 1

2 2
4 Mes Tnkte

>^0
2 2

4 Mw

4 Mes

C>''' 0

1 2

4 Mes

Fig. 430.

Fig. 431.

Fig. 432.

Fig. 433.

669. In places where it is customary to execute the balanc'e-chass'e (§ 609), the couplet
is usually danced in the following order, which is recommended because of its natural
sequence: Immediately following the prelude of eight measures, the first lady and the oppo-
site gentleman (vis-a-vis) commence the figures (§ 637).

I. Forward and Back Two (En AvantDeux et en Arriere). Four measures. One chass'e
and three pas elev'es forward; same backward [Fig. 430].

II. To Right and Left (Chasse a Droite et a Gauche). Four measures [Fig. 431].

Note. — One should never neglect to return to place after this figure, as the omission would dis-
turb the succeeding figure. Many persons habitually go to the centre in the chasse left, but this is incor-
rect and only allowable where there is a great deal of space.

III. Crossing (Traverse). Four measures. In this figure each walks to the left in a
curved line to the place of the vis-a-vis, and turns to face the centre [Fig. 432].

IV. To Right and Left to Centre (Chasse a Droite et a Gauche au Milieu). Four meas-
ures. Especial care must be taken in this figure to reach the centre by means of the chass'e
to the left, in order to regain one's position in proper time for the balanc'e-chass'e, which
follows instead of the retravers'e [Fig. 433].

.— "— »

4Mes

4 Me* X

Kig. 434.

F1G.43S.

. GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 189

V. Balance Partners (Balance-Chaste). Four measures. This makes it necessary for the
partners to face one another and balance to right and left [Fig. 434].

VI. Turn by Hand to Original Positions in the Set {TourdeMainavotre'Place)[¥\g.^c].
At the conclusion of the last of these figures, they

are repeated by the second lady and the first gentle-
man, the third lady and the fourth gentleman, and
the fourth lady and the third gentleman, in the order
named.

670. The custom of bowing in each en avant
deux (forward two) is superfluous. The bows to part-
ners and to centre at the beginning and the end of
the dance are sufficient for good taste. Repeated
reverences during the figures are quite as unnecessary
as they would be in a social call.

Of course these repeated salutations have their proper place in many Quadrilles, no-
tably in the Quadrille a la Cour, where they form a part of the figures, and allowance is made
for them both in time and in music. However, the most elegant and artistic salon dances,
the Minuet and the Gavotte, contain but four bows, two at the beginning and two at the
end, the first being to the spectators and the second to the partner, in each case.

THE THIRD COUPLET OR STROPHE LA POULE

67J. It is said that the name of this strophe (The Hen) was taken from the original
music, which, at the time of the balance, resembled the cackling of a hen.

The figure is commenced by
the first lady and second gentle- j B m.

man, as in the second strophe. o • • _i

I. Crossing [Traverse"). Four / \ T(" tC *

measures. This is executed by join- I * r-J1

ing right hands and walking to the \ / " j ~&t

opposite places [Fig. 436]. ^ -

co
m
rig

[I. Crossing Back (Helraversi). ' «

B, ... 4Mes 4M«* 4 Mrs

Hour measures. In this the active

, • • , e . j i_ wl Fig. 43d. Fig. 437. 1 ft* 438.

couple join left hands upon the fifth

music syllable, and pass by, giving

right hands to partners upon the seventh music syllable, thus forming an irregular line in

which the dancers may conveniently face one another [Fig. 437].

III. Balance in Line {Balanci en Ligne). Four measures. In this figure, the ladies ex-
ecute first one cbass'e and two pas eleves to the right, then the same steps to the left ; while
the gentlemen execute first one chassi and two pas ilevis to the left, followed by the same
steps to the right [Fig. 43 8 J.

190

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

This balance is sometimes executed by one chass'e-tourne en avant a droite, and the same
movements back to place. This is very good, if properly executed.

Still others execute the original balance degag'e or pas de Basque sur la place. One
should always look at the person toward whom he directs his movement.

672. IV. Half Promenade (Demi-Promenade). Four measures. This figure leads only
to the opposite side. It will be noticed that it is executed by one couple exactly as in the
first strophe, while the lady of the other couple, who began the strophe, stands at the
left of her partner before the demi-promenade ; and, as it is not necessary to the demi-prom-
enade that she change her place, she remains in this relative position, until the conclusion
of the figure, when she regains her position at her partner's right, by means of a turn in
his direction. The arms are crossed during the entire figure [Fig. 439].

V. Forward and Back, Two (En JlvantDeux et en Jlrriere). Four measures. It is, of
course, understood that this figure is executed by the same couple who commenced the
figure [Fig. 440].

673. VI. To Right and Left (Chasse a Droite et a Gauche). Four measures. It was at
one time customary to execute a dos-a-dos in place of this figure. In the dos-a-dcs the dancers

IV.

4Mes

Fig. 440.

*0
I

VI.

V V

4Mes

Fig. 441.

VD.

Z 8

1 1

4Mes

Fig. 442.

vra.

4Mes
Fig. 443.

approach and pass, stepping around one another to the left, back to back, and returning to
place [Fig. 441].

674- VII. Forward and Back, Four (En Jlvant Quatre et en Arriere). Four measures.
In going back, one should turn the head slightly toward the partner, as if to speak; thus
avoiding a too automatic appearance, and rendering more apparent the similarity of the
Quadrille to a conversation [Fig. 442].

VIII. Half Right and Left (Demi-Chaine Anglaise). Four measures. This figure brings
the dancers to their original places in the set and restores, the form of the square for the
execution of the fourth strophe [Fig. 443].

THE FOURTH COUPLET OR STROPHE LA TRENIS

675. This strophe bears the name of Trenitz, a famous dancer who is said to have
invented it about the year 1800. It is not to be found in works prior to that time, and is
now omitted in most countries.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 191

676. This strophe has undergone such changes that confusion often arises regarding
it. It is executed in some places with traverse-croise, in others with crois'e-tr averse, and in
still others with the three hooks (crochets a trois). The Author has seen it danced with an
additional chaine des dames in England, Norway and the East Indies; it is also danced with
chasse-croise and in other ways.

The best course is to drop the whole strophe, but it is necessary to represent and explain
it here.

677. The original and correct sequence of the
strophe, as composed by Trenitz, was as follows : 1

I . First Couple Forward and Back (Premiere Couple \f
en Jlvanl el en Arriere). Four measures [Fig. 444].

678. There exist essential differences between the
words couple, deux and paire, but they afe very easily
explained and comprehended. Although a gentleman 2 *
and lady who dance together as partners are regarded es
as a couple, a gentlemen and the opposite lady are ,G" 444"
not, but are designated by the term deux, which, as

an unqualified numeral, does not imply any relationship between the persons to whom it
is applied.

The word couple in French is particularly applied to two persons of opposite sex who
are related either by marriage or by consent, and the word paire is applied to two objects
of the same species ; as, for instance, une paire a'e bottes (a pair of boots), but the expression
couple a" amis and paire a" amis are both used, as are
also the expressions paire de cbevaux and couple de
cbevaux, etc. (" Dictionary " of Noel and Chapsal).

I I . First Couple Forward ; Lady Cross to Oppo-
site; Gentleman Back to Place (Premiere Couple en
Jivanl. la "Dame Traverse, el le Cavalier T{elourne a
ta Place). Four measures. The first couple forward ;
the lady crosses to the left of her vis-a-vis, and re-
mains there, while the gentleman returns alone to 4Mes.

his place [Fig. 445]- ****

III. Cross Over, Three (7 ' raveni-Croiii a Trois).

Four measures. In this figure the lone gentleman passes to the opposite side between the
two ladies, who also cross to the side opposite them, each passing in a curved line to the
outside, and crossing one another, turn to face their own partners who are now vis-a-vis
[Fig. 44°]-

IV. Recross to Place, Three (T{eh-aversi Croisi Trois. Jutqu'a ta Place). Four measures.
In this the gentleman once more passes between the two ladies, and all proceed to their
original positions [Fig. 447].

V., VI. Balance and Turn to Place (Balanci el Tour de Main). Four measures [Figs.

448. 449]-

I92 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Following the execution of these figures, the entire strophe is repeated and danced by
the second, third and fourth couples in their respective turns.

VARIATIONS OF THE FOURTH COUPLET OR STROPHE

679. The third figure is sometimes varied by the v. . vi.
execution of a croise-traverse instead of traverse- g". ^ Q--'~i
crois'e. I n this, the ladies exchange places, before go- ">4 V

ing across the set, and again before returning ; pausing

at the end of each four measures in the middle of the '.

set and facing their own partners for the balance. In «f ^3 ^Lr~?S

these figures it should be noticed that the lady who 4m ^ 4M s '*""'

begins the strophe crosses in front of the other, that FlG 8 FlG

is, inside the line of direction of the other lady, and

recrosses behind or outside. This figure is more

beautiful than the first because its execution is more rhythmic.

680. In some countries still another style of dancing this strophe has been used for
so long a time that dancing masters are obliged to teach it. It is executed as follows:

THE THREE HOOKS OR THE SHELL (LES TROIS CROCHETS OU LA COQUILLE)

I. One Couple Forward and Back (Un Couple en Avant et en Arriere). Four measures
[Fig. 450].

II. The Three Hooks (Les Trois Crochets). Four measures. In this, the name and the
outline of the figure correspond very nicely. The lady walks in a circle around her part-

1 1

it*"** V*-.

? f \

..,. — Ol

i 9

«"S>

„ 02

4Mes

4 Mm

4 Mes""

Fig. 450.

Fig. 451.

Fig 45*.

Fig. 453.

ner, and returns to place, while the gentleman executes a tour demain with the opposite
lady, in the centre of the set, presenting for the purpose his right hand, after which they
remain in the centre, facing their partners (this circle is sometimes executed without join-
ing hands) [Fig. 451].

III. Balance Partners (Balance-Chasse). Four measures [Fig. 452].

IV. Turn by Hand to Original Positions in the Set (Tour de Main a vos Places). Four
measures [Fig. 453].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 193

While this figure is extremely graceful and beautiful, it is not technically correct, as it
extends through only sixteen measures, whereas the music contains twenty-four. It may,
however, be given, not as a part of La Trims, but as an independent figure. Many per-
sons refer to this figure as La Coquille (The Shell), but the name "The Three Hooks"
is demonstrated by the drawings to be more fitting.

THE FIFTH COUPLET OR STROPHE LA PASTOURELLE

681. This strophe has been called La Pastourelle (The Shepherdess) from its original
music, which was similar to the shepherd or pastoral songs.

I. First Couple Forward and Back (Premiere Couple en Avant el en Arriere). Four
measures [Fig. 454].

This is the same as the first figure of La Trims.

II. The Same Couple Advances and the Lady Crosses to the Left of her Vis-a-Vis while
the Gentleman Returns, Alone, to His Place (La Meme Couple en Avanl, la Dame Traverse
et le Cavalier t\etourne a sa Place). Four measures [Fig. 455].

1 1

11.

t %

nut iv. 2 fob

1
•

;

\ ♦ 0

4Mes.

1 z z

8Mes-

4Mes.

4 Mrs.

i $

4Mes.

Fig. 454. Fig. 455. Fig. 456. Fig. 457. Fig. 458.

682. III., IV. Forward and Back, Three, Twice (En Avant Trois et en Arriere deux
fait). Eight measures [Fig. 456].

This figure was sometimes called chassi a la visile, because the gentleman in advanc-
ing turned his head toward the lady at his right, and in retiring toward the one on his
left, as though in pleasant conversation. This greatly relieves the figure of the stiff ap-
pearance which would be the result were the three to move forward and backward in too
automatic a manner.

683. This figure may be varied by the use of different arm positions, and one may, if
sufficiently skillful, turn the ladies under the uplifted arms, as in the Allemande or Tyro-
ttenne. The variations, however, are left to the discretion of the dancers.

684- V., VI. Solo. Fight measures. The lone gentleman dances forward and back
[Fig. 457] and to the right and left to the centre [ Fig. 458].

Other than the ordinary Quadrille steps may, if desired, be danced; as, for instance,
the so-called Cossack step ; but unless the gentleman is capable of executing such steps

194

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

VII.

Mil.

beautifully, he should stick to the regular movements, rather than appear ridiculous by
exhibiting his lack of skill.

This solo is sometimes omitted and the lone gentleman executes, instead, two tours de
main, the first with his vis-a-vis, and the second with his partner.

Many dancers execute this solo as follows : " Forward and back, and right to centre,"
omitting the " left to centre," and thus filling only
six measures of the music. This should be avoided,
as it brings the figure to a close two measures
ahead of its proper time.

VII. Open Half-Circle to the Left (Demi-
J{onde Ouverte d Gauche). Four measures. This
figure leads to the original places. It is called an
open half-circle, because while the lone gentleman
presents his right hand to his partner, he does not
offer his left to his vis-a-vis [Fig. 459].

VIII. Half Right and Left (Demi-Chaine Jln-

glaise). Four measures. This figure brings the dancers back again to their original posi-
tions [Fig. 460].

4Mes.

Fig. 459.

VARIATION OF THE FIFTH COUPLET OR STROPHE
THE GRACES (LES GRACES)

VII.

685. This strophe may be repeated under the name of The Graces (Les Graces), in
which the seventh figure is so changed that the ladies dance
the solo, as in Fig. 461.

This name might be changed to " The Three Graces," for
the Greek mythology represents such a group, composed of
three of the daughters of Zeus or Jupiter. They were the dis-
pensers of grace, beauty and refinement, and presided over
festivals, entertainments, dancing, music, painting and sculp-
ture. They were called Aglaia (splendour), Thalia (beauty) and
Euphrosyne (gayety). Perhaps the title " Pastourelle, with solo
for the lady," would be more correct.

4 Mes.

Denii-romte

ouverte

apres le

Solo

dela

dame.

Fig. 461.

THE LAST COUPLET OR STROPHE LA FINALE

The name of this strophe is self-explanatory. Different combinations may be used to
execute it.

686. The most simple combination of the Quadrille a la Cour is given in the " Dance
Album" of A. Freising, and the most beautiful combination is to be found in the twelfth
edition of the same book (page 42, No. 6).

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

'95

687. The combination sometimes known as La Rose a Quatre, and which contains the
changement of the ladies, is among the final strophes most commonly used. The name
La Rose (The Rose) is derived from the figure itself, which, if drawn, presents a design
resembling that flower. This resemblance is nearly lost in the Contredanse, where only two
couples form a set, but with eight couples the similarity to the flower is more marked.

THE ROSE (LA ROSE)

688. For two couples (En deux couples).

I. Forward and Back, Four (EnAvantQualreel en Arriire). Four measures [Fig. 462].

II. Exchange of Ladies {Changement des Dames). Four measures [Fig. 463].

III. Forward and Back, Four [En AvantQuatre eten Arriere). Four measures [Fig. 464].

IV. Return of the Ladies (Reprise des Dames). Four measures [Fig. 465].

1 1

Z 2

4H.
Fig. 461.

ft,

4M.
Fig. 463.

III.

« 1

I I

\ n

2 I
4M.

Fie. 464.

IV.

m
in

4M.

Fig. 465.

689. In the exchange of ladies, the gentlemen lead the visiting ladies, who approach
them on the left, in a three-quarters circle to the left. In case the figure is danced by only
two couples, the visiting lady is the gentleman's vis-a-vis, but if there are four couples
(Rose a buti), then the gentleman turns the lady who stands at his left in the set; that is,
the first gentleman and fourth lady, and so on.

690. As many couples as desire may participate in the Rose, but for each couple in
excess of four, four measures of music must be added ; and, as it is always necessary to
maintain an even number of couples, the music will be increased by periods of eight meas-
ures, thus providing a proper ending for the figure.

Following the first strophe it is customary to execute L'Ele (twenty-four measures) as
the second, although the reason for so doing is not clear, and the combination probably
has no logical explanation. The second strophe is followed by a repetition of the Rose,
which is danced through by each couple.

69J. Instead of exchanging ladies in this figure, the gentlemen sometimes "cheat"
the approaching ladies, by wheeling quickly and turning their own partners, with whom
they return to place. This figure may be permitted among friends, who will accept it as

196

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

a pleasantry, but it should be avoided or at least very seldom used among strangers. It is
necessary that this " cheating " be done twice, thus occupying sixteen measures of music
in order that the figure shall not interfere with others who may, at the same time, be danc-
ing the Rose or the Galop.

692. If one dances the Galop, he must hold his partner in Waltz position, and the
gentleman should always commence with the left foot, while the lady commences with the
right.

PAS DE GALOP

I. Forward and Back, Four (En Jlvant Quatre et en Jlrriere). Three Simple Chasing
Steps and One Whip Syllable to the Centre (Trois chassis simples et un fouett'e au milieu).
Four measures. Both execute three simple chasing steps and one whip syllable forward,
and the same movements backward [Fig. 466].

(See §§ 478 to 482, and Exercises 59 and 60.)

II. Cross Over, Four (Traversee a Quatre et en Arriere). Four measures. In this figure
the dancers may turn either once or twice to the right or left in Waltz position (if it can be

"ft

4M.

Fig. 466.

4)1.

Fig. 467.

IV.

4M.

Fig. 469.

properly done and the execution does not interfere with the other dancers), provided that
the tempo is maintained. In an ordinary traversee a deux the dancers, upon meeting, pass to
the left, allowing the vis-a-vis to cross upon their right ; but in the Galop, the Waltz posi-
tion renders it necessary to pass by upon the right of the approaching couple [Fig. 467].

III. Forward and Back, Four (En Avant Quatre et en Jlrriere). Four measures [Fig. 468].

IV. Recross, Four (T(etraverse a Quatre). Waltz position. Four measures [Fig. 469].
This figure is followed by another repetition of L'Et'e, upon twenty-four measures, and this
is unchanged whether the Rose or the Galop is danced, for its figures always follow one
another in the same sequence.

If, however, in dancing the Galop, the couples rotate to the right, the figure is as rep-
resented in No. II. [Fig. 467], but if " the reverse" (a I'envers ou a rebours) is danced, the
figure is as shown in No. IV. [Fig. 469].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 197

ladies' windlass (moulinet des dames)

693. The following beautiful combination, which is very popular in North Germany,
is executed by four couples only, and may be substituted for the preceding as a final strophe.

I. Cross with Chasing Steps, Eight (Chassi Croisi a Huil). Four measures. All chas-
sent to the side, ladies to the left, gentlemen to the right and behind the ladies; upon
meeting, all execute a demi-balanch which consists of a pas digage, either to right and left
or to left and right.

II. Recross, Eight (J(ecroisi dHuif). Four measures. The same figure in counter-motion.

III. Ladies' Windlass {Moulinet des Dames). Four measures. Four ladies join right
hands to form a cross and retain same while they walk once around the set to place.

I V. Balance in Windlass and Turn to Place {Demi-Balanci en Moulinet et Demi-Tour de
Main). Four measures. The gentlemen, who have so far remained inactive in their places,
now receive the left hands of their partners in their own right hands, and all execute a demi-
balanci, after which the ladies return to place by means of a half-turn, which leaves the
gentlemen in the centre and prepared for the succeeding figure.

V. Grand Promenade {Grande "Promenade). Eight measures. In this figure, each gentle-
man gives his left hand to his partner, to form the crossed position for the promenade, and
all proceed once around the set. This figure is executed four times, and is followed upon
the succeeding twenty-four measures by the entire strophe L'Ete.

Upon the fifth repetition of this figure, the gentlemen offer their right arms to their
partners and conduct them to seats.

This strophe may be still further extended by the execution of one or more of the figures
which follow.

694. As the execution of these various figures and combinations depends largely upon
the number of dancers, their ability, the size of the hall, and the time allowed for dancing
such figures, no positive rules as to their use can be set down. The matter must therefore be
left to the discretion of the director, who may select the figures and combinations which are
most suitable. A dancing-master may, it is true, drill his pupils for the execution of a cer-
tain Finale, but even he may be forced by circumstances to alter the figures or to substi-
tute others where a large number participate in the dance, as the most thoroughly drilled
figures may sometimes fail ; while, in other instances, figures that arc entirely impromptu are
very successful.

LARGE CIRCLES (gRANDES RONDEs)

I., II. Grand Circle to Left and Right (Grande "Rpnde d Gauche eta Droite). Fight meas-
ures. In this figure all join hands and form a closed circle, making an eighth turn to the
left, placing the right foot forward in 3d position, and take cither six walking or three chas-

198 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

ing steps in a circle. Upon the seventh and eighth music syllables, all turn to the right
and repeat the movement in the opposite direction to place [Fig. 470].

III. Ladies to Centre and Return (Les Dames au Milieu et de T{etour). Four measures.
The four ladies execute chass'e-tourne to right to the centre, and repeat the same to place
[Fig. 471].

I V. Gentlemen to Centre and Balance (Les Cavaliers au Milieu et Demi-Balance sur Place).
Four measures. The four gentlemen execute a chass'e-tourne to the right to the centre,

letU.

tn.

0 9

4 i

IV.

A f ,

4M.

Fig. 471.

4M.

Fig. 472.

where they then execute a demi-balanc'e while the ladies do likewise. This demi-balanc'e
consists of a degage upon the right while the left is drawn into posterior 3d position and
the same movement is executed on the other foot, and requires two measures or four
syllables of music [Fig. 472].

V., VI. Balance Partners and Turn to Place (Balance avec vos Dames et Tour de- Main).
Eight measures. These figures are executed with ordinary walking steps, and need no ex-
planations, as the cuts speak for themselves [Figs. 473, 474].

^4\

VI.

4M.

Fig. 473.

Fig. 474.

Fig. 475.

695. VII. Grand Right and Left, Half Round (Demi-Chaine a Tiuit). Four measures. In
this all turn to partners and present the right hand upon the first step, and the left hand
to the next lady, and so on [Fig. 475].

During this figure the gentlemen pass in front of their ladies and continue in a ser-
pentine line half around the circle, where they meet their own partners, who have simul-
taneously taken the same steps in the opposite direction.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

199

Although this figure is very simple, frequent mistakes arise from improper placing or
position. It should be noted that the gentlemen start toward the inside-, while the ladies
start toward the outside of the circle.

696. Eight measures have been prescribed for the demi-chaine a butt, but if the prompter
calls merely "grande chaine! " it is always understood to mean grande cbaine entiere, or
grand right and left all the way around; in which figure the dancers do not stop upon
meeting their partners, but continue the movement to places, thus requiring sixteen meas-
ures of music.

697. VIII. Promenade to Seats (Promenade Tinale). Eight measures. This figure is
designed especially for the escorting of the ladies to their seats, for which purpose the
gentlemen offer their right arms, and all retire from the floor with ordinary walking steps.

698. This is the most commonly used final strophe, but even this is frequently pro-
longed.

699. It is not at present customary to "prompt" for Quadrilles in well-regulated
parties.

700. It is natural to suppose that only well-drilled and competent dancers would at-
tempt to lead in the execution of the figures, but this is not the case. Persons who know
so little regarding the figures as to be ignorant even of their names, to say nothing of their
combinations, frequently attempt to direct Quadrilles, prompting one thing and leading
another, until, when the confusion has become complete, they call " cberchez vos dames!"
when all the dancers struggle to find their partners and to untangle the snarl into which
they have been led.

For the information of dance managers, certain final figures, which may be combined
according to personal taste, are given herewith :

701. Grand Right and Left Half Round ; Turn, and Repeat to Place (Chaine et Chaine de
fytour). Sixteen measures. In this figure the chain is executed in the same manner as in
the demi-cbaine a buit until the partners meet, when they join right hands and, after a
demi-tour de main, return in the direction from whence they came to place. The gentle-
men start inside and return outside the ladies.

This figure has been composed for four couples and allows four measures for the first
demi-cbaine, two measures for the demi-tour de main, two measures to pause, facing the di-
rection from whence they came, four measures for demi-cbaine de retour, and four measures
for final tour de main. If more than four couples participate, the pause must be lengthened
accordingly, i.e., two measures for each additional couple.

Balance and Turn to Place (Balance" et Tour de Main). Eight measures. This figure
affords time for those who are tardy about arriving at their places to right themselves for
the succeeding figure.

702. The Diagonal Lines (Let Lignet Obliques). For four couples. In this the arms are
crossed as in the Promenade (§ 666), and the first and second couples turn respectively
to the third and fourth, thus forming two lines of four, diagonally across the set.

I. Forward and Back, Eight (En Avant rluitef en Arriere). Four measures.
II. Exchange of Ladies (Changemenl da Dame*). Four measures. In this the first and

200 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

third ladies cross to the next gentlemen at the right, who present their left hands and exe-
cute a demi-tour de main to place.

Forward and Back, Eight (En Avant Tiuit et en Jlrriere). Four measures.

Repeat to next gentleman.

These figures are then repeated, the second and fourth couples turning respectively to
the third and first, and so on, until the ladies are once more restored to their original posi-
tions in the set.

This is a very beautiful figure, if the lines are kept straight, but it loses by the widen-
ing if eight couples participate.

703. The term en avant huit is used in all cases in which eight or more people partici-
pate in the figure. Such expressions as en avant seize (sixteen) are not used, because the fig-
ures are all planned for eight persons.

THE OPPOSITE CIRCLES (lES RONDES OPPOSEEs)

704- Not less than eight couples should be used in these figures, because a smaller
number makes too small an outer circle.

I. Ladies to the Centre (Les Dames au Milieu). Four measures. All the ladies execute
a chass'e-tourn'e toward the centre, turning to the right and facing partners, and then exe-

I. "•

0 •

? P

• V

* *f°

°-^

'*■ m

• I

y-v

cr"' X

■ \ •

• J

•

4M.

Fig.

476.

^ X

4M.

Fig. 477.

cute a balance sur place, at the same time joining hands and forming a closed circle in the
centre, with their backs turned to the middle of the set [Fig. 476].

705. If such a closed circle is entirely composed of ladies or of gentlemen, the right
hand is presented palm upward and the left is given palm downward, and in the following
manner: upon the first step of the balance which goes to the right, the right hand is pre-
sented, and upon the first step to the left, the left hand is given, thus closing the circle.

II. Gentlemen Forward (Les Cavaliers Jlpprochenf). Four measures. The gentlemen
take two short steps toward the centre, where they execute a demi-balanc'e sur place, during
which they join hands to form a circle facing the ladies [Fig. 477].

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 201

III. Opposite Circles to the Left (Rondes Opposes a Gaucbe). Eight measures. The
ladies turn in a circle to their left, and the gentlemen in another circle to their left, thus
forming two opposite circles as they are facing one another and producing a very attrac-
tive appearance [Fig. 478].

706. Every figure is rendered easier by the execution of exact steps and the mainte-
nance of even tempo.

This figure, which contains sixteen steps, presents a better appearance if danced upon
eight measures than upon four.

IV. Opposite Circles to the Right (J(ondes Opposees a Droite). Eight measures [Fig. 479].

^%-v

o w o

4 Mes. 4 Mes.

Fio. 480. Fig. 481.

V., VI. Balance and Turn to Place (Balance" et Tour de Main). Eight measures [Figs.
480, 48 1 ].

After these figures, the complete strophe is repeated, as follows :

I . The Gentlemen to the Centre and Giving of the Hands (Les Cavaliers au Milieu et
Donnez les Mains). Four measures.

II. The Ladies Approach (Let "Dames Approchent). Four measures.

III. Opposite Circles to the Left and Right (J{ondes Opposies a Gauche et a Droite).
Sixteen measures.

IV. Balance and Turn to Place (Balance" et Tour de Main). Eight measures.

THE WREATH ( I. A CUIRLANDe)

707. This strophe may be danced by as many couples as space permits.

I. The Ladies Advance to Form a Circle (Les Dames en Avant pour Former une
f{onde<. Four measures. The ladies advance, either with four small walking steps or
with one chass'e and two pas ilev'es. They do not turn, but during a demi-balanc'e give the
hands and form a closed circle.

II. The Gentlemen Advance to Form the Wreath (Les Cavaliers en Avant pour
Former la Guirlande). Your measures. The gentlemen advance to the ladies, cross their

202 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

arms in front and over the ladies' arms and join hands, thus forming another closed circle
intertwining that of the ladies, and completing the wreath.

III. Wreath, Circle to Left {Guirlande, ~Rpnde a Gauche). Four or eight measures.
Retaining the form of the wreath all walk to the left, half around the set.

IV. Open the Wreath (Ouvrez la Guirlande). Four or eight measures. The first
couple release their left hands and fall back simultaneously with those at the other end of
the line to form a straight column, thus utilizing the remainder of the music.

V. Ladies Pass Through (Traversee de Dames). Four measures. In this figure, the
gentlemen raise their hands so that the ladies may pass under and to the opposite side,
forming what is known as an " English column," the ladies being upon one side and the
gentlemen upon the other.

This is followed by :

L'Ete Generate, in which the dancers execute the following figures, as in the second
strophe of the quadrille :

En avant deux et en arriere.
Chass'e a droit e et a gauche.
Traversee.

Chass'e a droite et a gauche.
Retraversee, tour de main.
It will be noticed from this that the dancers walk backward, and not into the middle
during the second chass'e a gauche, and that that figure is followed by a real traversee, im-
mediately after which a tour de main is made with the now opposite partner, while the
whole concludes with a march by couples, from which may proceed either a Finale Prom-
enade, a Polonaise, a Grandfather Dance or any other movements that may be desired.

708. In case too many couples participate to permit the formation of a single wreath,
two or more may be formed and the figures may be executed alike in each wreath. At
the command " Open ! " both wreaths fall back and form two lines vis-a-vis.

In these cases the strophe L'Ete is executed first by all the ladies, then by all the
gentlemen, and upon the second chass'e a gauche they dance to the centre, and execute a
balance with partners instead of retraversee. The figure ends with a tour de main.

709. Various other and similar combinations may be added to the Finale, but the con-
ductor should always bear in mind that too long a Finale is not only tiresome to the dancers,
but wearies the spectators and overtaxes the musicians.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 203

The Polonaise

(M.M.88-J)

710. Properly speaking, the Polonaise is not really a dance, but rather a Promenade
or Procession. Its particular office is to afford opportunity for the lady in whose honour
the ball may be given to greet the guests, and to invite them to participate in the enter-
tainment.

For this purpose, the lady so honoured makes a tour of the hall accompanied by her
partner, saluting each couple in turn. The gentleman naturally joins in the reverences.
Each couple, after having been greeted, fall into line behind the first couple who continue
their way around the room until all have taken places in the procession.

The usual step for the Polonaise is the alternation of the feet in the 4th, 3d, and 4th
positions as in the Polka, but in different rhythm (3-4 measure). The step usually com-
mences with the right foot.

711. This being neither a difficult nor a tiresome movement, even the oldest and the
youngest of the gentlemen present should be sufficiently polite to invite some lady to par-
ticipate in the pleasure of it, especially at private or house parties. It would be well for
the young gentlemen of to-day to follow the example of the old Polish and French gen-
tlemen, who are, in this respect, perfect models of politeness.

712. It was at one time customary to exchange ladies at different points in the Polo-
naise, but the practice is now obsolete.

71 3. If no one lady has a particularly prominent part, as in the case of public parties,
where an admission fee is charged, the manager or director should ask one of the older
ladies to commence the Polonaise.

7J4- This beautiful beginning to a social function should never be omitted, because of
its sentiment, and the dignity that it casts upon what follows it.

715. The Polonaise is sometimes executed at the conclusion of a ball, but when this
is done, the reverences are made at the end instead of the beginning of the dance, and are
expressive of a farewell.

The different figures and changes of the Polonaise are of little moment, and are left
to the judgment of the leading couple, who should, in selecting them, bear in mind at all
times, (1) the amount of space necessary for their execution, (2) the number of participants,
and (3) their ability.

716. Many exquisite figures for the Polonaise have been published in the various
works upon dancing, both old and new, with and without drawings. It would be impos-
sible to describe them all, but the following are recommended for their beauty and sim-
plicity.

717. In placing pupils for the Polonaise, they present a better appearance if the tallest
are at the right and the shortest at the left, in regular gradation. Indeed, such a formation

204 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

facilitates the work of a teacher. The Polonaise or March commences with the smallest
pair, who wheel to the left and are followed by each successive couple in order.

I. Grand Promenade (Grande Promenade). This figure has already been described
(§ 693). It should be continued once or twice around the hall until all the couples have
joined.

II. Column of Twos (Colonne a Deux). In this, all other couples fall in line behind
the leading couple and march up the centre of the hall, where the column is divided, and
the gentlemen proceed to the left and the ladies to the right, around the room, meeting
again at the starting point, and passing once more in colonne a deux to the head of the hall
(§§ 632, 635).

III. Casting off Twos. In this, the first couple go to the left, the second to the right,
and so on, passing again to the starting point, where they form the

IV. Column of Fours (Colonne a Quatre). In this the procession passes to the head
of the hall for the execution of the next figure.

V. Casting off Fours. In this figure the platoons wheel alternately to left and right,
and pass around to form the

VI. Column of Eights (Colonne a Huif). This formation is retained until the head
of the hall is reached, where it divides in the centre, and wheels in platoons of four to left
and right. Proceeding simultaneously to the foot of the hall, the two columns combine,
the couples of the right column falling in between those of the left, and thus forming again
the

VII. Column of Fours. The procession passes once more to the head, where the divid-
ing process is repeated and after forming a Column of Twos, the line once more casts off
to left and right, in preparation for the

VIII. Passage of the First Half Column (Passage de la Premiere Demi-Colonne).
Upon meeting, that portion of the dancers which is led by the first couple passes, arm
in arm, between the partners of the couples whom they meet, who separate for the purpose,
but immediately rejoin their arms when the last couple has passed through. From here all
proceed to the head of the hall, for the

IX. Passage of the Second Half Column (Passage de la Seconde Demi-Colonne), in
which the first half-column separates and allows the second to pass through.

X. Passage of the Ladies Through the Middle (Les Dames Passent au Milieu). In
this the couples separate and the ladies pass between the partners of the advancing columns.

XI. Passage of the Gentlemen Through the Middle (Les Cavaliers Passent au Milieu).
On meeting this time, the gentlemen pass between the partners of the opposite columns.

XII. Column of Twos. After this meeting, the half columns consolidate and form
the original single Column of Twos, which proceeds to the head of the hall, and divides for

XIII. The Half Moon (La Demi-Lune). Upon separating, the ladies join hands and
face the centre of the hall, passing to the right; and the gentlemen join hands and move
to the left, facing the wall. Both lines proceed in this manner to the meeting-place, where
the gentlemen pass in front of the ladies and face them.

As soon as the two lines have entirely passed one another, they turn, and the gentle-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

205

men face the centre, while the ladies face the wall, and continue thus to the opposite ends
of the hall, where the ladies pass again to the inside, and all proceed to the starting point
to begin the next figure.

718. XIV. The Snake (Le Serpent). This figure may be executed in single file or by
couples. The single file is better adapted to classes in which the sexes are not mixed, and
the formation by couples is preferable where both ladies and gentlemen participate. At
the conclusion of this figure, a large closed circle is formed for the

719. XV". Grand Circle (Grande T{onde). The Polonaise may, at the beginning of a
ball, lead into a Waltz or a Polka, but if at the end, it should be concluded by a reverence,
which may be done in two ways.

720. The first and more dignified manner is as follows: The first couple, still retain-
ing the hands, turn to the second and address, then pass to the third and address them,
and so on to the last couple, beside whom they take their places, and are followed in turn
by each of the other couples, until the last have passed the first, when the Polonaise is ended.

721. The second manner of ending is less elaborate, and is preferred among acquaint-
ances. It is as follows: Having formed a large circle, the ring is broken, and falls back in
four lines to the ends and sides of the hall; the head and foot lines advance, address and
retire to their places, and the side lines repeat the figure, after which each gentleman ofFers
his arm to his partner and leads her to her seat.

722. If the hall or the company is too large, some of the foregoing figures may be
omitted, or others may be substituted or added if desired; or more intricate figures may
be introduced, where there is a sufficient number of couples upon whose ability in dancing
dependence may be placed. This, however, must be left to the conductor, who is usually
in a position to judge as to the abilities of his guests.

Chapter XIV

THE MINUET

THE music of the Minuet of the Queen, which is presented here together with its
text [Fig. 452], has been taken from a manuscript copy which is said to have come
down to us from Gardel. The text above the lines refers to the movements which are ex-
ecuted during the first rendering of the music, and that which appears below the lines re-
fers to the movements during the repetition.

724. Herr A. Freising, dancing teacher of the Royal University of Berlin, is in pos-
session of an authentic and exact description of this classical dance.

725. It has, therefore, been possible, with the aid of these works, for the author of this
grammar to choregraphically represent the Minuet of the Queen in its original form ; as
well as a collection of other important dances, which will be published later as a separate
work.*

Minuet of the Court [Le Menuet de la Cour)

726. Although much significant information regarding the Court Minuet may be
found in the " Lexicon of Dances," of Rudolph Voss, and the " History of the Art of
Dancing," by Albert Czerwinski, a more complete description is given by Bernhard Klemm
in his " Catechism."

The Minuet is a grave and dignified dance for two persons, containing steps peculiar
to itself; it is executed upon the lines of the letter " Z."

Its name {Menuet) is derived from the French word menu, which comes in turn from
the Latin word minutus, meaning " small " or " dainty." From this fact we may infer that
the steps should be small and daintily executed.

727. The music is in 3-4 time, the tempo slow (M.M. 56 = J.) and the music should be
executed in a majestic manner {maestoso), with the accent falling upon the first music syl-
lable, while the third is rendered prominent by the accompaniment, if not by the melody.

The music for the Minuet consists of two parts of eight measures each, and a so-called

* It is to be regretted that Herr Zorn never published the collection to which he refers. — Ed.
206

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

207

" trio " which is of like duration (sixteen measures), and each of these parts is repeated.
Inasmuch as the entire melody is played through twice, and there is also a Prelude and a
Postlude of eight measures each, the entire dance, as hereafter described, extends through
one hundred and forty-four measures of music.

728. The Minuet was first introduced at the court of France.. This particular Minuet
(Menuet de la Cour) is ascribed to Pecour, who was perhaps the most celebrated dancer of

>,'.-

Musique du Menuet de la Reine.

Fin du salut.

Pi— ii 111 1 1111 ill par le Pas (crave
5, S4 Pas grave Pas en tournant.

Pas de cote

n Balance Louis XIV
Coapi pirouette

J, Fin J.

Spas marches,assembl<,Pas de cote u droite et a gauche
• pas ma rihes, assemble, pirouette

Pas de Bourne. Coupe tranche et droit
Pas Manel. Balance de cote et en arriere.Pas grave mam gauche

Temps lev* et chassi.

Tin de mm)

Salut pnu term,

F10. 482.

pou termljier

his period (1674-1729), while the Menuet de la Reine, which is accounted the most beauti-
ful as well as the most perfect and the most difficult ever written, is the work of Gardcl,
and was composed for the celebration of the marriage of Marie Antoinette to Louis XVI.,
from which circumstance its name is derived. It was generally executed in conjunction
with the Gavotte of Vestris, and its music was probably composed by Ramcau.

729. Minuets have been written by many of the most celebrated composers, but the
Menuet de la Cour is generally danced to the " Boat Song " from " Don Giovanni," by

2o8 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Mozart. This melody contains two parts of eight measures each, and is played twice
through for each couplet.

730. The Minuet has been frequently termed the " queen of dances," and justly so,
for no other dance contains such elegance of manner nor is so exquisitely graceful. It spread
to many countries, was practiced in every European court, and it is executed, even now, in
many places where one would hardly expect to find so beautiful a dance.

Note. — The Author was greatly surprised to see the peasants of a small and out-of-the-way
Norwegian village executing the Minuet. He had gone to the place to study the national dance, and
had no idea that so beautiful a conception was known to them.

731. Although it no longer appears upon the list of social dances, and is perhaps ridi-
culed by persons of little taste, and by those who are too ignorant to appreciate its beauty
and its value, the Minuet is considered by all competent dancers and teachers of dancing
as a most valuable assistance in aesthetic training. It frequently reappears, even now, at
social functions, among those persons who still retain some vestiges of taste and some
appreciation of the beautiful.

732. An illustration showing a Minuet which was danced in the new hall of the "Di-
ana Bath," in Vienna, may be found upon page 220 of the German periodical, "Ueber
Land und Meer," for 1861 (No. 14).

733. A Minuet Quadrille, composed by A. Freising, dancing teacher at the Royal
University in Berlin, has been adapted by the members of the German Academy and in-
corporated in their course of instruction, for the purpose of aiding to revive the Minuet.

734- A new minuet, with choregraphic script and musical supplement, appeared in
the " Frauenzeitung," of Berlin (Vol. XIII., No. 1), January 1st, 1886. It is called the
" Minuet of Louis XV.," and was written by M. de Soria, ballet master of the Grand
Opera at Paris. The music is by E. Etesse.

735. There also appeared, during the latter part of 1886, another new Minuet, which
was published by Franz Pechel, in Graz. It was presented and explained by means of
three choregraphic drawings, with text, and was the work of Edward Eichler, graduated
academic dancing master in Graz. The music was original and was composed by Franz
Rafael.

Thus we may see that, even now, efforts are made to do honour to this beautiful dance.

Steps of the Minuet (Pas de Menuei)

736. There are, in the Minuet, four different combinations of steps that belong ex-
clusively to it. They are as follows:

Minuet step to the right (Pas de menuet a droite).
Minuet step to the left (Pas de menuet a gauche).
Minuet step forward (Pas de menuet en avant).
Minuet balance (Balance de menuet).

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

209

737. Although the music of the Minuet is in 3-4 time, it is customary to so phrase
it as to make four step movements coincide with six syllables of music. In teaching,
however, it is preferable to divide the movements into six syllables of music, as this
method is more easily understood by pupils, and by its use the simple movements are
more easily accommodated to the music.

738. F.xercise 102 shows the choregraphic representation of the different Minuet
steps :

Minuet Step to the Right (Pas de menuet a droite) [Fig. 483].

Fie. 483.

Execution. — Preparation: 5th Position of Right.

First syllable. The right foot glides upon the toe into 2d position.

Second syllable. Raise the left heel and transfer the weight, thus bringing the left
into 2d position.

Third syllable. Bend the supporting knee and glide the left foot, with slightly bended
left leg, into the posterior 5th position.

Fourth syllable. Stretch both legs and transfer the weight, thus bringing the right
foot into anterior 5th position.

Fifth syllable. Glide the right foot lightly to 2d position and transfer.

Sixth syllable. Glide the left foot lightly into posterior 5th position and transfer,
thus bringing the right once more into anterior 5th position, and ready to begin the suc-
ceeding movement.

In the Minuet, two of these pas droits are always used in succession.

739. Minuet Step to the Left (Pas de menuet a gauche) [Fig. 484].

pi.,-1 ,<*k

■ s/ >»I.1*K.

l.<*fc*K

■*Sl—^ H r> ■— ^ '\ n

FlO. 484.

I Mention. — First Part. Preparation : 5th Position of Right.

First syllable. Bend the supporting knee and raise the heel, at the same time gliding
the right foot forward into 4th position, where it receives the weight.

Second syllable. Rise upon the right toe and glide the left foot lightly into 1st
position.

2IO

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Third syllable. Glide the left foot to ad position, at the same time lowering the
right heel, and bending the right knee.

Fourth syllable. Transfer.

Fifth syllable. Bend the left knee slightly, glide the right foot into posterior 5th po-
sition and transfer.

Sixth syllable. Glide the left foot lightly to 2d position, at the same time stretching
the left leg, and transfer.

Second Part.

First syllable. During the bending of the supporting leg, glide the right foot to the
posterior 4th position and transfer.

Note. — It will be noticed that while the first part of this step separates the partners by the width
of a step, this first syllable of the second part restores them to their relative positions.

Second syllable. Rise as high as possible upon right toe and glide left foot backward
into 1st position. The remaining four syllables are the same as the corresponding sylla-
bles of the first part.

740. Minuet Step Forward {Pas de Menuet en avant) [Fig. 485].

L^ajgjvkji

/-7 X^. II f\ ^-s ]j .

rlrN-Kl

:r>IU1f

Fig. 483.

Execution. — First Part. Preparation: 2d position of right.

First syllable. The right foot glides lightly through the 1st into the anterior 4th
position and receives the weight.

Second syllable. Raise the right heel and glide left foot through the posterior 3d and
into the 2d flowing position.

Third syllable. Lower the right heel, at the same time putting down the left foot in
posterior 3d position.

Fourth syllable. Glide left foot to 1st position and transfer.

Fifth syllable. Advance right foot to anterior 4th position and transfer.

Sixth syllable. Glide left foot to 1st position and transfer.

Second Part. The second part is begun by the right foot which starts from 1st po-
sition, and the first four syllables are exactly similar to those of the first part.

Fifth syllable. Place the right foot in front of the left in an over-stepped 5th position,
rise upon the toes and execute a half-turn to the left.

Sixth syllable. Lower into anterior 5th position of left and transfer, thus allowing the
right foot to begin the succeeding step.

This half-turn accomplishes the change of direction necessary to the execution of the
figure of the Minuet.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

211

741. Minuet Balance (Balance de Menuet) [Fig. 486].
Execution, (a) Preparation : 2d point position of right.

First syllable. Glide right foot into anterior 4th, marking the 1st position in transit,
and transfer.

Second syllable. Glide left to posterior 3d position.

Third syllable. Carry same (left) into 2d flowing position.

Fourth syllable. Put down left and glide same through the 1st to posterior 4th posi-
tion and transfer.

Fifth syllable. Glide right to anterior 3d, and

Sixth syllable, thence into 2d flowing position.

742. Didelot, Bournonville, and certain other celebrated dancers have executed the
Balance de Menuet in the manner which follows [Fig. 486^] :

(b) First syllable. Same as in a.

Second syllable. Mark with the toe of the left foot the posterior and anterior 3d posi-
tions in passing, and

i„uyh A

X y.

Fig. 486.

Third syllable, proceed into anterior 4th point position.

Fourth syllable. Glide left a whole step backward to posterior 4th position and transfer.
Fifth syllable. Mark lightly with the right foot the anterior and posterior 3d posi-
tions, and

Sixth syllable, proceed into 2d flowing position.

743. The Minuet may be executed by either one or more couples. If it is
danced by more than a single couple they form a column, one behind another,
about forty inches apart, with the shortest couple in front. The head of the
column should face the place of honour, and the line usually runs lengthwise of
the hall [Fig. 487]. If space permits, more than one column may be formed.

The description which follows is for a single couple. In case there are others, all the,
couples execute the same steps and figures, and exact uniformity of movement is one of
the most important elements of the dance.

744. The division of the couplets refers to the music, and the numerals at the right
of the line show the number of measures required for the execution of the figures.

745. Kxercise 103. Minuet of the Court (Menuet de la Cour) [Fig. 488].

0 *

0 f

0 t

Fig. 487.

212

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

MM 56 = J

Musique de Mozart.

• -

o- a
. ScAriltsaU

-o o- 8

recfils

o- 3

Pas a

■droite

-o 3-

Schriltsali

o- 08

h'ntift

o- -o -ft

Pas

o- -o3

crauche

r% .

. . dessplei . .

. . c/ie?i. . . .

. . -de . . .

- . . mime

. .. .d?. . .

• -

-2'ir ScArae . -

Ueberpang

2* Traverse

oblique

Sc/irittsaU

rechts

Pas

droite

. . .„

. ..d».. .

. . . d? . . .

......

. . d?. . .

.......

j2d.

% -

. Balance

de menuet J

Tour de main droite

kiL a i^ikikii

„1 A i^lkfKI!

^ A l -^l-^TT IT

— «

o— — o o—

— o

O- — 0 o—

— « o—

5-«0-^

• -

. . Sihr4Usatz

Tec/its

Pas a

droite

Balance de

menuet /

Tour de main eauche

..*._.

2 da

• - -

. . Hec/ils - .

. . a droite .

. a Kauche .

Ill

•

Scfirag . . .

: Ueberga?ig

2" tra

verse . . -

- HecAts .

- a droite .

- )

Fig. 488.

2 da

3L*

Balance*

final

.Demi-tour de deux mains

„fl A I^IKIKIl „U A 1-

>v|-t-\]T Tf

Pas a

droite

lift

d?. . .

„

—0

. . d° . .

0— -0 0- 1 -0

. . d? . . .

FIRST COUPLET

Prelude.

During the first eight measures of the music, each gentleman conducts his
lady to the position in the column which has been assigned to them, and,
releasing her hand, stands at her left side.

THE LADY S PART

The lady extends her right foot to
2d position.

Transfers, and executes a quarter-
turn to the right.

Draws the left foot into posterior 3d
position.

THE GENTLEMAN S PART

The gentleman extends his right
foot to 2d position.

Transfers and executes a quarter-
turn to the left.

Draws the left foot into anterior 3d
position.

At the conclusion of these movements the hands are joined.

GRAMMAR OF THK ART OF DANCING 2 1 3

Arrangement original par Peeour. Choregraphie de F. A. Zorn.

LLLLL

fill

I I I I

000 , «i

* 1

j«^tt

Q>f^ .-. ^

»OLi

SchrittsaU

rtctits

Pas a

droite

o -.k;lvi\l

^^ll'Ll^rkl

k^-^

• . . SdriAmU .

limit.

. . . . Pas a gauche'

J'l'ScArif

1'eherganf

I •' traversd. . .

.d".

.d?

• . .

. limit. .

. .J*" lebvrpums

S* traverse oblique

►J

..*. . .

........

. . . d» . . .

. . -d». .

• . .

. Rechtt . .

. . .«•. - .

...*?...

continuation du tour de main gauche.

SciriUsalM rtcAtt

Pas a droite

,».

j |mi

^>n^

limit.

. .a gauche

. . l,r traver

. Zi*i» . .

. 1*' Ueberpane

3? travers^ . . .

.Rttitt . .

■ . Rdvdrence au publique. comme a I'introduction et a la dame, puis la reconduir a sa place

24?

I,lo. . fer*emKtme>m:-.mrte.tei I 4er. . EinleilnAf . . . umi . \. . . ScAtus* \-beglei ■ . . J lung: • ■ -I I

Fig. 488.

«Tu-| 746. Bow.

The lady inclines the body and bends
theknees,at thesametimeslightly
raising the right heel ;

Glides right foot to posterior 4th
position; transfers; sinksand rises
again

And draws the advanced foot back-
ward to anterior 3d position.

The gentleman inclines the body-
without bending the knees;

Glides left foot backward to pos-
terior 4th position; transfers

And draws the advanced foot back-
ward to anterior 3d position, at
the same time rising to an erect
position.

747. The ordinary bow of the gentleman is executed in 1st position and
upon the place, but in order to coincide with the figure of the Minuet,

MFV.

214

SYLL.

1-2

3-4
5-6

1-2

3-4
5-6

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

it is necessary for him to step backward, that he may remain upon the
same line with his partner.

Glide backward into 4th position
upon the right;

Transfer;

Draw right into anterior 3d posi-
tion.

Carry left forward to anterior 4th
position;

Transfer ;

Quarter-turn to right to face part-
ner in 1st position.

Carry right to 2d position ; transfer;

Draw left into posterior 3d position,

dropping left hand to side ; and

Bow.

Quarter-turn to left, and transfer;
Draw right to anterior 3d position;
Give hand.

Glide backward into 4th position

upon the left;
Transfer;
Draw left into anterior 3d position.

Carry right forward to anterior 4th

position;
Transfer;
Quarter-turn to left to face partner

in 1st position.

Carry left to 2d position;

Draw right into posterior 3d posi-
tion, release lady's hand and drop
right hand to side;

Bow.

Quarter- turn to right;

Draw left to anterior 3d position ;

Present hand.

748. The Leading of the Ladies (Introduction). Both begin with right foot.

Pas de Menuet en avant.
Pas de Menuet en avant.

Pas de Menuet en avant.
Pas de Menuet a droite.

This brings the dancers into the position shown in Fig. 489, when the
hands, which have until now been joined, are released.

Pas de Menuet a droite.
Pas de Menuet a droite.
Pas de Menuet a gauche.
Pas de Menuet a gauche.

Fig. 489.

These movements bring the dancers back to place, as shown in Fig.
490, and ready to commence the execution of the principal figure.

SECOND COUPLET (THE PRINCIPAL FIGURE)

Fig. 490.

749. The principal figure consists of the following combinations: traver see oblique,
fas de Menuet a droite double, and pas de Menuet a gauche double.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Fig. 491 shows the drawing of the principal figure.

Note. — The first couplet of thirty-two measures ends with the traven'et
oblique, and the second couplet commences with the pas de Mtnuet a gauche
double, and calls for the repetition of the entire melody. pIG ^

750. The principal figure is usually repeated twice in both the first and second halves
of the Minuet.

First repetition of principal figure.

Second repetition of principal figure.

In case it becomes necessary, or desirable, to abbreviate the Minuet, these repeti-
tions may be omitted ; thereby reducing the dance to only ninety-six measures,
without seriously affecting it. But unless both repetitions of the principal figure
are omitted in each half of the dance, there will result a very disturbing condi-
tion, as the music will contain one hundred and twenty measures.

It is customary for the first dancer to inform his followers if the principal figure is
to be executed only once, and the usual signal is a light clapping of the hands,
immediately preceding the last pas de Menuet a gauche. By this signal all the
other participants understand that the balance shall be executed.

THI R D COUPLET

Minuet balance {Balance de Menuet).

751. During the conclusion of the balance the right arm should be raised in readi-
ness to give the hand for the tour de main droite, which consists of
two pas de menuet en avant, one pas de menuet de cote {droit ou gauche).

215

Fig. 492 represents the tour de main droite.

At the conclusion of the first pas en avant, the couple should be in

« Fig. 491.

such a position that the lady faces the spectators ; at the conclusion
of the second, they should have passed entirely around one another. In the pas
de cite, the hands are released and the partners separate, passing to their origi-
nal positions, the lady by means of pas de menuet a gauche, and the gentleman
by pas de menuet a droite.

Following this is the pas a droite double, during which the right arm is lowered gently,
Balance de Menuet, and raise left arm,
Tour de main gauche,

VI.

Fig. 493 shows the figure of the tour de main gauche:

Fio. 493.
Pas de Menuet a droite double,
Pas de Menuet a gauche double.

2l6 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

FOURTH COUPLET

After this the principal figure is again executed three times, the first VD-

traversie thereof filling the last four measures of the third couplet, -.^VX

and the remainder the entire thirty-two measures of the fourth vsJJ

couplet; at the conclusion of which the dancers are in the positions Fig. 494.

shown in Fig. 494. 36

FIFTH COUPLET CODA (CONCLUSION)

752. Balance de Menuet, with raising of both hands, preparatory to execution of

demi-tour des deux mains and two pas de menuet en avant, which

. . . . Vffl

bring the dancers into the relative positions shown in Fig. 495, ^ . — ^

from which they again come to their original places ; the lady by J

means of a pas de menuet a gauche and the gentleman by fas de FlG

menuet a droite.

753. The dance is finished by two bows similar to those at the beginning, but in-
stead of retreating upon the seventh and eighth measures, the gentleman conducts
the lady to her seat.

Chapter XV

THE GAVOTTE

THE oldest description of the Gavotte now extant, or at least the oldest intelligible
description, is to be found in the " Orchesographie " of Thoinot Arbeau, published
in 1588. But the music there given is so entirely out of date, that it would be impos-
sible to adapt it to dancing purposes to-day without changing it completely, and making
alterations which would destroy the originality of the dance, and therefore render repro-
duction of no value.

755. The music of the Gavotte which reached the highest mark, of favour, and which
was said to be the work of Louis XIII, King of France (born in 1601), must have been
composed at a much later date than is supposed, or altered to correspond with the more
recent rules of musical composition.

756. The Gavotte which has lived to receive the title of la danse classique in our day
was written by Gaetano Vestris. Its steps are so well chosen and so admirably combined
that one could hardly conceive a more beautiful effect; and as the dance may be executed
with either simple or artistic steps, it is little wonder that so worthy a production has re-
ceived so fitting an honorary title.

757. The first part of the Menuet de la Reine, by Gardel (§ 728), is generally danced
at the commencement and conclusion of this Gavotte, before which the strain of eight
measures is played twice through. During the first rendering, the gentleman conducts his
lady to the appointed position ; and during the repetition the usual introductory bows are
executed. At the conclusion a similar strain is played, first for the final bows, and then
for the leading of the ladies to seats.

COIPLET AND FIGURE

758. It should always be borne in mind that the term " couplet" means a "strophe,"
which contains the entire melody of the music, and that the word "figure" refers only to
the lines described by the dancers upon the floor. A single figure requires only from eight
to twelve measures of music.

759. Exercise 104. La Gavotte de G. Vestris [Fig. 496].

217

2l8

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

La Gavotte de G. Vestris.

Introduction. Meiiuct de la Reine. MM 56 .- J

Choregraphie de F. A. Zorn.

Prelude

.. U,A~TT

Le cavalier

U,J

conduit la

dame a la

5 _££_ a

place fixee

pour le

fcJIr^Jlrf^lP

AaLL

JLLJUL

10 II, J-

r>i-Mi^i~k

K.XJ

lo~P

— o 3" —o 3* — -o 3- ■ -o — «

JJJi

k^hj

-3°— -30— -S*- »- -3 3

Gavotte

M M 76 ; j

Hole du dauseur. La dame fait les niemes pas du pied oppose*.

! L T^JLMMJ JL vl ^ v;. ?^U cW if* I ^. ^ Tl

5 I 3 -o o— — o O- 3 8— o o— — o -3

3 ^-'Fist

I IT T>i

L7 s

£^ Jf=

-^"1^ ]\

3lour».

Fig. 496.

Introduction. " La Menuet de la Reine."

Prelude.

The gentleman leads his partner to the place from which the Gavotte is
to start, and both stand in 1st position.

THE LADY S PART

Carry right foot to 2d position;
Transfer;

Draw left into anterior 3d position
preparatory to the curtesy.

THE GENTLEMAN S PART

Carry right foot to 2d position;
Transfer;

Draw left into posterior 3d position
preparatory to the bow.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

219

r \ \t V- \\ (

-*h \r \ \r v*

>,{i~

Repetition

de I'autre pied

3*Fi(!

iTFi*

/ \ 1/

tin /

i Hif ) \r

$Jl

.{o

j L

I—L

I Ul

\ {

$ 1A

i- na

/ ITw I

& n

ft i^o \<> n

.{03

^«* *

^ ^

^ -^

\-* $

±.

La finale «e fait comma I'introduction par la 1*™ partie du menuet de la Reine

Flo. 496.

IYLL.
I

3
>-3

Incline upper body and transfer;

Glide left to posterior 4th position

and transfer;
Draw right to anterior 3d position.

Three walking steps forward, begin-
ning with left foot.

Carry right to anterior 5th position;
Execute a quarter-turn to left on

both feet;
Sink to anterior 3d position of left.

Incline upper body and transfer, si-
multaneously bending right knee;

Glide right to posterior 4th position
and transfer;

Draw left to anterior 3d position.

Three walking steps forward, begin-
ning with right foot.

Carry left to anterior 5th position;
Execute a quarter-turn to right on

both feet;
Sink to anterior 3d position of right.

220

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

SYLL.
I

i-3

Glide left to 2d position;
Transfer;

Draw right into posterior 3d posi-
tion.

Incline upper body and transfer,

bending right knee;
Glide right to posterior 4th position

and transfer;
Draw left to anterior 3d position.

Three glissades dessous, left.

Carry left to 2d position and trans-
fer;

Execute a quarter-turn on left, glid-
ing right in semi-circle to pos-
terior 3d position ;

Transfer.*

Glide right to 2d position;
Transfer;

Draw left into posterior 3d posi-
tion.

Incline upper body and transfer;

Glide left to posterior 4th position

and transfer;
Draw right to anterior 3d position.

Three glissades dessous, right.

Carry right to 2d position and
transfer ;

Execute a quarter-turn on right,
gliding left in semi-circle to pos-
terior 3d position ;

Transfer.*

The Gavottef

FIRST COUPLET (FORTY MEASURES)

Figure I. (Eight measures.)
1-3 Preparation: Anterior 3d position of right.

1 Forward. One temps lev'e into 4th position.

2 One assemble dessus with left.

3 One changement de jambes saute into 3d position.
1-6 Backward. Three jet'es dessous and one assemble dessus.

Note. — The first jet'e is always toward the supporting foot.

Forward : One temps leve into 4th position.
One assemble dessus with left.
One entrechat quatre.

* This transfer brings both dancers into proper position for the execution of the Gavotte.

t The description which follows is of the gentleman's part. The lady executes the same
steps and figures, but in counter-motion.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 221

Backward: Two jet'es dessous and one assemble dessus, thus bringing left into anterior
3d position.

Note. — The rhvthm of the music of the fourth and eighth measures renders this variation
necessary.

Figure 11. (Eight measures.)

Cross to right, behind lady.

Three glissades croisees (dessous, dessus-dessous).
Backward : Four pas ailes de pigeon.
Recross to left behind lady.

Three glissades croisees.
Backward : Three pas ailes de pigeon.

Figure III. (Twelve measures).

Upon the place : Half-turn to right, facing lady, with right in anterior 3d position.
One pas ballotte, dessus et dessous.

One pas de zephire into intermediate (2-4) position with demi-
rond de jambe gauche en dehors and 1-4 turn to left.
Repetition of preceding two measures, commencing with left foot.
Repetition of same two measures, commencing with right foot.
Beginning with left foot, one ballott'e dessus et dessous, and one assemble dessous into

posterior 3d position of left.
Upon the place : b'ourjetes dessous.

Upon the place : One assemble dessous, one entrechat-quatre and one cbangement de
jambe to anterior 3d position of left.

Figure IV.

Repetition of third figure with other foot (Repetition avec f 'autre pied.)

SECOND COUPLET (FORTY MEASURES)

Figure 1. Gentleman's Solo (Solo de Danseur). (Eight measures). [Exercise 100,

§613].

Cross to left and right. Two pas de basque.

Backward. Two pas bourrees, and one assemble dessous.

Cross to right and left. Two pas de basque bris'es.

Backward. Two pirouettes basques to right.

Figure II. Lady's Solo (Solo de la Dame). Eight measures.

The same steps as the gentleman's solo, but in the counter-motion.

I ,

222 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Figure III. (Twelve measures.)

Forward. Gentleman beginning with right, lady with left.

One pas ballotte and one pas de zephire.
One pas ballotte and one pas de zephire.
One pas ballotte and one. pas de zephire.

One pas ballotte and one assemble dessous with left foot, during
which the gentleman executes a quarter-turn to left, thus
coming dos-a-dos to partner.
Backward. Four glissades crois'ees to left.

Three-quarter-turn. Two jetes dessous and one assemble dessus, by which the gentle-
man comes into anterior 5th position of left.

Figure IV. (Twelve measures.)

Repetition of Third Figure, beginning with other (gentleman's left, lady's right)
foot, by which the dancers are brought vis-a-vis in the eighth measure.

THIRD COUPLET (FORTY MEASURES)

Figure 1. (Eight measures.)

Forward. One tempo lev'e saute into 4th position.

One contretemps dessus with left into 3d position.

One changement de jambe.
Eackward. Four alternate temps de cuisse, right, left, right, left.
Forward : One temps lev'e saute into 4th position.

One contretemps dessus with left into 3d position.

One entrechat quatre ou huit.
Backward: Three alternate temps de cuisse, right, left, right.

Figure 11. (Eight measures.)

Cross to right behind lady : One chass'e.

One pirouette battue of two or more turns (depending
upon ability of dancer), by which the left foot
comes into anterior 5th position.
Backward : Four pas ailes de pigeon.
Cross to left before lady. One chasse.

One pirouette battue of two or more turns ending in an-
terior 5th position of right.
Backward. Three pas ailes de pigeon.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 223

Figure 111. (Twelve measures.) meas.

Slightly forward. One ronde croisie entiere, the gentleman to right inside and the
lady to left outside the circle.
One pas ballotti.

Two temps fouett'es dessus. 2

Repeat preceding two measures. 2

Repeat preceding two measures. -2

Upon the place. One ballotti and one assemble dessous with left foot.
Backward. Four jetes, one assemble and two changements dejambes, ending in an-
terior 5th position of left.

Figure IV. (Twelve measures.)

Slightly forward. Ronde siparie ; gentleman to left with left foot, and lady to

right with right foot, with same steps as in ronde crois'ee, but

in counter-motion. 6

Upon the place. One ballotti and one assemble dessous with right. 2

Backward. Four ailes de pigeon.

One assemble dessous with right foot, and

Two entrechats quatre ou fruit, ending in anterior 5th position of
right.

76J. Postlude. Following the third couplet, the first part of the Menuet de la
Reine is again executed, with the final rivirences, the first to the spectators and the
second to the partner ; upon the seventh measure of which the gentleman offers
the lady his right arm and courteously leads her to her seat.

Chapter XVI

SOCIAL ROUND DANCES

The Galop and the Galopade

THE usual significance of the word " galop " is the most rapid pace of a horse, and
the word "galopade" refers to a similar movement in dancing. "Galopade" is,
therefore, a more correct terme de danse than " galop." The dance which is now known as
the Galop was formerly called the Galopade, which name signifies a dance movement to
the side by means of simple chasing steps. The word Galop refers technically to a waltz-
like turning by means of alternate chasing steps (chassis alternatifs).

763. This dance, being one of the simplest of the round dances, and having been al-
ready introduced in the closing figures of the Quadrilles, will undoubtedly appeal to the
teacher as the most natural transition to the round dances.

The Galop is written in 2-4 measure, and the accent is equally placed upon both tempi.
The steps are either simple or alternate chasing steps. (See §§ 476 and 477.)

Simple chasing steps to the side should be practiced until the student is competent to
execute them smoothly, either in repetition or alternately, after which a temps fouett'e may
be added to the exercise. (See. §§476 and 488.)

By combining a whip-step (fouett'e) with three simple chasing steps upon two measures
of music, the phrase may be immediately repeated in the opposite direction; if, however,
the enchainement is to extend through four measures, seven chasing steps and a whip-step
should be used.

Exercise 105. Galop of the Amazons (Galop d'Amazones). [Fig. 497.]

MM 126: J

224

Fig. 497.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

225

764. The following figure is not only of great value in practicing the above combina-
tions, but it affords the pupil an agreeable diversion: —

THE STAR OF FOUR COUPLES (l'eTOILE A OJJATRE COUPLES)

As the Waltz position is assumed in this figure, it will be necessary to make a digres-
sion and explain it.

765. The carriage of the arms in the Waltz position has as its foundation the 3d arm
position, as shown in Fig. 498. The dancers stand facing one another, and near enough
for the gentleman to pass his right arm behind the lady, in order to hold and guide her.

The lady places her right hand, palm downward, in the gentleman's left, and her left
hand upon the gentleman's right arm. Care should be taken that the feet do not touch.
The position is illustrated by Figs. 499 and 500.

Fig. 498.

Fig. 499.

Fig. 500.

766. The gentleman must never place his arm so far around the lady's waist as to
bring her left shoulder in line with his right, nor should he allow himself to raise his left
elbow, thus drawing her hand close to him ; neither should he contract the habit of sup-
porting his left hand upon his hip, as that position is a constant menace to other dancers.
The hand stretched horizontally to the side is not only awkward and uncomfortable, but
takes too much room ; the idea that such an attitude is " smart " is absurd.

The lady must never allow her weight to rest upon the right arm of her partner, for
such a position not only interferes with freedom of movement, but is offensive to good
taste. This lack of reserve is more common in our day than ever before.

767. The most correct Waltz position is a perfectly natural carriage of the body with
both arms in 3d position. This is clearly shown in Fig. 498, above.

768. Had not our judgment and taste been perverted by that most unreasonable tyrant
we call fashion, there is little doubt that we should unhesitatingly pronounce the Waltz
position to be indecent, for even now it would be considered a flagrant insult should a

226 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

gentleman place his arm around the waist of the lady with whom he is sitting. Why then,
should such a liberty be excused, merely because the music of the dance is in the air? It
would never be tolerated beyond the duration of the music. Where is the
logic of it ? *• ,

769. But to return to the figure of the star (J etoile). The four couples v*/^*

stand in the Waltz position, in the respective corners of a square, as shown
in Fig. 501. *° »'«

Note. — It is always understood that the gentleman commences with the left,
and the lady with the right foot, in the waltz position.

MEAS.

All execute three chassis simples and one fouette with quarter-turn to right. 2

All execute the same steps to next corner at right. In this the gentleman begins

naturally with the right and the lady with the left foot.
It will be found that by turning the head slightly in the direction of the steps, the
turning will be more easily made, and the entire figure will present a more pleas-
ing appearance.
Repetition of preceding four measures to next corner to the right.
Repetition of preceding eight measures, which restores dancers to original places in

the square.
770. The above figure, if executed by four couples, is known as

T etoile simple or etoile a quatre couples. If executed by eight oV°* /i

couples, it is known as la double etoile (the double star), in which ,• ^V os
case the dancers form an octagon, as shown in Fig. 50a.
Couples 1, 3, 5 and 7 are known as the first party, and couples *«

2, 4, 6 and 8 as the second party. FlG' 5°"

First party. Forward to centre and thence to next corner at the right.
Second party. Forward to centre and thence to next side at the right. 4

First party. Repetition of first four measures. 4

Second party. Repetition of second four measures. 4

Repetition of same movements to original places. 16

Either star may be executed as a Cotillion figure with Galop steps, or by substituting
therefor the steps of the Mazurka-Polka.

The application of the Galop step to the last figure of the Quadrille is plainly demon-
strated by this figure (§ 692).

The Galop-Waltz

771. Literally, the word "waltz " means to turn forward from the place, or to advance
by turning; and in waltzing one either moves from his place by turning or causes his
partner to move from place. Thus we may say that every round dance is a Waltz, the
particular kind of Waltz being designated by prefixing another word.

o
3 .0 •'

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 227

If, for instance, the music is that of a Galop and the dancer executes Galop steps, the
addition of the turnings makes the dance a Galop- Waltz; in the same manner, Polka steps
produce a Polka-Waltz, Mazurka steps a Mazurka-Waltz, and so on.

772. The steps of the Galop- Waltz are neither more nor less than the alternate simple
chasing steps (chassis alternatifs) in which the rear foot is drawn into posterior 3d po-
sition after each chass'e to the side, thus forming the necessary preparation for the suc-
ceeding cbasse, which completes the turn.

A half-turn must be made upon each chass'e, and for this purpose the gentleman turns
to the left backward, and the lady to the right forward upon the first; and the gentleman
to the right forward and the lady to the left backward upon the second chass'e.

773. The Line of Direction. By means of the turns above described, the dancing
couple proceed, almost involuntarily, along the line of a large circle, around the hall.

To illustrate : let us imagine such a circle drawn upon the floor, as the line upon
which we are to waltz. If one faces the centre, the direction line to the right is at his
right, and that to the left is at his left side.

THE FIGURE OF THE WALTZ-DANCES

774. As a rule, round dances proceed along the line to the right, and the ordinary
Waltz turns to the right upon the line of direction are shown in Fig. 503.

K . .

Fig. 503. Fig. 504. Fig. 505. Kig. 506.

The reverse of this movement to the right is represented in Fig. 504.
Figs. 505 and 506 show the Waltz turns in ordinary and in reversed form, going to
the left along the line of direction.

The Reverse of the Galop (Le Galop a L'envers)

775. For the sake of variety, skilful dancers frequently turn in the opposite direction
upon the direction line. This variation is what is known as " reversing " or " waltzing to
the left" (a tenvers ou a rebours). The movement calls for considerable dexterity, for
while the ordinary Waltz turn along the direction line to the right contains somewhat less

228 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

than a whole turn, depending upon the size of the grand circle, the reverse turn calls for
something more than a whole turn.

776. The line of direction remains unchanged in the "reverse" and the dancers con-
tinue in the same general direction, because other couples who may be following have no
way of learning that those in front contemplate changing, and for some couples to start
around the hall in the other direction would render collisions almost unavoidable.

777. It is the general custom to commence the Galop with several simple chasing
steps to the side, without turning. Particular attention must be paid to the music, else
the dancer will fall into false cadence, in which case his steps will not coincide either with
those of the couples who are dancing correctly, or with the rhythm of the music.

The Pursuit (La Poursuite)

778. The Galop is varied by dancing directly forward without turning, in which
movement the dancers move along the line of direction without revolving. This figure is
called La Poursuite by the French, and in it the gentleman should always dance backwards,
allowing the lady to follow him dancing forwards, particularly if her dress reaches the floor.
Indeed, this rule is generally conceded to be invariable, notwithstanding the fact that the
figure could be executed in reversed order.

The Waltz (La False)

779. As has been already stated, any round dance may be called a Waltz, and the par-
ticular species of Waltz may be indicated by prefixing a denominative word. If, however,
no such word is prefixed, and the dance is spoken of simply as a " Waltz," one always under-
stands that the sociable national dance of Germany is meant.

780. Originally, only the three-step Waltz was danced, and that slowly, sometimes very
slowly(56 = 1 ). This gave good dancers so smooth and easy an appearance that it was
often said that they "could dance upon a plate."

781. Since that time, however, the beautiful three-step Waltz has disappeared in all
but a few of the German states, and even there it is danced in more rapid tempo, the dancers
sometimes demanding as nonsensical a tempo as 88 to ioo.

782. The proper tempo of a dance depends upon its nature, as has been explained in
§ 407. If the music is too slow, the dancer is unable to prolong the rhythm to coincide
with it, and if the next step is begun before its time the effect is extremely annoying. If
the music is too rapid, it is difficult for the dancer to follow it without becoming " winded,"
and to dance in that condition is neither agreeable nor artistic.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

229

783. As the result of many experiments with the metronome, the Author has come to
the conclusion that the most rapid tempo in which the waltz can be properly executed is
seventy-two measures per minute.

784. Johann Strauss, senior, the Waltz king, played Waltzes at about 72, and Lanner
rendered them at about 76. In Germany, the tempo runs from 69 to 72; in Paris, as high
as 76; in tranquil England, from 66 to 69; and in Russia many young persons waltz at a
tempo so rapid that few musicians can follow it.

The Two-Syllable Waltz I La False a Deux Temps)

785. This Waltz should be called the Cbass'e- Waltz, or chasing step Waltz, and it is
rather a six than a three step Waltz. The real Valse a deux temps is described in § 834,
under the name of the Hop Waltz or Two-Step.

786. The so-called Vienna Waltz or Valse a deux temps has, during the last fifty years,
come into vogue and nearly displaced the beautiful three-step Waltz. This so-called Vienna
Waltz is, in reality, only the Galop danced in Waltz time, for the Viennese delight in
rapid dancing and make everything a Galop, compelling even fashion to follow them by
their bewitching merriment.

787. It is the rhythm, and not the step combination, which constitutes the difference
between the Galop-Waltz and the False a deux temps.

For the Galop-Waltz the music is written in 2-4 measure and rendered with practically
the same accent on each syllable; the dancer therefore requires an equal length of time for
each step-syllable.

For the Valse a deux temps, the music, which is in 3-4 measure, is played with a strongly
accented first syllable, and the dancer in accenting his first step-syllable to correspond with
the music, almost involuntarily prolongs it to fill the second quarter-note of the measure.
His sense of measure will almost invariably lead him to this prolongation if the music is
properly phrased for the Valse a deux temps.

F.xercise 106 [Fig. 507].

MM 72, J

Flo. 507.

788. Although Waltz music is always written in 3-4 measure there is as wide a differ-
ence between the various compositions as between the different interpretations of them. For

230

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

the Chassi Waltz or False a deux temps, the syncopated rhythm, such as one may find in
the "Parisian Waltz" by Johann Strauss, is best adapted [Fig. 508].

iiii

£EgE3E3

t j ir t j 11 w

Fig. 508.

789. For the slow three-step Waltz, the music of the Landlers is best, viz., M. M.
54-60 = J. [Fig. 509].

Fig. 509.

790. The Fairy Waltz of J. Labitzki contains a most exquisite rhythm, if played at
about 72 [Fig. 510].

«£

P~=~

Fig. 510.

791. Still, notwithstanding all that has been said regarding the various compositions,
more depends upon the rendering of the music than upon the music itself, and a really
efficient musician can interpret any Waltz composition so that it will fit the requirements
of either style of the dance [Figs. 511 and 512].

For Two-
Waltz

"Step kH » 1 .h r 1 r * \=F$=^

Fig. 511

For Three-Step -0 O 1
Waltz

Fig. 512.

792. All that has been said regarding the Waltz position, direction, figure and changes,
in connection with the Galop, is equally applicable to the Waltz.

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

231

The Three or Six-Step Waltz (La False a Trot's ou a Six Temps)

793. There is little more to be said of this beautiful dance beyond what has been al-
ready explained. An entire rotation or step-sentence contains two measures or six sylla-
bles, and for that reason we may style it the six-step Waltz, which title is literally proper.

794. Exercise 107. Three-or Six-Step Waltz (False a trois ou a six temps) [Fig. 513a].

P^i

M U 54i72,J.

iTT

T*.

^TT

im$

■

a •

JKJ^pklLJ^;!

ere
b »

AsX.1

~iu ^

Fig. 5:3.

The key indicates that the regular waltz turn to the right is to be made along the
line of direction to the right, and the symbol of the gentleman means that the choregraphy
shows the step combination for the gentleman only. The lady begins the same combination
upon the first syllable of the second measure, the gentleman having by that time com-
pleted a half-turn.

Preparation: Anterior 3d position of right.

First Syllable. Carry the right foot forward slightly toward the right into 4th posi-
tion, and transfer.

Second syllable. Glide left foot forward into the crossed 4th position, executing at the
same time a half-turn upon the right, and transfer.

Third syllable. Draw the right backward into anterior 3d position, transfer and carry
left to posterior 4th balancing position (coupe dessus) as a preparation for the commence-
ment of the next measure.

Fourth syllable. Put down the left in posterior 4th position and transfer.

Fifth syllable. Glide right backward into crossed posterior 4th position, at the same
time executing a half-turn upon the left, and transfer.

Sixth syllable. Draw the left foot forward into posterior 3d position and transfer, im-
mediately carrying the right into anterior 4th balancing position (coup'e dessous), ready to
repeat the sentence and completing the Waltz turn.

795. It is therefore plainly to be seen that to execute a complete Waltz turn the dancer
requires two measures of music, upon which he makes either more or less than a complete
rotation, in accordance with the requirements of maintaining the line of direction as ex-
plained in § 775.

232 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

796. It is customary for the gentleman to commence upon the first note of the first
measure and the lady upon the first note of the second measure.

The acquirement of the Waltz step is far from difficult, but in order to waltz smoothly
and gracefully one must practice long and diligently.

797. There is no other round dance so conducive to dizziness as the Three-Step Waltz.
One should therefore immediately stop upon the first appearance of this sensation, and
either turn three times in the opposite direction, thus dispelling it, or wait a short period
until it has passed. In this way one may rapidly accustom himself to the movement, but
unless the dizziness is avoided at once it is likely to result in headache or some other dis-
agreeable feeling.

798. In the 'Three-Step Waltz, as in the Galop, one may dance directly forward or
backward, or turn to the left, but these variations require considerable practice and ability.

These variations were first acccepted in Germany under the Bohemian name Redowak,
(see § 811), about 1830.

The Reverse Waltz (La Valse a I'Envers)

799. The execution of this movement is explained by Bernhard Klemm in his "Cat-
echism" in a masterly manner: —

" The gentleman executes alone, and as a preparation, the first three steps of the ordi-
nary Waltz (to the right), after which he immediately commences the succeeding six steps
with the left foot, turning to the left, while the lady begins the same six steps with her
right foot and turns in the same direction as the gentleman."

800. Exercise 108 shows the choregraphy of the " Reverse." In dancing it the gentle-
man commences with the first half of the sentence, and the lady with its second half [§794,
Fig- 5*3*]-

The Polka (La Polka)

801. Rarely, if indeed ever, has a dance received so much honor, or so much atten-
tion, as was paid to the Polka in 1844, when the whole world wrote and talked about it,
and apparently thought little of anything else.

Every newspaper contained essays singing the praises of the dance, and persons dressed
their hair a la polka, with pomade a la polka, ate cakes a la polka, wore gowns a la polka,
and so forth; and almost numberless musical compositions for the dance were published.
Every music store put out "original Polkas," every picture store displayed "Polka"
pictures, and so many " true " and conflicting stories were told about the origin of the
dance, that Professor Schlosser might have spent months had he reviewed them all.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

*33

At that time the author travelled from Odessa to Vienna and Paris, for no other
reason than to visit the most celebrated teachers of the Polka. And what did he find ?
Only the dance which, as a child, he had learned from his father under the name of the
" Scotch Waltz," and which he had shown to his pupils in Dresden in 1835, in Christiania
in 1836, and in Paris in 1837. It was not, however, until 1844 that this dance became
known in Paris to those persons who understood how to advertise it.

802. The Tour or the Parisian Polka, once so popular, has long since disappeared, and
the Polka-Quadrille, composed in 1845 in Paris, never achieved a fashionable position.

803. The music of the Polka is in 2-4, or more properly 4-8 measure, of which the
first eighth-note is strongly and the third lightly accented. The step-sentence, however,
may be said to commence upon this third eighth-note.

804- The Amazons Polka, by F.mil Tiri, was among the first of the so-called original
Polkas, and The Tour (La Tour) or Parisian Polka, as well as the Polka-Quadrille were
arranged upon that composition.

The composer gave this music the tjtle of" The Bohemian Amazons," and the degree
of the metronome was so slow (88) that the steps could be executed with the utmost pre-
cision. In social dances, however, few young people are satisfied with such a tempo, and it
was accordingly accelerated. The most rapid tempo in which the steps can be accurately
executed is 108.

Exercise 109. Original Polka (Polka Originale) [Fig. 514].

MM 88 i 108 : J

K n^MMi.

Fig. 514.

805. As indicated by the key the steps are executed along the lines of the regular
Waltz figure upon the direction line to the right, and the symbol shows that the script is
the gentleman's part. He commences with the left foot.

806. Execution. Preparation: Anterior 3d position of left, with light raising on the
right and lifting of the left in the part-measure.

First syllable. Put down left foot, and transfer.

Second syllable. Carry right to posterior 3d position, and transfer.

Third syllable. Glide left forward and sidewise, upon the sole, and transfer (this must
be done whether one is dancing directly forward or is turning).

Fourth syllable. Draw right into posterior low 3d balancing position, ready for the
commencement of the succeeding step.

The movement is staccato.

807. The " pursuit " and the " reverse" are easier of execution in the Polka than in
the Galop or the Waltz, because of the hopping, and are therefore more often danced.

234 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

808. The Polka has been known by various names, such as the Hop-Polka, the Polka
Tremblante, and the Parisian Polka, but they are all identical in execution.

In certain of the Rhine countries there is danced, under the name of the " Bavarian
Polka," a combination which in Russia, England, France and in various other countries
is called the " Scotch Polka," and which in Bavaria is known as the " Rheinlander."

809. In Vienna and certain other portions of Austria, a so-called " Rush Polka" is
danced, in which there is no hopping, and which is played in more rapid tempo than the
ordinary Polka. Indeed, this tempo is often so rapid as to change the dance to a Galop.
Many authorities claim that there should be no hopping in the Polka. Let us consider —
who is right ?

810. There is but one way in which to bring about uniform opinions among the vari-
ous authorities upon the art of dancing, as to the different terms and expressions relating
to it, and that is, by maintaining a society or a committee of thoroughly educated masters
to whom questions may be referred for consideration, and whose findings shall be final.
Until such a board of authority is established, we need not hope for anything but a Babel
in the language of the dance.

A plan of this character has already been undertaken by the German Academy of the
Art of Teaching Dancing, in Berlin, which includes members from other countries; and it
is to be hoped that all friends and connoisseurs of the art will cooperate with this move-
ment, in order that a Universal Academy of the Art of Dancing may be effected.

Redowa (Rejdovak^

811. In the Bohemian language the word rejdovat signifies to push by turning to and
fro, in the same manner that one would grasp the shafts of a wagon and push it backward,
at the same time turning the shafts to guide it to a given place ; and the noun of the word
is spelt rejdovak.

This term may therefore be applied to the " pursuit " in the round dances ; as, for in-
stance, the Three-Step Waltz, in which one dancer is pushed backward along the line of
direction.

81 2. The number of turns in the same direction is a matter of little or no consequence ;
but a change of figure every four measures as follows is recommended :

Four measures, Waltz turn to right.
" " Gentleman going backward.

" " Waltz turn to left.

" " Lady going backward.

813. This combination of figures was adopted in Southern Germany about 1830, un-
der the name of" Redowak," and the original music was as follows :

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING
Exercise no. Redowa Originate [Fig. 515].

235

Fig. si 5.

Redowaczka ( Redoivatschka)

814. The same variations were afterward applied to the Galopade, with a correspond-
ing change to 2-4 measure, and the dance was called the " Redowaczka."
Exercise ill. Redowaczka Originale [Fig. 516].

Fig. 516.

815. At the time of the general acceptance of the Polka, similar variations were applied
to that dance, and it was called the Redowa-Polka, which name has clung to it to this day.

Note. — The French write and pronounce the word " Redowa," following their usual practice
of suppressing the final consonant.

8 J 6. Many beautiful and worthy compositions having been published under the title
of " Redowa," by Karl Faust and others, in which a peculiar rhythm, similar to that of the
Mazurka, was employed, it was thought worth while to invent a new step-sentence to cor-
respond to them, and it is this that we now call the Redowa; and by an unimportant change
in this sentence, or rather, by its repetition, the dance called the Mazurka-Polka was pro-
duced. (See § 823.)

817. Exercise 112. Modern Redowa-Step {Pas de Redowa Moderne) [Fig. 517].

MM U4.J

frrlWt.^ foU^^A

F10. 517.

.coition — Preparation for gentleman : Anterior 3d position of left.
First syllable. After a light hop upon the right foot in the part-measure, the gentle-
man glides the left foot into the 2d position {temps lev'e glisse), and transfers.

236 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Second syllable. The right foot now follows into anterier 3d position, while the left
is slightly raised and pushed sidewise from its position [coupe lateral).

Third syllable. The left foot, which hangs in the 2d balancing position, is now put
down and receives the weight, while the right is carried immediately into the posterior 3d
balancing position.

These three syllables fill one measure of music and contain a half-turn, and the same
combination is repeated in the second measure with the other foot, to complete the rota-
tion ; the enchainement therefore extends through a period of two measures.

818. In this dance the reverse and pursuit are greatly facilitated by the lifting move-
ment which it contains, and which consists principally of the throwing step (jet'e). Such
variations are therefore more common in the Redowa than in most of the round dances ;
indeed it is these variations which are responsible for its name.

819. The Redowa is frequently executed under the name of" Tyrolienne," and there
are many compositions for it which have been made up solely of genuine Tyrolese airs.
The disagreement which arises from such a condition is readily understood when one pauses
to consider that few dancers or composers are competent to discriminate between the Bo-
hemian and the Tyrolese music which determines the proper title of the dance. Indeed,
such questions could only be suitably decided by a board of experts.

820. Again, the Redowa is, in certain other countries, known as the " Hunters' Schot-
tische " or the " Hunters' Polka." These names, like those of many other dances and
steps, are difficult to account for. The name "Hunters' Schottische" appears to have
been first given to the dance in Berlin, and as the story is at least plausible, we will re-
cite it.

About the time that the dance was introduced there was garrisoned in Berlin a mili-
tary body known as the "Neuchatel Hunters," composed largely of good-looking
young men whose handsome uniforms were greatly admired by the young ladies. It is
said that one of the " Hunters " executed the steps of the dance is so exquisite a manner
that his comrades endeavored to imitate him, and that the ladies therefore gave the dance
the name of the " Hunter " Schottische or Polka, which title eventually spread to other
places.

821. It sometimes happens that the same combination of steps is invented at two dif-
ferent places, and therefore receives correspondingly different names. Such a contingency
is quite possible in the case of such combinations as the Polka step and in others which
coincide so completely with the musical rhythm. This will, perhaps, account for the dis-
parity of names in this case. Would it not be possible that such a coincidence might ex-
tend to a third or even a fourth location ?

822. Young persons are seldom at a loss to find a name for that which pleases them,
regardless of its absolute correctness, and this is only further evidence of the need of a
universal academy of the art of dancing.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

237

Mazurka-Polka or Polka-Mazur

823. This dance is usually referred to as the " Mazurka- Polka," although most of the
musical compositions for it are marked " Polka-Mazur." Which is the correct title ?

824. Although the position, the figure, the line of direction, and at least a part of the
step combination coincide with the Polka, the music is in 3-4 measure, and the rhythm
so exactly similar to that of the Mazurka that one has only to quicken the tempo to be
able to dance the Mazurka by it.

Now, if in the other round dances the music designates the character of the dance, as,
for example, in the Galop-Waltz, which is danced to Galop music, and in the Mazurka-
Waltz, which is danced to Mazurka music, why should not the same rule apply to this
dance, which, being executed to Mazurka music, should be called the Mazurka- Polka?

825. It may be that the transposition has been made for the sake of easier pronunci-
ation.

826. The invention of the dance is attributed to the Russian Princess, Marie Nicola-
ewna ; but, although the Princess was reputed to be an excellent dancer, and the Russian
Court is a great patron of the art, still the author cannot affirm of his own knowledge that
such was its origin. He will state, however, that the dance cam£ to Odessa from St.
Petersburg long before it was practiced in other countries.

The original music is said to have been that which is given herewith :
Kxercise 113. Mazurka-Polka [Fig. 518].

MM 140:

H 7n[k^.n^a1k^.^^L^-^1^^^.

Fig. 518.

Execution (The Gentleman's Part). Preparation : Anterior 3d position of left.

First syllable. Temps lev'e glissi and transfer.

Second syllable. Coupe dessous lateral (§ 493).

Third syllable. Fouetti dessous (§ 487).

Fourth syllable. GHss'e.

Fifth syllable. Coupe dessous lateral.

Sixth syllable. Jete dessous upon the left, followed by immediate lifting of right foot
into posterior 3d balancing position.

This combination extends through two measures of music, and as a consequence the
entire enehainemenl, which contains a complete rotation, requires a period of four measures.

23«

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

827. For the sake of variety, one may execute the first two measures a rebours and
the remainder backward.

828. The enchainement may also be combined with the Galopade. In this case the
first two measures may be danced a rebours with a half-turn, and the remaining two meas-
ures filled in by the Galopade, which consists of five chassis simples and one fouett'e.

This combination, applied to the star figures, presents a beautiful appearance (see
Exercise 105 and § 770).

829. It would, however, be an improper combination to execute the first three sylla-
bles twice, and the last three only once, because the repetition of such an enchainement
would constitute a period of only six measures, and would throw the dancers into false
cadence ; but this would be remedied by executing the first three syllables three times
and the last three once, as that combination would constitute an enchainement of eight
measures, thus ending in correct cadence.

The Tyrolienne [La Tyrolienne)

830. The melodies of the Tyrolese dances are Alpine songs called Yodlers and L'dnd-
lers, to the accompaniment of which the boys and girls dance at weddings and festivals.
In these dances the youth leads his partner gently by the hand, turns her beneath his
arm, revolves most skilfully, and sinks upon one knee, while she dances around him ; he
perhaps finishes by lifting her high in the air, all of which is done to the music of a
charming Three-Step Waltz.

831. The author saw, at Dresden, in 1835, a dance called the Tyrolese or Balance
Waltz, the music of which was a genuine Tyrolese air. Following is its choregraphy :

Exercise 114. Tyrolienne Originale [Fig. 519].

MM. 50

•^ ■ -o *3 A -© o- a* A

Fig. 519.

Preparation : Waltz position. Gentleman in anterior 3d position of left; lady, anterior
3d position of right.

FIRST PART (SIXTEEN MEASURES)

First Measure.

The gentleman executes a demi-balanc'e to left, with inclination and turning to partner,
while the lady executes a demi-balanc'e to right with corresponding inclination, but no
turning.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 239

First syllable. The gentleman glides left into 2d position and transfers.

Second syllable. Raises upon left foot and glides right into posterior 3d balancing
position.

Third syllable. Lowers left heel (une chute). (See § 374.)

Second Measure. Repetition in opposite direction.

The lady executes the same steps in countermotion.

Third and Fourth Measures. Execute a complete rotation of the three-step Waltz, in
which the gentleman leads backward with the second half, and the lady follows forward
with the first half of the Waltz step.

This enchainment requires four measures of music, and is executed four times, neces-
sitating the repetition of the period of eight measures of music.

SECOND PART (SIXTEEN MEASURES)

The Three-Step Waltz.

THIRD PART (SIXTEEN MEASURES)

Repetition of the first part.

FOURTH PART (SIXTEEN MEASURES)

Balance as in first part, but merely join hands. Two measures.

Turn, disengage hands and execute Waltz turn, the gentleman to the left and the lady
to the right, again joining hands. Two measures.
Repeat figure three times. Twelve measures.

FIFTH PART (SIXTEEN MEASURES)

Waltz.

Other Tyrolese figures may be added at will, and any number of couples may join in
the dance. Indeed, certain couples may retire and make way for others to take their places,
provided the regularity of the lines and the coincidence of the figures is maintained.

832. Tyrolienne dt I 'Acadimit. A Tyrolienne composed by Herr A. Freising has been
unanimously adopted by the members of the German Academy and incorporated in their
course of instruction. It is composed of various genuine figures of the Tyrolese national
dances and is so arranged that it is suitable for use at the finest balls. The music, which
corresponds both in motive and in rhythm to the peculiarities of the Tyrolese airs, is by
Kdouard Herold of Berlin.

833. A complete choregraphic exposition of this very elegant dance will be given in
another collection.

Its figures are briefly outlined in Freising's " Dance-Album " of 1885, page 52.

Nan. — Hcrr Zorn never published the " Collection " referred to. — Ed.

240

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Hop Waltz [La False Sautillee)

834- At the beginning of the nineteenth century there was danced, to very lively music,
a Waltz in 2-4 measure known as the " Hop Waltz." The step consisted of one jete and
one fouette, as shown in the following exercise:

Exercise 115. Hop Waltz (La Valse sautillee) [Fig. 520].

M M W

0 * f T

.-f- 0 M 0 -

- . 0

00 + 0 .

if 0^—

iTffPm

r 0 * f

F^ff^

V> 80-

eIL

~ V A

z ^

- h

Fig. 520.

The key signifies the ordinary Waltz turns toward the right, and the symbols repre-
sent the role of the gentleman.

Preparation : Waltz position ; gentleman, posterior 3d position of left ; lady, posterior
3d position of right.

During the part-measure, the gentleman lifts the left foot into 2d balancing position.

First syllable. Jete into 2d position, with immediate lifting of right into posterior 3d
balancing position.

Second syllable. Hop upon left and extend left into 2d balancing position, as prepa-
ration for the succeeding jete.

During these two syllables a half-turn is executed, and the rotation is completed in
the second measure by the repetition of the same combination with the other foot.

The hop (saute) may, as shown in the script of the third and fourth measures, be sub-
stituted by a fouette, which will embellish the movement.

Balance Waltz [False Balancee)

835. The same steps are also applied to the regular 3-4 Waltz, in which case there is
no jete in the first syllable, and the transfer of weight is accomplished without hopping.
This movement is known as the two-step Waltz, and the same movement is also called
the Balance Waltz (La Valse Balancee), under which name it is explained in Klemm's
" Catechism."

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

24I

While the name " Two-Step " or " Two-Step Waltz " is in itself literally correct, in-
asmuch as only two transfers of weight are made during a complete Waltz turn, it might
be well to call it the " Degagee Waltz," to distinguish it from the Balanc'ee Waltz of the
Tyrolienne.

Exercise 116. Balance Waltz (La False Balanc'ee) [Fig. 521].

, M M 69 : a.

Fie. 521.

Execution. — Preparation : First position. During the part-measure, the gentleman
carries the left foot into 2d position, at the same time hopping upon the right.

First syllable. Put down left in 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Hop on left foot, simultaneously executing a rond de jambe en dehors
with the right.

Third syllable.

Fourth syllable,
for the next step.

These four syllables contain a complete Waltz turn and require two measures of music.
It is unnecessary to state that the lady executes the same movements as the gentleman,
.but in counter-motion, thus maintaining the coincidence of their respective parts.

Persons of sufficient skill may make this a very beautiful dance, by doubling the rond
de jambe and "beating" the temps lev'e in the part-measure; but unless one is especially
proficient such attempts will be extremely unlovely.

Put down right in 2d position, and transfer.
Hop on right and carry left into 2d balancing position as preparation

The 5-4 Waltz (False en Cinq Temps)

836. A Waltz in 5-4 measure, which was said to have originated in Paris, was at one
time brought out, but its rhythm was so greatly at variance with the ordinary sense of
measure that it was very short-lived and the endeavor to make it fashionable resulted in
utter failure.

837. Nearly the same fate overtook the Sicilienne and the Impiriale, which were pub-
lished, with notes and descriptions, in 1854. They were too complicated to attain popu-
lar-

242

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

The Varsovianna (La Varsouvienne)

838. This was another round dance of the same period, but it was more favorably
received than the three preceding, and thus lived longer and spread farther. It is occa-
sionally danced even at the present time.

839. The original music and choregraphic description are given herewith.
Exercise 117. The Varsovianna (La Varsouvienne) [Fig. 522].

M M 130 a 144 = J

]wi£t

A A-M^H

l\ vK

K— K

K^-tth

k*.

A a4a^4a^^\A„^£

Fig. 522.

The key indicates that the dance is to proceed by means of the regular Waltz turns,
along the line of direction to the right, and the auxiliary keys, which are under -the part
measures, indicate the particular direction in which the movements should go at that point,
and which must be maintained until changed by another auxiliary key.

It is true that the direction may be ascertained by referring to the signs of the positions
and movements, but the use of auxiliary keys often serves to expedite matters by increas-
ing the clearness of the script.

84O. Preparation: Gentleman's part. Posterior 3d position of left with inclined direc-
tion of sole. During the part-measure the gentleman carries the left foot to the side.

FIRST PART (EIGHT MEASURES)

First syllable. Put down left in 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Coupe dessous lateral with right, thus forcing the left into 2d balancing
position.

Third syllable. Jete upon left, with immediate carrying of right into posterior 3d balan-
cing position, with simultaneous half-turn to the left backward.

Fourth and fifth syllables. Put down right foot in 2d position and hold same for the
duration of a half-note.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING 243

Sixth syllable. Carry right backward into the posterior 3d and thence to 2d balancing
position.

This step-sentence requires two measures of music, and its repetition by the other foot
in the succeeding two measures constitutes an encbalnement of four measures, and completes
the rotation. It will be noted, however, that the gentleman must, in order to complete the
Waltz turn upon the second jetey execute a half-turn to the right forward.

The same encbalnement is repeated upon the next four measures.

SECOND PART (EIGHT MEASURES)

841 . I n this the rhythm of the music necessitates a different combination of movements,
as follows:

Part measure. The left foot is raised into posterior 3d balancing position and then
stretched into 2d balancing position.

First syllable. Put down left in 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Coupe dessous lateral with right.

Third syllable. Fouetti dessous (§ 487).

Fourth, fifth and sixth syllables. Repetition of first, second and third.

Seventh syllable. Put down left in 2d position and transfer.

Kighth syllable. Coupe lateral.

Ninth syllable. Jete upon left, carry right into posterior 3d and thence to 2d balan-
cing position with simultaneous half-turn to the left backward.

Tenth and eleventh syllables. Put down right foot in 2d position, and hold same for
duration of a half-note.

Twelfth syllable. Carry left backward into posterior 3d, and thence to 2d position.

This sentence is repeated upon the succeeding four measures with the other foot;
the whole encbalnement therefore extends through a period of eight measures.

842. In the original music, which was composed by Johann Strauss, still other
rhythmic variations occur, but it will be easy for dancing teachers and other persons who
have followed these examples closely to discover or to invent suitable combinations for
these variations.

843. If, however, the measure is changed from 3-4 time, it will be necessary to adapt
the movements to the requirements of the case.

Krakoviak (Cracoviemte)

844- That this dance originated in Cracow may be inferred from its very name ; but
although it is not, as sometimes stated, the actual national dance of the Cracovians, but
merely a social dance intended for the drawing-room, its music and its movement are alike
true to the national characteristics of that people.

244

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Of the many compositions that have been published for this dance, the most popular
is that which follows :

Exercise 118. Krakoviak (Cracovienne) [Fig. 523].

M.M.100 a108: i

8 «-6 *-6 *"■>

Fig. 523.

Preparation : Both stand in anterior 3d sole position of right.

Position : The gentleman holds the lady as in Walz position, but allows his left arm
to hang naturally at the side, or supports it by placing the back of the closed hand upon
his hip.

Note : Some prefer to carry the left arm behind the back or to raise it to 4th position.

The lady rests her left hand lightly upon the right shoulder of her partner, and either
holds her dress gracefully with the right hand, or supports her hand open upon her hip.
The Polish ladies assume this attitude with an inimitable grace, quite in keeping with
their extraordinary talent as dancers.

FIRST HALF

Both begin with the right foot and execute three pas ordinaires and one frapp'e forward,
along the line of direction, in the same manner as in the Mazurka (§§ 880 to 883), but in
2-4 measure ; finishing in the part measure by a simultaneous raising upon the left foot
and lifting of the right into an anterior balancing position.

First Measure.

First syllable. Put down right foot, which glides forward into 4-5 position, and transfer,
immediately lifting left foot into posterior 4th balancing position with slightly bended
knee, and inclined or perpendicular direction of the sole.

Second syllable. Hop on right foot and carry left forward in a circle to anterior 4th
balancing position, at the same time " raising " upon the right foot, in preparation for the
succeeding step.

Second Measure. Repetition with left foot.

Third Measure. Repetition with right foot.

Fourth Measure.

The lady executes a fourth pas ordinaire, and then crosses over by means of a tour
boiteux, which consists of four pas boiteux, while the gentleman executes the following en-
chainment :

First syllable. Put down left in 2d parallel position, at the same time turning the right
foot upon the ball into corresponding position.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

245

Second syllable. Strike the heels together, thus coming into a half-outward 1st posi-
tion, and immediately carry the left into posterior 5th ball position, in readiness for the pas
de ciseaux en tournant.

Many dancers execute, in place of the beating of heels, three audible steps in 3d sole
position (pas frappes), of which the first and third are more strongly accented than the
second. This figure is quite in harmony with the spirit of the dance, but in large parties,
where excitement is almost unavoidable, may so degenerate as to become nothing more
than a rude tramping.

These four measures constitute the first half of the enchainement.

S ECONU HALF

845. The Second Half consists of the tour boiteux, in which, as has been already stated,
the lady goes around her partner by means of four pas boiteux, while he executes three
pas de ciseaux en tournant, carries the left foot into parallel 2d position, and strikes the
heels together, or else executes three pas frappes ; thus finishing the enchainement of eight
measures in such time that the part-measure may be used as preparation for a repetition.

Unless the enchainement is begun with the commencement of the clausula, the dancers
will fall into false cadence, and the entire movement will appear ridiculous.

Mazurka- Waltz (False de Mazourka)

846. The title of this dance is self-explanatory, for it is a Waltz movement executed,
in either 3-4 or 6-8 Mazurka time in periods of eight or sixteen measures. The dance
has become widely spread, but is particularly popular in Poland.

Execution. Preparation : Gentlemen left and lady right foot in anterior 3d position.

The gentleman holds the left hand of the lady in his right and leads her through the
first half of the enchainement, but assumes the regular Waltz position for the second half.
The dance may be very beautifully varied by carrying the disengaged arms in different
graceful ways.

Exercise 119. Mazurka- Waltz (Valse-Mazourka) [Fig. 524].

MM M4: J)

Flo. 524.

246 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

FIRST HALF

a. Promenade : Both execute, upon the first four measures, four pas ordinaires, the gentle-
man commencing with the left foot and the lady with the right.

SECOND HALF

During the succeeding four measures, which constitute the second half of the clausula,
the dancers assume the Waltz position, and execute the same steps with Waltz turns along
the line of direction.

This enchalnement, therefore, requires eight measures, and particular care should be taken
in it to observe the proper cadence.

847. Any of the Mazurka steps other than the pas boiteux (which cannot be alternated)
may be used in this enchalnement.

848. The Poles usually dance the Mazurka- Waltz, or, as they pronounce it, the Valse-
Mazur, as a promenade of eight measures, combined and alternating with eight measures
of turning, as in the Waltz.

For the sake of brevity, only four measures of the figures have been written in Exer-
cises 1 19 <z and 1 1 9 <£.

849. Execution of Exercise 119^ [Fig. 524].

Preparation: 1st position. During the part-measure the gentleman carries the left
foot into the low balancing 2d position, turning the toe slightly forward.

First Measure. Pas battu parallele. (This is explained in § 885, and written' chore-
graphically in Exercise 119^).

Second Measure. Pas ordinaire to left, turning in that direction on the left foot upon
the third syllable.

Third and Fourth Measures. Repetition of the 1st and 2d with other foot.

850. Exercise 119 c [Fig. 524]. (This exercise is described in Klemm's " Catechism"
as the False Russe or " Russian Waltz."

Execution : The preparation and the first measure of this are exactly similar to the cor-
responding portion of Exercise 119^, and finish in the balancing 2d position of the left.
The second measure is executed by the gentleman as follows :

First syllable. Jete to left and transfer.

Second syllable. Carry the left backward into the crossed 4-5 ball position, and exe-
cute a half-turn to the left backward, finishing in anterior 3d position of left.

Third syllable. Finish by coupe dessous with left.

The same step-sentence is repeated in counter-motion with the other foot upon the
succeeding two measures.

The lady, as in all other round dances, executes the same steps as the gentleman, but
in the opposite direction, thus maintaining the coincidence of movement along the line
of direction.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

247

Galop-Polka or Glide-Polka (L' Esmeralda)

851. This combination of steps, which consists of two simple Galopade steps to the
side and one clearly accented Polka-step, is perfectly described by the name "Galop-Polka,"
and is so absolutely in harmony with the rhythm of a properly arranged musical compo-
sition that its execution becomes almost involuntary. The "Apropos Polka," by Karl
Faust (Op. 68), is a good instance of this.

Many dancing-masters, among whom was the Author, had, previous to the appearance
of this dance, discovered the step-sequence and given it the name of the Galop- Polka, little
thinking that the euphonious Spanish name Esmeralda, which was derived from a similar
combination occurring in the chorus of a ballet of that name, had elsewhere been applied to it.

852. The music is in 2-4 measure, and in the absence of a specially arranged compo-
sition, any Polka music may be used, provided the rhythm given above the lines of the
following example is applied. The dance is executed in Waltz position, and the part of
the lady is the exact counterpart of that written below for the execution of the gentleman.

853. Exercise 120. Galop- Polka or Glide-Polka {U Esmeralda) [Fig. 525].

Rbytme

Preparation: Anterior 3d position of left. In the part measure glide to the left, at the
same time raising upon the right and transferring to left upon the first beat of the measure.
This is immediately followed by two chassis simples, one coupe, and onejete to the left, dur-
ing which one executes a half Waltz turn along the line of direction, as indicated by the
key. For variety, the same movements may be executed a rebours.

Note. — The different abbreviations which occur in the choregraphy have been explained in §§462,
479 «><1 493-

Schottischc, Rhcinlander, Bavarian Polka

854- In the year 1850 there appeared, in all parts of Europe, the " Schottische," a
round dance which had, as early as 1844, Deen executed in Bavaria under the name " Rhcin-
lander," and in the Rhenish countries it was known as the " Bavarian Polka." These names

248

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

have in some places been retained until this time. The music, which is in 2-4 measure, is
rendered very slowly, with the effect of 4-4 time.

855. This dance was known in France, England, Russia, Italy, Greece and various
other countries as the " Scottish," and it would be difficult to explain, if indeed, it could
be satisfactorily determined, how the title "Schottische," which is the German form of the
word, ever came to be so definitely applied to the dance as to warrant its adoption, untrans-
lated, into the languages of all the countries referred to.

The Polka (§ 801) was known as the "Schottische Waltz" about 1840.

856. The music given in the following exercise, which was composed in Paris by A.
Decombre, corresponds exactly with the rhythm of the dance and attained great popularity.

Exercise 121. Schottische [Fig. 526].

Fig. 526.

Execution : Gentleman's part.

Preparation : Waltz position : anterior 3d position of left.
Direction : To the right, by means of regular Waltz turns.
First Measure. First syllable. Glide left to 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Draw right into posterior 3d and transfer.
Third syllable. Glide left into 2d position and transfer.
Fourth syllable. Draw right into posterior balancing 3d position.
Second Measure. The same movements are executed during the second measure with
the other foot, and the first and third syllables of each measure are accented, thus giving
a rocking movement to the combination. There is no turning during this rocking {balance)
movement.

Third Measure. First syllable. One jet'e to left.

Second syllable. Hop upon left and raise right into posterior bal-
ancing 3d position.
Third and fourth syllables. Repetition of first and second with other
foot.
Fourth Measure. Repetition of third measure.

857. A whole turn is executed in each of these (the third and fourth) measures, and
the entire enchainement , therefore, extends through a period of four measures. For the
purpose of teaching, the step-sentence may be divided, and the first two measures may be
termed balanc'ee or rocking, while the last two are called sauteuse or hopping. The first step-

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 249

sentence is composed of two cbass'es-gliss'es alternatifs, and the second of four jetes-releves
en tournant, otherwise known as Pas de Rigaudon [§ 474]. It is a common fault among
dancers to neglect the exact execution of this latter portion of the encbainement and thus
produce a peculiarly crude effect. The foot must not be allowed to remain in the balan-
cing 2d position with horizontal sole at the end of the sentence, but must be carried
backward from that place into posterior balancing 3d position, thus finishing in a closed
position.

858. The whole combination, however, has a more graceful appearance if executed as
shown in Exercise 121 b, in which the balance is expressed by means of the abbreviated
symbols of the chassis alternatifs [§ 479], under the second of which is the sign of accent.
This accentuation of the final movement of the second pas chass'e may be regarded as a suf-
ficient preparation for the succeeding movement (sauteuse). The third measure contains
the complete script, and commences with the putting down of the left foot (upon the first
syllable), which immediately glides into 2d position, where it receives the weight. The light
spring in the preceding part-measure serves as preparation.

Upon the second syllable there occurs a hop upon the left foot, during which the right
is raised and carried by means of a rond de jambe en Fair, through the posterior 4th and
again into 2d position balancing, from which (upon the third syllable) it is put down, glides
to 2d ball position, and receives the weight.

The fourth syllable is marked by a hop upon the right foot, with simultaneous lift-
ing of the left in preparation for the repetition of the combination during the fourth
measure.

859. The slow tempo in which this dance is executed so clearly accentuates the four
syllables of each measure that such a division of the movement is as natural as if the music
were in 4-4 time, like that of the Imp'eriale.

860. If, as sometimes happens, the guests desire a Rheinlander or a Schottische, and
the musicians have no music for either of these dances, any Polka played in half-time will
answer the purpose.

861. Many dancers find it more convenient to vary this movement by substituting
regular Galop steps for thejetes en tournant, but this alteration, while it may, perhaps, sim-
plify the execution, detracts from the beauty of the dance.

Another variation which became extremely popular in Greece and Italy, was for a
certain period in use. In it the dancers, instead of assuming the Waltz position, stood
vis-it-vis with their partners and balanced, after which they separately executed a tour sur
place upon one foot, the lady turning to the right, and the gentleman to the left.

862. In Germany and France this balancing is usually executed parallel to the line
of direction, but in England it is the custom to execute the movement diagonally, with
the gentleman's face and the lady's back to the line of direction.

250

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Hungarian Waltz [False Hongroise)

863. As its name implies, this dance is of Hungarian origin. It was first executed in
Odessa by two sisters who, upon their return from Hungary, danced it as a variation of
the Rheinlander or the Schottische, to the music of which dances it may be fitted. The
dance created a favorable impression upon all who saw it, pupils endeavoured to learn
it, and it spread rapidly, meeting everywhere a ready welcome.

864- Exercise 122. Hungarian Waltz (False Hongroise) [Fig. 527].

M.M.108: J

n s*-*\jL^nA

A „ V ^o?NoN/rwwA 7 ./T

<f\>

J. IKlUAh-*„A 7 Ai

tinuation

Fig. 527.

The dance is executed in regular Waltz position.

Preparation. Lady : Anterior 5th sole position of right. Gentleman : Anterior 5th
sole position of left.

The entire enchalnement contains four measures of four syllables each. During the first
half of the step-sentence the lady's part is the exact counterpart of the gentleman's, which
is made up of two ballonnes to the left, one assemble and one tortille bipede.

The Gentleman's Part. During the part-measure, hop strongly upon the right foot,
and carry left into balancing 2d position.

FIRST HALF

First syllable. Put down left in 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Bend left knee and carry right foot into posterior balancing 3d posi-
tion with perpendicular sole and point turned strongly outward, and transfer.

Third and fourth syllables. Same as first and second.

Fifth syllable. Assemble. In this the left foot is carried backward into anterior 5th
sole position during a hop upon the right.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

25l

Sixth syllable. Temps tourn'e en dedans. In this the heels are raised and turned entirely
outward. This and the succeeding syllable constitute what is known as a tortill'e bipede
contraire [§ 530].

Seventh syllable. Bring the heels forcibly together in 1st position with feet turned half-
outward.

Eighth syllable. Carry left backward into 5th position.

SECOND HALF

The second half of the encbainement contains two pas de sissonne with backward turning,
one assemble, and one tortill'e, which are executed as follows : —

First syllable. Bend both knees with weight upon right foot.

Second syllable. Stretch forcibly, hopping upon right and lifting left foot into high
balancing 2d position.

Third and fourth syllables. Repetition of first and second syllables.

Fifth syllable. Assemble, ending in posterior 5th position of left.

Sixth and seventh syllables. Tortill'e bipede contraire, ending in 1st position.

F.ighth syllable. Final pause, or in case of repetition of encbainement, preparatory hop
upon right foot and carrying of left into balancing 2d position.

During these two measures, the gentleman executes a complete turn backward upon
the right foot.

865. It being supposed that pupils have learned the simple step-syllables, one may
use the term ballonn'e to prompt the first half of the encbainement and the term sissonne or
tour de ciseaux to prompt the second half for the purpose of teaching [§ 468].

866. The Lady's Part. During the first half of the enchainement the steps of the lady
correspond with those of the gentleman, but are of course executed in counter-motion. In
the second half, however, she executes a tour boiteux, for which the abbreviated sign of the
pas ballonnes is used [§ 529].

Execution of the Figure

Part-Measure. Temps leve. This is executed- as follows : during a hop upon the left
foot carry the right, by means of a demi-rond de jambe en Fair, from the posterior into the
anterior balancing 4th position.

First syllable. Put down right foot in 2d position and transfer.

Second syllable. Carry left foot forward into narrowed 4th position and transfer.

Third and fourth syllables. Repetition of first and second.

Fifth syllable. Carry right foot forward into 5th position.

152 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Sixth and seventh syllables. Tortill'e bipide contraire.

Eighth syllable. Preparation for succeeding step. These movements carry the dancers
along the line of direction in a circle, the same as in the other round dances.

867. The gentleman may, if he wishes, vary the movement, by himself executing the
tour boiteux. This variation will be very agreeable if the right leg has become tired, as is
frequently the case. The dance may also be varied by executing the figure a rebours. In
order to give the steps the genuine Hungarian characteristics, one may knock the heels
together alternately upon the fifth, sixth and seventh syllables, as shown in the seventh
and eigth measures of Exercise 37 [§ 249]. In order to do this the assemble which occurs
upon the fifth syllable is omitted.

868. The dance may be executed to any Rheinlander or Imp'eriale music, in case no
Hungarian composition is available, provided a proper tempo is observed.

869. The following beautiful and genuinely Hungarian combination may be executed
by sufficiently skilled dancers:

Direction: To the right sidewise along the line of direction. The gentleman executes
two ballonn'es and one frapp'e to the left with the left foot, and two battements elev'es with
the right heel, by which a whole turn to the left is made. The lady executes the same step-
sentence in counter-motion.

This figure is followed by a tour boiteux to the right in which both place the left arm
around the waist of the partner, and raise the right arm into 4th position.

This figure may be varied by so strongly swinging as to execute a turn and a half, which
brings the dancers into a position which enables them to repeat the enchainement along the
line of direction with the other foot. In this case the tour boiteux is executed to the left,
and the left arms are raised.

The Mazurka {La Mazourka)

870. This dance, which is sometimes called Masur or Masurek by the people of Poland,
derives its name from the tribe called Masures, who dwell in what was once the Duchy of
Masovia. In English, the word "Mazurka" would be translated " Masovian woman."

871. In all parts of Poland this dance is preferred above all others, and it is also prac-
ticed in many other parts of Europe. It found its way into the aristocratic circles of
Paris, where it was for a time extremely popular, but it never had such vogue as did the
Polka, the Waltz and similar round dances.

872. The reason is evident, for the Mazurka required much time, patience and artistic
ability not called for in learning the other dances. As a result, many dancers never learned
the Mazurka, and in localities where that dance was not in special favor, there was fre-
quently so strong an opposition to it as to prevent its execution.

The existence of this feeling of opposition is largely attributable to the fact that the

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 253

mazurists, not satisfied with a half-hour (which any experienced manager will agree is
enough) for the execution of the dance, aroused the antagonism of the non-mazurists, by
demanding a full hour. There is little wonder that those who were unable to participate
became impatient.

873. The Mazurka is, beyond question, the most beautiful social dance of our time,
and the author knows by his experience of more than fifty years that everyone who has
properly acquired the dance prefers it to all others. This is true of the dancers of all nations.

874. Perhaps the principal attraction in this singular dance lies in the fact that the
dancer is at liberty to vary his steps at will, provided he observes the proper measure, and
does not interfere with others. The succession of the figures is not fixed, as it is in Qua-
drilles, and one may therefore give his fancy free rein, for there is such a variety of figures
that some change is always possible. Besides, the first dancer, or the manager, may im-
provise whatever figures he desires.

There is in this dance a certain inspiration not to be found in any other. Nearly every
good Mazurka dancer feels an indescribable sensation entering his very soul and driving
away all fatigue, immediately the first strains of a properly composed and correctly ren-
dered Mazurka fall upon his ear.

875. It would be difficult, indeed, to accurately describe the characteristics of this dance;
in fact, to fully appreciate its beauties one must have seen it executed again and again by
accomplished dancers. The Mazurka is a combination of exalted pride and martial bold-
ness, knightly gallantry and the most graceful devotedness.

While it is commonly admitted that the Poles, as a nation, are skilful dancers, it can-
not be affirmed that all Poles are good Mazurists, nor is it beyond the possibility of other
nations even to excel them in that particular dance.

876. The national character of the Mazurka is apparent among all classes of Polish
dancers. The peasant, who accentuates the measure with his heavy ironshod shoes, lacks
neither agility nor grace; but his dance is fit only for the yard or the village inn.

The aristocrat executes the same steps, but in a manner so elegant as to be perfectly
in keeping with the brilliant company, the glistening parquet, and the magnificent deco-
rations of his gorgeous ballroom.

The middle classes execute the Mazurka in a manner distinct from either, combining
the elements of both the peasant and the aristocratic performance. In aristocratic circles
one finds the pas courant and the pas de Basque; in the middle class pas ordinaire is the
favorite step.

877. It seems to be the opinion of many people that a great deal of noise and the most
extravagant movements of all parts of the body add to the beauty and national character
of the Mazurka, but this is not true. The dance may be perfectly executed without any
such accompaniments. It may, of course, like anything else, be overdone, but if so, it
ceases to be beautiful.

878. The music of the Mazurka is in either 3-4 or 3-8 measure, of which the second
syllable is accented, as shown by a point or an accent placed above it ; but the regular
accentuation of the first syllable is also observed.

254

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

In teaching the steps, a tempo of about M. M. 144 is the most practicable, but in the
actual execution of the steps, the swing of the dance leads the participants, almost invol-
untarily, into a much quicker tempo; it should, however, never be allowed to exceed
M. M. 176, and it is always affected by the composition to which it is danced.

879. Owing to the fact that competent mazurists frequently execute figures which are
original and peculiar to themselves, it is impossible to determine the actual number of
Mazurka steps, but we may take as fundamental those which are choregraphically described
in the following exercise :

TECHNICAL STEPS OF THE MAZURKA

880. Exercise 123. Mazurka Steps (Pas de Mazourka) [Fig. 528].

MM 144 a 176 = J

l fU/^lJ^

S VvJL^I rt\A*^\K

V^vJ^Ll^l^Lk

V-^L^A

A ^

\ a.

^£

<r\>

^kJU

-±A^

L^=A

f n h\^A

? v\>

? ? <?%>

a. Pas Glisse or Pas Ordinaire or Pas de Tlore, etc. (Usual step of the gentleman).

This step is the one most commonly used by gentlemen, both in the promenade and
in the figures. It is described in several works upon the art of dancing under the name
fas glisse, but many Polish dancing masters call it pas de flore and by other names.

The Author has carefully examined the various names and he has finally concluded
that the name pas ordinaire is most appropriate, for the reason that other and different steps
and movements may be understood by the term glisse, while the term flore, being inex-
pressive of any quality or attribute of the step, appears to be merely an arbitrary expres-
sion, which is, at best, unsatisfactory.

Preparation : 1st position.

Part-measure : Hop lightly upon the left foot, at the same time lifting the right.

First syllable. Put down right foot, which glides forward into 4th position.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 255

Second syllable. Transfer, and carry left foot backward into low balancing 4th position.

Third syllable. Hop on right, and carry left foot forward as preparation for the suc-
ceeding step.

This step is executed alternately, and in it the legs should be well stretched, the points
of the feet turned strongly outward and down, and the lifting should not be too high. A
certain swing of the body and crossing of the legs render this step particularly attractive.

In the example, the first two measures have been written in complete choregraphic
form, but the remainder contains only the abbreviated signs.

The backward step is executed in the same manner, but in counter-motion.

The ladies do not, in the simple Mazurka as commonly danced, execute this step,
but in certain figures of the Mazurka Quadrille, which attained high favor, it becomes par-
ticularly beautiful if executed by them in their peculiarly graceful way.

881. Limping Step (Pas Boiteux) [Exercise 123 b~\. For both lady and gentleman.
Preparation: 1st position.

Part-measure : Hop on left and extend right forward.

First syllable. Put down right gently in anterior 4th position.

Second syllable. Degage and carry left forward a whole step.

Third syllable. Put down left foot audibly in anterior 4th position, and degage.

Fourth syllable. Hop, falling audibly upon left, and carry right into preparation for
next step.

The width of this step varies according to the requirements of the figure and the space.

In the example, the movement is written with complete choregraphy in the first and
second measures, but only the abbreviation is given in the remaining measures. This
step is always executed with the same foot, for to alternate would cause it to cease to be a
pas boiteux. It is used principally in the closing figures, or in the turn upon the place, tour
sur place, and that figure is therefore frequently termed tour boiteux. The figure generally
extends through four measures of music, and is known in Poland as the holupiec or ho/upza,
although these names are seldom heard except in the Polish countries.

Many ladies carry the foot forward in a large circle upon the second syllable, with the
leg turned strongly outward, and perpendicular direction of the sole. This creates a very
pretty effect. Pas boiteux is very often executed in connection with other steps, or combined
with the cbangements de pieds, to restore a lost cadence. It may also be executed backward.

882. Basque Step or Running Step (Pas de Basque or Pas Courant) [Exercise 123*"].
For ladies.

This step, which is executed in a free and rapid manner, resembles the running step
and is sometimes known as Pas Courant. It has been referred to by that name in § 449.

The step has also, and for a similar reason, been known as Pas de Basque [§ 521 et
seq.]. There is, however, an important difference between the dancing step of the people
who dwell around the Bay of Biscay and the so-called Pas Courant of the Mazurka. The
Spanish Basque dance is in either 3-8 or 3-4 measure, and in executing this step they cross
the legs strongly and put the feet down in 5th position; while the French Basques exe-
cute the same step in 2-4 time, as in the Gavotte. In the Mazurka, the so-called Pas de

256 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Basque is always made without crossing the legs, and no such measure as 2-4 is ever em-
ployed.

This step is sometimes referred to as the Pas de Pas or Pas de Bas, but these names
are the result of mispronunciation of the word " Basque."

In view of the facts above mentioned, it seems to the Author that the step would better
be called the Pas Couranl or Running Step, and he therefore makes that recommendation.

Preparation: 1st position.

Part-measure: Carry right foot into anterior low balancing 4th position.

First syllable. Throw weight lightly upon right foot (jete).

Second syllable. Glide left forward a whole step and transfer.

Third syllable. Coupe. This is executed by bringing the right foot so forcibly into 1st
position as to cut the left from its place; the weight is immediately transferred, and the
now free left foot carried forward, as in the preceding part-measure, in preparation for the
succeeding step. The abbreviated sign of the coupe has been already explained in § 526.

Pas courant, although principally used by ladies, is sometimes executed by gentlemen
as well; but they accentuate the third syllable to a more marked degree than do the ladies;
this audible accentuation, while quite proper in the dance, should never descend to the
level of a rude tramping.

Pas courant should be practiced both forward and backward, for it occurs very frequently
in the various combinations and figures, and even in the promenade.

If one fancies the crossed position, the coupe should be made into 3d, instead of 1st
position.

883. Collecting Step (Assemblee) [Exercise 1 23 d\

This movement consists in striking the heels together in 1st position, with the feet
turned half outward. It can be used only in connection with other movements. Its sim-
plest and most common application is in connection with a preceding pas boiteux.

Upon the third syllable of the pas boiteux, the free foot, instead of passing into 4th
position, is carried only into 2d parallel, and the supporting foot is simultaneously turned
to a corresponding angle. The heels are brought forcibly together upon the first syllable
of the next measure as shown in Fig. 521.

The first half of the clausula contains the complete choregraphy ; the fifth and sixth
measures, the abbreviated script ; and the seventh and eighth measures, the regular musi-
cal symbol of repetition.

884. Step-Sentences (Phrases) [Exercise 1 23 e~\.

One may, by combining these various steps, form what is known as phrases or step-
sentences ; for example, in the first half of Exercise 1 23 e, which contains two pas ordinaires,
one boiteux, and one assemble, constituting a phrase which extends through four measures.

After this has been thoroughly practised, add a tour boiteux, which consists of three
pas boiteux and one assemble, and also requires four measures. This constitutes the second
half of Exercise 1 23 e .

885. The Striking Steps to the Side (Les Pas Battus Laterales). This step is also known
as Polish step (Pas Polonais) or Striking of the Heels {Coup de Talon).

GRAMMAK OF THE ART OK DANCING 257

Any genuine Mazurka step should be done after the manner of the Poles, and might,
therefore, be called a pas polonais, and the coup de talon appears in so different a manner
in other steps, that that title is not sufficiently significant. The word coup refers only to
the actual movement by which the striking is effected.

The word battre, in dancing, signifies the striking of one foot with the other, and as
one foot is, in this movement, struck against the other sidewise, the name " Sidewise Strik-
ing Step " or pas battu lateral appears to be the proper expression.

In striking the heels together one is liable to come in contact with the ankle, if the
feet are turned outward; and as such an accident is extremely painful, the feet should be
held nearly parallel for the execution of this step. For this reason it might be called pas
battu parallele or "Parallel Striking Step." The word lateral signifies the direction of the
beating. For the sake of abbreviation, we may refer to the step as pas battu.

886. Execution. — Part measure. Raise the left foot into 2d balancing position, turn-
ing the point slightly forward.

First syllable. Strike the left heel audibly against the right, during a hop on the right
foot.

Second syllable. Carry left foot sidewise to 2d position, turning the leg outward, and
transfer.

Third syllable. Glide right foot into 1st position and immediately lift the left into 2d
as preparation for the succeeding step.

Here also the syllable is audible, and although this attribute is agreeable to the dan-
cers, and quite in harmony with the character of the Mazurka (especially if the dancer
wears spurs) one should, nevertheless, keep within the limit of good taste.

This step should be practised with equal diligence both to the right and to the left,
as it is applied in both directions; although in the promenade it is most commonly exe-
cuted to the left, as by this means the gentleman turns entirely toward his partner.

887. Two or more pas battus may be executed in succession. If two of them be per-
formed, the first falls upon the third syllable of the preceding measure, and the second
upon and clearly marking the cadence of the music.

Three successive pas battus require a full measure of music, and are always followed
by a pas ordinaire, and four pas battus. When executed consecutively, they extend through
one and one-third measures, the fourth falling upon the cadence of the second measure.
This combination is always followed by the extension of the free foot into 2d position,
after which the other is immediately drawn to it.

888. Pat Battu et Pas Ordinaire. The nature of this combination of steps is self-evi-
dent. It extends through two measures of music, and consists of one beating step and
one pas ordinaire in regular enchdinement. If the first step is executed to the left, the
second continues that direction ; and the last syllabic of the pas ordinaire serves as prepara-
tion for the repetition of the combination, which commences with the beating to the right,
thus alternating the movement. This sentence is sometimes used in the Promenade,
wherein a turn to the left brings one directly facing the partner, and one to the right
brings the partners dos-a-dos. One should, however, avoid this as far as possible ; it is

258 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

only allowable under any circumstances to turn the back to the partner at the moment of
striking.

This combination occurs very frequently in the set figures.

889. Pas Battu, Ordinaire, Boiteux et Jlssemblee. This combination forms a very simple
and agreeable encbalnement of four measures, the first of which contains the pas battu ; the
second pas ordinaire ; the third, pas boiteux ; and the fourth, assemblee.

If the pas battu is executed to the left, the pas ordinaire follows the same direction, and
the pas boiteux must be made with the right. Both feet participate in the assemblee.

The movement to the right is in counter-motion.

By executing a complete rurn in the pas boiteux, with corresponding movements of the
head, body and arms, one may improvise very graceful and attractive figures ; indeed, the
Mazurka-Quadrille, which has been highly favoured is made up of just such combinations.

890. Exercise 123/contains the choregraphic script of this enchainment, which may be
described as follows : —

Preparation : 1st position.

During the part-measure, the left foot is carried into the 2d low balancing position and
the points of the feet are turned parallel.

First Measure.

First syllable. Hop lightly upon the right and bring the left heel audibly against the
right sidewise.

Second syllable. Turn left foot forward and carry same to ad position, where it is put
down audibly and receives the weight, and immediately raise right into ad position.

Third syllable. Put down right foot audibly in 1st position, again carrying left into
balancing position, in readiness to commence the repetition.

These three syllables constitute the so-called sidewise striking step (pas battu lateral).

Second Measure.

First syllable. Put down left foot and glide same lightly into ad position.

Second syllable. Transfer upon left foot, simultaneously carrying the right backward
into the slightly bended half-high a-4 position.

Third syllable. Hop on left foot, maintaining same attitude.

Third Measure.

First syllable. Hop lightly upon left foot, and carry right through the half-high ad
into half-high anterior 4th position, thus beginning a whole turn, which is finished upon
the Second syllable.

Third syllable. Put down right foot in anterior 4-5 position, and turn upon the tip
of the left into ad position, parallel.

Fourth Measure.

Upon the first syllable of this measure, the heels are brought forcibly together sidewise
and into 1st position, which is held during the remaining two syllables.

The entire enchainement of four measures is repeated in the opposite direction upon the
remaining half of the clausula. The key in the fifth measure indicates that the movement
shall be to the right, and the script is written in the abbreviated form.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 259

Pounding Step (Pas Frappe)

891. This phrase, which extends through two measures, is very often combined with
other steps, as, for instance, two pas ordinaires. It is executed in the place of the combined
pas boiteux and assembl'ee.

If this phrase is begun with the right foot, it will finish in posterior 4th balancing po-
sition at the conclusion of the second pas ordinaire.

Execution of the pas frappe :

First syllable. Jet'e into 1st solo position and put down right foot audibly, at the same
time bending the left leg and carrying the left foot backward into balancing position.

Second syllable. Put down left foot audibly in 1st position.

Third syllable. Turn both heels outward.

Fourth syllable. Strike heels together.

Fifth syllable. Rest in 1st position.

Sixth syllable. Preparation for succeeding pas frappe.

892. Although it is entirely opposed to all the rules of art to support the weight be-
tween the two feet, in amplified 2d position, some dancers, in turning the heels outward
(third syllable) glide into this attitude, and if this is done in a sufficiently skilful manner it
is not without grace. Dancers of exceptional ability may often assume attitudes and execute
movements which, if attempted by others, would appear wholly ridiculous, and which in
reality may be directly opposed to every law of dancing. These deviations must be per-
mitted to those whose skill is so consummate as to render them beautiful. No other dance
so freely lends itself to these deviations as does the Mazurka. This may be attributed
to the individual freedom which it bestows upon the dancers.

Pushed Cutting Step (Pas Coupe Pousse)

893. This combination possesses a certain similarity to the pas boiteux.

Preparation : 3d position.

During the part-measure hop upon the left foot and carry the right into anterior 4th
balancing position.

First syllable. Put down right in anterior 4th position.

Second syllable. Transfer.

Third syllable. Bring left forward into posterior 3d position, knocking (audibly) against
the supporting right, transfer, and carry right immediately into anterior 4th balancing
position in preparation for the succeeding step.

This phrase may be repeated consecutively, but can only be alternated by combining
it with other steps.

260 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Chasing Step (Pas Chasse)

894- The ordinary alternating chasing step is frequently substituted for the pas courant
(§ 882) in the Mazurka, and if the lady can impart to the movement more than its ordi-
nary grace, the change is delightful. However, unless she fully understands this move-
ment and performs it with exquisite ease, she would better stick to the running step ; for,
although the movement may be executed in a most beautiful manner, it is still a French
step, and therefore entirely foreign to the character of the Mazurka.

Sidewise Chasing Step (Chasse Lateral or Chasse de Cote)

895. This combination, although of French origin, is more or less Polish in character,
It consists of chassis simples to the side, and may be used in the promenade, in which the
gentlemen always execute it to the left and the ladies to the right (§ 476).

The movement is commenced by gliding the left foot into 2d position and transferring,
thus bringing the right into preparatory 2d position with the weight upon the left, which
is assumed to be in 1st position.

The phrase begins upon the 3d syllable of the measure, upon which the right foot
strikes against the heel of the left, which immediately glides to the side.

This is repeated upon the first syllable of the next measure, and upon the second syl-
lable the weight is transferred, thus restoring the preparatory position for the phrase.

In executing this movement, the feet are held nearly parallel, and the two beatings
should follow one another in such rapid succession that the rest upon the second syllable
and the cut in the rhythm are thrown into bold relief.

There can be no other or more definite rule for the number of repetitions of the vari-
ous Mazurka steps than that they must clearly mark a cadence of either two, four or eight
measures.

Scissor Step (Pas de Ciseaux)

896. This combination has been already explained in connection with the Cracovienne
(§ 844) and the Hungarian Waltz (§ 863). The change of name from its general form,
sissonne, to ciseaux is accounted for in § 468.

Section 470 contains a description of the movement as executed in the Mazurka, in

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 261

which it is supplemented by subsequent raising {Pas de ciseaux re/eve). The choregraphic
description of this movement may be found in Exercise 62 (§ 470).

This step is sometimes executed by the gentlemen in dancing the Mazurka, in place
of the pas boiteux, and is generally applied to the tour sur place, going backward upon the
right foot.

897. It has already been stated that the variety of Mazurka figures is great, and it mav
be added that in attempting to exactly describe them all, one might fill a large volume and
yet find it incomplete. Still, those who have practiced and acquired the steps and combi-
nations which have been mentioned above, will not only readily comprehend almost every
other step, but will be competent to improvise original combinations — indeed the new
enchainments will come to them involuntarily in the animation of the dance.

262 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Mazurka Figures

In order to properly describe the different Mazurka figures, the author has found it
necessary to first evolve a system by which the various positions and combinations may
be exactly denominated ; for even the oral teacher sometimes feels the inaccuracy of recog-
nized names, notwithstanding the fact that he has the great advantage of being able to
demonstrate his meanings and to actually place his pupils in the requisite positions.

In the case of written instruction, however, one often meets with the necessity of de-
scribing movements, etc., difficult to put into words, which, although they would never
really hinder an oral instructor, must be thoroughly and precisely explained and distin-
guished from other similar points, and the writer is compelled to enter into more or less
lengthy deductions as to the propriety of this or that expression before completing his
description.

Aside from all this there is little chance that a teacher of experience will be particu-
larly embarrassed by the criticisms or questions of his pupils ; whereas, he who writes a
book of instructions may be positive that any real errors he may chance to make will be
very severely criticised.

Indeed, the fear of such criticism has so affected the author of this book that he has
pondered for whole days over a single simple expression, searching every available author-
ity before he dared to declare an accepted term incorrect, or to suggest the use of a term
not hitherto utilized by other choregraphs.

The various kinds of positions and formations have been more deeply studied by mil-
itary instructors than by masters of dancing, and the author has therefore adapted their
system of denomination to the positions and the movements of the dance, because of their
greater distinctness.

Instructions Regarding Cotillion and Mazurka Figures

898. Several pupils placed side by side in one line form what is known as a " Rank,"
and those who stand at the right and left of the middle of this line constitute, respectively,
the right and the left wings. If several such ranks stand one behind another, the front
line is called the first rank, the next the second rank, and so on.

899. If the pupils stand in a line one behind another, they constitute what is known
as a " File." Therefore, if persons forming a rank execute a quarter-turn, either to right
or left, they immediately become a file. If several ranks of equal length be placed one

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 263

behind another, they constitute as many files as there are persons in each line, and the first
file is composed of those who stand at the extreme right, those at the extreme left forming
the last file.

900. If several ranks stand one behind the other the whole body is known as a
" Column," and if the number of ranks exceeds that of the files, the column is longer
than it is wide and is called a " Long Column." If the number of files exceeds that of the
ranks, it is called a " Broad Column." In action, broad columns are generally used, and
in marching, long columns. A long column becomes broad by means of a quarter-turn
and vice versa. Two ranks of eight files form, therefore, a broad column.

901. If two ranks stand one behind the other, and the first rank executes a half-turn,
there is formed an all'ee vis-a-vis. If, however, the first rank remains quiet and the rear
one makes a half-turn, there is formed an all'ee dos-a-dos. If such an alley is composed of
all ladies or all gentlemen it is called respectively " a ladies' " or " a gentlemen's alley."

902. If the front rank consists of gentlemen and the rear rank of ladies, a half-turn by
the gentlemen produces an all'ee vis-a-vis, commonly known as an " English Column,"
because in early English dances the dancers stood in this form. If the ranks are trans-
posed and the ladies execute a half-turn, the result is what is known as a " Reversed Eng-
lish Column."

903. If the front rank consists of gentlemen, and the rear of ladies, and each rank
executes a quarter-turn to the right, the result is a regular dancing formation known as
colonne a deux, in which the lady is, as the rule demands, at the right of her gentleman.
A similar quarter-turn to the left produces what may be called a reversed colonne a deux,
in which the lady stands at the left of her partner.

904. The position for the Contredanse has been described in §§ 653 and 654. The
regular position for Contredanse may be formed by dividing a colonne a quatre into halves,
each of which constitutes a mixed rank which is turned vis-a-vis.

905. If a column is divided lengthwise, it is called " split " {colonne crevie) and if divi-
ded crosswise, it is "cut" (colonne coupee); if the two divisions face one another, they form
a colonne coupee vis-a-vis, and if back to one another, colonne coupee dos-a-dos.

Space

906. For the purpose of ascertaining beforehand how many persons may sit in a cir-
cle of a given size, deductions based upon practical experiments have demonstrated that
each couple so seated require a space occupying four feet of the length or width of the
hall ; and although this unit is large enough to appear well-nigh ridiculous, it is in reality
correct.

Around a hall thirty-six by twenty-four feet, there may therefore be seated thirty
couples, nine at each side and six at each end. More than that number would be crowded.

264 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Twenty couples may be seated around a hall 24 x 16 which contains 384 sq. ft.

Thirty couples may be seated around a hall 36x24 which contains 864 sq. ft.

Forty couples may be seated around a hall 48 x 24 which contains 1536 sq. ft.

Fifty couples may be seated around a hall 60x40 which contains 2400 sq. ft.

From this one may readily see that a small hall will seat more persons in proportion
to its size than a large one, and that this proportion of seating accommodation around a
hall is still further varied by the shape of the hall. For example, if the hall is longer than
it is wide it will accommodate more persons than a perfectly square one would. This is
shown by the following table :

A hall 50 x 50 contains 2500 sq. ft. and will seat 50 couples.
A hall 60x40 contains 2400 sq. ft. and will seat 50 couples.
A hall 70x30 contains 2100 sq. ft. and will seat 50 couples.
A hall 75x25 contains 1875 sq. ft. and will seat 50 couples.

If the persons are seated in two circles in a hall 70x30, each circle will be 35 x 30 and
will seat thirty-two couples, and the entire hall sixty-four couples.

If in a hall 75 x 25 the persons are seated in three circles each 25 x 25, each circle will
contain twenty-five and the whole hall seventy-five couples.

In case more couples participate than the space mentioned permits, the ladies take
seats in front of the gentlemen, thus nearly doubling the seating capacity.

The rules above given regarding the positions, terms, and calculations of space apply
both to the Mazurka and the Cotillion.

Large and Small Circles

907. For the Mazurka, the entire company is seated in a single large circle, each ladv
at the right of her partner. It was formerly the custom in many Polish cities, to divide
the company into several small circles ; but although under certain conditions this is ad-
visable, fashions have changed in this respect since that time.

908. Each formation has its good and its bad points which depend largely upon cir-
cumstances. If the hall is very large, and particularly if it is much longer than it is wide,
and the number participating in the Mazurka is large, the division of the company into
smaller circles is advisable. In this case, those persons who desire to dance in the same
circle should sit together. The experienced dancers usually endeavor to congregate in one
circle, in order that they may execute the more beautiful and difficult figures without
being disturbed by those less efficient than themselves.

Likewise, the less skilful dancers form a circle of their own, and if the manager is suf-
ficiently thoughtful to provide them with a competent leader, they may execute figures so
simple that even the least experienced guests may participate in them with pleasure. This
division of the dancers provides for every one, and even those who are acquainted with

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OK DANCING 265

only a very few figures may dance oftener in a small circle than in a single large one.
More persons may participate in two circles than in one.

If, however, the single circle is not too large, the manager can conduct it more easily,
and more pleasure may be given to each dancer, as there will result a greater number of
well executed figures in a given time.

909. In a large circle, a single tour of the promenade becomes monotonous and con-
sumes a great deal of time ; besides, one manager is unable to properly conduct more than
a certain number of couples. The varying abilities of the dancers present another dis-
advantage. Expert dancers desire to execute new and difficult figures, but these are ruined
by inexperienced persons who necessitate corrections, which are always unpleasant and
annoying.

On the other hand, the less skilful demand the easy figures, of which the others have
long since tired, and so it is often impossible to execute harmoniously more than a very
few figures.

910. Notwithstanding all this, the company should not be divided unless circum-
stances demand it, for a single circle is of particular advantage in private parties, when the
company is not too large. A single circle contains more of the element of unity, leaves
the space freer for the promenade, imposes fewer limitations upon the selection of figures
and affords the spectators a better opportunity to distinctly observe the various figures.

But the prime essential, whether there is a single large circle or various smaller ones,
is an efficient leader, a man who is a thoroughly experienced dancer. It is a matter of re-
gret that the part is so often assumed by persons who are ignorant of even the names of
the figures, to say nothing of their combination and sequence.

Introduction

911. The Mazurka is generally commenced with a grand tour (grand right and left),
followed by a tour boiteux upon the place, after which the dancers take their seats.

If the company is very large in proportion to the space, a few steps forward to the
centre and back will answer the purpose of the tours.

With less than eight couples, five measures to the left and five to the right are recom-
mended; but for more than eight couples eight measures should be allowed for every tour.

A promenade may be substituted for the tours as an introduction, in which case the
first couple lead around to the right, returning to their original position, and there execute
a tour sur place, after which they are again seated. The next couple at the right follow as
soon as the first couple have passed, and the figure continues in the same manner until
all have returned to their seats.

912. The Promenade is the most important thing in the whole Mazurka, as it displays
the grace and ability of each dancer.

266 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

Having arrived at their respective places, each couple executes a tour sur place and
address. If, after the promenade, new partners are to be selected, the turn should be made
in order that each dancer may have a better opportunity of seeing the entire company,
and thus be better able to locate the desired person. After the figure, however, the gen-
tlemen must lead his partner to her own seat, where, after a tour sur place and a bow, he
leaves her, and retires to his original position in the circle.

913. The Selection of Figures should always depend upon the circumstances of num-
ber and space, for there are figures which may be begun by one, two, three, four, five or
even a larger number of couples.

In case there are not more than seven couples, as frequently happens at private dances,
the manager should choose figures which do not call for more than three couples ; if there
are from eight to fifteen, he should never commence with less than two couples and he
may introduce certain figures which begin with three or four ; if there are from sixteen to
thirty-one couples, one should begin with from four to six, and so on.

In addition to this, the manager should always keep in mind the skill of his dancers,
which he usually knows. He should place the good dancers together, and with his own
partner commence a line for the less skilful. In this manner he may easily lead the danc-
ers by demonstrating the various figures, and those who fail to follow figures thus demon-
strated will be conspicuous.

914- Where all are experienced dancers and acquainted with one another, it is often
agreed that each group shall dance a different figure, and the practice renders the Mazurka
more attractive to both dancers and spectators.

A group of twenty competent dancers may execute ten or fifteen different figures in
the space of half an hour without allowing the interest to flag for a single moment. A
manager who is unacquainted with the company should always begin with simple figures
which will be readily understood.

915. These rules all apply to the Cotillion as well as to the Mazurka, and many fig-
ures may be applied to either dance.

916. The number of Mazurka and Cotillion figures is so great that it would be im-
possible to extend the Grammar so as to include them all, and for that reason the choreg-
raphy and even the description of them will not be undertaken.

Chapter XVII

CONCLUDING REMARKS

THF purpose of this Grammar is to establish a universal method of teaching danc-
ing and the invention and demonstration of a satisfactory system of dance script, by
means of which the movements of any and all dances may be definitely and intelligibly
shown.

918. In addition to this work, the author has devoted many years to the preparation
of a collection of the social dances of the present and of other days, and the different
national and stage dances, but it will be a long time yet before the work will be in shape
to put upon the market. *

919. On account of this necessary delay, and in order to give an idea of the manner
of representing the movements of the upper body, the author has added to this Grammar
the following choregraphic description of the beautiful Spanish solo-dance called " La
Cachucha."

This description is given principally to demonstrate the fact that the choregraphy set
forth in this work is capable of expressing, in a satisfactory way, all the movements of the
various members of the body — the legs, arms, head, rump, etc, which form so important
an element in the proper rendition of a dance, and the Cachucha has been selected as a
model because all the members are particularly active and expressive therein.

Should not such a demonstration prove, at least, the possibilities of the system sug-
gested in this book?

920. Regarding this description, it may be well to state that it is presupposed that the
reader has carefully studied the Grammar, and that if he has not committed the expressions
and symbols to memory, he is at least sufficiently acquainted with the index to easily find
anything he may desire to have explained.

The Cachucha [La Cachucha)

92). The Cachucha is a Spanish solo-dance, better adapted for execution by a lady
than by a gentleman, which is danced to the melody of an Andalusian national song con-
taining two parts of eight measures each, to which, for the sake of variety, there has been

• Thi» refer* to the collection before mentioned, which wa» never published. — En.

267

268 GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

added a third part of similar duration, and the whole is completed by an introduction and
a coda.

The celebrated Fanny Elssler, by her wonderful execution, won for this dance a popu-
larity in keeping with its merits.

The word cachucha, in Spanish, is a term of endearment, which is applied to particu-
larly attractive or graceful persons or things, and is also used as the name of a certain kind
of cap.

922. The music and complete choregraphic description of the Cachucha, which is exe-
cuted in 3-8 measure, is placed at the top of the succeeding pages.

The clicking of the castanets, which forms so essential a part of the Spanish dances, is
generally neglected by all save Spanish dancers. Great care should be devoted to this
feature.

It is customary to play a few chords before the regular melody is commenced, as shown
in the Music Book (No. 124).

923. The dance is divided into four couplets, and the melody is played four times,
ending with the coda.

The script of the first couplet is given upon the first line below the notes, the second
on the next, and so on.

Each couplet contains four figures of sixteen measures each, for the third of which the
music is the same as for the first.

924. It must not be forgotten that a number below the line of the floor indicates the
advanced foot, and a period the foot which is behind ; a comma below the period indicates
a ball position, and a very small circle a toe or "point" position. A circle surrounding
certain signs of the legs indicates that such positions are assumed during the execution of
a pirouette or turn. The direction in which the turn is to be made is indicated by the
direction of the circular sign, and the turning foot is shown by the sign of position. The
thick end shows the starting, and the arrow-head the finishing point of the turn. If the
beginning of the circle extends below the line of the floor it indicates a forward turn;*if to
the right, a right turn. The term " right " applies to the right side of the dancer, who is
supposed always to face the spectator unless otherwise stated. The shaded line which is
used to show the head represents the hair, and by it one may show the direction of the
face, and even of the eyes.

925. In figures so small as those in the example it is difficult to draw them exactly,
but the arm-positions can hardly fail to be understood. The 4th position of the feet is
generally indicated by the number, and crossed positions of the legs by a little cross (x)
above the line of the supporting leg (§ 105).

GRAMMAR OK THE ART OF DANCING

269

Cugnetu.. A A. M K j JL I Jl. I A . jj , J> » j < i)T I A n J>

Prelude. Chords.

Execution of the Cachucha

FIRST COUPLET

926. Figure I. Ziz-zag Forward (Ballonni Progrcssif). (Sixteen measures.)

Enter from background at left, proceeding diagonally forward to the right, by
means of three ballonnis dessous, one pirouette and one frapp'e dessus, into 5th
position.

Repeat obliquely to the left.

Repeat obliquely to the right.

Repeat obliquely to the left to centre.

927. Figure 11. (Pivoter.) (Sixteen measures.)

Turn slowly backward to the left upon the place by means of six pas de ciseaux
dessous, in 2d and 5th positions with the left arm raised, but without raising upon
the toe.

Pirouette basque to left.

Repetition to the right.

ITLL.

1-3

1
2

928. Figure 111. Zig-zag Backward (Ballonni T{ etrograde). (Sixteen measures.)

One ballonni to right, followed by raising into 5th point position and au-
dible lowering of right heel, and carry left foot into 2d position balancing.

Put down left in 2d position.

CJIide right into anterior 5th position, pointing toe strongly downward, and
audibly lowering the heel, immediately carrying the left into posterior
balancing position.

MEAS.

4
4
4
4

27O GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

!-3

!-3
1

Carry left foot to 2d position and transfer.

During this measure the right arm executes a large arm-circle (grand rond
de bras), accompanied by bending the body to such a degree that the
right hand nearly touches the floor, and then a corresponding move-
ment of the left arm.

Carry right foot to 2d position and transfer.

Execute a tour entier upon right ball or point, carrying left foot first into 2d
balancing, and thence into anterior 5th point position, and transfer.

Pound with whole sole of right foot into anterior 5th position, and transfer.'

Rest.

Begin the ballonne as preparation for the repetition.

Ballonne retrograde to left.

Repetition of entire enchainement .

929. Figure IV. (Frappe Tortille.) In the background. (Sixteen measures.)

Traversee to right sidewise with one frappe and one tortille repeated three
times, and followed by one coupe and one pas de basque lateral.

One frapp'e with right into 2d position, and transfer.

Turn left foot upon the heel until the toe comes to a point a little in ad-
vance of the right heel.

Turn left into anterior 5th sole position.

The second and third syllables constitute a pas tortilli.

Repetition of first measure.

Repetition of second measure.

Execute coup'e dessous with right foot into posterior 5th ball position.

Put down left foot in 2d position, and transfer.

Draw right foot into crossed anterior 4-5 position, and transfer.

MEAS.
I

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 271

CMttg,*ttw-, *>i,*»i,JM,J>»i 1 J> » i , J> » J , A , . jf , J> , j

n«s.

'M-

A J J

A 45 A

s:.
11

n«s

A I) X

WJU

4—2-

K, $

LJL

AJL

4_2.

4_J.

4_i

iCk

iQL

Hi!.

JL_

.£.

/>•

AJJS

The second and third syllables of the preceding measure constitute the pas

de basque espagnol.
Repeat preceding four measures to left.
Repeat preceding four measures to right.
Two frapp'es tor lilies.
Coupe pas de basque.

Frappe on right foot into anterior 4th position, and transfer.
Rest.
Preparatory movement for succeeding pas ballonne.

SECOND COUPLET

930. Figure I. The Inclined Rhombus Forward (Le J^hombe en Descendant).

Obliquely forward to right to the middle line by one and a half ballonnes,
two pas elev'es forward into 4th position, one demi-pas de basque to left,
one tapp'e du talon gauche (stamp with left heel), and one frappe with right
into 2d position.

93 J. Divide figure into periods of several syllables. It is of advantage to
both instructor and pupil to treat this figure as a verse-line divided into
eleven syllables or counts, which may be designated as follows:
o, 1 2 3, 4 5 6, 7 8 9, and 10.

During the first part-measure, hop upon the left foot, carrying the right
foot forward into balancing position and raising right arm to correspond,
which is nearly to 5th position, and following the movement by lifting
the eyes to the upstretched hand.

Upon the first syllable of the first measure, put down right foot in 2d po-
sition, and transfer.

4
4
2
1

272

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

H|t2v

SYLL.

3-4
5-6

7
8

Draw left foot into posterior 3d heel position, and transfer.

These three syllables constitute a ball step, or pas ballonn'e [§ 527].

Repeat first two syllables of pas ballonn'e.

Execute two high pas Clevis upon line of direction.

Carry left foot into 2d position, and transfer.

Swing right foot into crossed anterior 4-5 position.

Syllables seven and eight constitute a half basque step or demi-pas de basque.

932. The name demi-pas de basque is entirely correct, for in executing it
one steps half to the side and carries the other foot into crossed balan-
cing position, but does not transfer the weight.

933. The step is called pointe de pied by many Spanish dancers, but that
term is too indefinite, as it does not in any way explain the manner in
which it should be done.

Raise left heel and lower it audibly, with weight still resting upon it. This

movement is known as stamping or taper (§ 265).
Stamp with right foot into 2d position and transfer, and rest during the

second syllable of the fourth measure, again resuming the dance upon

the third syllable thereof, by preparation for the succeeding step.
Most of the step-sentences of the Cachucha and other Spanish dances may

be analyzed in the above manner.
The same enchainement is repeated upon the next four measures with the

other foot, and extends obliquely forward to the centre line of the stage.

The accompanying arm-movements are clearly shown in the choregraphic

description.
The same enchainement is again performed upon the next four measures,

commencing with the right foot and going backward obliquely to the

left as far as the horizontal middle line of the stage. In doing this, it is

necessary for the dancer to nearly turn her back to the spectators.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 273

1Y1X.

Still another repetition of this combination upon the remaining four meas-
ures brings the dancer once more to her place in the centre of the back-
ground, where, by means of the demi-pas de basque, she again faces the
spectators.

Figure II.

This figure, which consists of sixteen demi-pas de basque, with tapes de talon,
brings the dancer to the front of the stage, as shown in the script.

Figure III. The Inclined Rhombus Backward (Le )\hombe en Jffontant).

This figure is exactly similar to the first figure of the Couplet, except that
it is in counter-motion.

934. Figure IV. In the foreground.

Demi-travers'ee a droite, consisting of coupe-tor tille, coupe-pas de basque, frappe-
ramass'e and frapp'e-pirouette.

The steps have already been explained in their respective places in this
Grammar; but the following repetition of the explanations is given that
the reader may more readily understand their application in this dance.
For that reason the enchaincment has been divided into twelve syllables,
in the same manner as previously employed.

Coupe. Put down left foot forcibly in posterior 5th position, and transfer.

Tortille. Turn right foot inward upon the ball.

Turn right foot outward into anterior 5th position, and transfer.

Coupe. Put down left foot forcibly in posterior 5th ball position, and trans-
fer, thus releasing right.

Pas de basque. Carry right to 2d position, and transfer.

274

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

A-L

VL±

A«(y$,

Reverence au parterre et sortie par des pas ballonnes

Carry left, by a circular movement, into anterior crossed 4-5 position, and
transfer.
7 Frapp'e. Stamp with right into 2d position, and transfer.

Ramasse. Bend supporting right leg, and glide left foot into anterior 5th
point position with corresponding bending of left leg, simultaneously
bending the body and dipping the left arm to such a degree that it would
be possible to pick up with the left hand a small object lying upon the
floor. The movement receives its name from this bending, and the
meaning of the word ramasser is to pick up.

The right arm is raised during this movement to a corresponding position in
the opposite direction, and the eyes follow the movement of the left hand.

Put down left and raise right heel, and straighten the body, commencing
thereby the transfer of weight, which is completed upon syllable

10 by a stamp in 2d position with the right foot.

1 1 Raise right heel and execute a complete turn to right upon the toe, with
left leg in three-quarters high flowing 2d position.

Put down left foot in 2d position, and transfer.

Retravers'ee to left with same encbainement, but in counter-motion.

Repeat to right.

Repeat to left to centre, but without ramasse.

4
4
4

THIRD COUP LET

Figure 1. Zig-Zag Backward (Ballonne Retrograde).
Same as third figure of first couplet.

Figure 11. In the background upon the place.

Three temps de ciseaux, without hopping or turning, one coupe and one pas
de basque to the right.

OMl

iT '. . | . . H ■

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

275

o
i-4

8-9

1
1

Repeat.

Pivoter to left, with left arm raised and pirouette basque to left, as in the
second figure of the first couplet.

Figure 111.

Zig-Zag forward, with two successive pirouettes. Encbainement of ten syl-
lables.

Hop preparatory to pas ballonn'e.

Move obliquely forward to the right half-way to centre, by one and a half
pas ballonn'es.

Complete turn upon right ball with left foot in balancing anterior 5th po-
sition with perpendicular sole.

Put down left into anterior 5th sole position, and transfer.

Stamp with right into 2d position, and transfer.

Repeat turning as in fifth and sixth syllables.

Stamp with right into 2d position, and transfer.

Repeat enchalnement to left.

Repeat figure.

935. Figure IV. t\amaui. (Sixteen measures.)

Short zig-zag to rear with eight raising and picking up movements.

The phrase contains six syllables.

Kxccution :

Preparation : Temps-leve (this consists ofafouetle and a hop preparatory to

the pas ballonn'e).
Put down right foot in 2d position, and transfer.
Ramass'e (already explained).
Put down left and raise right heel.

MEAS.

276

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING

JUTS

J)J?T3 , J) JTT3 , J) JTH , J) — J7T3 JLP33-

MEAS.

4 Stamp with right into 2d position.

5 Temps fouette-dessous. Under crossed whip-syllable. (See § 487 et sea.)

6 Temps /eve, as used in the part-measure as preparation for pas ballonne.
This enchalnement of six syllables is danced alternately eight times, and

brings the dancer at its end into the centre of the background.

FOURTH COUPLET

1-4
5-6

7
8

9
10

936. Figure 1. Grand Degage.

Execution : Zig-zag forward to right and left, to a point slightly in front

of the horizontal middle line of the stage.
The enchainment contains ten syllables.
Part-measure. Movement preparatory for pas ballonn'e.
Move obliquely forward to right, half-way to centre, by means of one and

a half pas ballonnes.
Slowly execute one and a quarter turns upon the right toe, with left foot in

high balancing 2d position.
Put down left foot in anterior 4th position, raising the left arm and follow-
ing its movement with the eyes.
Transfer slowly and with dignity to left foot, at the same time bending the

upper body, lowering the left and raising the right arm and bending the

knees.
Transfer, in like manner, to right foot.
Raise again as in seventh syllable.
The dancer rests upon the eleventh syllable, and upon the twelfth executes

again the movement preparatory to the repetition of the enchainement in

the other direction.

GRAMMAR OF THE ART OF DANCING 277

The music should be rendered rallentando from the fifth to the tenth syllable.

These movements should all be executed in an easy, airy manner, with correspond-
ing arm movements.

Repeat to the left forward to horizontal middle line.

Repeat to the right forward halfway to front.

Repeat to left forward to a point slightly beyond the middle line of the front,
kneeling slowly upon the left knee during the sixteenth measure, with right arm
lowered and left arm raised, head slightly inclined forward, and eyes downcast.

937. Figure 11. Transfer upon the Knees (Degagi a Genoux).

During the first four measures, carry the right arm inside the right leg, by a grand
rond de bras, which proceeds thence upward and through a raised position, return-
ing again to a lowered attitude outside the right leg, accompanied by a similar
but opposite movement of the left arm. During all this the eyes follow the
movement of the right hand, while the head and body involuntarily cooperate.

During the fifth measure, carry the left arm into the crossed anterior horizontal
position, and turn the upper body slightly to the left, following with the eyes
the movement of the left hand, and rise slowly during the sixth measure, upon
the right foot, at the same time continuing the raising of the body and the move-
ments of the arms.

During the seventh measure, carry the right foot into 2d position, and transfer,
and execute with the left zjete en tournant, sinking in the eighth measure upon
the right knee.

Repeat the entire embalmment in counter-motion to the eighth measure, in which
the dancer, instead of kneeling as before, pauses during two syllables in anterior
5th position of right, once more executing upon the third syllable the move-
ment preparatory to the fas ballonm.

938. Figure HI. In the foreground.

One and a half pas ballonnes and two pas elev'es to the right.

Deep curtesy to right, directed particularly to the occupants of the corresponding

boxes, to whom the eyes are turned. A

Repetition of encha'inement to left.
Backward to centre by two and a half pas ballonnes in circular direction to right,

followed by complete turn to right upon right toe, and low curtesy to centre

to spectators.

CODA

The dancer concludes with one and a half pas ballonnes and several pas elev'es to left.
F.xit left upon last syllable of music.

Index

Unless marked "p." (signifying page) the numbers refer to the sections.

Abaissi, Temps, 378.

Abaisstmtnts, JJJ.

Abaisser, 123.

Abaisser, Symbol, 130.

Accelere, Pas, 423.

Accent, 186.

Accessory Qualities of Movement, 264.

Aerial Position, 57.

Ailti de Pigeon, 600.

Air Position, 57.

AM, Pat, 417-420.

Alley dos-a-dos, 901.

Alley, Gentlemen's, 901.

Alley, Ladies', 901.

Alley vis-a-vis, 901.

Allonger, 1 1 9.

Alternate Beatings, 169.

Alternate Crossed Raisings, 156.

Amazons' Galop, 763.

Amplified Arm-Positions, 285, 286.

Amplified Arm-Positions, Symbols, 336.

Amplified Foot-Positions, 108.

Amplified Intermediate Foot-Positions, 96.

Amplified 2d Foot-Position, 33.

Anatomy of the Arm, 306.

Anatomy of the Leg, 1 14.

Atglaise, Cba'int, 66 1.

Ankles, Movements of the, 1 14.

Anterior Foot-Position, Symbol, 35.

Aphmb, 388.

Arm, Anatomy of the, 306.

Arm-Circles, 311.

Arm-Circles, Small, 312.

Arm-Circles, Symbols, 352.
Arm-Movements, 302.
Arm-Movements, Simple, 309.
Arm-Movements, Symbols, 342.
Arm-Positions, 268.
Arm-Positions, Amplified, Cut, 286.
Arm-Positions, Amplified, Diagram, 286, 339.
Arm-Positions, Amplified, Symbols, 336.
Arm-Positions, Bended, 272.
Arm-Positions, Character, 300.
Arm-Positions, Closed, 283, 337.
Arm-Positions, Crossed, 274.
Arm-Positions, Crossed, Symbols, 338.
Arm-Positions, Folded, 299.
Arm-Positions, French System, p. 82.
Arm-Positions, Front Diagram, 269, 335.
Arm-Positions, Half Intermediate, 273.
Arm-Positions, Half-Stretched, 272.
Arm-Positions, Imitative, 274, 300.
Arm-Positions, Interlaced, 299.
Arm-Positions, Intermediate, 273.
Arm-Positions, Intermediate, Symbols, 335.
Arm-Positions, Mimic, 274, 300.
Arm-Positions, Narrowed, 285x 286.
Arm-Positions, Open, 284.
Arm-Positions, Opposed, 288.
Arm-Positions, Side Diagram, 269.
Arm-Positions, Symbols, 334.
Arm-Positions, Zorn's System, p. 83.
Arms Akimbo, 421.
Arms, Carriage of the, 268.
Arms, Curvature of the, 10.
Arms, Movements of the, 309.

279

28o

INDEX

Arms, Movements of the, in Walking, 269, 421.

Arms, Symbols of the, 331, 332, 342.

Arpeggio, 602.

Arrondi, 272.

Arqu'e, 120.

Arsis, 188.

Assemble, 456.

Assemble (Mazurka), 883.

Attitude, 327.

Attributes of Steps, 392.

Audible Beatings, 171.

Audible Falling, 374.

Auxiliary Height-Lines, 75.

Average Steps, 408.

Baiss'e, 381.

Baiss'e, Temps, 365.

Baisser, 125.

Baisser, Symbol, 130.

Balance, 609, 649, 662.

Balanc'e-Chass'e, 647.

Balanc'e-D'egager, 607, 649.

Balance de Menuet, 741.

Balance en Ligne, 671.

Balance in Line, 671.

Balance, Minuet, 741.

Balance Partners, 662, 669.

Balance Waltz (Two-Step), 835.

Balance Waltz (Tyrolese), 831.

Balancing Position, 65.

Balancing Positions, Height of Open, 93.

Ball Position, Symbol, 28.

Ball Positions, 22.

Ball Steps, 527.

Ballet, p. 10.

Ballet Music, 199.

Ballonne, Pas, 527.

Ballotte, Pas, 498.

Bas, Pas de, 882.

Basque, Pas de, 107, 521, 882.

Basque Step, 521.

Basque Step (Mazurka), 882.

Battement, 1 60.

Battements Alternatifs, 169

Battement s Changes, 168.

Battements, Classification of, 161.

Battements Cruises, 167.

Battements, Grands, 223.

Battements, Les, 209.

Battements, Pet its, 162.

Battements Simples, 166.

Battements, Symbols, 226.

Battements sur le Cou-de-pied, 1 64.

Battre, 267.

Battre, Symbol, 267.

Battu, Pas, 581.

Battu Lateral, Pas (Mazurka), 885.

Bavarian Polka, 808, 854.

Beating, 160.

Beating Down, 188.

Beating Exercises, 209.

Beating Steps, 581.

Beating Up, 188.

Beatings, Alternate, 169. .

Beatings, Audible, 171.

Beatings, Braided, 589.

Beatings, Carried, 171.

Beatings, Changed, 168.

Beatings, Classification of, 161.

Beatings, Crossed, 167.

Beatings, Direction of, 170.

Beatings, Glided, 171.

Beatings, Inaudible, 171.

Beatings, Medium, 164.

Beatings, Simple, 166.

Beatings, Small, 162.

Beauty, Correctness of, 10.

Bended Arm-Positions, 272.

Bended Foot-Circles, 259.

Bended Leg-Position, 84-86.

Bending, 118.

Bending and Stretching Exercises, 141—145.

Bending Exercises, 135.

Bending Movements, 375.

Bending Syllable, 375.

Bending, Symbols, 130.

Bending the Body, 325.

Bending the Body, Symbols, 350.

Body, Symbol of the, 331.

Boiteux, Pas, 881.

INDEX

28l

Bond, 372.

Bondir, Pas, 370.

Bourrie et Chass'e, 5°3-

Bourrie, Pas de, 50 1.

Bow-Legs, 120.

Bowing in Quadrilles, 670.

Boxed-in Steps, 436.

Braided Beatings, 589.

Bras Droit, 342.

Bras Gauche, 342.

Brisi et Contretemps, 597.

Bris'e, Pas, 596.

Bris'e, Temps, 596.

Broken Step, 596.

Broken Syllable, 596.

Cachucha, La, 92 1.

Cadence, 192.

Casura, 197.

Capacity, Seating, of Halls, 906.

Capriola, 589.

Capri o/a Intrecciata, 589.

Carriage, 8.

Carriage of the Arms, 268.

Carriage of the Hand, 8, 9.

Carriage of the Head, 321.

Carried Beatings, 171.

Carried Foot-Circles, 260.

Carried Steps, 409.

Carrying, 175.

Cat's Tail, 666.

Chain, English, 661.

Cbaine, 661.

Cbdint Anglaist, 661.

Chain* dts Dames, 661.

Changed Beatings, 168.

Changement dts Dames, 702.

Changcmcnt of the Feet or Legs, 157.

Changements it famhes, 157.

Changementt dt famhes tu Pieds, 450.

Change menu de Pieds, 426.

Changements of the Legs or Feet, 450.

Character Arm-Positions, 300.

Chaise a Droit tt a Gauche, 669.

Chant a Droit tt a Gaucht au Milieu, 669.

Chass't a la Visitt, 682.

Chass'e and Bourrie, Difference, 503.

Chass'e and Coupe, Difference, 497.

Chass'e de Cote (Mazurka), 895.

Chass'e Lat'erale (Mazurka), 895.

Chtrchez vos dames, 700.

Chord, 326.

Choregraphic Figure, Direction of, 131.

Choregraphic Symbols, 25.

Choregraphy, p. 4.

Choregraphy of the Figure, 614.

Chute, 374.

Circle of the Arm, 311, 352.

Circle of the Foot, 254-263.

Circle of the Leg, 254.

Cistaux, Pas de, 468.

Ciseaux, Temps de, 468.

Classification of Dances, p. 9.

Clausula, 197.

Clefs, Les, 353.

Closed Arm-Positions, 283, 337.

Closed Foot-Positions, 18.

Clutching of the Toes, 1 16.

Coincidence, 326.

Colonne a Deux, 716.

Colon ne a Huit, 717.

Colonnt a j^uatre, 717.

Colonne Coupee, 90 5.

Colonnt Crevie, 905.

Column, 900.

Column, Cut, 905.

Column, English, 902.

Column of Eights, 717.

Column of Fours, 717.

Column of Twos, 7 1 7, 903.

Column, Split, 905.

Combined Bendings and Raisings, 155.

Comparison of Dancing and Language, 7.

Composite Pirouettes, 558.

Compound Movements, 354, 400.

Compound Movements, Classification, 355.

Compound Steps, 400.

Conception of Time, 181.

Conclusion (Musical), 201.

Continue, 138.

282

INDEX

Continue/; 138.

Contraction of the Toes, 116.

Contra-Dance, 629, 654.

Contre-Danse, 629.

Contretemps, 594.

Contretemps and Brise, Difference, 597.

Contretemps En tier, Pas, 595.

Cooperation of the Fingers, 313.

Cooperation of the Hand, 313.

Corkscrew Pirouette, 562.

Correctness of Beauty, 10.

Cossack Step, 90.

Cotillion Figures, 916.

Cou-de-Pied, 240.

Counter-Beating, 594.

Counting, 182.

Coup de Talon (Mazurka), 885.

Coupe and Chass'e, Difference, 497.

Coupe Frapp'e, 495.

Coupe, Pas, 491.

Coupe Pousse (Mazurka), 494, 893.

Couple, 678.

Couplet, 639.

Courant, Pas (Mazurka), 449, 882.

Courante, Step, 448.

Courante, Temps de, 448.

Courb'e Entierement, 272.

Course, Pas de, 437.

Cracovientie, 844.

Crochets a Trois, 676.

Croise-Tr averse, 676.

Crossed Arm-Positions, 274.

Crossed Arm-Positions, Symbol, 338.

Crossed Beatings, 167.

Crossed Foot-Positions, 19, 102.

Crossed Jump, 589.

Crossed Raisings, 156.

Crossing Over and Under, or Before and

Behind, 176.
Cuisse, Pas de, Traits de, 579.
Cuisse, Temps de, 577.
Curvature of the Arm, 10.
Curvature of the Fingers, 10.
Curved Movements, 179.
Cut (Ccesura'), 197.

Cut Column, 905.
Cutting Half-Step, 496.
Cutting Step, 491.

Dance Music, 197.

Dance Syllable, 182, 363.

Dance Terms, 360.

Dancer, Symbol of the, 616, 619.

Dances, Classification of, p. 9.

Dances, Column and Line, p. 9.

Dances, Comic, p. 10.

Dances, Demi-Caractere, p. 10.

Dances, Full Figure, p. 9.

Dances, Grotesque, p. 10.

Dances, National, p. 9.

Dances, Pantomimic, p. 10.

Dances, Periodical Figure, p. 9.

Dances, Round, p. 9.

Dances, Salon, p. 9.

Dances, Serious, p. 10.

Dances, Show, p. 9.

Dances, Social, p. 9.

Dances, Social Choir, p. 9.

Dances, Social Show, p. 9.

Dances, Theatrical, p. 9.

Dancing and Language, Comparison, 7.

Dancing as a Branch of Education, p. 6.

Dancing, Definition, 1.

Dancing, Factors of, 2.

Dancing, Natural, p. 3.

Dancing, Source of, p. 3.

Danse Classique, La, 756.

Descendre, 624.

D'egagement, 391.

D'egager, 128.

D'egager, Symbol, 1 30, 222.

Degager-W altz, 835.

Degrees of Bending the Arm, 272.

Degrees of Bending the Leg, 85.

Demi, 667.

Demi-Bras, 292.

Demi-Bras, Symbol, 340.

Demi-Chaine Anglais e, 661.

Demi-Contretemps, 594.

Demi-Coupe, 496.

INDKX

-S.?

Demi-Courbe, 2~2.

Demi-Glisse, 483.

Demi-Lune, La, 7 1 7.

Demi-Pointe, 533.

Don't- Promenade, 666, 672.

Deml-Ronde de Jambe, 256.

Demi-Tendu, 272.

Demi-Tour, 548.

Denomination of the Foot-Circles, 262.

Denomination of the Sole Directions, 72.

Desnui, 176.

Dessus, 176.

Determination of the Foot-Positions, 20.

Determination of the Names of the Steps, 416.

Deux, 678.

Diagonal Lines, The, 702.

Diagonal Sole-Direction, 59.

Diagonal Steps, 402.

Diagrams of the Arm-Positions, 269, 335.

Diminished Steps, 399.

Direction, Line of, 773.

Direction of Beatings, 170.

Direction of Movements, 177.

Direction of Steps, 393.

Direction of the Chorcgraphic Figures, 21, 130.

Distant Legs, 120.

Dts-a-dos, Alley, 901.

Double Crossed Foot-Positions, 103.

Double Crossed Foot- Positions, Symbol, 105.

Double Foot-Circle, 256.

Double Intermediate Arm-Positions, 273.

Double Intermediate Foot-Positions, 101.

Double Quadrille, 633.

ile Scissor-Stcp, 473.

lilc Scissor-Syllable, 471.
Down-Stroke, 188.
Droite, Ay 647.

Duration of Movements, 183.
Duration of Pirouettes, 569.
Duration of Steps, 394.

Effect of the Bending and Stretching Exercises,

'35-
Effect of the Transferring Exercises, 253.
Eighth Turns, 541.
Elbow, Movements of the, 309.
Elevations, 152, 376.
Elevations Croisees Alternatives, 156.
Elev'e et Levi, 366.
£leve, Pas, 430.
Elev'e, Temps, 376.
Elever, 121.
Elever, Symbol, 1 30.
Emboit't, Pas, 436.
En Arriere, 647.
En Avant, 647.
En Avant et en Arriere, 607.
En Avant Huit, 703.
En Avant £>uatre et en Arriere, 674.
Enchainements, 193.
En Dedans, 258.
En Dehors, 258.
English Chain, 661.
English Column, 902.
Entrechat, 589.
Entrechat Royal, 591.
Epaulements, 310, 322.
Equilibre, 387.
Equilibrium, 387.
Escaping Syllable, 452.
Esmeralda, L ', 851.
Eti, V, 668.

Etoile a Quatre Couples, 764.
Exchange of Ladies, 702.
Exercises, Beating, 209.
Exercises, Bending, 135.
Exercises, Bending and Stretching, 141-145.
Exercises, Preparatory, 132.
Exercises, Raising, 152.
Exercises, Raising and Lowering, 209.
Expansion of the Toes, 1 16.

Ecart'e, Temps, 455.
Echappi, Temps, 452.
Effect of Lowering, I 23.
Effect of Raiting, 122.

Factors of Dancing, 2.
falling, 374.
Falling Step, 374.
Falling Syllable, 454.

284

INDEX

False Measure, 187.

Fausse Mesure, 187.

Feet, Positions of the, II.

Field-Step, 423.

Fifth Arm-Position, 270, 282.

Fifth Foot-Position, 17.

Figure, 5, 614, 639.

Figure, Choregraphy of, 614.

Figures, Cotillion and Mazurka, 898.

Figures, Polonaise, 716.

Figures, Simple, 642.

File, 899.

Finale, La, 686.

Find your Ladies, 700..

Finger Movements, 309.

Fingers, Carriage of the, in Walking, 421.

Fingers, Curvature of the, 10.

Fingers, Interlaced, 299.

First Arm-Position, 269, 275.

First Couple in a Quadrille, 634.

First Foot- Position, 13.

First Impressions, p. 7.

First Person in a Quadrille, 636.

Five-Step Waltz, 836.

Flexibility of the Wrist, 313.

Flig-Flag, 612.

Floor-Line, Necessity of Drawing the, 383.

Flore, Pas de, 880.

Flowing Positions, 55.

Flowing Positions, Height of the, 60—65.

Flowing Positions, Open, 65.

Flowing Positions, Symbol, 61.

Folded Arm-Positions, 299.

Folded Hand-Positions, 299.

Foot-Circle, Backward, 257.

Foot-Circle, Bended, 259.

Foot-Circle, Carried, 260.

Foot-Circle, Double, 256.

Foot-Circle, Forward, 257.

Foot-Circle, Glided, 260.

Foot-Circle, Inward, 258.

Foot-Circle, Outward, 258.

Foot-Circle, Small, 256.

Foot-Circle to the Side, 257.

Foot-Circles, 254.

Foot-Circles, Names of the, 262.

Foot-Circles, Symbols, 261.

Foot-Positions, 1 1.

Foot- Positions, Amplified, 109.

Foot-Positions, Closed, 18.

Foot-Positions, Crossed, 19, 102.

Foot-Positions, Determination of, 20.

Foot-Positions, Double Crossed, 103—105.

Foot-Positions, Half-Intermediate, 99.

Foot-Positions, Intermediate, 94.

Foot-Positions, Inward Turned, 78, 79.

Foot-Positions, Open, 18.

Foot-Positions, Parallel, 1 10.

Foot-Positions, Variations of the, 11.

Foot- Positions, Prolonged, 109.

Forward and Back Four, 673.

Forward and Back Two, 669.

Forward Eight, 703.

Fouett'e, Tempi, 487.

Fourth Arm- Position, 270, 281.

Fourth Foot-Position, 16.

Fourth Foot-Position, Symbols of the, 45.

Frapp'e (Music), 188.

Frapp e, Pas, 891.

Frapper (Pounding), 265.

French Quadrille, 628.

French System of the Arm-Positions, 268.

Frotter, 266.

Galop, 762.
Galop, Amazons', 763.
Galop d'Amazones, 763.
Galop, Pas de, 692.
Galop-Polka, 851.
Galop (Quadrille), 692.
Galop-Step, 692.
Galop- Waltz, 771.
Galopade, 762.
Gauche, A, 647.

Gavotte de G. Vestris, 757, 761.
Gavotte, La, 754.
Gavotte Music, 755.
Gentlemen's Alley, 901.
German Academy of the Art of Teaching
Dancing, p. 4.

INDEX

285

Giving the Hand, 315.

Glide Polka, 851.

Glided Beatings, 171.

Glided Foot-Circles, 260.

Glided Steps, 409.

Gliding Half-Steps, 483.

Gliding Steps, 480, 880.

Gliding, Symbols, 174.

Glissade, 482.

Glissi, 173.

Glissi, Pas, 1 73, 880.

Gliistment, 173.

Glisser, 172, 173.

Glissrz, 173.

Grace, 389 .

Graces, Lei, 685.

Grand Promenade (Polonaise), 716.

Grand Promenade (Quadrille), 693.

Grand Tour, 9 1 1 .

Grande Rondi (Polonaise), 719.

Grandes Rondes, 694.

Grands Battements, 163.

Grandes Rondes de 'Jambe, 256.

Group, 328.

Group, Choregraphy of, 627.

Groups, Interlaced, 299.

Guirlande, La, 70 7.

Gymnastics, p. 6.

Half-Bended Arm-Position, 272.

Half-Bended Leg-Position, 87.

Half-Counter Beating, 594.

Half Foot-Circle, 256.

Half-High Balancing Position, 67.

Half-High Closed Flowing Position, 63.

Half-Intermediate Arm-Positions, 273.

Half-Intermediate Foot-Positions, 99.

Half-Moon, 717.

Half Outward Position, 398.

Half Point Positions, 22.

Half-Promenade, 666, 672.

Half Right and Left, 661.

Half-Steps, 395.

Half-Stretched Arm-Position, 272.

Half-Stretched Leg-Position, 88.

Half-Turns, 540.

Hand, Carriage of the, 8, 9.

Hand-Circles, 311.

Hand, Giving the, 315.

Hand-Position, Folded, 299.

Hand-Positions, Symbols, 346.

Hand, Presenting the, 314.

Hand-Shaking, 278.

Hands, Positions of the, 318.

Harmony, 326.

Head, Carriage of the, 321.

Head Couple in a Quadrille, 634.

Head, Movements of the, 321.

Head, Positions of the, 347.

Head, Symbols of the, 330.

Heel-Positions, 51.

Heel-Positions, Symbol, 53.

Heel-Positions, Uses of the, 52.

Height Lines, 75.

Height of the Balancing Positions, 93.

Height of the Flowing Positions, 60.

Height of the Open Flowing Positions, 65.

Hen, The, 671.

High Balancing Position, 66.

High Closed Flowing Position, 64.

High Port de Bras, 305, 308.

Hop, 368.

Hop-Polka, 808.

Hop-Waltz, 834.

Horizontal Sole-Direction, 59.

Hungarian Waltz, 863.

Hunters' Polka, 820.

Hunters' Schottische, 820.

Imitative Arm-Positions, 274, 300.

Impiriale, V , 837.

Importance of Practice, 145.

Inaudible Beatings, 1 7 1.

Inclined Sole-Direction, 59.

Independence of Arm and Foot Movements, 303.

Influence of Temperament upon Dancing, 407.

Interlaced Arm-Positions, 299.

Interlaced Fingers, 299.

Interlaced Groups, 299.

Intermediate Arm-Positions, 273.

286

INDEX

Intermediate Arm-Positions, Double, 273.
Intermediate Arm-Positions, Symbols, 335.
Intermediate Foot-Positions, 94.
Intermediate Foot-Positions, Classification, 95.
Intermediate Foot-Positions, Double, 10 1.
Intermediate Foot-Positions, Names of the, 97.
Introduction (Music), 201.
Introduction (Mazurka), 911.
Inward Foot-Circle, 258.
Inward-Turned Foot-Positions, 78.
Inward-Turned Foot-Positions, Symbol, 79.

"Jarret'e et Arqui, I 20.

7"> 372-

Jete, Pas, 459.

Jumped Raisings, 153.

Jumping, 367.

Jumping and Springing, Difference, 368.

Jumping Step, 369.

Jumping Syllable, 367.

Keys (Choregraphic), 353.
Kick, 384,

Kicking Movements, 384.
Kneeling Position, 90.
Knees, Movements of the, 1 14.
Knock-Knees, 120.
Knocking the Heels, 885.
Krakoviak, 844.

La Bourree, 501.

Ladies' Alley, 901.

Ladies' Chain, 661.

Ladies' Windlass, 693.

Language and Dancing, Comparison, 7.

Large Beatings, 163.

Large Foot-Circles, 256.

Large Steps, 398.

Left Arm, Symbol, 342.

Leg, Anatomy of the, 114.

Leg-Circles, 254.

Leg, Degrees of Bending the, 85.

Leg-Movements, Classification, 113.

Leg-Positions, Bended, 84-86.

Leg-Positions, Half-Stretched, 88.

Leg-Turning Exercises, 246.

Legato, 386.

Legs, Distant or Bow, 120.

Lengthening, 119.

Levi, Temps, 364, 380.

Levi and Elev'e, Difference, 366.

Leve-Sauti, Temps, 367.

Levee, 379.

Lever, 1 24.

Lever, Symbol, 130.

Lifting, 124.

Lifting and Raising, Difference, 366.

Lifting Syllable, 364, 380.

Lignes Obliques, Les, 702.

Limping Step, 881.

Line of Direction, 773.

Little Finger, Curvature of the, 10.

Low Balancing Position, 65.

Low Flowing Position, 60.

Low Port de Bras, 305-307.

Lowering, 123.

Lowering, Effect of, 1 23.

Lowering Exercises, 377.

Lowering Syllable, 378.

Lowering, Symbol, 130.

Lowering the Arms, 306.

Lowering the Arms, Symbol, 344.

Maestoso, 727.

Mar eke Militaire, 396.

Marching and Walking, Difference, 417.

Marching Step, 417, 423.

Marking, 385.

Masur, 870.

Masurek, 8 70.

Mazourka, Pas de, 880.

Mazurka Figures, 898.

Mazurka Figures, Selection of, 913.

Mazurka Phrases, 884.

Mazurka-Polka, 823.

Mazurka Steps, 880.

Mazurka, The, 8 70.

Mazurka- Waltz, 846.

Measure, 6, 185.

Measure of the Quadrille, 644.

INDEX

287

Medium Beatings, 164.
Medium Steps, 398.
Melody, 197.

.<•/, La, 723.
Mtnuet, Balance de, 74 1.
Afenntt de la Cour, 726, 745.
Minuet dt la Reint, 723, 759.
Metronome, 184.
Military March, 396.
Mimic Arm-Positions, 274, 300.
Minuet Balance, 741.
Minuet, Figure of the, 726.
Minuet Music, 727.
Minuet of Louis XV, 734.
Minuet of the Court, 726-745.
Minuet of the Cjueen, 723, 759.
Minuet Quadrille, 733.
Minuet Steps, 736.
Minuet, The, 723.
Mixed Pirouette, 568.
Modern Rcdowa Step, 817.
Monter, 624.
Moulinet dts Dames, 693.
Movement, Accessory Qualities of, 264.
Movement, Definition, 4.

cment, Direction of, 177.
Movement of the Feet in the Air, 77.

i-ment, Precision of, 210.
Movements, Ankle, 114.
Movements, Arm, 302, 309.
Movements, Arm, in Walking, 421.
Movements, Arm, Symbols, 342.
Movements, Bending, 375.
Movements, Classification of, 113.
Movements, Compound, 354, 400.
Movements, Curved, 179.

ments, Duration of, 183.
Movements, Elbow, 309.
Movements, Finger, 309.
Movements, Head, 321.
Movements, Knee, 114.
Movements, Leg, 113.
Movements, Shoulder, 310.
Movements, Simple, 1 1 5, 400.
Movements, Straight, 178.

Movements, Thigh, 1 14.
Movements, Toe, 1 14.
Movements, Trunk, 322.
Movements, Wrist, 309.
Music, Ballet, 199.
Music, Dance, 197.
Music, Gavotte, 755.
Music, Social Dance, 200.
Music-Syllable, 182.

Names of the Steps, 416.

Narrow and Distant Legs, 120.

Narrow Intermediate Position, Symbol, 96.

Narrowed Arm-Positions, 285, 286.

Narrowed Arm-Positions, Symbols, 336.

Natural Dancing, p. 3.

Natural Steps, 398.

Normal Time, 183.

Normal Walking Speed, 406.

Occupation of the Free Leg in Turning, 551.

Open Arm-Positions, 284.

Open Flowing Positions, 65.

Open Flowing Positions, Height of the, 65.

Open Foot-Positions, 18.

Opposed Arm-Positions, 288.

Opposed Arm-Positions, Symbols, 339.

Opposees, Rondes, 707.

Opposite Circles, 704.

Opposition, 287.

Opposition, Exercises in, 290.

Opposition in Walking, 289.

Order of Steps in Teaching, 429.

Order of Words, Correct, 214.

Ordinaire, Pas, 423, 880.

Outward Foot-Circles, 258.

Outward Pirouette, 559.

Outward Turned Soles, 398.

Paire, 678.
Panta/tn, 659.
Parade Step, 423.
Parallel Cxsuras, 197.
Parallel Foot- Posit ions, MO.
Parallel Soles, 398.

)

288

INDEX

Parisian Academy, p. 4.

Parisian Polka, 802.

Part-Measures, 204.

Pas Acc'el'er'e, 423.

Pas Ailes de Pigeon, 600.

Pas Alle, 406, 417-420.

Pas and Temps, Difference, 357.

Pas Assemble, 456, 883.

Pas Ballonn'e, 527.

Pas Ballot e, 498.

Pas Battu, 581.

Pas Battu (Mazurka), 885.

Pas Battu Parallele (Mazurka), 885.

Pas Boiteux (Mazurka), 881.

Pas Bondissant, 3 70.

Pas Bris'e, 596.

Pas Chass'e, 475.

Pas Chass'e (Mazurka), 894.

Pas Contretemps Entier, 595.

Pas Coupe, 491.

Pas Coupe Pousse (Mazurka), 494, 893.

Pas Courant, 443.

Pas Courant (Mazurka), 449, 882.

Pas de Bas, 882.

Pas de Basque, 1 06, 107, 521.

Pas de Basque (Mazurka), 882.

Pas de Basque Espagnol, 522.

Pas de Basque Franfais, 882.

Pas de Bourree, 501.

Pas de Bourree And en, 505.

Pas de Bourree Moderne, 508.

Pas de Ciseaux, 468.

Pas de Ciseaux (Mazurka), 896.

Pas de Course, 437.

Pas de Flore (Mazurka), 880.

Pas de Galop (Quadrille), 692.

Pas de Mazouria, 880.

Pas de Menuet a Droite, 738.

Pas de Menuet a Gauche, 739.

Pas de Menuet en Avant, 740.

Pas de Parade, 423.

Pas de Pas, 882.

Pas de Rigaudon, 473.

Pas de Sis Sonne, Double, 467.

Pas de Traits de Cuisse, 579.

Pas de Zephire, 5 1 3.

Pas, Definition, 411.

Pas E lev is, 430.

Pas Emboites, 436.

Pas Frapp'e, 891.

Pas Frapp'e (Mazurka), 891.

Pas Glisse, 173, 480.

Pas Glisse (Mazurka), 880.

Pas Jet'e, 459.

Pas March'e, 417, 423.

Pas Ordinaire (Marching), 423.

Pas Ordinaire (Mazurka), 880.

Pas Polonaise (Mazurka), 885.

Pas Saute, 369.

Pas sur les Point es, 435.

Pas Tendu, 513-515.

Pas Tomb'e, 374.

Pas Tor ti lie, 82, 530.

Passage de Demi-Colonne, 717.

Pastourelle, La, 681.

Periodical Enchainments, 604.

Perpendicular Sole-Direction, 59.

Person, Symbols of the Dancing, 617.

Petits Battements, 162.

Petits Ronds de Bras, 312.

Petits Ronds de ^Jambes, 256.

Phases of the Foot-Positions, 11.

Phrase, 193.

Pigeon, Ailes de, 600.

Pigeon-Wing Step, 600.

Pirouette, 127, 545~553-

Pirouette a la Seconde, 557— 5 60.

Pirouette Composee, 558.

Pirouette, Duration of the, 569.

Pirouette en Attitude, 557.

Pirouette en I' Air, 574.

Pirouette, Mixed, 568.

Pirouette, Pure, 567.

Pirouette sur le Cou-de-pied, 557, 560.

Pirouette Tire-Bouchon, 562.

Pistolets, 600.

Pli'e, Temps, 375.

Pli'ements, 375.

Plier, 118.

Plier, Symbols, 130.

INDEX

289

Plus, 135.

Plies Legato, 139.

Plies Staccato, 138.

Point Positions, 23.

Point Positions, Symbol, 30.

Polish Step, 885.

Polka, The, 801.

Polka, Bavarian, 808, 854.

Polka, Glide, 851.

Polka, Hop, 808.

Polka, Hunters', 820.

PwUet-.Ma7.ur, 823.

Polka-Mazurka, 823.

Polka, Parisian, 802.

Polka-Quadrille, 802.

Polka-Redowa, 815.

Polka, Rush, 809.

Polka, Scotch, 808.

P$Jia Tremblante, 808.

Polonais, Pas, 885.

Polonaise, The, 710.

Polonaise Figures, 716.

Part de Bras, 268.

Port de Bras, Classification, 304.

Port de Bras, High, 305, 308.

Port de Bras, Low, 305, 307.

Porter, 175.

Position, 3.

Position, Ball, 22.

Position, Ball, Symbol, 28.

Position, Bended Arm, 272.

Position en Balance, 56.

Position en r Air, 57.

Position for the Preparatory Exercises, 136.

Positions, Heel, 51.

Positions, Heel, Symbol, 53.

Positions, Heel, I'se of the, 52.

Position* of the Arms, 268.

Positions of the Arms, Symbols, 334.

Positions of the Arms, Amplified, 285, 286.

>ns «>f the Arms, Amplified, Symbols, 336.

ions of the Feet, 1 1.

MM of the Hand, 318.
Positions of the Hand, Symbols, 346.
Positions of the Head, Symbols, 347.

Posterior Position, Symbol of the, 35.

Postlude, 201.

Poule, La, 671.

Pounding, 265.

Pounding Step, 891.

Pour suite, La, 778.

Practice, Importance of, 145.

Precision of Movement, 210.

Prelude, 201.

Prelude to the Quadrille, 646.

Preparation for a Step, 1 89.

Preparatory Exercises, 132.

Presenting the Hand, 314.

Principal Part, 197.

Prolonged Foot-Positions, 108.

Prolonged Steps, 399.

Promenade (Mazurka), 912.

Proper Order of Words, 214.

Pure Pirouette, 567.

Pursuit, The (Waltz-Dances), 778.

Pushed Raisings, 153.

Putting Down, 125.

Putting Down Movement, 381.

Putting Down Syllabic, 365.

Putting Down, Symbol, 1 30.

Quadrille a la Cour, 686.
Quadrille Bows, 670.
Quadrille Couplet or Strophe, 639.
Quadrille, Double, 633.
Quadrille Figures, 614, 639.
Quadrille Figures, Chorcgraphy of the, 614.
Quadrille, French, 628.
Quadrille-Polka, 802.
Quadrille, Positions in the, 630.
Quadrille, Significance of the, 663.
Quadrille Symbols, 614.
Quadrille, The, 629, 655.
Qualities of Movement, 264.
Quarter-Bended Leg- Posit ion, 88.
Quarter Turns, 541.
ue de Chat, 666.
Qjtkk Mendings, 140.
Quii kstcp, 423.
Qttkk Strps, 404.

■>

290

INDEX

Raising, 121.

Raising and Lifting, Difference, 366.
Raising and Lowering Exercises, 209.
Raising and Lowering the Arms, 306.
Raising and Lowering the Shoulders, 320.
Raising and Lowering the Shoulders, Symbol,

351-

Raising, Effect of, 122.
Raising Exercises, 152, 376.
Raising Position, 32.
Raising Position, Symbol, 33.
Raising Steps, 430.
Raising Syllable, 376.
Raising, Symbol, 130.
Raising the Arms, Symbol, 344.
Raisings, Alternate Crossed, 156.
Raisings, Crossed, 156.
Ramasser, 351.
Rank, 898.

Rebroussal Sole Direction, 59.
Redowa, 811.

Redowa, Modern Step, 817.
Redowa Originate, 813.
Redowa Polka, 815.
Redowaczka (Redoivatscbia), 814.
Redowa i, 813.
Redresser, 119.
Regularity of Tempo, 207.
Relation of the Arm and Leg Movements, 303.
Relative Positions of Partners, 653.
Remarks Upon the Bending and Raising Exer-
cises, 159.
Repetition, 14 1.
Retravers'e, 608, 611.
Reverse Galop, 775.
Reverse Waltz, 799.
Reversed English Column, 902.
Rheinlander, 808, 854.
Rhythm, 191.
Rhythm, Symbols of, 212.
Rigaudon, Pas de, 473.
Right and Left, 661.
Right Arm, Symbol, 342.
Ritournelle, 645.
Rolling the Arm, 318.

Rond de Bras, 311.

Rond de Bras, Symbol, 352.

Ronds de Bras Petit s, 312.

Ronds de Jambe, 254.

Ronds de Jambe, Classification, 255.

Ronds de 'Jam be de Cote, 1S7-

Ronds de Jambe Doubles, 256.

Ronds de Jambe en Arriere, 257.

Ronds de Jambe en Avant, 257.

Ronds de Jambe en Dedans, 258.

Ronds de Jambe en Dehors, 258.

Ronds de Jambe, Petit s, 256.

Ronds de Jambe, Symbols, 261.

Ronds de Main, 311.

Ronds Opposes, 704.

Rose, The, 688.

Rounded Arm-Carriage, 272.

Rounded Leg-Position, 89.

Rubbing, 266.

Ruement, 384.

Ruer, 384.

Rump Turns, 544.

Running Positions, 93.

Running Step, 437.

Running Step (Mazurka), 882.

Rush Polka, 809.

S'Abaisser, 123.

Saute, Pas, 369.

Saute, Temps, 367.

Sauter, 367.

Schottische, 854.

Schottische, Hunters', 820.

Schottische Waltz, 855.

Scissor-Step, 468.

Scissor-Step (Mazurka), 896.

■Scissor Syllable, 468.

Scotch Polka, 808.

Scotch Waltz, 801.

Scottish, 854, 855.

Seating Capacity of Halls, 906.

Se Balancer, 56.

Second Arm-Position, 270.

Second Foot-Position, 14.

Second Foot-Position, Width of the, 14.

INDEX

29I

Secondary Attributes of Steps, 409.

Selection of Mazurka and Cotillion Figures, 913.

S'elever, I 21.

S'elever, Symbol, 130.

Sequence of Steps in Teaching, 429.

Serpent, The, 718.

Se Tour ner ; 127.

Shoulder Movements, 310, 322.

Shoulders, Shrugging the, 320.

Shoulders, Shrugging the, Symbol, 351.

Shoulders, Symbol for Turning the, 348.

Shoulders, Symbols of the, 349.

Sicilienne, 837.

Side Steps, 397.

Signal, 645.

Simple Arm-Movements, 309.

Simple Beatings, 166.

Simple Figures, 642.

Simple Foot-Positions, 1 1 .

Simple Foot-Turnings, 126.

Simple Intermediate Positions, 96.

Simple Intermediate Positions, Table, 98.

Simple Movements, 1 1 5, 400.

Simple Movements, French Terms for the, 1 1 J'

Simple Preparatory Exercises, 132.

Simple Steps, 400.

Sissonne, 466.

Sissonne, Pas de, 467.

Sissonnc Step, 467.

Sissonnc Syllable, 467.

Sit tonne, Temps de, 467.

Sissonne, Temps de, Double, 471.

Size of Steps, 392.

Slow Steps, 404.

Small Arm-Circles, 312.

Small Beatings, 162.

Small Foot-Circles, 256.

Small Steps, 398.

Social Dances:

Ama/"iis' ( l.tlop, 763.

Bavarian Polka, 808, 854.

Court Minuet, 726-74S.

Craeovienne, 844.

Five-Step Walt/., 836.

Galop, 762.

Social Dances (Continued):
Galop a I'Envtrs, 775.
Galop d' Amaxones, 763.
Galop-Polka, 851.
Galop- Waltz, 771.
Galopade, 762.
Gavotte, 754.

Gavotte de G. Vestris, 757, 759.
Hop-Polka, 808.
Hop-Waltz, 834.
Hungarian Waltz, 863.
Hunters* Polka, 820.
Hunters' Schottische, 820.
Imperiale, 837.
Krakoviak, 844.
Mazurka, 870.
Mazurka-Polka, 823.
Mazurka-Waltz, 846.
Alenuet de la Cour, 726-745.
Menuet de la Reine, 723, 759.
Minuet of the Court, 726-745.
Minuet of the Queen, 723, 759.
Parisian Polka, 802.
Polka, 801.
Polka-Glide, 851.
Polka-Masur, 823.
Polka-yuadrilie, 802.
Polka-Rcdowa, 815.
Polka, Scotch, 808.
Polka Tremblante, 808.
Polonaise, 7 1 0.
Ouadrillc, 629, 655.
Quadrille a la Cour, 686.
Redou-a, 811.
Redowa- Polka, 815.
Rejdovak, 811.

Rcdowaczka (Redouatscbka), 814.
Reverse Galop, 775.
Reverse Walt/, 799.
Rhfinlander, 808, 854.
Rush Polka, 809.
Russian Walt/., 850.
Schottische, 854.
Schottischc-Walt/., 855.
Scotch Polka, 808.

292

INDEX

Social Dances (Continued):

Scotch Waltz, 801.

Scottish, 855.

Sicilienne, 837.

Tour, La, 802.

Two-Step Waltz, 835.

Tyrolese Waltz, 831.

Tyrolienne, 819, 830.

Tyrolienne de V Academic, 832.

False, 779.

False a Deux Temps, 785.

False a V ' Envers, 799.

False a Six Temps, 793.

False a Trois Temps, 793.

False Balancee, 835.

False de Mazourka, 846.

False en Cinq Temps, 836.

False Hongroise, 863.

False-Mazur, 848.

False Russe, 850.

False Sautillee, 834.

Farsouvienne, 838.

Varsovianna, 838.

Vienna Waltz, 786.

Waltz, 779.
Social Dance Music, 200.
Sole Direction, 24.
Sole Direction, Diagonal, 59.
Sole Direction, Horizontal, 59.
Sole Direction, Inclined, 59.
Sole Direction in Open Flowing Positions,

59, 72-
Sole Direction, Perpendicular, 59.
Sole Direction, Rebroussale, 59.
Sole Direction, Symbols of the, 61.
Sole Direction, Vertical, 59.
Sole Directions, Names of the, 59.
Sole Position, 12.
Sole Symbols, 398.
Source of Dancing, p. 3.
Space, 906.

Spanish Basque Step, 522.
Speed, 183.
Split Column, 905.
Spreading the Toes, 116.

Spreading Syllable, 455.

Spring, 368, 372.

Springing, 370.

Springing and Jumping, Difference, 368.

St. Leon's Symbols, 24, 25.

Staccato Bendings, 138.

Stage, Diagram of the, 623.

Stamping, 265.

Star of Eight Couples, 770.

Star of Four Couples, 764.

Stenochoregraphic Symbols, 25.

Stenochoregraphy, p. 4.

Step, 356.

Step and Syllable, Difference, 357.

Step, Chasing, 475.

Step, Cossack, 90.

Step, Definition, 390.

Step Phrases, 193.

Step, Quick, 423.

Step-Sentences, 193.

Steps, Attributes of, 392-409.

Steps, Average, 408.

Steps, Ball, 527.

Steps, Beating, 581.

Steps, Boxed-in, 436.

Steps, Broken, 596.

Steps, Carried, 409.

Steps, Compound, 400.

Steps, Glided, 409.

Steps, Half, 395.

Steps, Diagonal, 402.

Steps, Diminished, 399.

Steps, Direction of, 393.

Steps, Duration of, 394.

Steps, Large, 398.

Steps, Medium, 398.

Steps, Minuet, 736.

Steps, Natural, 398.

Steps of One Syllable, 403.

Steps, Pigeon-Wing, 600.

Steps, Prolonged, 399.

Steps, Simple, 400.

Steps, Size of, 392.

Steps, Slow, 404.

Steps, Small, 398.

INDEX

293

Steps, Straight, 402.

Steps, Stuffing, 501.

Steps, Temperate, 404.

Steps, Tossing, 498.

Steps upon the Place, 401.

Steps, Walking, 406, 417, 420.

Straight Movements, 178.

Straight Steps, 402.

Straightening, 1 19.

Stretched Foot-Circles, 259.

Stretched Leg-Positions, 84.

Stretching, 119.

Stretching Exercises, 132, 375.

Stretching Steps, 5 13—51 5-

Stretching Symbol, 130.

Striking, 267.

Strophe, 639.

Stuffing Step, 501.

Summer, The, 668.

Super-High Balancing Position, 69.

Super-High Positions, Use of, 70.

Supported Arm-Positions, 292.

Supported Arm-Positions, Symbols, 340.

Supporting Foot, Position of the, 20.

Sur les Pointes, Pas, 435.

Syllable and Step, Difference, 357.

Syllable, Bending, 375.

Syllabic Broken, 596.

Syllabic, Dance, 363.

Syllable, Lowering, 378.

Syllable, Music, 357.

Syllable, Step, 357.

Syllable, Word, 357.

Svmbols of the Arm-Positions, 334.

Symbols of the Arms, 331, 332.

Symbols of the Body, 331.

Symmetry, 326.

Syncope, 19O.

Tableau, 329.

Taper, 265.

Technical Names of Steps, 4 1 2.

Technical Term*, 360.

Temperament, its Influence on Dancing, 407.

Temperate Steps, 404.

Tempi, 182.

Tempo, 183, 361, 362.

Tempo, Evenness of, 207.

Tempo, Normal, 183.

Tempo of the Quadrille, 646.

Temps, 128, 361.

Temps Abaissi, 378.

Temps Abaisse, Symbol, 382.

Temps and Pas, Difference, 357.

Temps Assemble, 456.

Temps Baiss'e, 365, 382.

Temps Brisi, 596.

Temps de Ciseaux, 468.

Temps de Courante, 448.

Temps de Cuisse, 577.

Temps de Sissonne, 467.

Temps de Sissonne, Double, 47 1.

Temps ficarti, 455.

Temps tLcbapp'e, 452.

Temps £leve, 376.

Temps Fouett'e, 487.

Temps Levi, 364.

Temps Levi -Saute, 367.

Temps Plii, 375.

Temps Sauti, 367.

Temps Tomb'e, 454.

Tendre, 1 1 9.

Tendre, Symbol, 1 30.

Tendu, 272.

Tendu, Pas, 513-515.

Tensions, 375.

Termes de Danse, 360.

Terms for Simple Movements, Technical, 1 1

Ttrre-a-terre, 241, 386.

71**, 188.

Thigh-Beating Step, 577, 579.
Thigh-Beating Syllabic, 577.
Thighs, Movements of the, 1 14.
Third Arm-Position, 270, 277.
Third Foot-Position, 15, 34.
Three Hooks, 676, 680.
Three-Step Waltz, 793.
Throw, 368, 372.
Throwing Step, 459.
Time, Conception of, 181.

294

INDEX

Time, Normal, 183.

Time, The Apportionment of, 181.

Toes, Clutching of the, 116.

Toes, Contraction of the, 116.

Toes, Expansion of the, 116.

Toes, Movements of the, 114.

Toes, Spreading the, 116.

Tomb'e, Pas, 374.

Tomb'e, Temps, 454.

Tomber, 374.

Tor ti lie Bipide Contra ire, S35-

Tortille Bipede Simultane, 536.

Tor ti lie, Pas, 82, 5 30.

Tortille Sautille, Pointe et Talon, 537.

Tortille, Tour, 538.

Tor tiller, 251.

Tossing Step, 498.

Tour, La, 802.

Tour de Corps, 323, 539.

Tour de Main, 608, 647, 664, 669.

Tour des Mains, 664.

Tour de Torse, 322, 539.

Tour Tortille, 538.

Tourne, 126.

Tourne, Symbol, 130, 247.

Tournure, 319.

Tours de Mazourka, 898.

Tours (Simple Figures), 643.

Tours (Turns), 540.

Transferring, 114, 128.

Transferring by Turning or Bending, 324.

Transferring, Effect of, 129.

Transferring Exercises, 119, 252, 290, 291.

Transferring Exercises, Effect of the, 253.

Transferring, Importance of, 128.

Transferring Symbol, 130, 222.

Traverse, 607, 61 1, 647, 655, 669, 671.

Traverse-Croise a Trois, b"]b.

Tremblante, Polka, 808.

Tr'enis, La, 675.

Trillo, 602.

Trio, 202, 727.

Triole, 508.

Trunk, Movements of the, 322.

Turned Attitudes, Symbols, 349.

Turning, 126.

Turning Exercises of the Legs, 246.

Turning or Rolling the Arm, 318.

Turning, Symbol, 130.

Turning the Arm, 318, 345.

Turning the Arm, Symbol, 345.

Turning the Body, 323.

Turning the Legs, Exercises in, 246.

Turning the Rump, 530.

Turning the Shoulders, 348.

Turns, Eighth, 541.

Turns in the Air, 552.

Turns, Rump, 544.

Turns upon Both Feet, 541.

Turns upon One Foot, 542.

Twisting, 251.

Twisting Step, 82.

Two-Step Waltz, 835.

Two-Syllable Waltz, 785.

Tyrolese Waltz, 831.

Tyrolienne, 819, 830.

Tyrolienne de V ' Acad'emie, 832.

Un, Significance of the Article, 415.
Up-Stroke, 188.
Up-Stroke, its Use, 189.
Upward Sole Direction, 59.

False, La, 779.

False a Deux Temps, 785.

False a I'Envers, 799.

False a Six Temps, 793.

False a Trois Temps, 793.

False Balancee, 835.

False de Mazourka, 846.

False en Cinq Temps, 836.

False Hongroise, 863.

False-Mazur, 848.

False Russe, 850.

False Sautillee, 834.

Value of First Impressions, p. 7.

Farsouvienne, 838.

Varsovianna, 838.

Vertical Sole Direction, 59.

Festris, Gavotte de G., 757, 759.

INDEX

295

Vienna Waltz, 786.
fts-a-v'u, 655.
lli-a-vis Alley, 901.

Walking, 16.

Walking and Marching, Difference, 417.

Walking and Running, Difference, 437.

Walking Exercises, 422.

Walking, Movement of the Arms in, 289,421.

Walking, Normal Speed in, 406.

Walking, Opposition in, 289.

Walking Step, 409, 417-420.

Waltz, Balance, 835.

Waltz, Degager, 835.

Waltz, Five-Step, 836.

Waltz, Galop, 771.

Waltz, Hop, 834.

Waltz Position, 279, 765.

Waltz, Russian, 850.

Waltz, Scotch, 801.

Waltz, Six-Step, 793.

Waltz, The, 779.

Waltz, Three-Step, 793.

Waltz, Tyrolese, 831.

Waltz, Vienna, 786.

Whip-Syllable, 487.

Whole Foot-Circle, 256.

Whole Intermediate Positions, 96.

Whole Step, 395.

Whole Turn, 540.

Wholly Bended Arm-Position, 272.

Wholly Narrowed Arm-Position, 337.

Wholly Stretched Arm-Position, 271, 272.

Word-Syllables, 182.

Wreath, The, 707.

Wrist, Flexibility of the, 313.

Wrist Movements, 309-313.

Zephirt, Pas de, 5 1 3.

Zephyr Step, 513.

Zorn's Symbols, 25, 26.

Zorn's System of the Arm-Positions, 268.

Glossary

Most of the words in this Glossary are French ; in cases where they belong to other languages they are indicated
as follows: Bt., Bohemian; C, German; //., Italian; Lat., Latin; Pal., Polish.

<;, to, from, at, in.

abaisse, lowered.

abaissement, the act of lowering.

abaisser, to lower.

accelere, accelerated, quickened.

action, action, motion.

adagio (It.), a slow movement of time.

aile, wing.

air, air.

all'ee, alley, passage.

allegro (It.), a rapid movement of time.

alter, to go, to walk.

aihnger, to lengthen.

alternatif, alternative, alternate.

alternativement, alternately.

ami, friend.

ancien, ancient.

ang/aiie, Knglish.

aplomb, self-command.

approcbent, approach, draw near (plural).

apr'et, after.

arabesque, an inclined attitude.

arpeggio (It.), the successive striking of the notes

of a chord.
arqu'e, bowed, rounded, arched.
arriere, behind, backward.
arrondi, rounded.
arsii, up-beat in music.
auemble, collected.
anemblee, assembly.
anembler, to collect, to bring together.
attitude, position, attitude.
an, to the.
0*/<G.), up, at, in, by, for.

autour, around.

autre, other.

aux, to the.

avancant, advancing.

avancer, to advance, to go ahead, to move forward.

avant, forward.

avtc, with.

avoir, to have.

baisse, put down, dropped.

baisser, to put down.

balance, balanced, weighed ; balance-step.

balancer, to balance, to weigh.

/'ii/ancez, balance (imp.).

ballonne, inflated, swollen, distended.

ballonner, to inflate, to swell, to distend.

ballot e, tossed.

balloter, to toss.

basque, Biscavan.

battement, beating.

bat t re, to beat or strike.

battu, battue, beaten.

Begleitung(G), escort ; accompaniment.

bei (G.), by, at, on, in, with.

beitimmten (G.), fixed, determined, settled.

bipide, bipedal, two-footed.

boiteux, limping, lame.

bon, good.

bond, bound, spring.

bondir, to bound, to spring.

bondiuant, bounding, bouncing, springing.

bottei, boots.

bourr'e, stuffing.

bturree, a stuffing step, a dance.

197

298

GLOSSARY

bras, arm.
bris'e, broken.

couplet, a combination of figures.
cour, court.

casura, a strain, a portion of a melody.

cadere (Lat.), to fall.

capriole, a crossed jumping step.

capriola (It.), a prancing step.

cavalier, gentleman.

ce, ces, this, that, these, those.

chahie, chain.

change, changed, altered.

changement, the act of changing.

chass'e, chasing step.

chassent, chase (plural).

chasser, to chase.

chat, cat.

chevaux, horses.

choregraphique, choregraphic.

chute, an audible fall.

cinq, five.

cinquieme, fifth.

ciseaux, scissors.

classique, classic.

clausula, a phrase.

clef, key, clef.

clos, closed.

collo (It.), neck.

colonne, column.

comme, as, like, how.

commenc'ee, commenced, begun, started.

commencement, beginning, commencing.

composee, composite.

conduire, to conduct, to lead.

contenant, containing.

continuer, to continue.

contraire, contrary, opposite.

contredanse, contra-dance.

contretemps, contrary to time, unexpected.

coquille, shell.

corps, body.

cote, side.

cou-de-pied, the instep or ankle.

coup, a stroke or knock.

coupe, coup'ee, cut.

couple, two similar things.

courante, a dance.

courb'e, curved, bent.

course, running.

crev'ee, split.

crochet, hook.

croiss'e, crossed, crossing.

cuisse, thigh.

dactyl (Lat.), a metric foot of two syllables.

dame, lady.

danse, dance.

danser, to dance.

danseur, male dancer.

danseuse, female dancer.

de, of, from, by, out of.

des, of the, from the (plural).

dedans, inward.

d'egag'e, disengaged.

degager, to disengage, to transfer.

degagement, disengagement, transfer.

dehors, outwards.

del (It.), of the.

demi, half.

den (G.), the, to the.

der (G.), the, that, which, who.

descendant, going down, descending.

descendre, to descend.

desgleichen (G.), the same.

dessous, behind, under.

dessus, in front, over.

deux, two.

deuxieme, second.

die (G.), the, that, she, which.

direction, direction.

dit, said, called, named.

dix, ten.

donnez, give (imp.).

dos-a-dos, back to back.

double, double.

droit, right.

ecart'e, spread.

GLOSSARY

299

ecbapp'e, escaped.

ecbapper, to escape.

Einleitung (G.), introduction.

elevation, raising.

eleve, raised.

ilever, to raise.

emboite, fitted, boxed.

en, in, into, on, to, by, at.

enchainement, step-combination.

tntier, entiere, entire, complete, whole.

entierement, entirely, completely, wholly.

entrechat, a prancing step.

tnvers, reverse.

epaules, shoulders.

epaulements, shoulder-movements.

equilibre, equilibrium.

espagnol, Spanish.

et, and.

etoilt, star.

extrcice, exercise.

fait, makes.
fausse, false.
fille, daughter.
fin, end, conclusion.
finale, final.
fix'ee, fixed, determined.
fleur, flower, blossom.
fore, name of a ma/.urka-step.
ftis, times.
ftrmer, to form.
fouttt'e, whipped.
francais, French.
frapp'e, stamped, pounded.
frapper, to stamp, to pound.
frotter, to rub.
fubren (G.), guide, conduct, lead.

gauche, left.

generate, general, usual, common.

gen»ux, knees.

glissade, gliding movement.

glissant, gliding.

gliss'e, glided.

glissement, gliding.

glisser, to glide.
glissez, glide (imp.).
graces, graces.
grand, grand, large.
grave, grave, serious.
guirlande, garland, wreath.
gyrus (Lat.), a turn.

hangroise, Hungarian.
huit, eight.
huitieme, eighth.

iambi (Lat.), metric feet of two syllables, one

short and one long.
il (It.), the.
immediate, immediate.
inclinee, inclined, tipped.
intervalle, interval.
intrecciare (It.), to weave or braid.
intrecciata, intrecciate (It.), woven or braided.
introduction, introduction.

jambe, leg.

jarrete, close-legged, knock-kneed.

jet, throw.

jete, thrown.

Jeter, to throw.

jolie, neat, pretty, nice, pleasing.

jusque, to, even, till, as far .

la, the.

lateral, later eaux, side, lateral.

lat'eralement, sidewise.

le, the.

legato, connected, smooth.

lev'e, lifted.

lever, to lift.

ligne, line.

lints ((J.), left.

lune, moon.

madame, madam, a married woman.
maestoso (It.), majestic.
main, hand.
mail, but, why.

3°o

GLOSSARY

mani (It.), hands.

manteau, mantle, cloak.

marche, march.

marquer, to mark, to indicate, to trace.

masur, masurek (Pol.), Mazovian.

matelot, sailor.

meme, same.

menu, small, neat, dainty.

menuet, minuet.

mesure, measure.

milieu, middle, centre.

mi lit aire, military.

minutus (Lat.), small.

moderne, modern.

monter, to mount, to ascend, to go up.

moulinet, windlass.

mouvement , movement, motion.

moyen, medium, middle.

oblique, oblique, slanting, diagonal.
opposee, contrasting, opposing.
ordinaire, ordinary, common, usual.
originale, original, primitive, not copied.
ou, or, otherwise, else.
ouvert, open.
ouvrez, open (imp.).

paire, pair, two of a kind.

par, by, from, for, with, through, at.

parade, parade, show.

par allele, parallel.

parallelement, parallel.

partie, part.

pas, step.

passage, passage, going through.

passant, passing.

passent, pass (plural).

petit, small.

phrase, phrase.

pied, foot.

piede (It.), foot.

pigeon, pigeon, dove.

piroetta (It.), a turn upon one foot.

pirouette, a turn upon one foot.

pistolet, pigeon-wing step.

place, place.

Platz (G.), place.

pli'e, bended ; bend of the knee.

pliement, bending.

plier, to bend.

plus, greater, more, also.

pointe, point, the tip of the foot.

port, carriage.

parte, carried.

porter, to carry.

position, position.

pour, for, in order to.

poursuite, pursuit.

pousse, pushed.

pr'ec'edentes, preceding.

prelude, prelude, introduction.

premier e, first.

presto (It.), very quick.

progressif, advancing, progressing, going forward.

promenade, promenade.

publique, public.

puis, then, next, afterward, besides.

y«tf(/r///f,quadrille,asquaredancefor four couples.
quarr'e, square, four-sided, quadrilateral.
quart, quarter, one-fourth.
quatre, four.
quatrieme, fourth.
queue, tail.

ramass'e, picking up.

ramasser, to pick up.

rebours, reverse, countermotion.

rebroussale, upward turned.

rechts (G.), to the right.

reconduir, reconduct, lead back.

reculant, retreating.

redowatscbka (G.), redowaczka (Pol.).

redresser, to straighten.

rejdovak (Bo.), redowa.

rejdovat (Bo.), to push in zig-zag motion.

rel'evation, raising again.

relev'es, reraised.

renvers'ee, reversing.

r'ep'et'e, repeated.

301

petition, icnewai.
retard, return.
retaurnt, returning.
retravers'ee, recrossing.
retrograde, backward.
'■'rverence, bow, courtesy.
•vbe, rhombus.
bme, rhythm.
rstaurnelle, signal, flourish, call.
rivalta (It.), turning again, an opposite turn.
rile, character, part.
ronde, round, circle.
roue, wheel.
routttt-, a small wheel.
ruement, kicking.
ruer, to kick.
rune, Russian.

sa, his, her, its.
salle, room, hall.
saint, salute.
mutt, jumped.
tauter, to jump.
sauteuie, jumping.
sautille, hopped.
lutillee, a hop.

itilUr, to hop.
Scblust (G. 1, end, conclusion.
Scblussbeg/eitung (G.), conducting (one's partner)

to seat at end of a dance.
scbrag (G.), oblique, diagonal.
Scbnttsatz (G.), step-sentence, enchainment.
te, himself, herself, itself.
secande, second.
umelle, sole.
separee, separated.
left, seven.

seul, sole, only, alone, single.
ww, sixteen.
si ftes, signs, symbols.
simple, simple, single, pure.
timultane, simultaneous.
1 1 sinm, a dance.
six, six.

solo (It.), by or for one person.

spalancare (It.), to open wide.

spondee, a metric foot of two syllables.

staccato, short and distinct.

suite, succession, sequence.

suive, follows.

sur, upon.

syncope, syncopation.

talon, heel.

tape, pounded, stamped.

taper, to stamp, to pound.

tempi (It.), time-syllables.

tempo (It.), time, speed.

temps, a dance-syllable.

tenant, holding.

tendre, to stretch.

tendu, stretched.

tension, stretching.

tenu, tenue, held, kept.

termes, terms, expressions.

termine, terminates, ends.

terre-a-terre, upon the ground.

tete, head.

thesis, down-beat in music.

tire-bouchon, cork-screw.

t ambit, fallen.

tomber, to fall.

ton, tone, custom, style, taste.

torse, body, trunk.

tortille, twisted.

tortiller, to twist.

tournant, turning.

tourn'e, turned.

taurner, to turn.

taurnure, torn.

tour, turn, figure.

tracer, trace, mark, indicate.

trait, stroke, touch.

traverse, crossed.

traversee, crossing.

tremblanti, trembling, quivering, shaking.

trillo (It.), a quivering note.

trio (It.), the third part of a melody.

302

GLOSSY

triole, a note divided into three parts.
triple, threefold.
trois, three.
troisieme, third.
tronc, trunk.

Uebergang (G.), crossing over.

urn (G.), in order to.

««, one.

und (G.), and.

valse, waltz.

fference.

^Li.y, bowi, reverei
vis-a-vis, face to face, opposite.
volta (It.), turn.
Vorspiel (G.), prelude.
vos, your.
votre, your.

wie (G.), as, like.

zephire, zephyr.

•z.u (G.), to, toward, at.

^^%/.^<t^^<^^<

UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Grammar of the art of dancing, theoretical and practical; lessons in the arts of dancing and dance writing (choregraphy) with drawings, musical examples, choregraphic symbols, and special music scores"

See other formats